Home

WT210/WT230 Digital Power Meter User`s Manual - Electro

1. A r r I ri m V VAl41 2 3 g Veree cunsewr nouo MODE MAX HOLD TRIG q im rL J r r k A VAF ruwcrioN ELEMENT m am a M W rwE B m V F1 2 3 X A a a INTEGRATOR k A deg runcrion ELEMENT START STOP RESET MW HARMONICS MEMORY INTEG SET C ri l r m V H 123 g DPMO 1 Lt J k A h jruwrow evemenr a Ljww he CO LL eok eor sur O1P3W O 3P3W T ry o m n o n n n scALiNG M Ava LINE FREQ STORE RECALL HARMONICS KEY LOCK LEISPAW 19V 3A The explanation given in this section uses WT230 as an example For the differences between the WT210 and the WT230 see section 2 2 Operation Keys and Functions Element Display Procedure Operate the instrument by following the thick lines in the menu below Press the ENTER key to confirm a selection or setting Toleave the current menu in the middle of the operation press the key indicated in step 1 The confirmed settings up to that point are kept Setting Averaging Set the averaging function 1 Display C SERE 8 LF LE Display C FF LE 3 aoFF i AHG 9 ENTER 1 on 5 rc oru ijs BLHLE LuyPE een T ku E E n v 7 Ep Pate Sk f Y AREH f 5uaL I rE5n m ur AEE Set the coefficient Display C 9 H ENTE
2. 1 Display C SETUP 2 Lann SHIFT OUTPUT i n i rF nut v df 3 Display C t rELAY gt ENTER oFE 4 Select the mode 5 NES 5 Display C 7 v nagdtE gt ENTER L 5 ST ENTER f Lx d 5P 6 duHL End of setting IE dae H A v dRER H f Explanation Setting the Comparator Mode The following two settings are available For details see pages 9 9 and 9 10 The initial value is SinGL SinGL the comparator mode will be set to single mode duAL the comparator mode will be set to dual mode Note When you change the comparator mode after having set the comparator limit see page 9 13 and succeeding pages the situation will change as follows Also verify the comparator limits again When you change the mode to the dual mode after having set limits in the single mode the limit of ch2 see page 9 15 will take the value of the limit of ch1 and the limit of ch4 will take the value of the limit of ch3 When you return again to the single mode the previous values of each channel will be restored N CAUTION Do not change the comparator mode measurement mode or harmonic measurement ON OFF while the comparator function is ON see section 9 8 Similar to the Note above changing the type of limit might result in unexpected statuses of the output relay 9 12 IM 760401 01E 9 6 Setting the Comparator Limit Values Option CHECK RA
3. 2 Selecting the Input Element Select the input element by pressing the ELEMENT key of display A or B The operation is the same as the one described on page 5 1 Maximum Reading Unit and Unit Prefix Maximum reading of apparent and reactive power 99999 when the number of displayed digits is 5 Display range of power factor 1 0000 to 1 0000 when the num of displayed digits is 5 If the computed result lies between 1 0001 and 2 0000 1 0000 is displayed If it is 2 0001 or more PFErr is displayed If it is between 1 0001 and 2 0000 1 0000 is displayed If it is 2 0001 or below PFErr is displayed Units VA apparent power var reactive power power factor no unit Prefix m k M Selecting the Display Function The following selections are available VA apparent power will be displayed var reactive power will be displayed PF power factor will be displayed Selecting the Input Element 1 2 3 Displays the measurement values of element 1 2 3 X Refer to page 5 2 Note Changing the measurement mode might result in different computed results even when the input signal is the same For more details on the measurement mode refer to page 4 1 When either the voltage or current drops below 0 5 less than or equal to 1 if the crest factor is set to 6 of the measurement range PFErr will be displayed
4. sss 10 3 10 3 Status Byte Format before the IEEE 488 2 Standard sssssssssss 10 4 10 4 Output Format for Measured Computed Data Setup Parameters and Error Codes 10 5 10 5 Setting the Address and Mode ccsccccssceeeseneeeeeneeeeeneeeeeeaeeeseneeeeseaeeeesaeeesssneeeseneeess 10 11 10 6 Setting the Output Items sssssssssseseeeneeenene eene neret nnn 10 13 10 7 Commands before the IEEE 488 2 Standard sssssee 10 16 xii IM 760101 01E Content Chapter 11 Serial Interface Option AN 11 1 Serial Interface Functions and Specifications sseeeee 11 1 11 2 Connecting the Interface Cable ssssssseeeeneeeeenenneeennen nennen 11 3 11 3 Setting the Mode Handshaking Method Data Format and Baud Rate 11 5 11 4 Format and Commands of Output Data before the IEEE488 2 Standard 11 8 Chapter 12 Initializing Setup Parameters Zero Level Compensation and Key Lock 12 1 Back up of Setup Parameters sesssssssssseeeeeeneeneee nennen nennen nnns 12 1 12 2 Initializing Setup Parameters ssssssssseeeeeneeeeeneen ennemis 12 2 12 3 Performing Zero Level Compensation esssseeeeenenennenen nnns 12 4 I AE Cum e HR 12 5 Chapter 13 Communication Commands 1 System of Comm
5. Response data B lt Rsps header Space Response header gt A response header sometimes precedes the response data Response data must be separated from the header by a space For details refer to page 14 7 Response data Response data is used to define a response If multiple items of response data are used they must be on separated by a comma Example 500 0E 03 RMT CONFIGURE MODE RMS lt RMT gt ko lec Data Header n If a program message contains more than one query responses are made in the same order as the queries Normally each query returns only one response message unit but there are some queries which return more than one response message unit The first response message unit always responds to the first query but it is not always true that the n th unit always responds to the n th query Therefore if you want to make sure that a response is made to each query the program message must be divided up into individual messages Points to Note concerning Message Transmission Itis always possible to send a program message if the previous message which was sent did not contain any queries fthe previous message contained a query it is not possible to send another program message until a response message has been received An error will occur if a program message is sent before a response message has been received in its entirety A respon
6. ii switching between remote and local mode 10 3 symbols symptom 15 13 synchronization source esessseeeeeen 4 4 SYNTAX e 14 3 Syntax error 10 4 System configuration 1 1 Mn talk only a intende posi cte ri tec ER eere do d 10 12 talk only mode eeseseeseeeeeene 10 1 11 1 talker target element IM 760401 01E Index 3 un E Index temperature coefficient esssssssss 16 3 16 4 terminator sseeessss 10 12 11 7 three phase four wire system seeseeesse three phase three wire system seessse three voltage three current system EE top VIEW tere tetra eterne te t bee tee OI bete ce transition filter seseseseeeeeeenene type of averaging type of limite vine Ire eet tedeschi U update hold iorra nene Rei 6 7 update raters bon cete aiii ia 4 32 updating the displayed data harmonic 7 2 upper limits of analysis orders upper level query eeseeeeenennenn V valid frequency range for integration 6 11 verifying of functions we 15 12 verifying of the harmonic measurement function T verifying the comparator output functio
7. eese 7 6 7 4 Setting the Harmonic Order and Displaying the Measured Harmonic Value 7 7 Store Recall Function of Measured Computed Data and Setup Parameters 8 1 Storing Recalling Measured Computed Data sseenennen 8 1 8 2 Storing Recalling Setup Parameters sssssssseeeeeennnen eene 8 5 External In Output Function 9 1 Pin Arrangement and Pin Assignments of the External I O Connector Option 9 1 9 2 Remote Control Option sssssseseseeseeeeeneneeeeeennnen neret 9 3 9 3 D A Output Option er tne edet eS Dirk een e cot Ec red aSK Pape Ee de e aD a acne 9 4 9 4 Comparator Function Option ssssesesseseseeeeneenneeneennenennen nennen nennen nnn 9 9 9 5 Setting the Comparator Mode Option sssssseeeneneneneneennenn 9 12 9 6 Setting the Comparator Limit Values Option sseeenn 9 13 9 7 Comparator Display Option seessessesseeseeeeseeeenne nennen nennen nnne 9 17 9 8 Turning the Comparator Function ON OFF Option een 9 19 9 9 Outputting to an External Plotter or External Printer cccccessseceseeeeeseseeeesseeeeseeees 9 20 Chapter 10 GP IB Interface Option A 10 1 GP IB Interface Functions and Specifications sseeeee 10 1 10 2 Responses to Interface Messages and Remote Local Modes
8. Command Description Page STORe Group STORe Queries all settings related to storing data 14 41 STORe INTerval Sets queries the interval for storing data 14 41 STORe PANel Saves the setup parameters to a file 14 41 STORe STATe Sets queries the store function ON OFF 14 41 Common Command Group CAL Executes zero level compensation and queries the results 14 42 CLS Clears the standard event register extended event register and error queue 14 42 ESE Sets queries the value of the standard event enable register 14 42 ESR Sets queries the value of the standard event register and clears it 14 42 IDN Queries the instrument model 14 43 OPC This command is not supported by this instrument 14 43 OPC This command is not supported by this instrument and is always 1 14 43 OPT Queries installed options 14 43 PSC Sets queries whether or not to clear some registers at power ON 14 43 RST Initializes the setup parameters 14 43 SRE Sets queries the value of the service request enable register 14 43 STB Queries the value of the status byte register 14 43 TRG Executes the same operation as the TRIG SHIFT HOLD key 14 43 TST Executes a self test and queries the results 14 43 WAI This command is not supported by this instrument 14 43 14 14 IM 760401 01E 14 3 Commands 14 3 2 AOUTput Group The commands in the AOUTput group are used to make settings relating to and inquires about D A output opt
9. o ge o o o o lo o o o o o o o o o o o o o d o o o o o o o d o o o o o go o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o E S E E E 4 El 2 E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E El El El El 38 E E o o 0000900000209 il o 2o E 6 G 009090909 000080808 loco 000 o or e G 080202020208080 G 020808080 8 290505 108086265 8 8 Vent holes 1880508 80808 E jet Front panel IM 760401 01E s e dsiq 10413 pue Hueso 101u0 N Buey ony pue Syed jo suonounjJ pue soweN H 2 2 Operation Keys and Functions Element Display Operation Keys and Function Displays on the WT210 model 760401 r Operation status indicator Indicates data updating voltage current range check and measurement mode status Sections 2 3 4 1 and 4 3 VOLTAGE Displays the CURRENT Displays the current range setup menu Section 4 4 voltage range setup menu Section 4 4 VOLTAGE SHIFT MODE Switches the measurement mode Section 4 1 AUTO indicator llluminates when range is set to AUTO CURRENT SHIFT MAX HOLD Turns ON OFF the MAX hold function When turned ON the MAX indicator illuminates Section 4 8 HOLD Holds the displ
10. 6 A v Display C Hf ENTER End of setting rn rt J dEL 1 r L Lr 1 I f H r 1 G A i m 1 L P L c4 LI uc Oo t za n r1 B LI Ge rra mj Cy tw E r o mn i vi sets the A column output function V moves to the B column gt SHIFT selects from element 1 to 3 Select data or setup parameters Display C 5 aT dRER T ENTER Pal End of setting v AL Execute the output IM 760401 01E 9 21 uonoung 1ndino u jeuje1x3 fa 9 9 Outputting to an External Plotter Printer Explanation Selecting the Output Printing Mode Select whether you are printing out on a plotter or a printer HPGL For printing on an external HPGL compatible plotter ESCP For printing on an external ESC P compatible printer PCL For printing on an external PCL5 printer language of HP compatible printer Setting the Output Contents in case of Normal Measurement All measured and computed data is output However for frequency if either one of the display function V Hz or A Hz is turned on the frequency of the corresponding function is output If both display functions are OFF the voltage frequency of the element assigned to display C is output Setting the Output Items and the Element in case of Harmonic Measurement Selecting the Output function correspons to c
11. S 6 Wiring a Three Phase Three Wire System Selecting the Wiring System s S 8 Selecting the Measurement Range S 9 Selecting the Voltage Hanger eer re Er E ER e PEE RN EDEN ee re e Es ET e EE ERES S 9 Selecting the Current Range ccssseceseesseesssseeseesseneeseeseneesseeeeseeseeeeaseasseeensnesseneesneeas S 10 Turning ON the Power to the Circuit under Measurement enne S 11 Displaying Voltage Current and Active Power S 12 Displaying the Voltage on the Primary Side of the Inverter on Display A S 12 Displaying the Current on the Primary Side of the Inverter on Display B S 13 Displaying the Active Power on the Primary Side of the Inverter on Display C S 14 Displaying the Voltage of the Secondary Side of the Inverter on Display A S 15 Displaying the Current on the Secondary Side of the Inverter on Display B S 16 Displaying the Active Power on the Secondary Side of the Inverter on Display C S 17 Displaying the Efficiency S 18 Setting the Efficiency Computation cssscssecsseeesseeseeeeseeeeseeeeeeeenenesseeensnesseneneeeees S 18 Display No Ne L9 ul Eel CSTAYS V ceecnoceneceocoennceenococaenenconenencee a A EROGO scents S 20 Confirming the Displayed Efficiency esee S 21 0 eh b E c 9 E Q 0 Wiring the Circuit
12. e ASCII conversion information b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 bO b7 to b4 Prefix unit 0000 None E 0 0001 m E 3 0010 k E 3 0011 M E 6 b3to b0 Decimal point position Data structure Data is in 4 byte IEEE single precision floating point format The byte order is MSB first Physical value 1 9x 2 E 1 7 x 14M 2 3 S Sign bit O or 1 E Exponent in the range of 0 to 254 M Mantissa as a 23 bit binary value For elapsed integration time Outputs the time in units of seconds For example 0x45610000 3600 if the time is 1 hour 1 00 00 For overrange and computation overflow Ox7E94F56A 9 9E 37 For no data Ox7E951BEE 9 91E 37 H pyepueis 2661 2 88r 3331 24 0 BurAqjduio spuewwosy jo uejs S z spueuiulo uoneoiunuiulo2 Output format The output format output order of measured data is the same as the ASCII format IM 760401 01E 14 35 14 3 Commands 14 3 10 RECall Group The commands in the RECall group are used to make settings relating to and inquires about recalling data This allows you to make the same settings and inquiries as can be set using the lower menus of MEMORY rECAL or MEMORY PnLrC O Ao RECall lt Space gt INTerval of lt Space gt gt lt NR gt 20 lt NRf gt 20 lt NRf gt P C
13. For details see section 3 3 5 To prevent the possibility of electric shock and damage to the instrument follow the warnings below A WARNING _ Employ protective earth ground before wiring measurement cables The power cord that comes with the instrument is a three pin type power cord Connect the power cord to a properly grounded three pin outlet Turn OFF the power to the circuit under measurement when wiring the circuit Connecting or removing measurement cables while the power is turned ON is dangerous Take special caution not to wire a current measurement circuit to the voltage input terminal or a voltage measurement circuit to the current input terminal Strip the insulation cover of the measurement cable so that when it is wired to the input terminal the conductive parts bare wires do not protrude from the terminal Also make sure to fasten the input terminal screws securely so that the cable does not come loose Use cables with safety terminals that cover the conductive parts for connecting to the voltage input terminals Using a terminal with bare conductive parts such as a banana plug is dangerous when the terminal comes loose After connecting the measurement cable attach the current input protection cover for your safety Make sure that the conductive parts are not exposed from the protection cover To make the protective functions effective check the following items before applying the v
14. MODE o o o o o RANGE UPDATE VOLTAGE CURRENT RMS VOLTAGE DC MAX HOLD HAUTO GAUTD o MEAN VOLTAGE CURRENT HOLD VA 123rE VAF runcrion ELEMENT TIME MODE MAX HOLD TRIG PF 123 2 a co INTEGRATOR STOP RESET L3 C33 ARMONIC Hz 12 32 h FUNCTION ELEMENT ht E KEY LOCK OUTPI er lt fer lt er lt Qa EKSS 3 5 3 D11P3W O3P3w FILTER WIRING n n n oO n n m o SCALING AVG LINE FREQ STORE E AE KEY Lock F13P4W O3V3A The explanation given in this section uses WT230 as an example For the differences between the WT210 and the WT230 see section 2 2 Operation Keys and Functions Element Display Operate the instrument by following the thick lines in the menu below Press the ENTER key to confirm a selection or setting Toleave the current menu in the middle of the operation press the key indicated in step 1 The confirmed settings up to that point are kept Turning the Harmonic Measurement Function ON OFF 1 Display C 3 START aFF ENTER SHIFT HARMONICS End of setting gt nn Si CAIs uy o Turning the Harmonic Measurement Function ON OFF on Pressing the ENTER key after selecting on will result in starting of the harmonic measurement and the HARMONICS indicator will light up The harmonic order will be displayed on display A OFF
15. MODE o o o o o RANGE UPDATE VOLTAGE CURRENT RMS VOLTAGE DC MAX HOLD AUTO GAUTO o A r r l ri m V VAl41 2 3 g Voree cunsewr nouo MODE MAX HOLD TRIG q T im J r r k A Val ruwcriN ELEMENT am am a M W time B m V F 1 2 35 TA a a INTEGRATOR k A deg runcrion ELEMENT START STOP RESET MW HARMONICS MEMORY INTEG SET C ri m V Hz 41 2 3 g Jf m rm c m k A h eynerion evemenr LOCA SETUP MW ht LI LL KEY LOCK OUTPUT SHIFT O1P3W C13P3W eee n Im o n m o SCALING AVG LINE FREQ STORE RECALL HARMONICS KEY LOCK Crap 4w C13V3A The explanation given in this section uses WT230 as an example For the differences between the WT210 and the WT230 see section 2 2 Operation Keys and Functions Element Display Procedure Operate the instrument by following the thick lines in the menu below Press the ENTER key to confirm a selection or setting Toleave the current menu in the middle of the operation press the key indicated in step 1 The confirmed settings up to that point are kept Select the four arithmetical operation function 1 Display C SETUP E41 LF LE FF LE v HBL f SERLE Et cem er rt Pnbrhb s Display C n HE H gt ENTER gt EF Fy WT230 only 5 5yaL AIF fF HI ENTER 9 v Ls PES
16. Time Below limit open status Exceeding limit closed status 24V ly ri IM 760401 01E uonoung 1ndino u jeuje1x3 IS 9 4 Comparator Function Option Dual Mode This mode allows you to combine the limit values of two relays e g the upper value Hi and the lower value Lo to determine the contact status The four relays will be fixed as two pairs of ch1 amp ch2 and ch3 amp ch4 Setting the limit values of a pair of relays e g ch1 amp ch2 can only be done at the same display function The setting method relay operation etc are the same as in the single mode and when the measured computed and integrated values exceed the preset limits the contact status will become NO The following shows an example When the current value exceeds 1 A but is less then 3 A GO will be ditermined and the circuit becomes closed When the current value lies below 1 A or exceeds 3 A NO GO will be determined and the circuit becomes open Current NO GO determination area Time Current GO determination area Time Current NO GO determination area Time Note Limit of ch1 is set to 3 A Limit of ch2 is set to 1 A Limit of ch1 is set to 3 A Limit of ch2 is set to 1A Limit of ch1 is set to 3 A Limit of ch2 is set to 1 A Below lower limit gt open circuit Exceeding lower limit below upper closed ci
17. m V VA 1 232 L L _ Lo k A var 1 j J J J FUNCTION ELEMENT am sm m M W TME B mV PFj123 X k A deg FuncTioN ELEMENT MW c m V H I m I L di 123r J j J J s FUNCTION ELEMENT um o MW ht FILTER o o o o o o a Im SCALING AVG LINE FREQ STORE RECALL HARMONICS KEY LOCK RANGE AUTO c AUTO VOLTAGE CURREN a T HOLD MODE MAX HOLD TRIG START STOP AE INTEGRATOR RESET HARMONICS MEMORY INTEG SET r3 REMOTE a ZO KEY LOCK OUTPUT O1P3w 3P3W O3P4W O3V3A step 1 The confirmed settings up to that point are kept 1 Turning ON OFF the Line Filter Select the filter function Display C SETUP 1 i 5k Ln r1 za r n rm Eq Lo a 2 r M tum gt n 3 J za I 31 a w Mi L n D m r E za rc m r1 7 l Select the filter function Display C n SETUP ZU LE 5 Er p ps n n ra E re C 5 Ln Py Ag 3 F rm a Ns pa a3 OR ber m fa ron T m oan uc x r3 ro La n l E W za pa fr c esie Turning ON OFF the Frequency Filter SHIFT WIRING The explanation given in this section uses WT230 as an example For the differences betwe
18. C 5 s N Ln r3 zn m ra 3 a a r 4 uw ri a re c 2 un Lc a rq Display C ENTER Un ra r ZW 7 aa roan n kp A E E n EL gt gt ESk Ln L Hi T 5 INTEGRATOR HOLD RESET INTEG SET a SHIFT WIRING ENTER End of setting IM 760401 01E 4 31 eBueg 1ueujeunseo y pue suomnipuo puawainsean Buas le 4 13 Selecting the Number of Displayed Digits and the Display Update Rate Explanation Selecting the Display Update Rate Select the display update rate 1 Display C SETUP 575 LF LE Pry bem HuL ij SCALE Ei n PaLr 5b nHEH 5yaLt LL reag 3 Display C 5 ur HE E 9 ENTER i ii ENTER rr AK G25 End of setting M ne L J dE g t p i Selecting the Number of Displayed Digits You can select the maximum number of displayed digits for V voltage A current W active power VA apparent power var reactive power PF power factor VHz voltage frequency AHz current frequency and harmonic measurement values voltage current active power power factor and relative harmonic content The initial setting is Hi Hi The number of displayed digits is set to 5 99999 Lo The number of displayed digits is set to 4 9999 Note
19. The voltage rating across the input voltage and current and ground on the WT230 varies depending on the operating conditions When protection cover is attached to the GP IB or serial interface and external I O connector Voltage between input terminals and ground 600 Vrms max When protection cover is removed from the GP IB or serial interface and external I O connector or when the connector is used Voltage between CURRENT VOLTAGE input and CURRENT input terminals and ground 400 Vrms max Voltage between VOLTAGE input terminal and ground 600 Vrms max O O SESS SSS IM 760401 01E 3 5 sjuswainseayy Bunes 310499 le 3 3 Wiring Precautions AN CAUTION Use measurement cables that have sufficient margin in withstand voltage and current against the signal being measured The cables must also have insulation resistance that is appropriate for the ratings Example When making measurements on a current of 20 A use copper wires that have a conductive cross sectional area of 4 mm Connecting to the Input Terminal Voltage Input Terminal The terminal is a 4 mm safety banana jack female Insert the safety terminal the conductive parts are not exposed into the voltage input terminal Current Input Terminal When the voltage of the circuit under measurement is being applied to the current input terminals do not touch the current sensor input terminals Since these terminals are electrically connected inside the
20. IM 760401 01E 5 3 s ns y uonejnduio pue synsey 1ueujeunseo y BuiAejdsiq eo 5 3 Displaying the Phase Angle CHECK RANGE MODE a z a n a RANGE UPDATE VOLTAGE CURRENT RMS VOLTAGE DC MAX HOLD HAUTO GAUTO o A m V VA 1 2 3 gx Voce currenT HoLD k A var FUNCTION ELEMENT MORE MAR ioe me MM v ENTER m V 23 gt CAL a INTEGRATOR k A UNCTION ELEMENT START STOP RESET MW HARMONICS MEMORY INTEG SET C mV H 425 g jme a k A Function ELEuewr LOCAL SETUP M W hz CJ LJ KEY LOCK OUTPUT SHIFT Craw O3P3w FILTER WIRING oO ET LI mi ja LI SCALING AVG LINE FREQ STORE RECALL HARMONICS KEY LOCK Co3sP 4W 11 3V3A The explanation given in this section uses WT230 as an example For the differences between the WT210 and the WT230 see section 2 2 Operation Keys and Functions Element Display Procedure 1 Selecting the Display Function Select deg phase angle by pressing the FUNCTION key of display B Display FUNCTION FUNCTION FUNCTION FUNCTION FUNCTION B eY A W c Mp ww You can reverse the order by first pressing the SHIFT key followed by the FUNCTION key 2 Selecting the Input Element Select the input element by pressing the ELEMENT key of display B The operation is the same as the one described on page 5 1 Explanation Display Range and Unit
21. case 7 4 IM 760401 01E 7 2 Setting the Target Element PLL Source and Harmonic Distortion Method Explanation Setting the Target Element Only one input element should be set for harmonic measurement The initial value is EL1 At the WT210 the element setting menu does not appear EL1 Element 1 is used for measurement EL2 Element 2 is used for measurement For 760502 this menu is not shown ELS Element 3 is used for measurement Setting the PLL source For harmonic measurement it is necessary to select the input to be used as the fundamental frequency PLL source for synchronization PLL stands for Phase Locked Loop V1 Sets the voltage of element 1 as the PLL source A1 Sets the current of element 1 as the PLL source e V2 Sets the voltage of element 2 as the PLL source A2 Sets the current of element 2 as the PLL source V3 Sets the voltage of element 3 as the PLL source A3 Sets the current of element 3 as the PLL source Note If the fundamental frequency of the PLL source cannot be measured due to fluctuations or distortion it is not possible to obtain correct measurement results In this case it is suggested that voltage with relatively small distortion be selected as the PLL source Itis recommended to turn ON the frequency filter in cases where the fundamental frequency is 500 Hz or less and high frequency components are present The cutoff frequency of this filter is 500 Hz
22. 11 4 IM 760401 01E 11 3 Setting the Mode Handshaking Method Data Format and Baud Rate CHECK RANGE MODE LT m n oO m RANGE UPDATE VOLTAGE CURRENT RMS VOLTAGE DC MAX HOLD AUTO GAUTO o A m V VA 12 3 VOLTAGE cunRENT HoLD L l l k A VAF ruwcrioN ELEMENT MODE ummniag E E u w e E O CETA P Ir Ji Py 2 3 z De irr a k A deg runcrion ELEMENT CAC yes HARMONICS MEMORY IN c u o m V Hz 123 ESIE h Hl h A I h k A h runcnon evemenr A 07 m m YW hi LI REP LOCK r LHP3W D13P3W FILTER SCALING Ave LWE FREQ STORE RECALL HARMONGS KEY Lock L13P4W L13V3A The explanation given in this section uses WT230 as an example For the differences between the WT210 and the WT230 see section 2 2 Operation Keys and Functions Element Display Procedure Operate the instrument by following the thick lines in the menu below Press the ENTER key to confirm a selection or setting To leave the current menu in the middle of the operation press the key indicated in step 1 The confirmed settings up to that point are kept Set the mode Select the handshaking method Set the data format 1 Display C 3 Display A 5 Display B 7 LOCAL 2 nar ENTER a hHndli ENTER 6 Fnr LH ENTER tanLH h
23. In case the order 2 to 50 is shown on display A Displays the phase angle between the voltage of the first order and each voltage of In case the 1st order fundamental is shown on display A Displays the phase angle between the voltage of the first order and the current of In case the order 2 to 50 is shown on display A Displays the phase angle between the current of the first order and each current of Display FUNCTION FUNCTION B A FUNCTION Display function V A Ww PF V A 96 V A W display A V deg the first order the 2nd to 50th order A deg the first order same as V deg the 2nd to 50th order Display FUNCTION FUNCTION FUNCTION FUNCTION FUNCTION C o ud E ANNE Display function V A W Displays all rms values computed values of 1 up to 50 components of voltage current or active power V Hz Displays the fundamental frequency of the voltage for PLL synchronization displays the measurement value for only the selected voltage input A Hz Displays the fundamental frequency of the current for PLL synchronization displays the measurement value for only the selected current input IM 760401 01E uondo uonounJ 1ueureunseoj y 31uouueH HE 7 1 Harmonic Measurement Function Auto Range Operation Range Up When the measured value of voltage or current V or A exceeds 200 of the rated range or when the peak value instantaneous voltage or
24. Note Pins 8 to 19 and 21 to 25 are not used The figure below shows the direction of the signals used by the serial interface CC DSR 6 CD DTR data terminal ready CA RTS request to send Computer CB CTS clear to send ready 4 This 5 instrument BA TXD transmitted data 2 BB RXD received data IM 760401 01E uondo e eyeju jeas B 11 2 Connecting the Interface Cable Table of RS 232 Standard Signals and their JIS and CCITT Abbreviations Pin No Abbreviations 25 pin connector RS 232 CCITT AA GND 101 FG Protective ground AB GND 102 SG Signal ground BA TXD 103 SD Transmitted data BB RXD 104 RD Received data CA RTS 105 RS Request to send CB CTS 106 CS Clear to send CC DSR 107 DR Data set ready CD DTR 108 2 ER Data terminal ready CE RI 125 CI Ring indicator CF DCD 109 CD Data channel received carrier detect CG 110 SQD Data signal quality detect CH C 111 SRS Data signal rate select DA DB TXC 113 114 ST1 ST2 Transmitter signal element timing Name DD RXC 115 RT Receiver signal element timing SBA 118 BSD Secondary transmitted data SBB 119 BRD Secondary received data SCA 120 BRS Secondary request to send SCB 121 BCS Secondary clear to send SCF 122 BCD Secondary received carrier detect Circles indicate pins used for the serial interface of this instrument
25. Queries communication output settings of the normal measurement function 14 31 MEASure NORMal ITEM normal measurement function ALL Sets the communication output items concerning all elements or S ON OFF at once 14 31 MEASure NORMal ITEM normal measurement function gt ELEMent lt x gt Sets queries the communication output items concerning each element ON OFF 14 31 MEASure NORMal ITEM normal measurement function gt SIGMa Sets queries the communication output items concerning S ON OFF 14 31 MEASure NORMal VALue Queries normal measured computed data set by commands other than MEASure NORMal1 ITEM ASCII format 14 31 RECall Group RECal1 Queries all settings related to recalling data 14 36 RECall INTerval Sets queries the recalling interval 14 36 RECall PANel Retrieves the setup parameters file 14 36 RECall STATe Sets queries recalling ON OFF 14 36 RELay Group RELay Queries all settings related to the comparator function 14 37 RELay DISPlay Sets queries the comparator display OFF or in case of ON the channel to be displayed 14 37 RELay HCHannel lt x gt Queries all settings related to relay output items in case of harmonic measurement 14 37 RELay HCHannel lt x gt FUNCtion Sets queries function of the relay output item in case of harmonic measurement 14 38 RELay HCHannel lt x gt THReshold Sets queries the threshold level for the relay output item 14 38 RELay MO
26. Sent MEASURE HARMONICS VALUE Received data 60 00E 00 12 01E 00 49 98E 00 49 62E 00 0 03E 00 5 50E 00 0 D GOGOL a O THA A a 125 Qo GO 01E 00 1 00E 00 0 00E 00 0 00E 00 0 01E 00 0 00E 00 0 01E 00 0 00E 00 0 99E 00 0 41E 00 0 17E 00 0 09E 00 0 06E 00 0 05E 00 0 03E 00 0 02E 00 0 02E 00 1 00E 00 0 00E 00 0 00E 00 0 00E 00 0 00E 00 0 00E 00 0 00E 00 0 MEASURE HARMONICS ITEM PRESET VPATTERN 01E 00 0 30E 00 0 14E 00 0 08E 00 0 05E 00 0 03E 00 0 03E 00 0 02E 00 0 01E 00 0 OOE 00 0 00E 00 0 00E 00 0 00E 00 0 00E 00 0 00E 00 0 00E 00 0 62E 00 22E 00 12E 00 O7E 00 04E 00 03E 00 02E 00 06E 00 1 09E 00 0 02E 00 4 01E 00 0 03E 00 2 03E 00 0 01E 00 24E 00 0 45E 00 0 23E 00 0 14E 00 0 08E 00 0 06E 00 0 05E 00 0 01E 00 0 01E 00 0 01E 00 0 01E 00 0 01E 00 0 01E 00 0 01E 00 0 82E 00 0 35E 00 0 19E 00 0 11E 00 0 09E 00 0 06E 00 0 05E 00 0 01E 00 0 01E 00 0 01E 00 0 01E 00 0 01E 00 0 01E 00 0 01E 00 0 60E 00 0 28E 00 0 16E 00 0 10E 00 0 07E 00 0 05E 00 0 04E 00 0 00E 00 00E 00 01E 00 01E 00 00E 00 01E 00 01E 00 Data contents Frequency of PLL source 60 00E 00 Hz Harmonic distortion factor of voltage 12 01E 00 Rms value of 1st to 50th order 49 98E 00 V Fundamental measured value 1st order 49 62E 00 V Harmonic measurement val
27. When the CLS command is received When power is turned ON again Examples 1 A query error occurs 2 Bit 2 QYE is set to 1 3 Bit 5 ESB of the status byte is set to 1 if bit 2 of the standard event enable register is 1 It is also possible to check what type of event has occurred inside the instrument by reading the contents of the standard event register 14 4 4 Extended Event Register Reading the extended event register tells you whether changes in the condition register reflecting internal conditions have occurred A transition filter can be applied which allows you to decide which events are reported to the extended event register FlLTeroo 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Condition register 15 14 13 12 11 109 8 4 2 1 0 STATus CONDition 0 POA3 POV3 OVR3 POA2 POV2 OVR2 POA1 POV1 OVR1 SRB FOV OVRS ITM ITG UPD Transition filter 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 3 2 1 9 STATus FILTerex RISE FALL BOTH NEVer Yo Y Y yyy 15 14 13 12 11 10 O Co lt N lt lt a lt A 2 ho lt O Extended event register STATus EESR The meaning of each bit of the condition register is as follows Bit 0 UPD Updating Set to 1 during updating of measurement data B
28. eeeeesseennen 1 4 D A output voltage 5 netten nnne 9 8 data nenne wel 47 data format we 11 7 data format ASCII 488 2 14 32 14 33 data format ASCII sese 10 5 10 9 data format BINARY sese 14 35 data section 10 6 Dloc 4 1 dead lock 14 5 Dro 5 4 digital cliaracters crecer repr ers emo c e 1 6 digital numbers essent enne 1 6 dimensional drawings 16 15 display function of integrator values 6 3 display TUltellOliS urea reri tiere eria y a Ret 1 3 DISPlay group is display hold harmonic een display range ueniret rrt tnt nen display resolution during integration display update rnnt tnn tors display update rate harmonic IM 760401 01E Index 1 un E Index displayed digits inssi tren eer ete 4 32 DL DL dual mode sssssssssssseseeeee ennemi 9 10 E ee effiCiericy 1 is ceci etre cercate 4 22 5 8 elapsed integration time eeseeseeeeeee 6 7 MISSIO eae aee gare ea RR ERE eR seran nera iaia enable registers ERROR cece certs e cdes crece eere eua Estee es teer e Rae Rede rodeo CE error codes for operation and measurement 15 14 error cod
29. lt NR gt 0 001 to 9999 Example CONFIGURE CURRENT ESCALING ALL 50 00 Description The setting values differ as follows Less than 1 000 Three digits after the floating point are valid 1 000 to 9999 The first five digits are valid CONFigure CURRent ESCaling ELEMent x Function Sets the scaling constants for the external sensor for each element separately queries the current setting Syntax CONFigure CURRent ESCaling ELEMent lt x gt lt NRf gt CONFigure CURRent ESCaling ELEMent lt x gt lt x gt 1 WT210 single phase model 1 3 WT230 three phase three wire model 1 to 3 WT230 three phase four wire model lt NR gt 0 001 to 1000 Example CONFIGURE CURRENT ESCALING ELEMENT1 50 00 CONFIGURE CURRENT ESCALING ELEMENT1 CONFIGURE CURRENT ESCALING ELEMENT1 50 00E 00 Description Setting values differ as described at CONFigure CURRent ESCaling ALL CONFigure CURRent RANGe Function Sets the current range external sensor input range queries the current setting Syntax CONFigure CURRent RANGe lt current gt EXTernal lt voltage gt CONFigure CURRent RANGe When the crest factor is set to 3 current 500mA to 20A 0 5 1 2 5 10 20A The following settings available only on WT210 5mA to 200mA 5m 10m 20m 50m 100m 200mA Example voltage 50mV to 200mVv 50 100 200mV for EX2 option 2 5V to 10V 2 5 5b 10V for E
30. Boolean is data which indicates ON or OFF and is expressed in one of the following forms Form Example ON OFF lt NRf gt ON OFF 1 0 When lt Boolean gt is expressed in lt NRf gt form OFF is selected if the rounded integer value is 0 and ON is selected if the rounded integer is Not 0 A response message is always 1 if the value is ON and o if itis OFF Character String Data Character string data is not a specified character string like Character data It is an arbitrary character string A character string must be enclosed in single quotation marks or double quotation marks Form Example ABC IEEE488 2 1992 lt Character string data gt If the character string enclosed in single quotation marks contains a double quotation mark it is represented as This rule also applies to double quotation marks The character string data of a response message is always enclosed in double quotation marks Because Character string data is an arbitrary character string if the last single quotation mark or double quotation mark is missing the instrument may assume that the remaining program message units are part of the Character string data and may not detect the error 14 8 IM 760401 01E 14 2 Program Format Block data Block data is arbitra 8 bit data Block data is only used for response messages
31. Operation Keys and Functions Element Display Procedure Operate the instrument by following the thick lines in the menu below Press the ENTER key to confirm a selection or setting Toleave the current menu in the middle of the operation press the key indicated in step 1 The confirmed settings up to that point are kept Selecting the Integration Mode Select the mode 1 Display C 3 Display C 5 RESET 2 AggdE 9 ENTER 2 aL nor T ENTER SHIFT INTEG SET e A Ep i Cart End of setting f d HE AE See sectoin 9 3 f Selecting the Integration Timer 1 Display C Hour RESET node Display A SHIFT INTEGSET 2 aa 3 z 6 A E A r 9 ENTER gt to ENTER v 7 d HE mE See sectoin 9 3 4 y A sets the value ij 5 V moves digits SHIFT gt Minute Second Display B 9 Display C 12 iif ENTER gt OO ENTER 7 Same as steps 10 4 Same as steps End of setting aJ 11 4 and 5 above 4 and 5 above 6 4 IM 760401 01E 6 2 Setting Integration Mode and Integration Timer Explanation Selecting the Integration Mode The following selections are available The initial value is nor nor Select this for manual or standard integration mode
32. Sets the rated integration time when integrated values are to be output as an analog signal inquires about the current setting RT RT Syntax RT m1 m2 m3 terminator ml indicates the hours 0 lt mi lt 1000 m2 indicates the minutes 0 m2 lt 59 m3 indicates the seconds 0 m3 lt 59 Query RT terminator Example RT1 0 Description Parameter error 12 will occur if an illegal value is set The maximum time that can be specified is 10000 hours Sets voltage range inquires about the current setting RV RV Syntax RV m terminator m indicates voltage range When the crest factor is set to 3 m 3 15V range 4 30 V range 5 60 V range 6 100 V range 7 150 V range 8 300 V range 9 600 V range When the crest factor is set to 6 m 3 7 5 V range 4 15 V range 5 30 V range 7 75 V range 8 150 V range 9 300 V range Query RV terminator Example RV9 Description Parameter error 12 will occur if an illegal value is set Changing of the voltage range is not allowed while integration is in progress execution error 13 will occur While recalling or storing is in progress execution error 19 will occur SA SA Sets the external sensor scaling value inquires about the current setting Syntax When CMO is set SA n terminator When CM1 is set SA m n terminator m indicates element m 0 All elements Setting not allowed during inquiry 1 Element 1 2 E
33. gt MEASURE NORMAL ITEM V ELEMENT1 1 ELEMENT2 1 ELEMENT3 1 SIGMA 1 For the meanings of the symbols of functions see Note on page 14 14 NORMal ITEM normal measurement function gt ALL Function Syntax Example MEASure Sets the communication output concerning all elements or gt ON OFF at once MEASure NORMal ITEM normal measurement function gt ALL lt Boolean gt MEASURE NORMAL ITEM V ALL ON NORMal ITEM normal measurement function gt ELEMent lt x gt Function Syntax Sets the communication output concerning each element ON OFF queries the current setting MEASure NORMal ITEM lt normal measurement function gt ELEMent lt x gt lt Boolean gt MEASure NORMal ITEM lt normal measurement function gt ELEMent lt x gt Example lt x gt 1 WT210 single phase model 1 3 WT230 three phase three wire model 1 to 3 WT230 three phase four wire model MEASURE NORMAL ITEM V ELEMENT1 ON MEASURE NORMAL ITEM V ELEMENT gt MEASURE NORMAL ITEM V ELEMENT1 1 MEASure NORMal ITEM lt normal measurement function gt SIGMa Function Syntax Example Sets the communication output concerning ON OFF queries the current setting MEASure NORMal ITEM lt normal measurement function gt SIGMa lt Boolean gt MEASure NORMal ITEM lt normal measurement function gt SIGMa MEASURE NORMAL ITEM V SIGMA ON MEASURE
34. oJ MAX HOLD v1 noel imn omer k A deg FUNCTION ELEMENT Y Y I LI LI MW START STOP RESET HARMONICS MEMORY INTEG SET c mm V 123 E REMOTE a Ing a N a MW h LJ LC KEY LOCK OUTPUT SHIFT O1P3w O 3P3W o 3P4w O 3V3A FUNCTION 7 Press 75 of display A to select function V For details see step 1 of page S 10 8 Press of display A to select input element 1 3 or X Each time T7 is pressed the element indicator character of display A illuminates in the order shown below The wiring system of the circuit on the secondary side of the inverter is three phase three wire and the circuit is connected to input elements 1 and 3 of the WT230 To show the measured value of input element 1 3 or X on display A we illuminate input element 1 3 or X Display A ELEMENT ELEMENT ELEMENT ELEMENT 53 CGD OO When input element 1 is illuminated the line voltage across phases U and V see page S 5 on the secondary side of the inverter is indicated When input element 3 is illuminated the line voltage across phases W and V see page S 5 on the secondary side of the inverter is indicated When input element X is illuminated the average of the line voltage across phases U and V and the voltage across phases W and V on the secondary side of the inverter is indicated However this value does not have any physic
35. of reading The unit of f in the read error equation is kHz 0 1 of reading 0 1 96 of range am RIAA Add x10 uA x voltage reading to the DC accuracy of power Influence of power factor When power factor PF 0 VA apparent power 0 2 of VA for 45 Hz lt f lt 66 Hz 0 2 0 2 x f of VA for up to 100 kHz as reference data The unit for frequency f is kHz When 0 lt PF lt 1 phase angle of the voltage and current Add the power reading x tano x influence when PF 0 Effect when the line filter is turned ON 45 to 66 Hz Add 0 3 of reading Less than 45 Hz Add 1 of reading Temperature coefficient Same as the temperature coefficient for voltage and current One year accuracy Accuracy 12 months after calibration Add reading error of the accuracy at 3 months after calibration x 0 5 to the accuracy at 3 months after calibration Accuracy when the crest factor is set to 6 Accuracy obtained by doubling the measurement range error for the accuracy when the crest factor is set to 3 Accuracy of Other Parameters and Computation Accuracy For the accuracy of frequency voltage and current see Frequency Measurement in section 16 3 Functions For the accuracy of integrated values Wh Wh Wh Ah Ah and Ah and the integration timer see Integration in section 16 3 Functions For the accuracy of voltage current and power during ha
36. or when the corresponding bit in the service request enable register becomes 1 For example if an event takes place and the logical OR of each bit of the standard event register and the corresponding bit in the enable register is 1 bit 5 ESB will be set to 1 In this case if bit 5 of the service request enable register is 1 bit 6 MSS will be set to 1 thus requesting service from the controller It is also possible to check what type of event has occurred by reading the contents of the status byte Reading from the Status Byte The following two methods are provided for reading the status byte Inquiry using the STB query Making an inquiry using the STB query sets bit 6 to MSS This causes the MSS to be read After completion of the read out none of the bits in the status byte will be cleared Serial poll Execution of a serial poll changes bit 6 to RQS This causes RQS to be read After completion of the read out only RQS is cleared Using a serial poll it is not possible to read MSS Clearing the Status Byte No method is provided for forcibly clearing all the bits in the status byte Bits which are cleared are shown below Whenan inquiry is made using the STB query No bit is cleared When a serial poll is performed Only the RQS bit is cleared When the CLS command is received When the CLS command is received the status byte itself is not cleared but the contents of the
37. uondo e ejieiul gi d5 H 10 7 Commands before the IEEE 488 2 Standard For a detailed description of each command refer to section 13 1 Command Description Wiring system WR m WiRing Voltage range RV m Range Voltage AV m Auto Voltage range Current range RA m Range current A AA m Auto current A range SA m Sensor Ampere Measurement mode MN m MeaN Measurement SN m SyNc source synchronization Source Line filter LF m Line Filter Frequency filter FL m FiLter Update rate SI m Sample Interval Hold HD m sampling HoID Trigger E or ST or GET Display DA m Display A function DB m Display B function DC m EAm EB m EC m Scaling SC m Display C function Element display A Element display B Element display C SCaling KV m K Amplre KA m K Wattage KW m K Voltage Averaging AG m AveraGing AT m Averaging Type P S ee AC m Averaging Coefficient sets wiring system sets voltage range sets voltage auto range sets current range sets current auto range sets external sensor scalling value sets RMS VOLTAGE MEAN or DC sets the measurement synchronization source sets line filter ON OFF sets frequency filter ON OFF sets display update rate holds display and output data trigger selects function to be displayed on display A selects function to be displayed on display B selects function to be displayed on display C selects element to be
38. 1 Then Listl AddItem FREQ V1 Query item ElseIf item 2 Then Listl AddItem Al THD Query item ElseIf item 3 Then Listl AddItem Al Total Query item ElseIf item 4 Then Listl AddItem Al Or 1 Query item ElseIf item lt 13 Then Listl AddItem CStr item 3 Else Listl AddItem CStr item 3 End If qry Mid qry comma 1 Listl ListIndex Listl ListIndex 1 Next item Listl AddIte In Listl ListIndex Listl ListIndex 1 qry Space 1000 Dummy DoEvents Next cnt Listl AddItem Listl ListIndex Call ibonl Dev GpibHarmonics Exit Function GPIBError All end 0 0 Listl ListIndex 1 Call DisplayGPIBError sts msg GpibHarmonics End Function 1 Query item Query item 14 58 IM 760401 01E 14 9 Sample Program Output of Harmonic Measurement Data 0002E400 IM 760401 01E 14 59 H pyepueis 2661 c 88tp 3331 24 0 HulAjdwoy spuewwosg jo wa sAs z spueuiuio uoneoiunuluo 14 10 ASCII Character Codes ASCII character codes are given below 1 2 3 4 7 0 20 40 0 60 16 100 0 120 16 140 0 160 16 10 16 20 32 30 48 40 64 50 80 60 96 70 112 J 21 LLO 41 1 61 17 101 1 121 17 141 1 161 17 DC1 1 A a q 11 17 21 33 31 49 41 65 51 81 61 97 71 113 2 22 42 2 62 18 102 2 122 18 142 2 162 1
39. Display range G180 0 to d180 0 G meaning phase lag d meaning phase lead Unit deg Selecting the Display Function When you select deg the phase angle will be displayed Selecting the Input Element 1 2 3 Displays the measurement values of element 1 2 3 X Refer to page 5 2 Note _ Changing the measurement mode might result in different computed results even when the input signal is the same For more details on the measurement mode refer to page 4 1 When either the voltage or current drops below 0 5 less than or equal to 1 if the crest factor is set to 6 of the measurement range dEGErr will be displayed Distinction between phase lag and lead can be made properly only when both voltage and current are sine waves and when the percentage of voltage or current input relating to the measurement range does not fluctuate much fthe computed result of the power factor exceeds 1 the display will be as follows Between 1 0001 to 2 0000 or 1 0001 to 2 0000 the phase angle displays 0 0 e 2 0001 or more or 2 0001 or less the phase angle displays dEGErr 5 4 IM 760401 01E 5 4 Displaying the Frequency CHECK RANGE MODE RANGE oO o o n n UPDATE VOLTAGE CURRENT RMS VOLTAGE DC MAX HOLD SAUTO SAU o MEAN A m V VA 12 3 x _ VOLTAGE cunRENT HOLD k A var FUNCTION ELEMENT MODE MAE HoD me TIME MW v ENTER B m V
40. ENTER 1 nFF Set the Interval v Display C E Prt 5t rc A on 5 jhourmin rsec4 8 listes YU mE WL gt ENTER gt GGG GO gt ENTER End of setting 6 V Up down 7 V Shift cursor SHIFT gt Recalling Measured Computed Data ON OFF Select the recall function 1 Display C STOP 5tart A s Display C k SHIFT MEMORY 2 P 3 Display AN rELHL ENTER 4 nri T ENTER End of settin M PuL5Ebr nn ng v ME paiet f nEHL Explanation Storing Measured Computed Data Storing into Internal Memory One block consists of all data which are obtained when the display is updated once The data number increases by the number of used input elements and therefore the number of blocks that can be stored depends on the model as described above The number of blocks which can be stored into the internal memory is as follows Model In case of normal measurement In case of harmonic measurement 760401 600 Blocks 30 Blocks 760502 300 Blocks 30 Blocks 760503 200 Blocks 30 Blocks e Items which can be stored When storing normal measured data harmonic measurement function is turned OFF Each measured computed integrated data of normal measurement will be stored However only either the voltage frequency or current frequency will be stored If either one of the display function V Hz or A Hz is turned on the frequency of the corresponding function is stored If both display functions are OFF th
41. Forthe relationship between the wiring systems and the method of determining the measured values or computed values see page 16 6 n SP3W and 3V3A systems the wiring system may be different between the WT210 230 and another product another digital power meter due to the differences in the input element that is wired To achieve correct measurements check the wiring system 3 14 IM 760401 01E 3 9 Using an External Sensor to Wire the Circuit under Measurement AN AN Note When using an external sensor make sure to use a sensor that comes in a case The conductive parts and the case should be insulated and the sensor should have enough withstand voltage with respect to the voltage being measured Using a bare sensor is dangerous because you might accidentally come in contact with it which results in electric shock When using a shunt do not wire while electricity is running This act is extremely dangerous Make sure to turn OFF the circuit under measurement Voltage is applied to the shunt while electricity is running Do not come in contact with it When using the clamp sensor make sure you have a thorough understanding of the specifications and handling of the voltage of the measurement circuit and the clamp sensor Check that there are no hazards places that may cause electric shock When using the external sensor input terminal do not touch the current input terminal or connect measurement cables This act i
42. IM 760401 01E 3 13 sjuswainseayy Bunes 310499 le 3 8 Using an External PT or CT to Wire the Circuit under Measurement Wiring example of a three phase three wire system 3P3W when using a PT CT Can be applied to models 760502 and 760503 Source Load S Input terminal Element D Input terminal Element 3 Wiring example of a three phase four wire system 3PAW when using a PT CT Can be applied to model 760503 Source Load Input terminal Element 1 Input terminal Element 2 Input terminal Element 3 Wiring example of a three voltage three current system 3V3A when using a PT CT Can be applied to model 760503 Source Load U R I Input terminal Element 1 Input terminal Element 2 Input terminal Element 3 Note L Youcan use the scaling function to directly read the measured values on the display For the procedures see section 4 5 Setting the Scaling Constant when Using an External PT or CT Note that the frequency and phase characteristics of the PT or CT affect the measured data For safety reasons this section indicates wiring diagrams in which the common terminals terminals of the secondary side of the PT or CT are grounded
43. NORMAL ITEM V SIGMA gt MEASURE NORMAL ITEM V SIGMA 1 MEASure NORMal VALue Function Syntax Example Queries normal measured computed data set by commands other than MEASure NORMa1 ITEM ASCII format MEASure NORMal VALue MEASURE NORMAL VALUE 10 04E 00 10 02E 00 10 03E 00 49 41E 00 Description The renewal of normal measured computed data output here occures when bitO UPD of the condition register refer to page 14 47 changes from high to low For more details refer to 14 2 6 For the output format of normal measured computed data refer to page 14 32 When the harmonic measurement function is ON harmonic measurement data will be returned same as the response to MEASure HARMonics VALue IM 760401 01E 14 31 H pyepueis 2661 2 88r 3331 24 0 BuiAqjduio spuewwosy jo wa sAs z spueuiulo uoneoiunuiulo2 14 3 Commands Data Format Output Format of Normal and Harmonic Measurement Data ASCII The data format output format of normal and harmonic measurement data which is requested by MEASure NORMal VALue Of MEASure HARMonics VALue is as follows Data Format of Normal Measurement Data All data of the harmonic measurement function are output in the NR3 format Example 123 45E 00 V A W VA VAR PF DEGR VHZ AHZ VPK APK MATH mantissa max 5 digits exponent 2 digits WH WHP WHM AH AHP AHM mantissa max 6 digits exp
44. Select the comparator function 1 Display C SETUP 2 Lann SHIFT OUTPUT m i F uub v d Select the display function ae 3 Display C rELAY gt ENTER oF F E node 5 Display C 7 oF F T ENTER m End of setting an C n Ow UD Bis moos 7n m 3 a C7 Je IM 760401 01E 9 17 uonoung 1ndino u jeuje1x3 Is 9 7 Comparator Display Option Explanation Comparator Display Function This function allows you to verify the set limits together with measurement computation data on the display when using the comparator function The display is as follows depending on whether the comparator function is set to single or dual mode Display in case the comparator function is set to single mode Unit prefix Illuminates as necessary in each display Unit One unit corresponding to relay on display A illuminates The unit V A or W corresponding to the measured computed or limit values shown on displays B and C is illuminated Input element One element corresponding to relay on display A illuminates Channel Relay Selectable from ch1 to ch4 by V 128r Measured or computed data Corresponding to the relay on display A Limit value Corresponding to the relay on display A Display in case th
45. Terminator ASCII codes are used Example DA 2 CR LF Command Parameter Terminator Command Defined by one to three uppercase alphabet characters Parameter Value or character string in ASCII code Terminator For GP IB communication When the WT210 WT230 is a listener CR LF LF or EOI can be received as a terminator When the WT210 WT230 is a listener the terminator specified by the DL command see page 13 3 is sent For Serial communication See pages 11 8 and 13 3 13 16 IM 760401 01E 13 2 Before Programming Multiple Command Statements Multiple commands can be written on a single line In this case delimit each command statement command parameter using a semicolon Note A space or a tab can either exist or not exist between a command and a parameter Query Commands A query command has a question mark attached to the end of the command The returned data in response to a query command is as follows Query Returned data DA gt DA1 Numeric Parameters Digits that exceed 5 digits in floating point parameters are truncated IM 760401 01E 13 17 g pyepueis 286 4 Z 88t 3331 OY 910J9q spuewwo Jo W3S S spueuiuo uoneorunuulo l 13 3 Sample Program Image 13 18 13 4 Sample Program Initialization Error Execution Functions Opti Dim Dim Dim Dim Dim Dim Dim Priv GPIB End Priv on Explicit StartFlag As Integer Start Flag addr As In
46. The actual number of displayed digits may be smaller than the maximum number of displayed digits depending on the combination of the voltage range and current range and the automatic digit carrying operation Values such as Vpk voltage peak Apk current peak phase angle efficiency crest factor four arithmetic operations average active power integrated value elapsed integration time and harmonic measurement values harmonic distortion and phase angle are not affected by the number of displayed digits set in this section For details see the sections describing each item Selecting the Display Update Rate You can select the display update rate of the measured or computed results shown on the display from the choices below The UPDATE indicator blinks in sync with the selected display update rate You can increase the display update rate to measure the load power that changes relatively fast or decrease the rate to measure the power of a signal with a relatively long period The initial setting is 0 25 s 0 1 s 0 25 s 0 5 s 1 s 2 s and 5s Note The display update rate of 0 1 s appears as a possible selection when the harmonic measurement function is ON However it cannot be selected If the display update rate had been set to 0 1 s when the harmonic measurement function was OFF the rate is changed to 0 25 s when you turn on the harmonic measurement function In this case the display update rate remains at 0 25 s even if you turn
47. VAi 2 Wiz xpr 2W Zdeg cos 2M Three phase on EVA EVA four wire i 1 2 3 EW W1 W2 W3 EVA VA1 VA2 VA3 Xvarzvari var2 var3 Wi VAi VieAi vari a VAi 2 Wi2 Three voltage W2 has no physical three current meaning i 1 2 3 ZW W1 W3 zVA 3 VA1 VA2 var vari var3 VA3 Note The WT210 WT230 computes apparent power VA reactive power var power factor PF and phase angle deg from voltage current and active power through digital computation If distorted signal is input the value obtained on this instrument may differ from that obtained on other instruments using a different measurement principle Ifthe voltage or current is less than 0 5 less than or equal to 1 if the crest factor is set to 6 of the rated range zero is displayed for VA or var and error is displayed for PF and deg The accuracy of detecting lead or lag is defined for a voltage and current input that is at least 50 range rating if the crest factor is set to 6 of the rated range Detection accuracy 5 deg 20 Hz to 2 kHz For 2var computation when the current leads the voltage each var value is computed as a negative value when the current lags the voltage the value is computed as a positive value 16 6 IM 760401 01E 16 3 Functions Item Specifications Scaling When performing voltage or current measurements with items such as external PT CT shunt and
48. r C7 N un ry Im em mo rc x oc cer Display C 5 ENTER gt aFF ENTER End of setting A on v fc A m a 2 r 4 FT Lu ri uu 2 ir e ra Lh raQ n r z za rc P ra 7 Scaling Function This function is useful for measuring voltage current power and such when you are using an external potential transformer PT current transformer CT or such and have connected their secondary side outputs to the input elements You set the scaling value to the PT ratio CT ratio or power coefficient When the scaling function is turned ON measured values which have been converted to the corresponding values for the transformer primary sides can been displayed or otherwise output Measured computed value Scaled result Voltage V PxV P Voltage scaling constant Current A CxA C Current scaling constant Active power W FxPxCxW F Power scaling constant Reactive power var FxPxCxvar Apparent power VA FxPxCxVA Selecting the Input Element This setting is to select to which element scaling will be applied The initial value is ALL At the WT210 this selection menu will not appear ALL Select this when the same scaling constant should be applied to all elements together EL1 Select this when the scaling constant should only be applied to element 1 EL2
49. 0 Clear Start Flag Dev 1 Clear device id addr 1 GPIB Address 1 Command1 Caption Command2 Caption Textl Text End Sub Samplel GPIB Chr 13 Get Normal Data Sample2 GPIB Chr 13 Get Harmonics Data O o 3 3 c 5 9 9 Oo 2 O Oo 3 3 2 a o N o lt o Pl 3 9 Qo Oo 3 3 2 a o O o 3 E lt 2 Q o 2 gt o m m m A oo eo N i oO N o o o 2 Q o Qo IM 760401 01E 14 53 14 8 Sample Program Output of Normal Measurement Data Samplel GPIB Get Normal Data Private Function GpibNormal As Integer Dim msg As String Command buffer Dim qry As String Query buffer Dim sts As Integer Dim item As Integer Dim comma As Integer Dim length As Integer Dim cnt As Integer term Chr 10 terminator msg Space 100 qry Space 200 Listl AddItem Now Initializing Wait a moment Dummy DoEvents sts InitGpib Initialize GPIB If sts lt gt 0 Then GpibNormal 1 Exit Function End If Initialize the settings msg RST term Initialize the settings sts ilwrt Dev msg Len msg Send Command If sts lt 0 Then GoTo GPIBError End If Set the measurement condition msg SAMPLE HOLD OFF term Hold off sts ilwrt Dev msg Len msg If sts lt 0 Then GoTo GPIBError End If msg MODE RMS term Measurment Mode RMS sts ilwrt Dev msg Len msg If
50. 13 5 13 5 KH KH we 13 5 KK pis tete tiene enne 13 5 KV KV KA KA KW KW sssssseseeennneens 13 5 DERE 2th te 19 6 MN MN2 o aTeo cactenssaattniead tea ccasvara fancets 13 6 MT MT icti iet te trt rece a e cet 13 6 OA OA es 13 7 OAD OAD ecce ritenere tete dte 13 7 13 7 s 13 7 eye d 13 8 OFD OED3 3 7 2 edes ecl ics derer Ie lt teesceacestuacth 13 8 OH OH we 19 9 ORIOR 13 10 OS teleardaesy 13 10 OY QOY25 ceterae tei na eere sena edid 13 11 QY THOMA 2 tus teas steeneseea ettet re e RE ed 13 11 PS PS tenete e e dace teat 18 12 a du VaeT tee 18 12 c 18 12 RO RO erie cede eiie cereis 18 12 RBR RBB2 rete mt e tte 18 12 RTRT O ueste tec nde een car uec etat 13 13 nh oV Ue ETE ETE 13 13 SAISA isiscesesen ee eiie nne n ria 13 13 SO SC tis dave ian iate nimmt meine irs 13 13 SI SI TM TM WR WR EPRE EAEE EET AE TE 13 14 NIGEN E 13 15 YM YM YONO Zae TTE BUTTON ON ae a 13 15 ZG is EE Commands IEEE 488 2 CAE aue actin Steet cea thet ai ae ec ORTU 14 42 CONFigure AVERaging TYPE esee 14 19 CONFigure AVERaging see 14 19 Index 4 IM 760401 01E CONFigure AVERaging STATe 14 19 14 19 CONFigure CFACtor CONFi
51. 4 4 Selecting the Measurement Range When Using Direct Input The maximum display is 99999 when the number of displayed digits is set to 5 When the result of voltage range x current range exceeds 1000 W the unit on the display will change to kW When this result exceeds 1000 kW the unit on the display will change to MW Power range table Alist of the combination of voltage and current ranges and the power range are shown below The table shows the active power range unit W The same ranges are set for apparent power unit VA and reactive power unit var Just replace the unit with VA or var when looking at the tables The following table shows the case when the number of displayed digits is five When the number of displayed digits is set to four one digit is subtracted to the lowest digit of the values in the table For selecting the number of displayed digits see section 4 13 On the WT230 When the crest factor is set to 3 Wiring System Voltage Current Range Range V 500 00mA_ 1 0000 A 2 0000 A 5 0000 A 10 000 A 20 000 A Single phase two wire 15 000 7 5000W 15 000W 30 000 W 75 000 W 150 00 W 300 00 W 1P2W 30 000 15 000W 30 000W 60 000 W 150 00 W 300 00 W 600 00 W 60 000 30 000 W 60 000W 120 00 W 300 00 W 600 00 W 1 2000 kW 150 00 75 000 W 150 00W 300 00 W 750 00 W 1 5000 kW 3 0000 kw 300 00 150 00 W 300 00W 600 00 W 1 5000 kW 3 0000 kW 6 0000 kW 600 00 300 00 W 600
52. 5 5 2 9 Set the transition filter used to detect the completion of the data updating msg STATUS FILTER1 FALL term Falling edge of bit0 UPD sts ilwrt Dev msg Len msg If sts lt 0 Then GoTo GPIBError End If IM 760401 01E 14 57 14 9 Sample Program Output of Harmonic Measurement Data Sleep 1000 Listl Clear Read and display the harmonics data For cnt 1 To 1 0 It is repeated 10 times in this program Clear the extended event register Read and trash the response msg STATUS EESR term sts ilwrt Dev msg Len msg If sts 0 Then GoTo GPIBError End If sts ilrd Dev qry Len qry If sts lt 0 Then GoTo GPIBError End If Wait for the completion of the data updating msg COMMUNICATE WAIT 1 term sts ilwrt Dev msg Len msg If sts 0 Then GoTo GPIBError End If Read out the harmonics data Receive Query msg MEASURE HARMONICS VALUE term sts ilwrt Dev msg Len msg If sts 0 Then GoTo GPIBError End If sts ilrd Dev qry Len qry If sts lt 0 Then GoTo GPIBError End If Extract items that are separated by commas from the received data Listl AddItem Measurement CStr cnt Listl ListIndex Listl ListIndex 1 For item 1 To 53 length Len qry comma InStr qry If comma 0 Then comma InStr qry term Query item Left qry comma 1 If item
53. 58E 0 0101 43E 0 04 9992E 0 05 0018E 0 05 387 1E 0 05 1932E 0 0500 35E 0 0488 21E 0 0548 19E 0 01 0485E 3 043 398E 0 Co m5 C5 co co 0 cn 4 oo P2 13 24 IM 760401 01E 13 6 Sample Program Output of Harmonic Measurement Data Sample2 GPIB Get Harmonics Data Private Function GpibHarmonics As Integer Dim msg As String Dim qrytemp As String Dim sts As Integer Dim cnt As Integer Dim spr As Integer term Chr 10 terminator msg Space 100 Listl AddItem Now Initializing Wait a moment Dummy DoEvents sts InitGpib Initialize GPIB If sts lt gt 0 Then GpibHarmonics 1 Exit Function End If Initialize the settings msg RC term Initialize the settings sts ilwrt Dev msg Len msg Send Command If sts lt 0 Then GoTo GPIBError End If Set the measurement condition msg SI2 term Update rate 500ms sts ilwrt Dev msg Len msg If sts 0 Then GoTo GPIBError End If Set the measurement range msg RV7 term Voltage range 150V sts ilwrt Dev msg Len msg If sts 0 Then GoTo GPIBError End If msg RA7 term Current range 5A sts ilwrt Dev msg Len msg If sts lt 0 Then GoTo GPIBError End If Setting related to harmonic measurement Object element 1 PLL source V1 Computation method of THD IEC msg HE1 PS1 DF0 HA1 term sts ilwrt Dev msg Len msg Send Command If sts lt 0
54. A type 1 element 20 00 value E 0 exponent 20 00 A current limit of element 1 for channel 2 ch3 P type 1 element 1 200 value E 3 exponent 1 2 kW active power limit of element 1 for channel 3 ch4 PF type 1 element 1 000 value E 0 exponent Power factor 1 limit of element 1 for channel 4 Selecting the exponent The following selections are available The initial value is as described above E 3 1079 E 0 109 E 3 103 E 6 109 Note The values of V voltage A current W active power VA apparent power var reactive power Vpk voltage peak and Apk current peak while the MAX hold function see section 4 8 is enabled will be displayed according to the maximum values MAX that are held The values that are compared against the limit values are also the maximum values MAX that are held When you use limit values based on harmonic measurement data make sure to set the harmonic measurement function to ON before you set the comparator function ON see section 9 8 Although the four relays used in case of normal measurement and in case of harmonic measurement are the same the contents of the settings will be kept for both seperately For example even after setting a limit for ch1 in case of harmonic measurement after previously having set a limit for ch1 in case of normal measurement will result in keeping both values The determination method does not change as a re
55. LF LE A FFiLE Y RBL rr H f E Select the setup method Select collectively oer 3 Display C 5 Display C 9 E n 9 ENTER ag AL 9 ENTER 9 579 gt ENTER r End of settin T PnLr5b 6 V sets the value 9 v m nHEH T V moves digits Eae f SHIFT gt 2r EE 8 moves the decimal point Lr rt5oa SHIFT nur BESTE Set ELEMENT 1 L EF NE 5 Display A 9 EAL H gt ENTER gt E Saag gt ENTER 6 7 Same as steps 6 to 8 8 Set ELEMENT 3 Set ELEMENT 2 13 Display C 11 Display B ENTER ESHBUDOL ENTER E5BDBUU End of setting 12 Same as steps 10 Same as steps 6 to 8 6to 8 Note The setup method menu All Each does not appear on the WT210 4 14 IM 760401 01E 4 6 Selecting the Measurement Range and Setting the Scaling Constant when External Sensor is Used option Selecting the Measurement Range Current with Scaling Function ON When equipped with option EX1 1 CURRENT Display C Hubn Im EL gt N c3 Du G E3 uU ll E3 The unit is V 3 ENTER End of setting mr 053 Lh Pu Ln The above figure shows the selections when the crest factor is set 3 The selections when the crest factor is set to 6 are shown below Auto 10 5 2 5 1 0 5 0 25 E5 E2 5 E 1 25 2 When equipped with option EX2
56. No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection DA 3ch Output DA 4ch Output DA ich Output DA 2ch Output DA COM DA COM IM 760401 01E uonoung 1ndino u jeuje1x3 f 9 1 Pin Arrangement and Pin Assignments of the External I O Connector Option DA12 specifications for WT230 760502 760503 remote control 12 channel D A output Pin No Signal Pin No Signal 1 DIGITAL COM 13 DIGITAL COM 2 EXT HOLD Input 14 EXT TRIG Input 3 EXT START Input 15 EXT STOP Input 4 EXT RESET Input 16 INTEG BUSY Output 5 No Connection 17 No Connection 6 DA 1ich Output 18 DA 12ch Output 7 DA 9ch Output 19 DA 10ch Output 8 DA 7ch Output 20 DA 8ch Output 9 DA 5ch Output 21 DA 6ch Output 10 DA 3ch Output 22 DA 4ch Output 11 DA ich Output 23 DA 2ch Output 12 DA COM 24 DA COM CMP specifications for WT210 WT230 760401 760502 760503 remote control 4 channel D A output 4 channel comparator output Pin No Signal Pin No Signal 1 EXTSTOP Input 13 DIGITAL COM 2 EXT HOLD Input 14 EXT TRIG Input 3 RELAY 3chrNC 15 RELAY 4chrNC 4 cou 16 com 5 NO 17 NO 6 RELAY 1chrNC 18 RELAY 2chrNC 7 com 19 cos 8 NO 20 NO 9 INTEG BUSY Output 21 EXTRESET Input 10 DA 3ch Output 22 DA 4ch Output 11 DA ich Output 23 DA 2ch Output 12 EXT START Input 24 DA
57. Power supplied by the source 73 07 when converted to a percentage VA var a Jd 1232 FUNCTION ELEMENT ae ma 2x glasa 3 2 8 Spe alsel Da LI L Lt i 4 PF deg 123r FUNCTION ELEMENT 1232 FUNCTION ELEMENT IM 760401 01E S 21 0 mE i e Le Q 0 Chapter 1 Functional Overview and Digital Display 1 1 System Configuration and Block Diagram System Configuration PT Digital power meter Voltage input WT210 Contact relay output Equipment 760401 Analog output under Recorder test Current i i WT230 input npu either 760502 760503 BB one RS 232 C Personal Ext Computer sensor Ext printer or plotter Block Diagram Model Input Section 760401 Built in input element 1 760502 Built in input element 1 and 3 760503 Built in input element 1 2 and 3 zv oo PUIEDONEDED e e pa GEN Section ee errr r i Voltage input section Samping i H DSP yY y CPU E ROM A D JE ISO RAM Zero
58. Select this when the scaling constant should only be applied to element 2 This selection will not appear on model 760502 EL3 Select this when the scaling constant should only be applied to element 3 End Selectthis when you finished the setting or when you want to abort the setting Setting the Scaling Constant The scaling constant are set in the following order The setting ranges from 0 001 to 9999 The initial value is 1 000 P Sets the PT ratio on display A C Sets the CT ratio on display B F Sets the power value on display C In case of the WT210 pressing the ENTER key after setting P C and F respectively will end this scaling setting In case of the WT230 selecting End at the input element menu will end this scaling setting IM 760401 01E 4 5 Setting the Scaling Value When External PT CT is Used Turning Scaling ON OFF Select the scaling menu once again after having set the scaling constant The initial value is oFF on Selecting on and pressing the ENTER key will start scaling and the SCALING indicator will light oFF Selecting oFF and pressing the ENTER key will stop scaling and SCALING indicator will extinguish Note If scaling constant x measurement range exceeds 9999M 10 computation overflow OF is indicated IM 760401 01E eBueg 1ueujeunseo y pue suomnipuo 1ueujeunseo y Dunes le 4 6 Selecting the Measurement Range and Setting the Scaling Constant when External Sensor is
59. Set to 1 when the measurement computed data of element 3 overflow or when an error occurs Display shown oF oL PFErr or dEGEr Bit 13 POV3 Element 3 voltage peak over Set to 1 when the voltage value of element 3 exceeds the peak value Bit 14 POA3 Element 1 current peak over Set to 1 when the current value of element 3 exceeds the peak value The transition filter is applied to each bit of the condition register seperately and can be selected from the following Note that the numbering of the bits used in the filter setting differs from the actual bit number 1 to 16 vs 0 to 15 IM 760401 01E 14 47 H pyepueis 2661 c 88r 3331 24 0 HulAj dwioy spuewwosy jo wa sAs z spueuiulo uoneoiunuiulo2 14 4 Status Report Manual integration mode Standard integration mode Continuous integration mode Integration Integration Integration Timer preset time Timer preset aa preset preset time Reset Start DE EM Reset Start p Reset Start i i Stop i i mco gquI mcd xz ec 3 4 4 w rel Au qux L When the elapsed integration time reaches the preset integration time data will be reset automatically and the contact status will change Rise The bit of the extended event register becomes 1 when the bit of the condition register changes from 0 to 1 Fall The bit of the extended event register becomes 1 when the bit
60. Syntax INTEGrate MODE NORMal CONTinuous lt String gt INTEGrate MODE lt NRf gt lt NRf gt lt NR gt 0 0 0 to Example INTEGRATE MODE NORMAL 10000 0 0 INTEGRATE MODE lt String gt HHHHH MM SS HHHHH hour MM gt INTEGRATE MODE NORMAL minute SS second Example INTEGRATE TIMER 10 0 0 INTEGRATE TIMER 10 00 00 INTEGRATE TIMER gt INTEGRATE TIMER 10 0 0 INTEGrate RESet Function Resets the integrated values Syntax INTEGrate RESet Example INTEGRATE RESET INTEGrate STARt Function Starts integration Syntax INTEGrate STARt Example INTEGRATE START IM 760401 01E 14 25 H pyepueis 2661 c 88gr 3331 24 o1 BuiAjduio spuewwosy jo wa sAs z spueuiulo uoneoiunuiulo2 14 3 Commands 14 3 8 MATH Group The commands in the MATH group are used to make settings relating to and to make inquiries about the computing function The same function can be performed using the MATH menu of the SETUP key of the front panel MATH EFFiciency y el V Space CFACtor gt ARIThmetic AVERage CFACtor lt Space gt I C v C lt NRf gt A 23 ELEMent x __ Space ao ELEMent MATH Function Queries all settings related to the computing function Syntax MATH Examp
61. The orders are printed up to the maximum analysis order When the fundamental frequency lies outside the measurement range of the harmonic measurement display B will show FrqEr an attempt to output will result in an error code When you set an element which is not the element of measurement column B an attempt to output will result in an error code When no measured data is present will be printed There are cases where the active power value becomes negative The corresponding bargraph will be printed in thin print When no plotter is connected output time out approx 60 s will result in an error code fthe LOCAL key is pressed during printing printing stops Example of Output to an External Plotter Some sections in the following figure such as fonts and graph lines differ in appearance from the actual output Output example in case of output item G V of harmonic measured data Voltage range Measured Relative Harmonic Current range Order Value Content Function and element THHHHHHE Harmonic Voltage List HHHHHHE PLL source Model M 760503 HRM Or Yolt V Cont Or Volt V Cont Frequency of PLL source H Ronge E 1 49 62 2 0 03 0 06 Rms value of 1st to 50th Function V 1 1 Bs ae og order of voltage Sync 2 C PEL V1 7 101 203 8 001 0 01 Rms value of
62. Then GoTo GPIBError End If pyepueis 7861 2 88h 3331 94 d10Joq spuewwo Jo Wa sAsS SPUBLIWIOD uoneorunuulo Set the communication output items A Elementl msg OH2 1 term sts ilwrt Dev msg Len msg If sts 0 Then GoTo GPIBError End If Clear the RQS of status byte Read and trash the response Sleep 1000 sts ilrsp Dev spr Serial Poll Listl Clear Read and display the harmonics data It is repeated 10 times in this program For cnt 1 To 10 GoSub Readdata Next cnt Listl AddItem All end Listl ListIndex Listl ListIndex 1 Call ibonl Dev 0 GpibHarmonics 0 Exit Function IM 760401 01E 13 25 13 6 Sample Program Output of Harmonic Measurement Data GPIBError Call DisplayGPIBError sts msg GpibHarmonics 1 Exit Function Readdata sts ilrsp Dev spr If sts 0 Then GoTo GPIBError End If If spr And amp H41 lt gt amp H41 Then cnt cnt 1 Return End If Read out numerical data till END msg OD term sts ilwrt Dev msg Len msg If sts lt 0 Then GoTo GPIBError End If Listl AddItem Measurement CStr cnt Listl ListIndex Listl ListIndex 1 Do While qrytemp lt gt END qrytemp Space 200 sts ilrd Dev qrytemp Len qrytemp If sts lt 0 Then GoTo GPIBError Serial Poll End If qrytemp Left qrytemp InStr qrytemp term 2 If qrytemp END Then Exit Do End If Listl AddItem qrytemp Listl L
63. Used option CHECK RANGE MODE ias Ll D D D RANGE UPDATE VOLTAGE CURRENT RMS VOLTAGE DC MAX HOLD AUTO SANG o A im r ri mv vali 2 3 z mck CURRENT HOLD MODE MAXHOLD TRIG q im T J l r k A Vaf ruwcrioN ELEMENT Hi m am Pm M W T E B m V PF 12 3 X CALA ea INTEGRATOR wx CES emer ove er START STOP RESET mw 0 CJ HARMONICS MEMORY INTEG SET c rr m V H 123 p gf a IL J n k A h Iruncriow mewewr LOCAL SETUP b MW hz CO CJ KEY LOCK OOTPUT SHIFT Draw O3P3w FILTER WIRING m o El E oO Bn E j SCALING AVG LINE FREQ STORE RECALL HARMONICS KEY LOCK Tsp 4w O 3V3A The explanation given in this section uses WT230 as an example For the differences between the WT210 and the WT230 see section 2 2 Operation Keys and Functions Element Display Procedure Operate the instrument by following the thick lines in the menu below Press the ENTER key to confirm a selection or setting Toleave the current menu in the middle of the operation press the key indicated in step 1 The confirmed settings up to that point are kept Setting the Scaling Constant of the External Sensor Input Select the external sensor function 1 Display C SETUP 3 31
64. VTHD ATHD 1 data Outputs the harmonic distortion factor of voltage current for either iEC or CSA The used computation method can be found out using the HARMonics THD command V A W 51 or 31 data Rms values of the 1st to 50 or 30 th order fundamental measured value 1st order harmonic measurement value 2nd order harmonic measurement value 50 or 30 th order IM 760401 01E 14 33 H pyepueis 2661 2 88r 3331 24 0 BuiAqjduio spuewwosy jo uejs S z spueuiulo uoneoiunuiulo2 14 3 Commands VCON ACON WCON 49 or 29 data Harmonic relative content 2nd order harmonic relative content 50 or 30 th order pF 1data Outputs the power factor of the fundamental 1st order vDEG 50 or 30 data Phase angle between the1st order voltage and 1st order current Phase angle between the 2nd order voltage and 1st order voltage Phase angle between the 50 or 30 th order voltage and the 1st order voltage e ADEG 50 or 30 data Phase angle between the1st order voltage and 1st order current Phase angle between the 2nd order current and 1st order current 5 Phase angle between the 50 or 30 th order current and the 1st order current Each data is divided by a comma on and ended by the terminator lt RMT gt Output Example of Harmonic Measurement Data Output example for model 760503 after having sent the following commands Refer also to page 9 23 for output example of external plotter
65. a a INTEGRATOR TE ES erle e START STOP RESET MW HARMONICS MEMORY INTEG SET c r1 l pan V Hz 123r E REMOTE Ft l1 im l1 k A h eunerion evemenr 97 sme D N MW he 4 Ei KEY Lock OUTPU O1P3W OsP3w gees Oo Im n o o n n n SCALING AVG LINE FREQ STORE RECALL HARMONICS KEY LOCK D33P4W ONIA The explanation given in this section uses WT230 as an example For the differences between the WT210 and the WT230 see section 2 2 Operation Keys and Functions Element Display Procedure Operate the instrument by following the thick lines in the menu below Press the ENTER key to confirm a selection or setting Toleave the current menu in the middle of the operation press the key indicated in step 1 The confirmed settings up to that point are kept Select the four arithmetical operation function 1 Display C SETUP LF LE EF LE RHL BLRLE E ma Fnbr hb s Display C 5 n RE H 9 ENTER 375 EFF gt ENTER a End of setting m 5 Ha E m j LF H i v rtEb5na LF Hg nr Ht E f B LF H 3 This is an example for the WT230 E rro rE Hg 760503 The display varies ae EXC GRO depending on the number of installed L re ng elements EF AF AFA P A b H i h L Alb H bB g ATA AH i Gy ug This is an example for the WT230 Hg 760503 The display varies HH 3i depending
66. command is not supported by this instrument OPC When OPC is sent 1 in ASCII code will be returned This command is not supported by this instrument OPC Queries installed options OPT OPT EXT1 HARM DA4 CMP NONE will be attached to the reply if no options are installed OPT must always be the last query in program message If there is another query after this an error will occur Selects whether or not to clear the following registers when turning ON the power or queries the current setting The registers are the standard event enable register the extended event enable register and the transition filter However they cannot be cleared if the parameter is 0 PSC lt NRf gt PSC lt NRf gt 0 no clearance other than O clearance PSC 1 PSC gt 1 Refer to Section 14 4 for more details on the registers Resets initializes the present settings RST RST Refer to 12 2 for initial settings All settings except communication settings are reset to factory default values Sets the value of the service request enable register or queries the current setting SRE lt NR gt SRE Example Description STB Function Syntax Example Description TRG Function Syntax Description TST Function Syntax Example Description WAI Function Syntax lt NR gt 0 to 255 SRE 239 SRE gt 175 since the bit 6 MSS setting is ign
67. dRER H e Set the relay Set the type of limit Set the limit value 4 Set the exponent Display C 7 Display A 13 Display B 17 Display C 19 gt i ch i ENTER H llt ENTER 2 GGO ENTER E 3 ENTER 6 20 ch 8 8 RII 14 V sets the value 18 Era A A A sh 2 y Pint 15 v shifts digits X EF SHIFT gt eh 4 PFI EFE 16 moves the HE i SHIFT decimal point RE OED 1 When you press the ENTER key at step 19 LH ili the output channel displayed at display C will rami change to the next channel i e from ch1 to ch2 Ee TEBR and so forth LB In 2 Depends on the model number Refer to the mE explanation for more details Bd ili 3 As the maximum order of harmonic analysis data Ad ID I varies by the fundamental frequency there might tore be cases where no analysis data are present up ALL uM to the 50th order display show bars In such a V case even setting the limit values will not result ABC in proper operation 4 The first digit is for the polarity Select in case of a negative value and nothing incase of a positive V moves to the B column value SHIFT 10 v selects from element 1 to 3 2 sets the A column type of limit 11 v moves to the C column SHIFT gt 12 v selects
68. e 460 Protruding from rack i 20 1 E 62 8 pa ems o e lam o LO LL E il L are co ca i 4 wo wr N EIA rack mount 482 6 1 n 460 Protruding from rack _20 i m of g f al ol N Ko NR N 1 L a Cl a o 5 482 61 463 Protruding from rack 20 L ius 2 3 ao N BE F e 1 Lona mm acu rcc E Nj 4 o i Unless other wise specified tolerance is 3 However tolerance is 0 3mm when below 10mm IM 760401 01E 16 15 a suoneoyioodsg 16 11 Dimensional Drawings WT230 Model 760502 760503 E un ra AE aj Unit mm RRvvvvvrvvvyvvvvs ys i i E i Sibi Addit de Ad Rear TOR RUE aa eli Aan 23 327 34 13 qd 285 JIS rack mount 3 480 1 B Protruding from rack 20 460 ES
69. external sensor clamp set a scaling factor to the primary secondary ratio Significant digits Selected automatically according to significant digits in the voltage and current ranges Selectable range 0 001 to 9999 Averaging Select the method from the following two types Exponential averaging method Moving average method Select the attenuation constant for exponential averaging select the sample number from 8 16 32 and 64 for moving average Efficiency Computation of efficiency is possible on the WT230 Crest factor Computes the crest factor peak value RMS value of voltage and current Four arithmetic operation Six types of four arithmetic operations possible A B A B A B A B A B and A B Average active power during integration Computes the average active power within the integrated period Integration Item Specifications Mode Select manual integration mode standard integration mode or repetitive integration mode Timer Automatically stop integration by setting a timer Selectable range 0 hours 00 minutes 00 seconds to 10000 hours 00 minutes 00 seconds Set automatically to manual integration mode for 0 hours 00 minutes 00 seconds Count overflow Holds the elapsed integration time and integration value and stops integration when the elapsed time of integration reaches the maximum integration time of 10000 hours or when the integrated value reaches the
70. gt SIGMa MEASure NORMal ITEM eere MEASure NORMal ITEM lt gt ALL ess MEASure NORMal ITEM TIME MATH MEASure NORMal ITEM seee 14 30 MEASure NORMal VALue eee 14 31 RECall INTerval 14 36 HECaILPANSel 2 inniti iecit es 14 36 sm P sted 14 36 RECall STATe RELay DISPlay RELay HCHannel x FUNCtion esses RELay HCHannel lt x gt THReshold RELay HCHannel x sse 14 37 RHEEay MODE ptite nte nnb pace siete 14 38 RELay NCHannel lt x gt FUNCtion RELay NCHannel x THReshold 14 38 RELay NCHannel x sss 14 38 RELAY 1 enun 14 37 RELEay STATS ioa ctr tt terii 14 38 SAMPIe HOLD eseeeeneeenenenen eene 14 39 SAMPIe RATE nist iett p toco be reawanvwiies 14 39 SAMPIG iani iie ce e n rd 14 39 STATus CONDition eii ts 14 40 STATUS BE E uites dpa ERROR 14 40 STATUS EESR ccccccccssscecsssccecssseeecsseeeeseeceeseeeessaees 14 40 STATUS ERROLT iniiieeitriin ppp xe E ERR 14 40 STATUS FIIETGerex iiiter its ende eri es 14 40 COMMunicate STATus we 14 16 STATus QMESSage eint teca 14 41 COMMunicate VERBose we 14 17 STATus SPOLL Serial Poll sess 14 41 COMMunicate WAIT we 14 17 STATUS occcccccccccecssecccesseeccsseeccssseeceseeeecseeeeess
71. is indicated If the measurement mode is VOLTAGE MEAN or DC no data 5 is indicated 4 24 IM 760401 01E 4 11 Performing Four Arithmetical Operation CHECK RANGE MODE o m o o o RANGE UPDATE VOLTAGE CURRENT AMS VOLTAGE DC MAX HOLD SAUD GAUO o A r i l ri m V VA 1 2 3 x Vote cunnevr HoLD MODE MAX HOLD TRIG 1 IL IL J I T k A Val ruwcroN ELEMENT er a m M W T E B m V PF ae iib des Ej INTEGRATOR k A deg ruwcrow ELEMENT START STOP RESET MW HARMONICS MEMORY INTEG SET c r1 l l 1 m V Hz i23 c REMOTE a n l1 IL lt k A h jruwcrow evemenr LOCA seve f MW het KEY LOCK OUTPUT SHIFT O1P3W O3P3W m o o o o n o n i SCALING AVG LINE FREQ STORE RECALL HARMONICS KEY LOCK LJ3P4W O3V3A The explanation given in this section uses WT230 as an example For the differences between the WT210 and the WT230 see section 2 2 Operation Keys and Functions Element Display Procedure Operate the instrument by following the thick lines in the menu below Press the ENTER key to confirm a selection or setting Toleave the current menu in the middle of the operation press the key indicated in step 1 The confirmed settings up to that point are kept Select the four arithmetical operation function 1 Display C SE
72. m 0 5 A range 1 A range 2 A range 5 A range 10 A range 20 A range FO DON HD UW BS 5 50 mV range only when equipped with option EX2 16 100 mV range only when equipped with option EX2 17 200 mV range only when equipped with option EX2 18 2 5 V range only when equipped with option EX1 19 5 V range only when equipped with option EX1 20 10 V range only when equipped with option EX1 21 5 mA range WT210 only 22 10 mA range WT210 only 23 20 mA range WT210 only 24 50 mA range WT210 only 25 100 mA range WT210 only 26 200 mA range WT210 only When the crest factor is set to 6 m 0 25 A range 0 5 A range 1 A range 2 5 A range 5 A range 10 A range Po WON HD U ww 5 25 mV range only when equipped with option EX2 Query Example Description RC Syntax Description RO RO Syntax Query Example Description RR RR Syntax 16 50 mV range only when equipped with option EX2 17 100 mV range only when equipped with option EX2 18 1 25 V range only when equipped with option EX2 19 2 5 V range only when equipped with option EX2 20 5 V range only when equipped with option EX2 21 2 5 mA range only when equipped with option EX2 22 5 mA range WT210 only 23 10 mA range WT210 only 24 25 mA range WT210 only 25 50 mA range WT210 only 26 100 mA range WT210 only RA terminator RA9 Parameter error 12 will occur if m is set to an illegal valu
73. output to external plotter and printer and communication output are also set to the maximum values MAX that are held The measured data that are stored are also set to the maximum values MAX that are held Settings for the the MAX hold function cannot be changed during storage IM 760401 01E SJojoureJeg dnjes pue geq peinduio9 paunseey jo uonoung je2eg eJo1S e 8 1 Storing Recalling Measured Computed Data Recalling Measured Computed Data Retrieving Data from the Internal Memory After displaying data stored in the internal memory you can use all display functions and carry out integration and display these data Furthermore by using the communication function data can be output Items which can be recalled all data which can be stored Aborting Recalling The recall operation stops in the following conditions when all stored data are retrieved when during the recall process oFF is selected at the store ON OFF setting Setting the Recalling Interval Sets the time interval for repeating the recall operation Setting range 00 00 00 0 hrs 00 min 00 sec to 99 59 59 99 hrs 59 min 59 sec Initial value 00 00 00 When set to 00 00 00 the recalling interval is set to the display update rate as when the data was stored Recalling ON OFF After having set the recalling interval select the recall menu once again The initial value is oFF on Recalling will start by pressing the ENTER key after selectin
74. terminator m indicates whether a header is added or not m 0 No header added 1 Header added Query H terminator Example H0 Description Parameter error 12 will occur if m is set to an illegal value HA HA Determines whether or not to turn ON the harmonic measurement function inquires about the current setting Syntax HA m terminator m indicates whether the harmonic measurement function or normal measurement function is set m 0 Normal measurement 1 Harmonic measurement Query HA terminator Example HA1 Description Parameter error 12 will occur if m is set to an illegal value When integration is in progress or being aborted harmonic measurement cannot be performed error 13 will occur Integration cannot be started when the harmonic measurement function is in progress error 16 will occur While recalling or storing is in progress execution error 19 will occur f you switch the harmonic measurement mode ON OFF using this command and query the measurement mode using the OD command immediately afterwards the measured data of the previous measurement mode may be output To retrieve the measured data in the new measurement mode a wait of approximately 2 seconds is required after issuing this command HD HD Determines whether or not output data display communications etc should be updated inquires about the current setting Syntax HD m terminator m indica
75. w 0 m V HH 123EX J Li ni n k A h jruwcrow ELEMENT am MW hz FILTER o o o o n n n js SCALING AVG LINE FREQ STORE RECALL HARMONICS KEY LOCK REMOTE L11P3W O3P3w O13P 4W 2 3V3A The explanation given in this section uses WT230 as an example For the differences between the WT210 and the WT230 see section 2 2 Operation Keys and Functions Element Display Operate the instrument by following the thick lines in the menu below Press the ENTER key to confirm a selection or setting Toleave the current menu in the middle of the operation press the key indicated in step 1 The confirmed settings up to that point are kept Setting the Output Item in case of Normal Measurement Select communication SETUP Select normal measurement SHIFT OUTPUT Set the output channel Display C ch d che ch J ch H ch 5 ch B ch 7 ch B ch g child chii chig chig Eh 4H End gt End of setting 9 Display C p Lenn l Pro nk dR JL rELRS ENTER 15 ENTER dks ENTER RE 4 V Set the output item Display C oc Ua boa ror go 7n za 7g tote Tua u 7a 7a ca zn rc Fe tg ee em Io a o 207 7 3 2 LY Select output format Dis
76. will be returned when the result are satisfactory If an abnormality is detected 1 will be returned Waits for the command following WAT until execution of the designated overlap command has been completed This command is not supported by this instrument WAI IM 760401 01E 14 43 H pyepueis 2661 c 88gr 3331 24 0 BurAjduio spuewwosy jo wa sAs z spueuiulo uoneoiunuiulo2 14 4 Status Report 14 4 1 Overview of the Status Report The figure below shows the status report which is read by a serial poll This is an extended version of the one specified in IEEE 488 2 1992 j 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Service request enable register pi A i amp OR A be i tg tg A MSS 7 6 ESBMAVEESEAV 1 0 Status byte Y RQS A Occurrence of a service request Output Error queue queue j 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Standard event enable register A P i OR Ld Ld A 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 standard event register i 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 32 1
77. 0 Extended event enable register E n i A le i t d A OR A i H A Le i A I 4 Ld A 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Extended event register A A 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 32 1 0 Transit filter A A 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Condition register 14 44 IM 760401 01E 14 4 Status Report Overview of Registers and Queues Name Function Writing Reading Status byte Serial poll RQS STB MSS Service request Masks status byte SRE SRE enable register Standard event Event in the ESR register instrument 1 Standard event Masks standard ESE ESE enable register event register Extended event Event in the register instrument 2 STATus EESR Extended event Masks extended enable register event register STATus EESE STATus EESE Condition Current instrument status STATus CONDition register Transition Extended event STATus FILTer STATus FILTer lt x gt filter occurrence conditions x Output queue Stores response message All executable queues to a query Stores error Nos and messages Error queue STATus ERRor Registers and Queues which Affect the Status Byte Registers which affect each bit of the status byte are shown below Standard event register Sets bit 5 ESB of status byte to 1 or 0 Output queue Sets bit 4 MAV of status byte to 1 or 0 Ext
78. 01E 10 1 uondo e ejietul gi d5 H 10 1 GP IB Interface Functions and Specifications GP IB Interface Specifications Electrical amp mechanical specifications conforms to IEEE st d 488 1978 Functional specifications refer to the table below Protocol Varies depending on the mode used See the previous page Code ISO ASCII code Address setting O to 30 listener and talker addresses or talk only can be selected using the front panel keys Remote mode clear remote mode can be cleared by pressing the LOCAL key on the front panel However this is not possible when Local Lockout has been set by the controller Function Subset name Description Source handshake SH1 full source handshake capability acceptor handshake AH1 full acceptor handshake capability talker T5 basic talker capability serial polling nontalker on MLA My Listen Address talk only capability listener L4 Basic listener capability nonlistener to MTA My Talk Address no listen only capability service request SR1 full service request capability remote local RL1 full remote local capability parallel poll PRO no parallel polling capability device clear DC1 full device clear capability device trigger DT1 full device trigger capability controller CO no controller function The connectors used in this function have protective covers When the covers are removed or when using connectors the voltage r
79. 1 Element 1 2 Element 2 for WT230 model 760503 only 3 Element 3 for WT230 only m4 indicates order of the harmonic m4 Integer between 1 and 50 or 30 m5 indicates setting value 0 000 m5 lt 9999 m6 indicates prefix m6 0 m E 3 1 E 0 2 k E 3 3 M E 6 OYH3 lt terminator gt OYH3 3 1 1 1 200 2 Parameter error 12 will occur if m is set to an illegal value No output is not related to any element order or setting value so in case the OYH command is set set these all to 1 asa dummy PF VTHD and ATHD are not related to any order so in case the OYH command is used set 1 as a dummy IM 760401 01E 13 11 g pyepueis 286 4 Z 88t 3331 eui 910 9q spuewwo Jo ue1s S spueuiuo uoneorunuulo 13 1 Commands PS PS Syntax Query Example Sets the input as the PLL source inquires about the current setting PS m terminator m indicates the input as the PLL source m 1 V1 2 Al 3 V2 for WT230 model 760503 only 4 A2 for WT230 model 760503 only 5 V3 for WT230 only 6 A3 for WT230 only PS lt terminator gt PS1 Description Parameter error 12 will occur if any illegal RA RA Syntax value is set While recalling or storing is in progress execution error 19 will occur Sets current range inquires about the current setting RA m terminator m indicates current range When the crest factor is set to 3
80. 16 6 Comparator Output CMP Option essen nennen 16 11 16 7 Remote Control Input Output Signal DA4 DA12 and CMP Options 16 11 16 8 GP IB Interface standard on C1 C1 option sssssseeeenen 16 12 16 9 Serial RS 232 C Interface Standard on C2 C2 Option sesessss 16 12 16 10 General Specifications sessssssssssseeeseeneeeneennennee nennen nnne enne nnn 16 13 16 11 Dimensional Drawings essseeeeneeenneennnenm mener nnne 16 15 Index xiv IM 760401 01E Startup Guide This guide covers an example of measuring the inverter efficiency and explains the setup procedure from wiring the circuit to performing measurements and computation For a detailed description of the setup procedure see the reference section indicated at the beginning of each setup item Page Wiring the CIFCUH o 6o eoe S 2 InstallingitheiWin230 e TEN ERE NR ERE DIET I E E E E E E EE S 3 Connecting the WT230 Power Supply cseccssetsseeesseeeseeeseneeeeeeeeeeeneneeseeeseeeeseneseeeeneee S 4 Turning ON the Power to the WT230 eeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeee enne nnne nenne nnne nennen S 4 Wiring the Circuit on the Primary Side of the Inverter eene S 5 Wiring a Single Phase Two Wire System Wiring the Circuit on the Secondary Side of the Inverter
81. 240 V Maximum rated current 10 A A sss ens GB Standard Power Cord complies with the CCC Part No A1064WD Maximum rated voltage 250 V Maximum rated current 10 A IM 760401 01E iii Checking the Contents of the Package Options Communication interface C1 GP IB interface One of the two is provided C2 Serial RS 232 C interface applies to the WT210 External sensor input function EX1 2 5 5 and 10 V range One of the two is provided EX2 50 100 and 200 mV range Harmonic measurement function HRM External I O function DA4 4 channel D A output applies to the WT210 One of the three is provided DA12 12 channel D A output applies to the WT230 CMP 4 channel comparator 4 channel D A output Ex Three phase three wire model GP IB interface UL CSA Standard power cord external sensor input for 50 100 and 200 mV range harmonic measurement function and 12 channel D A output 760502 C1 D EX2 HRM DA12 NO Instrument Number When contacting the dealer from which you purchased the instrument please give them the instrument number Standard Accessories The standard accessories below are supplied with the instrument Check that all contents are present and that they are undamaged Name Part No Q ty Description 1 Power cord See the 1 previous page 2 Power fuse A1347EF 1 250 V 1 A time lag attached to the fuse holder 3 24 pin connecto
82. 3 oS pi H Q o Til SO of C To A 480 1 Protruding from rack 20 460 EE e n elt PE rers qas n S a arro en 4 2 FII E Y See Ee ET oT Cc ol A wo X EIA rack mount N 482 6 1 Protruding from rack 20 460 1 e come U E 8 S A e UR N Y f o N c5 Protruding from rack 20 132 83 5 12 30 2 374 Unless other wise specified tolerance is 396 However tolerance is 0 3mm when below 10mm 16 16 IM 760401 01E Index Symbols ESCs Cristo eiiaestnhiee serium eri EE lt ESCoL lt ESCsR lt ESCssS SPSW indice inse nrc testet e cesi AR ra EE auda 3 12 488 2 MODS MR 11 1 488 2 mode ccccececcecteceeseeseneeteeseesensseessecsecssessessesenee 10 1 A ACCUIACY sssssssssssesseeeeeenene nennen nnne nnne nennen ET Mm m E active power accuracy Cel m crererrrercercr addressable mode eene adjusting adjusting the current range seeeeee 15 3 adjusting the D A output ww cece ccc eee eeeeeeeeeee 15 4 adjusting the voltage range 15 2 aliasing harmonic wi 7 3 ampere hour 6 1 6 7 AOU Tput group vcncce rti ir anaia ae 14 15 apparent POW triente entere 5 8
83. 3 Line 4 Line 5 Line 6 Data z number Terminator The data number will only be output in case of recall V1 data Terminator A1 data Terminator W1 data Terminator Frequency Display C Terminator END Terminator pata T inat The dat b ill only b tput i f I number erminator The data number will only be output in case of recall V1 data V3 data j SV data Terminator A1 data A3 data SA data Terminator W1 data W3 data SW data Terminator Frequency Display C Terminator END Terminator Data T inat The dat b ill only b tput i f I number erminator The data number will only be output in case of recall V1 data V2 data V3data j SV data Terminator A1 data A2 data A3 data y SA data Terminator W1 data 5 W2 data W3 data y SW data Terminator Frequency Display C Terminator END Terminator 10 7 uondo e ejieiul gi d5 H 10 4 Output Measured Computed Data Setup Parameters and Error Codes Default Output Format in case Integration Measurement WT210 760401 Data number Line 1 Terminator The data number will only be output in case of recall Line 2 W1 data Terminator Line3 Whidata Terminator Line 4 Ah1data Terminator Elapsed Line S Frequency integration time Terminator Line 6 END Termi
84. 3 8 8 E 3 o9 o9 o9 o9 E3 Ej 8 088 20 002 RO RR RR o9o8o8ogoge8o9998o2o9o8o9o998o8ogogoSo zn gm 2 Vent holes Front panel Handle Front Panel Rear Panel and Top View WT230 model 760502 760503 r 7 segment display r Function Unit Element display r Keys Section 2 2 TT Power switch Section 3 6 Vent holes WT230 model 760502 760503 r Current input terminal A Sections 3 7 to 3 8 r Voltage input terminal r GP IB or SERIAL connector Chapters 10 and 11 r External I O connector A Chapter 9 Sections 3 7 to 3 9 HE A eB Protective earth Input element 1 Input element 2 Input element 3 2 terminal A Page vi ce Power fuse Section 15 5 Section 3 9 Power connector A Section 3 5 External sensor input connector A WT230 model 760502 760503 Rear panel 24000 CERES 124040 680800 202090900090909 1000000000000000 009090909024 000000000000 505 10808000 20909090909 2000000000000 o o o o o o B o o o o o o t o d 20 o o E E E B B E E B 38 B B B B B B B B
85. 59 1 min 1000 hr to 9999 hr 59 min 59 s 1000 0 to 9999 5 10 min 10000 hr 10000 1hr For details on Wh Wht Ah Ah see page 6 3 For details related to the average active power during integration see section 4 12 The integrated value is determined and displayed by summing the value that is measured at every display update rate irrespective of the MAX hold function 6 8 IM 760401 01E 6 4 Precautions Regarding Use of Integrator Function Relation between s and the START STOP key When the HOLD key is pressed the display and communication output of the integrated results is being held while integration continues The relation between this hold function and the START STOP key is as follows Even when starting integration while the hold function is on the display and communication output will remain unchanged Only canceling the hold function or activating a trigger pressing the SHIFT key followed by the HOLD TRIG key will result in displaying or outputting the integrated results of the time of cancellation ON 4 HOLD OFF Displayed value AASS Dotted line shows integrated value Elapsed integration time i i START STOP RESET Even when stopping integration while the hold function is on the displayed integrated value will remain unchanged However as soon the hold function is turned off or a trigger is activated the integrated results of the time when inte
86. 79 5F 95 6F 111 7F 127 Universal Listener Talker Secondary Command Address Address Command GP IB code Example oca Hexadecimal Decimal ASCII character code 14 60 IM 760401 01E 14 11 Communication related Error Messages Error messages related to communications are given below When servicing is required contact your nearest YOKOGAWA representative Only error messages relating to the communication mode 488 2 are given here For other error messages refer to appendix 1 and section 15 4 Errors in communications commands 100 to 199 Code Message Action Reference 102 Syntax error Incorrect syntax Section 14 2 14 3 103 Invalid separator Insert a comma between data items to separate them 14 3 104 Data type error Refer to pages 14 7 14 8 and enter data using the correct 14 7 14 8 data format 108 Parameter not allowed Check the number of parameters 14 7 14 3 109 Missing parameter Enter the required number of parameters 14 7 14 3 111 Header separator error Insert a space between the header and the data to separate 14 4 them 112 Program mnemonic too long Check the mnemonic character string consisting of letters 14 3 and numbers 113 Undefined header Check the header 14 3 114 Header suffix out of range Check the header 14 3 120 Numeric data error Mantissa must be entered before the numeric value in lt NRf gt 14
87. 9 7 uonoung 1ndino u jeuje1x3 eo 9 3 D A Output Option Relation between the output item and the D A output voltage Frequency D A output Approx 7 5 V p O 5 0 V 2 5 V Db V Leo oe ke ea 0 5 Hz 10 Hz 1 kHz 100 kHz 1 Hz 100 Hz 10 kHz gt Displayed value Integrated value D A output 4 Approx 7 0 M p22 s2 552 en a sacs site aa sis sammie es 140 of rated value input 5 0 V Rated input to gt Time to rated integration time Other items D A output 4 Approx 7 5 V Hos Approx 7 0 V FUA 54 pese Displayed value Output 140 Approx 7 0 V 100 5 0V 140 100 i 0 OV m 100 5 0 V E 100 140 Displayed value 140 Approx 7 0 V ES peers 5 0V i aura Approx 7 0 V cU Approx 7 5 V e For PF and deg points in the range from 5 to 7 V and from 5 to 7 V are not output If there is an error the output will be about 7 5 V If the MATH setting is set to efficiency the output will be 5 V for 100 For Vp and Ap the output will be 5 V when the value is three times six times if the crest factor is set to 6 the range 9 8 IM 760401 01E 9 4 Comparator Function Option When the instrument is equipped with option CMP you can compare the measured computed and integrated values with previously set limits and these results can be output by contact
88. A 0 5 A 1 A 2 5 A 5 A and 10 A ranges Input resistance Approx 6 mQ 10 mQ max input inductance Approx 0 1 uH WT210 when the crest factor is set to 3 5 mA 10 mA 20 mA 50 mA 100 mA and 200 mA ranges when the crest factor is set to 6 2 5 mA 5 mA 10 mA 25 mA 50 mA and 100 mA ranges Input resistance Approx 500 mQ input inductance Approx 0 1 uH External sensor input When the crest factor is set to 3 2 5 V 5 V and 10 V ranges when the crest factor is set to 6 1 25 V 2 5 V and 5 V ranges Input resistance Approx 100 kQ When the crest factor is set to 3 50 mV 100 mV and 200 mV ranges when the crest factor is set to 6 25 mV 50 mV and 100 mV ranges Input resistance Approx 20 kQ Instantaneous maximum allowable input 1 period for 20 ms Voltage Peak value of 2 8 kV or RMS value of 2 0 kV whichever is less Current DCinput When the crest factor is set to 3 0 5 A 1 A 2 A 5 A 10 A and 20 A ranges when the crest factor is set to 6 0 25 A 0 5 A 1 A 2 5 A 5 A and 10 A ranges Peak value of 450 A or RMS value of 300 A whichever is less When the crest factor is set to 3 5 mA 10 mA 20 mA 50 mA 100 mA and 200 mA ranges when the crest factor is set to 6 2 5 mA 5 mA 10 mA 25 mA 50 mA and 100 mA ranges Peak value of 150 A or RMS value of 100 A whichever is less External sensor input Peak value less than or equal to 10 times the rated range Factory def
89. C T Display A 11 Display B 15 Display C 17 1 Eh i ENTER Hi ENTER gt iU HE ENTER E 3 ENTER 6 18 ch g 8 Ai 12 v sets the value 16 EFH ch 3 Pi M EFJ v ak tf v HELL 13 LY Jshifts digits rv ELE En t HAI j SHIFT gt Ex ETD HR I pr 14 moves the Herd SHIFT decimal point Are Ti Phi f Hh i 1 When you press the ENTER key at step 17 dEL i the output channel displayed at display C will HP change to the next channel i e from ch1 to ch2 API and so forth AREH 2 Depends on the model number Refer to the n ri DLL explanation for more details J Ph 1 AF Rh coy A B 19 V sets the A column type of limit E ni d gt ENTER 9 V moves to the B column End of setting SHIFT gt 12 10 v A selects from element 1 to 4 except HE H IM 760401 01E 9 13 uonoung 1ndino u jeuje1x3 f 9 6 Setting the Comparator Limit Values Option Setting the Comparator Limit Values in case of Harmonic Measurement Select the comparator function 1 Display C SETUP 2 Lann SHIFT OUTPUT i 5 i F Dut M Dl dH 3 Display C r L HH 9 ENTER ofr nn C55 n za rr us A 3 5
90. C It is followed by the average active power during integration if the function is specified in the computation settings see section 4 12 START 4 Holding the displayed value Press the HOLD key The HOLD indicator will light and the displayed values will be held HOLD 6 6 IM 760401 01E 6 3 Displaying Integrated Values Explanation Cancelling HOLD and Updating the Integration Continuing from step 4 press the HOLD key once more or press the SHIFT key followed by the HOLD TRIG key The HOLD indicator will extinguish and the displayed value will be updated rx HOLD TRIG Stopping Integration Press the STOP key The START indicator will extinguish and the STOP indicator will light The displayed values will be held STOP Resetting Integration Press the RESET key The STOP indicator will extinguish and the values on display A and C will be reset to 0 00 00 RESET Maximum Reading of the Display and Units Maximum reading Integrated value 99999 999999 only when the unit is MWh or MAh 99999 when displaying negative polarity Elapsed integration time 10000 Units Wh power integration watt hour value Ah current integration ampere hour value Prefix m k M Selecting the Display Function The following selections are available Wh displays both the positive and negative watt hour values Wht displays the positive w
91. CONFigure SCALing PT CT SFACtor Queries all settings related to scaling constants for voltage current power 14 21 CONFigure SCALing PT CT SFACtor ALL Sets the scaling constants for all elements of voltage current power 14 21 CONFigure SCALing PT CT SFACtor ELEMent x Sets the scaling values for each element of voltage current power 14 21 CONFigure SCALing STATe Sets queries the scaling function ON OFF 14 21 CONFigure SYNChronize Sets queries the measurement synchronization source 14 21 CONFigure VOLTage Queries all settings related to the voltage range 14 21 CONFigure VOLTage AUTO Sets queries the voltage auto range ON OFF 14 21 CONFigure VOLTage RANGe Sets queries the voltage range 14 21 CONFigure WIRing Sets queries the wiring method 14 22 IM 760401 01E 14 11 H pyepueis 2661 2 88r 3331 24 0 BuiAqjduio spuewwosy jo uejs S z spueuiulo uoneoiunuiulo2 14 3 Commands Command Description Page DISPlay Group DISPlay lt x gt Queries all the display settings 14 22 DISPlay lt x gt ELEMent Sets queries the element to be displayed 14 22 DISPlay lt x gt FUNCtion Sets queries the function to be displayed 14 23 DISPlay lt x gt MODE Sets queries the contents of the display 14 23 DISPlay lt x gt RESolution Sets queries the number of display digits 14 23 HARMonics Group HARMonics Queries all settings related to harmonic measurement 14 24 HARMonics DISPlay Querie
92. Cross ms interface N i iore rented teen ACC I Me Lead Lag Lx eres 1 Re See Stine eae resis annn eue ee ede deed EE a Detector T t Current input section i Frequency yid n i J i r Detector y E soj j r YT sena Zero Cross i 1 RS 232 C Detector 1 L So ee A aa M Uiaus Jeapeesusesaes sun ast rele emet option EEPROM Harmonies EY 1 RAM TN Option Option Comparator prse t imedbesdismrESMUNEmNEEE R o vo i Option In ion in lement 2 LA NT Didaci input duda e RE I Input section inputelement3 g E L put Secuon NINE pur Gemen y n yon WT210 s Current input section 1 C t i it ti urrent input section E Iso 1 Zero Cross Detector 1 Current Over Detector aaa IM 760401 01E 1 1 Aejdsig jJeu6iq pue m na Jeuonoun J ES 1 1 System Configuration and Block Diagram Signal Flow and Process The sections that make up the WT210 WT230 are VOLTAGE INPUT CURRENT INPUT DSP CPU display and interface In the voltage input circuit the input voltage is normalized by a voltage divider and operational amplifier then sent to the A D converter Shunt resistors form a close circuit at the current input circuit The voltage across shunt resistor is amplified and normalized by the operational amplifier and then input to the A D converter This method enables Switching of the current range without opening the current input cir
93. Depending on the integration timer this instrument will automatically decide the appropriate mode Cont Select this for the continuous integration mode Setting the Integration Timer Set the integration time The setting ranges from 0 00 00 0 hrs 00 min 00 s to 10000 00 00 10000 hrs 00 min 00 s The initial value is 0 00 00 0 00 00 When nor is selected on the integration menu the manual integration mode will become valid If Cont is selected an error code is displayed when integration is started and the integration is not performed s 0 00 01 to 10000 00 00 The time during which integration will be performed when in the standard or continuous integration mode The standard or continuous mode should be selected at the integration mode menu IM 760401 01E uone46o1u u 6 3 Displaying Integrated Values Procedure Display A CHECK RANGE MODE o E RANGE TAO S AUTOS s VOLTAGE CURRENT HOLD MODE MAX HOI TRIG o LI o UPDATE VOLTAGE CURRENT RMS VOLTAGE DC MAX HOLD MEAN 123r AF FUNCTION ELEMENT PF 1 232 deg runction ELEMEN Sr 3 5 7 3 START STOP Hz 1 2 3 FUNCTION ELEMENT BONCS MEMORY INTEG BA KEY LOCK OUTPU SHIFT O1P3w 3P3W O3P4w 2 3V3A The explanation given in this section uses WT230 as an example For the differences between the WT210 and the WT230 see section 2 2 Op
94. Frequency Filter This filter is inserted only into the frequency measurement circuit The cutoff frequency is 500 Hz Since the WT210 230 is making measurements in sync with the input signal the frequency of the input signal must be measured correctly Wiring System The input units for voltage or current are located on the rear panel of this instrument These units are called input elements The number of input elements depends on the model and the possible wiring systems are shown in the table below The wiring system indicates the circuit configuration for measuring voltage current and power The name of the system varies depending on the phase and number of electrical wires making up the circuit Model Number of Elements Wiring Systems Supported 760401 1 Single phase two wire 1P2W 760502 2 Single phase two wire 1P2W single phase three wire 1P3W three phase three wire 3P3W 760503 3 Single phase two wire 1P2W single phase three wire 1P3W three phase three wire 3P3W three phase four wire 3P4W three voltage three current 3V3A Display Functions Measured computed values are displayed on three red high intensity 7 segment LED displays You can view three values simultaneously You can select the display update rate 0 1 s to 5 s and the number of displayed digits 4 or 5 for voltage current and active power values Peak Measurement Function This function measures the peak values of the v
95. K where Dn the value at the n display Dn 1 the exponentially averaged value at the n 1 display Mn the measurement value at the nt display K attenuation constant Moving Averaging Lin Moving averaging is expressed by the following equation Dn Mnm 1 Mn m 2 Mn 2 Mn 1 Mn m where Dn the value at the n display Mn m 1 the measurement value at m 1 display before the n display Mn m 2 the measurement value at m 2 display before the n display Mn 2 the measurement value at two displays before the n display Mn 1 the measurement value at one display before the n display Mn the measurement value at the nt display m sample number 4 18 IM 760401 01E 4 7 Using the Averaging Function Setting the Averaging Sample Number Attenuation Constant The following selections are available The initial value is 8 8 16 32 or 64 Setting Averaging ON OFF Select the averaging menu once again after having set the averaging values The initial value is oFF on Selecting on and pressing the ENTER key will start averaging and the AVG indicator will light oFF Selecting oFF and pressing the ENTER key will stop averaging and the AVG indicator will extinguish Note The average coefficient is common to exponential average and moving average If you change the averaging process change the averaging coefficient also The averaging function that can be used during harmonic measurement
96. KEY LOCK The KEY LOCK indicator on the front panel illuminates From this point you can only operate the power switch or carry out the operation to turn OFF the key lock Turning OFF the key lock Carry out the following procedure while the KEY LOCK indicator is lit LOCAL Key lock OFF SHIFT KEYLOCK The KEY LOCK indicator on the front panel turns OFF All key operations are enabled Key Lock You can disable key lock the front panel key operation However the following switch and key operations are enabled even during key lock ON OFF of the power switch Operation to turn OFF key lock IM 760401 01E 12 5 3207 9y pue uonesueduio2 9A91 0JeZ sJejoeure1eg dnyes Burzijeniu Chapter 13 Communication Commands 1 System of Commands before the IEEE 488 2 Standard 13 1 Commands AA AA Sets the current auto range ON or OFF inquires about the current setting Syntax AA m terminator m indicates auto range ON OFF m 0 auto range OFF fixed range 1 auto range ON Query AA terminator Example AAO Description Parameter error 12 will occur if m is set to an illegal value Auto range is not allowed while integration is in progress execution error 13 will occur If the range is changed during auto range mode manual range mode will be validated instead of auto range mode f integration is started during auto range mode auto range mode will be invalidated A
97. MEASure HARMonics ITEM 14 29 MEASure HARMonics VALue 14 30 MEASure HARMonics we 14 29 MEASure HEADer 14 30 MEASure NORMal 14 30 MEASUIO s iios ERE E 14 29 MEASure NORMal BlNary eene 14 30 IM 760401 01E Index 5 un E
98. Pressing the ENTER key after selecing off will result in stopping of the harmonic measurement and the HARMONICS indicator will extinguish Note When the harmonic measurement function is turned ON the measurement mode will automatically change to RMS mode When the harmonic measurement function is turned OFF the measurement mode will stay the RMS mode When the harmonic measurement function is ON integration cannot be started And accordingly when the integration is in progress the harmonic measurement function cannot be started refer to page 6 10 7 6 IM 760401 01E 7 4 Setting the Harmonic Order and Displaying the Measured Harmonic Value CHECK RANGE MODE n o n n np RANGE UPDATE VOLTAGE CURRENT AMS VOLTAGE DC MAX HOLD GAUTO GAUTO o A VA VOLTAGE CURRENT HOLD e J 4 k A MODE MAX HOLD TRIG Li LU Y B V CAL a a INTEGRATOR A START STOP RESET Ww HARMONICS MEMORY INTEG SET C mV H 123r je a k A h eunerion evemenr LOCAL SETUP M W hz LI LI KEY LOCK OUTPUT LP3W Ll3P3W C n Im n n m n oO n SCALING AVG LINE FREQ STORE retusa LOCK Osp4w D33V3A The explanation given in this section uses WT230 as an example For the differences between the WT210 and the WT230 see section 2 2 Operation Keys and Functions Element Display Procedure The following operations assume that the harmonic measurement f
99. STOP MEMORY SETUP INTEGRATOR HOLD RESET INTEG SET a WIRING The explanation given in this section uses WT230 as an example For the differences between the WT210 and the WT230 see section 2 2 Operation Keys and Functions Element Display Operate the instrument by following the thick lines in the menu below Press the ENTER key to confirm a selection or setting Toleave the current menu in the middle of the operation press the key indicated in step 1 The confirmed settings up to that point are kept 1 SETUP Select the four arithmetical operation function Display C 2 L F L Loo FF Lt Y HHL f SERLE Ei n Fnirhb 3 Display C nH EH 9 ENTER 4 SYnl AIK EF Hi rE5a LEF H o r Ht E a ij LF H J DE LF Rd LF Ae LF AA REb5 Hh Hn h Alb Alb S A b RH Ul This is an example for the WT230 HH Ye 760503 The display varies depending on the number of installed RH ua elements B Au UM EFF WT230 only This is an example for the WT230 760503 The display varies depending on the number of installed elements 5 ENTER End of setting IM 760401 01E 4 29 eBueg 1ueujeunseo y pue suomnipuo 1ueujeunsee y Dunes le 4 12 Computing the Average Active Power during Integration Explanation Function Used to Compute the Avera
100. Standard power meter Recommended instrument Yokogawa WT2000 Adjusting Preparations Preparing this instrument 1 While pressing the SHIFT key turn ON the power switch adjustment mode Release the SHIFT key after the following sequence of events illumination of all LEDs turning OFF of all LEDs error 60 indication error 78 indication and then indication of the model rAnGE appears on display C Note Error codes 60 and 78 appear because all setup parameters are initialized when the instrument enters adjustment mode If you terminate adjustment mode turn OFF the power switch and turn the power back ON the WT210 230 starts with the setup parameters initialized 2 Select rAnGE and press the ENTER key Then let the instrument warm up for at least 30 minutes Press the or v key and the display will change to Ein in case of the external input option dA in case of the D A option or End The rAnGE mode is for adjustments of voltages or currents while the dA mode is for adjustments of the D A output This instrument has no need for adjustment of power Preparing the AC voltage current standard and DMM 3 Warm up the AC voltage current standard for at least an hour Warm up the DMM for at least an hour as necessary Operating Keys The keys to be used for carrying out adjustments are as follows ENTER Press this key to confirm every adjustment of each range SHIFT Aborts the adjustm
101. The filter is valid only for the PLL source e Ifthe amplitude of the input signal selected as the PLL source is smaller than the rated range value PLL synchronization may sometimes fail In this case it is suggested that a suitable measurement range be selected so that the input level exceeds 30 greater than or equal to 60 if the crest factor is set to 6 of the rated range value Setting the Computation Method of Harmonic Distortion The computation method of harmonic distortion can be selected from the following two In the following explanation a maximum of 50 analysis orders is assumed In case of a maximum less than 50 computation display will be performed up to that order iEC Computes the ratio of the rms value of the 2nd to 50th order component to that of the fundamental 1st order CSA Computes the ratio of the rms value of the 2nd to 50th order component to that of the rms value of the 1st to 50th component Computation Equation In case of iEC xe C In case of CSA iren eo C1 Fundamental component 1st order Ck Fundamental or harmonic component k Analysis order n Maximum order The maximum order depends on the fundamental frequency of the input set as the PLL source Refer to Chapter 16 for more details IM 760401 01E 7 5 uondo uonoun J 1ueureunseoj y 31uouueH I 7 3 Turning ON OFF the Harmonic Measurement Function Procedure Explanation CHECK RANGE
102. VOLTAGE CONFIGURE VOLTAGE RANGE 600 0E 00 AUTO 1 CONFigure VOLTage AUTO Function Syntax Example Sets the voltage auto range ON OFF queries the current setting CONFigure VOLTage AUTO Boolean CONFigure VOLTage AUTO CONFigure VOLTage AUTO ON CONFIGURE VOLTAGE AUTO gt CONFIGURE VOLTAGE AUTO 1 CONFigure VOLTage RANGe Function Syntax Sets the voltage range queries the current setting CONFigure VOLTage RANGe voltage CONFigure VOLTage RANGe When the crest factor is set to 3 lt voltage gt 15V to 600V 15 30 60 150 300 600V When the crest factor is set to 6 Voltage 7 5 V to 300 V 7 5 15 30 75 150 or 300 IM 760401 01E model 14 21 H pyepueis 2661 2 88r 3331 24 0 BuiAqjduio spuewwosy jo uejs S z spueuiulo uoneoiunuiulo2 14 3 Commands Example CONFIGURE VOLTAGE RANGE 600V CONFIGURE VOLTAGE RANGE CONFIGURE VOLTAGE RANGE 600 0E 00 14 3 5 DISPlay Group The commands in the DISPlay group are used to make settings relating to and inquiries about display This allows you to make the same settings and queries as when using the FUNCTION key or ELEMENT key on the front panel Function Syntax Example Description CONFigure WIRing Sets the wiring method queries the current setting CONFigure WIRing P1W2 P1w3 P3W3 P3W4 V3A3 CONFigure WIRing CONFIGURE WIRING P1W3 CONFIGURE WI
103. W he WY O1P3sw OsP3w a oO t a jas tj Im SCALING AVG LINE FREQ STORE RECALL HARMONICS KEY LOCK ETSPAW SW SA The explanation given in this section uses WT230 as an example For the differences between the WT210 and the WT230 see section 2 2 Operation Keys and Functions Element Display Procedure Operate the instrument by following the thick lines in the menu below Press the ENTER key to confirm a selection or setting Toleave the current menu in the middle of the operation press the key indicated in step 1 The confirmed settings up to that point are kept Storing Setup Parameters Select storage of setup parameters 1 Display C STOP 2 5tarE SHIFT MEMORY EFBL Select the file for storage FE EE 3 Display B 5 Vit BAL Sk gt ENTER i Ep Ped ENTER ij PaLrEL D EE me M ri Led f F LEM When select parameters are already stored to the file display C will show 5 RH E d When no data are stored yet display C will show E r E E Recalling Setup Parameters Select recalling of setup parameters 1 Display C STOP 2 5 tar E SHIFT MEMORY Eos cro A FELFL v oO ce Select the file for recalling Fort dE 3 Display B 5 ij FPnbrLL 9 ENTER a F LEI ENTER J End of settin F LEg Ing v Fr LEJ E When select parameters ar
104. WT210 Then press the CURRENT key again Connect the output terminal of the voltage standard either AC or DC to the voltage input terminal of this instrument and connect the current standard to the current input terminal Set the output voltage of the voltage standard to 600 V and output this voltage Verify that the measured voltage on the WT210 WT230 shows bars and changes to 600 V few seconds later Turn the output of the voltage standard OFF Set the output current of the current standard to 20 A and output this current Verify that the measured current on the WT210 WT230 shows bars and changes to 20 A few seconds later Turn the output of the current standard OFF 15 12 IM 760401 01E 15 3 In Case of Malfunctioning Check These Items First If the instrument does not operate properly even if the actions given in the table below are performed contact your nearest sales representative When contacting your representative inform the ROM version No which is displayed on display B on power up Symptom Items to check Section Nothing is displayed when the Is the power cord properly connected to the power connector of this 3 5 power is turned ON instrument and the AC outlet Is the input power voltage within the allowed range 3 5 e Has the fuse blown 15 5 Displayed data is odd sthere a possibility of noise 3 2 Are measurement leads connected correctly 3 3 to 3 9 Is t
105. Wire the Circuit under Measurement 3 15 3 10 Selecting the Wiring System Applies Only to the WT230 seen 3 19 Chapter 4 Setting Measurement Conditions and Measurement Range 4 1 Selecting the Measurement Mode sssesseeneneeneenen eene 4 1 4 2 Selecting the Measurement Synchronization Source ssssseeeee 4 3 4 3 Turning ON OFF the Input Filter enne 4 5 4 4 Selecting the Measurement Range When Using Direct Input esseeessss 4 7 4 5 Setting the Scaling Value When External PT CT is Used cccscceceseeeeeseeeessteeesseees 4 11 4 6 Selecting the Measurement Range and Setting the Scaling Constant when External Sensor is Used option ssessssssssseeeneeeneenenennen nennen nennen enne 4 14 4 7 Using the Averaging Function essent 4 17 4 8 Using the MAX Hold Function seseeeeneeeeeeennneee nennen 4 20 4 9 Computing the Efficiency Applies to WT230 Only see 4 21 4 10 Computing the Crest Factor ssessssseseeeeeeenenenee nennen nennen nnne neni 4 23 4 11 Performing Four Arithmetical Operation 4 25 IM 760101 01E xi Content Chapter 5 Chapter 6 Chapter 7 Chapter 8 Chapter 9 A A A A A 4 12 Computing the Average Active Power during Integration eseeeeeeee 4 29 4 13 Selectin
106. a place where the ambient temperature is 5 to 18 C or 28 to 40 C add the temperature coefficient to the accuracy as specified in chapter 16 When installing the instrument in a place where the ambient humidity is 30 or below take measures to prevent static electricity such as using an anti static mat Condensation may occur if the instrument is moved to another place where the ambient temperature is higher or if the temperature changes rapidly In this case let the instrument adjust to the new environment for at least an hour before using the instrument Desktop Place the instrument on a flat even surface as shown in the figure below WT210 model 760401 When using the handle for installation check that the handle is in one of the fixed positions To change the fixed position of the handle pull the handle outward along the rotational axis approximately 2 to 3 mm and slowly move the handle Fixed positions of the handle We recommend the positions 1 3 5 or 8 When using no 2 and 4 don t put any weight on the instrument Pullautalongidee roration axis approximately 2 to 3 mm and rotate the handle Rotation axis 3 2 IM 760401 01E 3 2 Installing the Instrument e WT230 model 760502 760503 Rack Mount To rack mount the instrument use the rack mount kit that is sold separately Rack Mount Kit Model Specifications Model Specifications
107. actual output Output example of setup parameters WT210 230 Setup Lists Rev 2 01 Model 760503 C2 EX2 HRM CMP 15 Vrms Auto 0 5 Arms Auto V Range A Range Ext Sensor Elem 1 50 00A Ext Sensor Elem 2 50 00A Items shown Ext Sensor Elem 3 50 00A Update Rate DispayA V Element Wiring method Display B A Element 1 Freuency filter Display c wW Element 1 Refer to the Line filter Update Rate 250me previous page for Hold ON OFF Wiring 1 Phase 3 Wire a description Freq Filter Off Scaling ON OFF Hug deb aeo Scaling Off I r PT Ratio Elem 1 21 000 VOLES Walle CT Ratio Elem 1 1 000 Current CT ratio Scaling Factor Elem 1 1 000 Power value PT Ratio Elem 2 1 000 CT Ratio Elem 2 1 000 Scaling Factor Elem 2 1 000 PT Ratio Elem 3 1 000 Averaging ON OFF CT Ratio Elem 3 1 000 T L Scaling Factor Elem 3 1 000 ype Averaging Off Coefficient Averaging Type Linear Crest factor Averaging Coefficient 8 Creset Factor ME Jntegration modo lt Integration timer Integrate Mode Manual A n Integrate Timer 00000 00 00 Rated integration time pated Time DA 00001 00 00 Storage ON OFF Store Off Interval Store Interval 00 00 00 Recall ON OFF Recall Off Interval Recall Interval 00 00 00 Sync Source A Sync source Max Hold Off MAX Hold d Resolution High Display digits s Source PLL V1 PLL source me Harmonics Off I Display A Order 01 Harmonics m
108. be applied to models 760502 and 760503 Source Load External sensor input connector EXT Q4 External sensor input connector EXT Input terminal Input terminal Element 1 Element 3 IM 760401 01E 3 17 sjueuiaunseo y Bues o40Jog le 3 9 Using an External Sensor to Wire the Circuit under Measurement Wiring example of a three phase three wire system 3P3W when using an external shunt Can be applied to models 760502 and 760503 Source Load ClO V External sensor External sensor c input connector c input connector e EXT S EXT Input terminal Input terminal Element 1 Element 3 Wiring example of a three phase four wire system 3P4W when using an external shunt Can be applied to model 760503 Source Load External sensor input connector c EXT External sensor input connector EXT input connector EXT Input terminal Input terminal Input terminal Element 1 Element 1 Element 3 Wiring example of a three voltage three current system 3V3A when using an external shunt Can be applied to model 760503 Source Load OE OM External sensor input connector input connector input connector c ex c xn c En Input terminal Input terminal
109. case of harmonic measurement m 1 Measured value of each component of voltage V 2 Measured value of each component of current A 3 Measured value of each component of active power W 6 power factor PF 16 harmonic distortion factor of voltage V THD 17 harmonic distortion factor of current A THD 19 Relative harmonic content of each voltage component V 20 Relative harmonic content of each current component A 21 Relative harmonic content of each active power component W 22 Phase angle between each voltage of the 2nd to 50 or 30 th order and the fundamental 1st order voltage 23 Phase angle between each current of the 2nd to 50 or 30 th order and the fundamental 1st order current Query DB terminator Example DB1 Description Parameter error 12 will occur if m is set to an illegal value DC DC Sets the function for display C inquires about the current setting Syntax DC m terminator m indicates one of the following functions in case of normal measurement m 1 voltage V 2 current A 3 power W 13 2 IM 760401 01E 13 1 Commands 7 Input voltage frequency V Hz 8 Input current frequency A Hz 9 watt hour Wh 10 ampere hour Ah 12 Peak voltage value Vpk 13 Peak current value Apk 14 Computation result MATH 24 positive watt hour Wh 25 negative watt hour Wh 26 positive ampere hour Ah 27 negative ampere
110. commands cannot be received Print Mode This mode is useful when harmonic analysis data are output to the external plotter or external printer For details refer to section 9 9 IM 760401 01E uondo e eyeju jeas B 11 1 Serial Interface Functions and Specifications Serial Interface Specifications Electrical characteristics conforms to EIA 232 RS 232 Connection point to point Communications full duplex Synchronization start stop system Baud rate 1200 2400 4800 9600 Start bit 1 bit Data length word length 7 or 8 bits Parity Even odd or no parity Stop bit 1 or 2 bits Hardware handshaking User can select whether CA CB CC and CD signals will always be True or be used for control Software handshaking User can select whether to control only transmission or both transmission and reception using X on and X off signals X on ASCII 11H X off ASCII 13H Receive buffer size 256 bytes A WARNING The connectors used in this function have protective covers When the covers are removed or when using connectors the voltage ratings across the measuring input and the ground become as follows Voltage between CURRENT VOLTAGE and CURRENT side input terminals and ground 400 Vrms max Voltage between VOLTAGE input terminal and ground 600 Vrms max Put the protective cover on the connector when this function is not used 11 2 IM 760401 01E 1
111. crest factor initialization of setup parameters and other items Sections 4 2 4 3 4 5 to 4 7 4 9 to 4 14 and 12 2 2 2 IM 760401 01E 2 2 Operation Keys and Functions Element Display Operation Keys and Function Displays on the WT230 model 760502 760503 r Operation status indicator Indicates data updating voltage current range check and measurement mode status Sections 2 1 4 1 and 4 13 VOLTAGE Displays the voltage range setup menu Section 4 4 CURRENT Displays the current range setup menu Section 4 4 VOLTAGE SHIFT MODE Switches the measurement mode Section 4 1 AUTO indicator Illuminates when range is set to AUTO ELEMENT Sets the input element to be displayed The indicator of the corresponding element illuminates Chapter 5 sections 6 3 and 7 4 FUNCTION Sets the function to be displayed Chapter 5 sections 6 3 and 7 4 Function Unit display CURRENT SHIFT MAX HOLD Turns ON OFF the MAX hold function When turned ON the MAX indicator illuminates Section 4 8 HOLD Holds the displayed value The HOLD indicator illuminates Press the key again to turn off the indicator and release the hold HOLD SHIFT TRIG Updates the displayed values in hold mode v Decreases the voltage or current range and sets functi
112. current value that is sampled exceeds approximately 300 approximately 600 if the crest factor is set to 6 of the rated range the range is increased the next time the measured value is updated Range down When the measured value of the voltage or current is less than or equal to 30 of the rated range and the peak value is less than or equal to approximately 30096 less than or equal to approximately 600 if the crest factor is set to 6 of the rated range of the next lower range the range is decreased the next time the measured value is updated Note When the range changes the PLL synchronization will be re established Therefore correct measurement values might not be obtained which might result in an unstable range If this is the case set the measurement range to a fixed range Display Update Rate In harmonic measurement you can select the display update rate from 0 25 s 0 5 s 1 s 2s and 5s For the setup procedure see section 4 13 Note The display update rate of 0 1 s appears as a possible selection when the harmonic measurement function is ON However it cannot be selected If the display update rate had been set to 0 1 s when the harmonic measurement function was OFF the rate is changed to 0 25 s when you turn ON the harmonic measurement function In this case the display update rate remains at 0 25 s even if you turn the harmonic measurement function back OFF Holding the Display When you use the display hold f
113. display A changes from ch1 to ch2 Reconnect the D A output terminal that is connected to the DMM to the terminal pin corresponding to channel 2 Make sure the output terminals do not come in contact with each other or the conductive parts of the terminal to come in contact with other objects 15 4 IM 760401 01E 15 1 Adjustments 9 Repeat steps 2 to 6 to adjust channel 2 10 Repeat steps 2 to 6 for all channels to be adjusted 11 Press The SHIFT key and display C will change to dA This completes the D A output adjustments When you press the RESET key instead of the SHIFT key the carried out adjustments will become invalid After Finishing Adjustments After having finished all adjustments turn the power OFF and ON again Communication Commands for Adjustment Command Description CAL1 Enters range adjustment mode CRO Switches to 15 V range in range adjustment mode CR1 Switches to 30 V range in range adjustment mode CR2 Switches to 60 V range in range adjustment mode CR3 Switches to 150 V range in range adjustment mode CR4 Switches to 100 mA range in range adjustment mode WT210only CR5 Switches to 500 mA range in range adjustment mode CR6 Switches to 1 A range in range adjustment mode CR7 Switches to 2 A range in range adjustment mode CR8 Switches to 5 A range in range adjustment mode CR11 Switches to 150 V range in range adjustment mode with the line filter turned ON CR12 Switches t
114. displayed on display A selects element to be displayed on display B selects element to be displayed on display C sets scaling ON OFF sets the scaling value sets averaging ON OFF selects exponential averaging or moving averaging sets attenuation constant or averaging number Crest factor CF m Crest Factor Sets the crest factor MAX hold KH m peaK Hold sets MAX hold MATH MT m MaThematics sets computing equation Number of displayed DS m Display reSolution sets the number of displayed digits digits Display range DR Display Range displays the current range Key lock KL m Key Lock sets key lock ON OFF Zero level ZC Zero Calibration executes zero level compensation compensation Integration IS Integrate Start starts integration IP Integrate stoP IR Integrate Reset IC m Integrate Continuous stops integration resets integration sets integration mode TM m1 m2 m3 integrate TiMer sets integration preset time Data storage SO Store On starts storage SR m1 m2 m3 Store inteRval sets storage interval Data recalling RO m Recall On starts recalling RR m1 m2 m3 recall inteRval sets recalling interval Setup parameters SL m panel Setting Load SS m panel Setting Save RC Reset Command recalling setup parameters storing setup parameters initialize setup parameters Communication CM m Communication coMmand commands OD Output Data sets command group to be used requests ou
115. error x 0 5 for the range of 110 to 130 of the rated range Lower limit of measurement frequency Display update rate 0 1s 0 25s 05s 1s 2s 5s Lower limit of measurement frequency 25Hz 10Hz 5Hz 25Hz 1 5Hz 0 5Hz Effect when the line filter 45 to 66 Hz Add 0 2 of reading Less than 45 Hz Add 0 5 of reading is turned ON Temperature coefficient Add 0 03 of reading C in the range 5 to 18 C or 28 to 40 C One year accuracy Add reading error of the accuracy at 3 months after calibration x 0 5 to the accuracy at 3 months Accuracy 12 months after calibration after calibration Accuracy when the crest Accuracy obtained by doubling the measurement range error for the accuracy when the crest factor factor is set to 6 is set to 3 IM 760401 01E 16 3 a suoneoyioeds 16 2 Accuracy Active Power Accuracy Item Specifications Accuracy Requirements Same as the conditions for voltage and current Accuracy 3 months after calibration Frequency Accuracy The accuracy shown below is the sum of reading and range errors DC 0 3 of reading 0 2 of range 0 5 Hz lt f lt 45 Hz 0 3 of reading 0 2 of range 45 Hz lt f lt 66 Hz 66 Hz f lt 1 kHz 0 2 of reading 0 2 of range 1 kHz lt f 10 kHz 0 1 of reading 0 3 96 of range 0 067 x f 1 of reading 10 kHz f 100 kHz x 0 5 96 of reading 0 5 of range 0 09 x f 10
116. from the following DA4 4 channels DA12 12 channels CMP 4 channels Setting the output function corresponds to column A in the procedure The output function can be set to any of the following V voltage A current P active power VAr reactive power VA apparent power PF power factor VFrq voltage frequency AFrq current frequency Ph total Watt hour Wh Ah total Ampere hour dEG phase angle VP peak value of voltage AP peak value of current MATH computation Ph positive watt hour value Wh Ph negative watt hour value Wh Ah positive ampere hour value Ah negative ampere hour value D A output 0 V no further elements can be set 1 If either one of the display function V Hz or A Hz is turned on the frequency of the corresponding function is output If both display functions are OFF the voltage frequency of the element assigned to display C that was illuminated last when display function V Hz or A Hz was illuminated is output 2 For details concerning the positive value of the ampere hour refer to page 6 3 Setting the element corresponds to colum B in the procedure WT210 760401 no such element setting available WT230 760502 element can be selected from 1 3 or 4 WT230 760503 element can be selected from 1 2 3 or 4 The element number 4 represents 9 6 IM 760401 01E 9 3 D A Output Option Setting the rated in
117. gt A a 29 A A FILTer I Space c FALL Ws BOTH S s lt Space gt I C OFF D NRf C STATus STATus EESR Function Queries all settings related to the status of Function Queries the contents of the extended event communication register and clears it Syntax STATus Syntax STATus EESR Example STATUS gt STATUS EESE 0 Example STATUS EESR gt 1 FILTER1 NEVER FILTER2 NEVER Description Refer to Section 14 4 for details on the FILTER3 NEVER FILTER4 NEVER extended event register FILTER5 NEVER FILTER6 NEVER STATus ERRor FILTER7 NEVER FILTER8 NEVER i Function Queries the occurred error code and message FILTER9 NEVER FILTER10 NEVER Syntax STATus ERRor FILTER11 NEVER FILTER12 NEVER Example STATUS ERROR FILTER13 NEVER FILTER14 NEVER 113 Undefined header FILTER15 NEVER FILTER16 NEVER OMESSAGE 1 STATus FILTer x ar Function he transit filter ries th rren ing STATus CONDition unctio Sets the transit filter queries the current setting F ee Syntax STATus FILTer lt x gt RISE FALL BOTH Function Queries the contents of the condition filter d 1 dcn NEVer Syntax STATus CONDition STATus FILTer lt x gt Example STATUS CONDITION gt 16 a lt x gt 1 to 16 Description Refer to 14 4 for details on the condition filter Example STATUS FILTER2 RIS
118. harmonic eese 7 2 l IEEE 488 2 1992 14 1 immunity 16 14 indiCatOt isis 3 2 5 tie tein ode XE eroe 2 2 2 8 influence from common mode voltage 16 2 initial menu eee initial settings initialization initializing setup parameters eeeeeeesse 12 8 INPUTTING SS e tec tet ne eee t nente input functions input impedance eee nnne 16 1 input terminal connection to esseseeeseeeee 3 6 installation condition esee 3 2 installation position 3 2 instantaneous maximum allowable input 1 period 16 1 instantaneous maximum allowable input 3 5 instantaneous maximum allowable input for 1 s 16 2 instrument number essen iv INTEGrate GOUD i anaa iniesta 14 25 integrated value 6 7 integration 6 1 integration busy 10 4 integration end eet e e tenere 10 4 integration hold ssssee e 6 1 integration methods 6 2 integration mode integration modes i integration OVEM 1er tee tree epit na nna enne integration reset essen integration timer 3 integrator function sessseeeeeeennenen interface messages eeeeeeeeeenneenennennne 10 3 internal
119. in section 16 3 Functions A D converter Simultaneous conversion of voltage and current inputs Resolution 16 bits Maximum conversion rate Approx 20 us approx 51 kHz 16 2 IM 760401 01E 16 2 Accuracy Voltage and Current Accuracy Item Specifications Accuracy Requirements Temperature 23 5 C Humidity 30 to 7596 RH Power factor 1 Crest factor 3 Input waveform Sine wave Common mode voltage 0 V Scaling function OFF Number of displayed digits 5 digits Frequency filter Turn ON to measure voltage or current of 200 Hz or less After warm up time has passed After wiring is complete and zero level compensation or measurement range is changed Accuracy 3 months after calibration Frequency Accuracy The accuracy shown below is the sum of reading and range errors DC 0 2 of reading 0 2 of range 0 5 Hz lt f lt 45 Hz 0 1 of reading 0 2 of range 45 Hz lt f lt 66 Hz 0 1 of reading 0 1 of range 66 Hz f lt 1 kHz 0 1 of reading 0 2 of range 1 kHz f lt 10 kHz 0 07 x f of reading 0 3 96 of range 10 kHz lt f lt 100 kHz 0 5 of reading 0 5 of range 0 04 x f 10 of reading The unit of f in the read error equation is kHz Add x10 uA to the DC accuracy of current Effective input range 1 to 13096 with respect to the rated range of voltage or current Except add the reading
120. indicates element m 1 Element 1 2 Element 2 for WT230 model 760503 only 3 Element 3 for WT230 only 4 X for WT230 only m4 indicates setting value 0 000 m4 lt 9999 m5 indicates prefix m5 0 m E 3 1 E 0 2 k E 3 3 M E 6 OY1 terminator 0Y1 1 1 600 0 1 Description Parameter error 12 will occur if m is set to an illegal value No output and computation result have no relation to the element but when using them with the OY command set m3 1 OYH OYH Sets the relay output items in case of Syntax harmonic measurement inquires about the current setting Up to four items can be set OYH ml1 m2 m3 m4 m5 m6 terminator ml indicates the output relay channel Query Example Description m2 indicates the output item number m2 0 no output 1 Voltage V 2 Current A 3 Power W 6 Power factor PF 16 harmonic distortion factor of voltage V THD 17 harmonic distortion factor of current A THD 19 Relative harmonic content of each voltage component V 20 Relative harmonic content of each current component A 21 Relative harmonic content of each active power component W 22 Phase angle between each voltage of the 2nd to 50 or 30 th order and the fundamental 1st order voltage V deg 23 Phase angle between each current of the 2nd to 50 or 30 th order and the fundamental 1st order current A deg m3 indicates element m
121. initial setting is A A Priority is placed in detecting the current signal period to be used as the synchronization source The current signal of each element is used as the synchronization source for the respective elements If the period of the current signal cannot be detected the voltage signal is made the synchronization source e V Priority is placed in detecting the voltage signal period to be used as the synchronization source The voltage signal of each element is used as the synchronization source for the respective elements If the period of the voltage signal cannot be detected the current signal is made the synchronization source oFF Measurement is not made by synchronizing to the voltage or current signal but the sampled data over the entire period of the display update rate is averaged Note Select an input signal with stable input level and frequency with little distortion for the synchronization source As a guideline select a signal whose frequency can be stably measured For example if the object under test is a switching power supply and the distortion in the voltage waveform is less than that of the current waveform set the synchronization source to V Voltage waveform gt p ae For example if the object under test is an inverter and the distortion in the current waveform is less than that of the voltage waveform set the synchronization source to A Voltage waveform A W mnn HIR YW
122. installed Measurement is possible only for the single phase two wire system e WT230 model 760502 The wiring system switches in the following order each time the WIRING key is pressed Two input elements Element 1 and Element 3 are installed NE 3P4W In case of a measurement circuit of single phase two wire system and having selected either element 1 or 3 selecting any of the above mentioned wring methods will result in correct measurement computation However the measurement computation results in c33V3A 1P3W Single phase two wire system 3P3W Three phase three wire system case element X has been selected lose the physical meaning WT230 model 760503 The wiring system switches in the following order each time the WIRING key is pressed Three input elements Element 1 Element 2 and Element 3 are installed c1P3W c33P3W c33P4AW c 3V3A Ld In case of a measurement circuit of single phase two wire system and having selected either element 1 or 3 selecting any of the above mentioned wring methods will result in correct measurement computation However the measurement computation results in 1P3W 3P3W 3P4W 3V3A Single phase two wire system Three phase three wire system Three phase four wire system Three voltage three current system case element X has been selected lose the physical meaning Note Select the wiring system to match the circuit under measur
123. instrument They differ in the format of their program headers They are Common command header Compound header Common Command Header Commands defined in IEEE 488 2 1992 are called common commands The header format of a common command is shown below An asterisk must always be attached to the beginning of a command lt Mnemonic gt pus ud An example of a common command CLS Compound Header Commands designed to be used only with this instrument are classified and arranged in a hierarchy according to their function The format of a compound header is illustrated below A colon must be used when specifying a lower level header lt Mnemonic gt An example of a compound header CONFIGURE MODE RMS Note A mnemonic is a character string made up of alphanumeric characters Consecutive Commands Command Group A command group is a group of commands which have the same compound header A command group may contain sub groups Example Commands relating to integration INTEGRATE INTEGRATE MODE INTEGRATE TIMer INTEGRATE STARt INTEGRATE STOP INTEGRATE RESet IM 760401 01E 14 5 H pyepueis 2661 2 88r 3331 24 0 BurAjduio spuewwosy jo wa sAs z spueuiulo uoneoiunuiulo2 14 2 Program Format When Consecutive Commands are in the Same Group This instrument stores the hierarchical level of the command which is currently being executed and performs analysis
124. instrument this act is dangerous When connecting measurement cables from an external current sensor to the current sensor input connector remove the cables connected to the current input terminals In addition when the voltage of the circuit under measurement is being applied to the current sensor input terminal do not touch the current input terminals Since these terminals are electrically connected inside the instrument this act is dangerous The terminal is a binding post The screws used on the terminal binding post are M6 screws Either wind the wire around the screw or pass the crimp on lugs through the screw axis then tighten firmly by holding the terminal knob When doing so make sure that no foreign objects are present in the contacts between the current input terminal and crimp on lugs Periodically check whether the current input terminal knob is loose and whether any foreign objects are present in the contacts between the current input terminal and crimp on lugs Unit mm Note On the WT230 model 760502 760503 you must set the wiring system using the WIRING key after wiring the circuit For the procedure see section 3 10 Selecting the Wiring System When measuring large currents or voltages or currents that contain high frequency components take special care in dealing with mutual interference and noise when wiring Keep the measurement cables as short as possible to minimize the loss between the circuit un
125. instrument is approximately 2 MQ If the input is 600 V iy is approximately 0 3 mA 600 V 2 MQ If the load current iL is 300 mA or more load resistance is 200 Q or less then the effect of iy on the measurement is 0 196 0 3 mA 300 mA or less If the input is 600 V and 3 A the effect on the measurement accuracy is 0 0196 0 3 mA 3 A Source Load Input terminal Element FIL Blouse pepe V VOLTAGE terminal WT210 WT230 C CURRENT terminal As a reference the following figure shows the relationship between the voltage and current that cause 0 1 or 0 01 effect on the measurement accuracy 0 1 effect 0 01 effect Measured 600 ra voltage V 500 400 300 200 100 Effect decreases 1 1 2 3 4 5 0 34 Measured current A of 1 When the Measurement Current Is Relatively Small Wire so that the current measurement circuit is connected to the load side In this case the voltage measurement circuit measures the sum of the load voltage eL and voltage drop ec across the current measurement circuit ec is the amount of error in this case For example WT230 s input resistance of the current measurement circuit is approximately 6 mQ If the load resistance is 600 Q the effect on the measurement accuracy is approximately 0 001 6 m 2 600 Q9 Source T NL Load IM 760401 01E sjueuiaunseo y Bues o40Jog le 3 5 Con
126. is exponential averaging The attenuation constant is fixed to 8 Therefore the setup procedure explained in this section is valid only during normal measurement The averaging function turns OFF when integration is started It does not turn back ON even if integration is stopped and reset IM 760401 01E 4 19 eBueg 1ueujeunseo y pue suomnipuo 1ueujeunseoe y Dunes le 4 8 Using the MAX Hold Function Procedure Explanation CHECK RANGE MODE o o o o o o o RANGE UPDATE VOLTAGE CURRENT RMS VOLTAGE DC AX HOLD YY GauToO GAUTO o MEAN E vaji 2 3 x begire MODI var MAX HOLD TRIG FUNCTION ELEMENT 2 TIME Vv ENTER SO D31P3W 0 3P3Ww ug m g g g g g g g O3P4w D33V3A PF 12 3E gt CAL a a INTEGRATOR deg runcrion ELEMENT a START STOP RESET fo HARMONICS MEMORY REMOTE H 1 23X2 h leuncrion ELEMENT LOCAL j SET h LL CJ KEY LOCK OUTPUNR SHIFT I A Sr 3sy 5 7 3 5 3 Ser lt ferc lt jJer lt SCALING AVG LINE FREQ STORE RECALL HARMONICS KEY LOCK The explanation given in this section uses WT230 as an example For the differences between the WT210 and the WT230 see section 2 2 Operation Keys and Functions Element Display CURRENT OFF CURRENT OFF SHIFT MAX HOLD ste SHIFT MAX HOLD l MAX HOLD MAX HOLD MAX Hold Function The
127. lt NRf gt 1 to 4 channel Example RELAY DISPLAY 1 RELAY DISPLAY RELAY DISPLAY 1 RELay HCHannel lt x gt Function Queries all settings related to relay output items in case of harmonic measurement Syntax RELay HCHannel lt x gt lt x gt 1 to 4 Example RELAY HCHANNEL1 gt RELAY HCHANNEL1 FUNCTION V 1 1 THRESHOLD 600 0E 00 IM 760401 01E 14 37 pyepueis 2661 c 88r 3331 24 0 HulAj dwioy spuewwosy jo wa sAs z spueuiulo uoneoiunuiulo2 14 3 Commands RELay HCHannel lt x gt FUNCtion Function Syntax Example Description Sets the function of the relay output item in case of harmonic measurement queries the current setting RELay HCHannel x FUNCtion harmonic measurement function NRf ELEMent lt 1 3 gt NRf ORDer lt 1 50 gt OFF lt harmonic measurement function gt VTHD V VCON ATHD A ACON PF W WCON VDEG ADEG RELAY HCHANNEL1 FUNCTION V 1 1 RELAY HCHANNEL1 gt RELAY HCHANNEL1 FUNCTION V 1 1 RELAY HCHANNEL2 RELAY HCHANNEL2 FUNCTION OFF RELAY HCHANNEL4 gt RELAY HCHANNEL4 FUNCTION PF 1 The order setting will be ignored in case the harmonic measurement function is set to VTHD ATHD or PF and might therefore be omitted Evenif V A or W has been selected the rms value of the 1st to 50th order does not become the corresponding relay output item Also even if VDEG or ADEG has been selected the phase angle betwe
128. make measurements Turn ON the power to the circuit under measurement Operate the inverter to rotate the motor IM 760401 01E S 11 0 eh S E c 9 s Q 0 Displaying Voltage Current and Active Power For details see section 5 1 5 After selecting the measurement range voltage and current ranges select the measured items to be displayed in each display Displaying the Volt the Pri Side of the Invert Display A Carry out the following procedure to display the voltage of the primary side of the inverter on display A Function indicator Element indicator RANGE o AUTO o AUTO o V V 12 3E peur CURRENT HOLD Lit yu Ex glengler a ie li CAL INTEGRATOR a deg ruwcrioN ELEMENT START STOP RESET HARMONICS MEMORY INTEG SET a A W 96 V Hz 412 3x gr A h Ww FUNCTION ELEMENT LOCAL SETUP ht 1 LJ KEY LOCK OUTPUT SHIFT Orsw O 3P3W O 3PAW O 3V3A 1 Press 7T of display A to select function V Each time T77 is pressed the function indicator character of display A illuminates in the order shown below To show the measured voltage on display A we illuminate function V Display A FUNCTION FUNCTION FUNCTION FUNCTION FUNCTION FUNCTION The decimal point position moves so that the measured value can be displaye
129. not allow assignment to an address other than 0 to 30 3 Reaction when the user initializes address settings Change of the current address is acknowledged when a new address is set using the LOCAL key menu see page 10 11 The newly set address is valid until another new address is set 4 Device setup at power ON Commands which can be used at power ON Basically the previous settings i e the settings which were valid when power was turned OFF are valid All commands are available at power ON 5 Message transmission options a Input buffer size and operation The input buffer s capacity is 1024 bytes b Types of queries which return multiple response messages Refer to the examples of each command in section 14 3 c Types of queries which generate response data during analysis of the syntax Every query generates response data when analysis of the syntax is performed d Types of queries which generate response data during reception No query generates response data when it is received by the controller e Types of commands which have pairs of parameters No such commands 6 List of function elements which configure commands used for the device All those which are included in elements of composite command program headers Refer to section 14 2 or 14 3 7 Buffer size which affects transmission of block data During block data transmission the output queue is expanded according to the size 8 List of program data elements which can be used in equations a
130. on the assumption that the next command to be sent will also belong to the same level Therefore it is possible to omit the header if the commands belong to the same group Example DISPLAY1 FUNCTION V ELEMENT 1 lt PMT gt When Consecutive Commands are in Different Groups A colon must be included before the header of a command if the command does not belong to the same group as the preceding command Example DISPLAY1 FUNCTION V SAMPLE HOLD ON lt PMT gt In Case of Consecutive Common Commands Common commands defined in IEEE 488 2 1992 are independent of hierarchical level Thus it is not necessary to add a colon before a common command Example DISPLAY1 FUNCTION V CLS ELEMENT 1 lt PMT gt When Separating Commands by lt PMT gt If a terminator is used to separate two commands each command is a separate message Therefore the common header must be typed in for each command even when commands of the same command group are being sent Example DISPLAY1 FUNCTION V lt PMT gt DISPLAY1 ELEMENT 1 lt PMT gt Upper level Query An upper level query is a compound header to which a question mark is appended Execution of an upper level query allows all settings of one group to be output at once Some query groups comprising more than three hierarchical levels can output all their lower level settings Example INTEGRATE lt PMT gt gt INTEGRATE MODE NORMAL TIMER 0 0 0 lt RMT gt In reply to a query a response c
131. output as data Current value Output voltage of the external sensor x Scaling constant Measurement range value for the external sensor The current value is used to determine the active power reactive power and apparent power to be displayed or output as data The scaling function explained here is completely different from the PT CT scaling function explained in the previous section IM 760401 01E 4 15 eBueg 1ueujeunseo y pue SUOI IPUOD 1ueujeunsee y Dunes le 4 6 Selecting the Measurement Range and Setting the Scaling Constant when External Sensor is Used option Selecting the Setting Format of the Scaling Constant Yoy can select the setting format on the WT230 The following two setting formats are available The initial value is ALL A ALL Select this when the same scaling constant should be applied to all elements together EACH Select this when the scaling constant should only be applied to each element seperately Setting the Scaling Constant The procedure to set the scaling constant depends on the setting format previous setting The setting ranges from 0 001 to 9999 The initial value is 50 00 In case of the WT210 the scaling constant is set at display C WhenALL is selected The scaling constant set at display C will be applied to all elements together When EACH is selected The scaling constant set at display A will be applied to element 1 only The scaling constant set at dis
132. range of 1 s to 99 hr 59 min 59 s Setup information Stores Recalls four patterns of setup information 16 10 IM 760401 01E 16 4 External Sensor Input EX1 and EX2 options Item Specifications Allows input of voltage output type current sensor signal For detailed input specifications see section 16 1 Input Measurement range of the EX1 option When the crest factor is set to 3 2 5 V 5 V and 10 V When the crest factor is set to 6 1 25 V 2 5 V and 5 V Measurement range of the EX2 option When the crest factor is set to 3 50 mV 100 mV and 200 mV When the crest factor is set to 6 25 mV 50 mV and 100 mV 16 5 D A Output DA4 DA12 and CMP Options Item Specifications Output voltage x5 V FS approx 7 5 V maximum against each rated value For the relationship between the output items and output voltage D A output voltage see page 9 8 Output current 1 mA Number of output channels 4 outputs for products with the DA4 or CMP option 12 outputs for products with the DA12 option Output items Set for each channel Accuracy accuracy of each measurement item 0 2 of FS Update rate Same as the display update rate Temperature coefficient 0 05 C of FS 16 6 Comparator Output CMP Option Item Specifications Comparator mode Select single mode or dual mode Output type Relay contact output contact structure 1C contact Nu
133. range of self test using TsT Refer to section 14 3 15 Common Command Group 21 Structure of extended return status Refer to section 14 4 22 To find out whether each command is performed in parallel or sequentially Refer to section 14 2 6 Synchronization with the Controller or Section 14 3 23 Functions performed until a message indicating completion of the command is displayed Refer to the function description of each command in Section 14 3 and to the corresponding chapters 14 2 IM 760401 01E 14 2 Program Format 14 2 1 Symbols Used in Syntax Descriptions Symbols which are used in the syntax descriptions in Section 14 3 are shown below These symbols are referred to as BNF notation Backus Naur Form For detailed information refer to pages 14 7 to 14 8 Symbol Description Example Example lt gt Defined value ELEMENT lt x gt lt x gt 1 to 3 ELEMENT3 0 One of the options in MODE RMS VMEan DC MODE RMS is selected Exclusive OR MODE RMS VMEan DC MODE RMS Abbreviated SCALing STATe lt Boolean gt may be repeated 14 2 2 Messages Blocks of message data are transferred between the controller and this instrument during communications Messages sent from the controller to this instrument are called program messages and messages sent back from this instrument to the controller are called response messages If a program message contains a query command i e a command whi
134. standard event register which affects the bits in the status byte are cleared As a result the corresponding bits in the status byte are cleared except bit 4 MAV since the output queue cannot be emptied by the CLS command However the output queue will also be cleared if the CLS command is received just after a program message terminator 14 4 3 Standard Event Register Overview of the Standard Event Register 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 PON URQ CME EXE DDE QYE RQC OPC Bit 7 PON Power ON Bit 7 PON Power ON Set to 1 when power is turned ON Bit 6 URQ User Request Not used always o Bit 5 CME Command Error Set to 1 when the command syntax is incorrect Examples Incorrectly spelled command name 9 used in octal data Bit 4 EXE Execution Error Set to 1 when the command syntax is correct but the command cannot be executed in the current state Examples Parameters are outside the setting range an attempt is made to make a hard copy during acquisition Bit 3 DDE Device Dependent Error Set to 1 when execution of the command is not possible due to an internal problem in the instrument that is not a command error or an execution error Bit 2 QYE Query Error Set to 1 if the output queue is empty or if the data is missing even after a query has been sent Examples No response data data is lost due to an overflow in the output queue Bit 1 RQC
135. sts 0 Then GoTo GPIBError End If msg FILTER OFF term Frequency Filter off sts ilwrt Dev msg Len msg If sts 0 Then GoTo GPIBError End If msg LFILTER OFF term Line Filter off sts ilwrt Dev msg Len msg If sts 0 Then GoTo GPIBError End If msg SCALING OFF AVERAGING OFF term Scaling amp Averaging off sts ilwrt Dev msg Len msg If sts lt 0 Then GoTo GPIBError End If Set the measurement range msg VOLTAGE RANGE 150V term Voltage range 150V sts ilwrt Dev msg Len msg If sts 0 Then GoTo GPIBError End If msg CURRENT RANGE 5A term Current range 5A sts ilwrt Dev msg Len msg If sts 0 Then GoTo GPIBError End If For measure the voltage frequency of elementl set function and element of displayC msg DISPLAY3 FUNCTION VHZ ELEMENT 1 term sts ilwrt Dev msg Len msg If sts 0 Then GoTo GPIBError End If 14 54 IM 760401 01E 14 8 Sample Program Output of Normal Measurement Data Set the communication output items l V A W gt on others gt off msg MEASURE ITEM PRESET NORMAL term sts ilwrt Dev msg Len msg If sts 0 Then GoTo GPIBError End If 2 Elementl VHz gt on msg MEASURE ITEM VHZ ELEMENT1 ON term sts ilwrt Dev msg Len msg If sts 0 Then GoTo GPIBError End If Set the transition filter used to detect the completion of the data updating msg STATUS FILTER1 FALL
136. the current setting Syntax DISPlay lt x gt FUNCtion lt display function gt DISPlay lt x gt FUNCtion lt x gt 1 to 3 1 Display A 2 Display B 3 Display C In case of normal measurement display function V A W VA VAR PF DEGRee VHZ AHZ WH WHP WHM AH AHP AHM MATH VPK APK TIME In case of harmonic measurement display function gt v A W PF VHZ AHzZ VTHD ATHD VCON ACON WCON VDEG ADEG ORDer Example DISPLAY1 FUNCTION V DISPLAY1 FUNCTION gt DISPLAY1 FUNCTION V Description For the meanings of the symbols of functions see Note on page 14 14 DISPlay lt x gt MODE Function Sets the contents of the display queries the current setting Syntax DISPlay lt x gt MODE VALue RANGe ESCaling DISPlay lt x gt MODE lt x gt 1 to 3 1 Display A 2 Display B 3 Display C VALue displays measurement data RANGe displays the present range of voltage and current or the scaling values of the external sensor of element 1 ESCaling displays the scaling values of the current external sensor Example DISPLAY1 MODE VALUE DISPLAY1 MODE gt DISPLAY1 MODE VALUE Description x will be ignored The contents of all the displays A to C will be received DISPlay lt x gt RESolution Function Syntax Example Description Sets the number of displayed digits queries the current setting DISPlay lt x gt RESolution HIGH Low DISPlay lt x gt RESolution lt x gt 1 to 3 1
137. the error queue can be read using the STATus ERRor query As with the output queue messages are read oldest first newest last refer to the previous page If the error queue becomes full the final message will be replaced by message 350 Queue overflow The error queue is emptied in the following cases in addition to when read out is performed When the CLS command is received When power is turned ON again To see whether the error queue is empty or not check bit 2 EAV of the status byte 14 48 IM 760401 01E 14 5 Before Programming Environment Model IBM compatible PC Language Visual Basic Ver5 0 Professional Edition or later GP IB board AT GPIB TNT IEEE 488 2 by National Instruments Settings on Visual Basic Standard modules used Niglobal bas Vbib 32 bas WT210 WT230 Settings GP IB address The sample programs given in this chapter use a GP IB address of 1 for the WT210 WT230 Setthe GP IB address to 1 according to the procedures described in section 10 5 IM 760401 01E 14 49 H pyepueis 2661 c 88gr 3331 24 0 BurAqjduio spuewwosy jo uejs S z spueuiulo uoneoiunululo2 6 Sample Program Image w WT2108230 IEEE488 2 Sample Program 14 50 14 7 Sample Program Initialization Error and Execution Functions Option Explicit Dim StartFlag As Integer Start Flag Dim addr As Integer GPIB Address Dim Timeout As Integer Timeout Dim Dev As Integer Device I
138. the harmonic measurement function back OFF 4 32 IM 760401 01E 4 14 Selecting the Crest Factor CHECK RANGE MODE a oO n o a RANGE UPDATE VOLTAGE CURRENT RMS VOLTAGE DC MAX HOLD AUTO CAUTO o MEAN A rr rr l ri mv vVAI12 3E vorraae cunnenr HOLD MODE MAX HOLD TRIG q rL Lr J em k A VAF FUNCTION ELEMENT is ae ae O s m M W Time LL v A ENTER D B m V PF CAE T a aE E c INTEGRATOR howe ES ES Lee over oe START STOP RESET mw C CJ HARMONICS MEMORY INTEG SET c a r m V Hz 4 2 3 r Ee J im k A h jruwcroN ELEMENT LOCALR SETUP N M W he LJ LJ KEY LOCK OFP SHIFT Draw D13P3W ao o a Im o o o Im SCALING AVG LINE FREQ STORE RECALL HARMONICS KEY LOCK Disp 4w D13V3A The explanation given in this section uses WT230 as an example For the differences between the WT210 and the WT230 see section 2 2 Operation Keys and Functions Element Display Procedure Operate the instrument by following the thick lines in the menu below Press the ENTER key to confirm a selection or setting Toleave the current menu in the middle of the operation press the key indicated in step 1 The confirmed settings up to that point are kept Select the measurement synchronization source 1 Display C SETUP l L Jo 4L r n r FE C7 s v Lr ry zr x r EX mM E
139. to normal indoor atmospheres with only non conductive pollution 4 Use cables of length 3 m or less 5 Measurement Category II CAT II applies to electrical equipment that is powered through a fixed installation such as a wall outlet wired to a distribution board and measurement performed on such wiring 16 14 IM 760401 01E 16 11 Dimensional Drawings WT210 Model 760401 Unit mm 250 73 359 356 E i o Es LJ aol o i N 4 o 480 JIS rack mount dogs Protruding from rack 20 I E n tr o ol an 2 i o E 6 c Ws o E 480 E
140. to other devices Data can be sent even when talk only is OFF In talk only mode the instrument cannot be controlled by a controller Interval In case of the talk only mode this setting specifies the interval to output data Setting range 00 00 00 0 hr 00 min 00 sec to 99 59 59 99 hrs 59 min 59 sec Initial value 00 00 00 When set to 00 00 00 the interval is equal to the display update rate In addition when the specified interval is shorter that the display update rate the data is output using the display update rate Terminator When this instrument is used as a listener Use CR LF LF or EOI as the receiving terminator When this instrument is used as a talker The sending terminator is set using the DL command The initial setting is CR LF EOl Note It is not possible for this instrument to receive data if the CR terminator is sent from the controller It is also not possible to set CR as the terminator which is to be sent from this instrument 10 12 IM 760401 01E 10 6 Setting the Output Items Procedure CHECK RANGE MODE oO RANGE GAUTO GAUTO o VOLTAGE CURRENT MODE MAX HOLD START STOP RESET HARMONICS MEMORY o o n n UPDATE VOLTAGE CURRENT RMS VOLTAGE DC MAX HOLD MEAN A l m V VA 123x Fr J E k A VAF ruwcriN ELEMENT oes oem M W TIME B mV PFj4123 X k A deg runcrion ELEMENT MW c r
141. x r3 REMOTE ea h FUNCTION ELEMENT LOCAL SETUP ht CJ KEY LOCK OUTPUT SHIFT OO 1P3w Lj 3P3W L13P4W O 3V3A For a description of the other digital numbers and characters that are displayed on the 7 segment LED of each display see section 1 3 EFFI Serv lt ferc lt ller lt Q oO Q 7 Press s The setup menu is displayed 2 Press or to show 54 H MATH on display C 3 Press we The selection of the computation function is confirmed and a menu used to select the computed items is shown on display C 5 HE H MATH moves to display B 4 Press or to show F EFFI efficiency on display C 5 Press me Efficiency computation is confirmed as a computed item Each display returns to the condition in which the measured values are displayed S 18 IM 760401 01E Displaying the Efficiency The following flow chart illustrates steps 1 to 5 In the procedural explanation in chapter 4 and beyond similar flow diagrams are used p Z mh Select the four arithmetic Q 1 MP Display C m SETUP LPs LE mr Fry LE AUG xe CALE ae p Pmbrabo 4 Display C 5 cC ant emen EFF gt ENER a 55aL AJ LCF HI PES zT 0 ur Ak E f LF H3 LF Al LF Hg LF R3 ARG H hb Huh Alb Ala H 2Ib HH I RH Ye HH 3
142. 0 00 750 00 mW 1 5000 W 3 0000 W 7 5000 W 15 000 W 30 000 W Note When the range is set to auto the measuring range switches according to range up range down conditions Therefore the range may vary even if the measured values remain the same f you open the voltage input terminal a voltage value of up to 0 3 V may be displayed due to hum noise and other phenomena This is because of the high input resistance of the voltage input terminal Shorting the terminal will result in a value of 0 V 4 10 IM 760401 01E 4 5 Setting the Scaling Value When External PT CT Is Used CHECK RANGE MODE n oO o o o RANGE UPDATE VOLTAGE CURRENT RMS VOLTAGE DC MAX HOLD GauToO GAUTO o MEAN VOLTAGE CURRENT HOLD va 1 23 val TIME MODE MAX HOLD TRIG Toim ENTER RESET E FUNCTION ELEMENT PF 1 2325 deg ruwcrioN ELEMENT STOP HARMONICS MEMORY a SET Hz 12 35 h ruwcriN ELEMENT serve ht Cj LI E ea E AL IUL EL Ua Cy e E Im n n m n n n SCALING AVG LINE FREQ STORE RECALL HARMONICS KEY LOCK L13P4W L13V3A The explanation given in this section uses WT230 as an example For the differences between the WT210 and the WT230 see section 2 2 Operation Keys and Functions Element Display o ExS3 2 3l 273 Srvr lt erc lt er lt Procedure Operate the instrument by following the thick lines in the m
143. 0 25 s 0 5 s 1 s 2 s or 5s Response time Approx display update rate 100 ms The time it takes to reach the accuracy of the final value when the displayed value changed from 0 to 100 or 100 to 0 of the rated range Auto range monitor The indicator illuminates when the input signal meets the conditions for auto range switching Overrange display Overrange oL is displayed for the following conditions During normal measurement When the measured value exceeds 14096 of the rated range During harmonic measurement For 600 V range or 20 A range 300 V range or 10 A range if the crest factor is set to 6 When the measured value exceeds 140 of the rated range For other ranges When the measured value exceeds 20096 of the rated range Hold Holds the displayed value Single update Updates the displayed value once each time the TRIG key is pressed during Hold MAX hold Holds the maximum displayed value of V A W VA var voltage peak and current peak Internal memory Item Specifications Measured data Number of stored data points Product Normal Harmonic measurement measurement WT210 single phase model 760401 600 blocks 30 blocks WT230 three phase three wire model 760502 300 blocks 30 blocks WT230 three phase four wire model 760503 200 blocks 30 blocks Store interval Display update rate or in the range of 1 s to 99 hrs 59 min 59 s Recall interval Display update rate or in the
144. 0 V 4 Wait for the measured value on display C to stabilize Even in stable condition the value fluctuates up to approximately 2 digits 5 Pressthe ENTER key The adjustment value is confirmed Display B shows the next voltage range Display A CAL Display B V Display C Measured value The measured value is displayed using 5 digits 6 Setthe output voltage of the standard according to the voltage range shown on display B and output the signal 7 Repeat steps 4 to 6 to adjust the voltage range shown in the table below The type and the order of the voltage ranges that are displayed are fixed Voltage Range Output Voltage of the Standard Shown on display B 15 00 V 15 000 V 30 00 V 30 000 V 60 00 V 60 000 V 150 0 V 150 00 V F 150 0 V 150 00 V F indicates that the line filter is ON 8 Turn OFF the output of the standard This complates the adjustment of the voltage range The current range will be adjusted next If the current range is not to be adjusted press the SHIFT key here 15 2 IM 760401 01E 15 1 Adjustments Adjusting the Current Range Connect the current output terminal of the AC voltage current standard to the current input terminal of the WT210 WT230 and the current terminal of the standard power meter 1 N EUT Equipment under Test AC voltage Voltage H current standard Output Terminal Standard power meter In step 8 of Adjusting the Volt
145. 00W 1 2000kW 3 0000kW 6 0000 kW 12 000 kW Single phase three wire 15 000 15 000 W 30 000W 60 000 W 150 00 W 300 00 W 600 00 W 1P3W 30 000 30 000 W 60 000W 120 00 W 300 00 W 600 00 W W 1 2000 kW Three phase three wire 60 000 60 000 W 120 00W 240 00 W 600 00 W 1 2000 kW 2 4000 kw SP3W 150 00 150 00W 300 00W 600 00 W 1 5000 kW 3 0000kW 6 0000 kw Three voltage three current 300 00 300 00W 600 00W 1 2000kW 3 0000kW 6 0000 kW 12 000 kW 3V3A 600 00 600 00 W 1 2000kW 2 4000kW 6 0000kW 12 000 kW 24 000 kW Three phase four wire 15 000 22 500 W 45 000W 90 000 W 225 00 W 450 00 W 900 00 W SPAW 30 000 45 000W 90 000W 180 00 W 450 00 W 900 00 W W 1 8000 kW 60 000 90 000 W 180 00W 360 00 W 900 00 W 1 8000 kW 3 6000 kw 150 00 225 00 W 450 00W 900 00 W 2 2500 kW 4 5000 kW 9 0000 kW 300 00 450 00 W 900 00W 1 8000kW 4 5000kW 9 0000 kW 18 000 kW 600 00 900 00 W 1 8000kW 3 6000kW 9 0000kW 18 000 kW 36 000 kW When the crest factor is set to 6 Wiring System Voltage Current Range Range V 250 00mA 500MA 1 0000 A 2 5000 A 5 0000 A 10 000 A Single phase two wire 7 5000 1 87 50W 3 7500W 7 5000 W 18 750W 37 500 W 75 000W 1P2W 15 000 3 7500 W 7 5000 W 15 000 W 37 500 W 75 000 W 150 00 W 30 000 7 5000 W 15 000W 30 000 W 75 000 W 150 00 W 300 00 W 75 000 18 750W 37 500W 75 000 W 187 50 W 375 00 W 750 00 W 150 00 37 500 W 75 000W 150 00 W 375 00 W 750 00 W 1 5000 kW 300 00 75 000 W 150 00W 300 00 W 750 00 W 1 5000 kW 3 0000 kw Single phase thr
146. 01 01E 10 6 Setting the Output Items Explanation Setting the Output Item in case of Normal Measurement Selecting the Default Setting Predefined items will be output by the communication function The following types of default settings exist and they depend on the model For a description of the output format in addressable mode or talk only mode see 10 5 to 10 8 Fora description of the output pattern in 488 2 mode see the description for the MEASure NORMal ITEM PRESet command page 14 31 Normal default setting dFLt n Consists of V voltage A current W active power the above menu shows P frequency and displayed data of display C Integration default setting dFLt i Consists of W active power the above menu shows P Wh watt hour Ah ampere hour frequency and integration time Selecting Original Settings You can set original output items output function and element to each output channel from ch1 to ch14 Setting the channel Select the output channel for assigning the output item from ch1 to ch14 Setting the output function corresponds to column A in the procedure Any of the following function can be selected The initial value is V V voltage A current P active power VAr reactive power VA apparent power PF power factor VFrq voltage frequency AFrq current frequency Ph total watt hour Wh Ah total ampere hour dEG phase angle VP peak value of voltage AP peak v
147. 01E 14 61 H pyepueis 2661 2 89r 3331 24 0 BuiAjduio spuewwosy jo uejs S z spueuiulo uoneoiunuiulo2 14 11 Communication related Error Messages Errors in communications execution 200 to 299 Code Message Action Reference 221 Setting conflict Check the relevant setting 14 3 222 Data out of range Check the setting range 14 3 223 Too much data Check the data byte length 14 3 224 Illegal parameter value Check the setting range 14 8 241 Hardware missing Check availability of options 260 Expression error Equation is not allowed 270 Macro error Does not conform to the macro definition specified in IEEE488 2 272 Macro execution error Does not conform to the macro definition specified in IEEE488 2 273 Illegal macro label Does not conform to the macro definition specified in IEEE488 2 275 Macro definition too long Does not conform to the macro definition specified in IEEE488 2 276 Macro recursion error Does not conform to the macro function specified in IEEE488 2 277 Macro redefinition not allowed Does not conform to the macro definition specified in IEEE488 2 278 Macro header not found Does not conform to the macro definition specified in IEEE488 2 Error in communication Query 400 to 499 Code Message Action Reference 410 Query INTERRUPTED Check transmission reception order 14 4 420 Query UNTERMINATED Check transmission reception o
148. 1 Set the voltage siganal channel of the synchronizer to 900 Hz 15 times current signal channel to 60 Hz and output these frequencies Set the frequency of the current standard to 60 Hz the output current to 1 A and output the current Set the frequency of the voltage standard to 900 Hz the output voltage to 15 V and output the voltage Set the displayed number on display A of this instrument to 15 Set the display function of display B to V and verify that the displayed value lies within the specifications On the WT230 change the settings of the element on which harmonic measurement is to be performed see section 7 2 and confirm elements 1 2 and 3 on display B If required change the voltage signal channel s setting of the synchronizer and the frequency of the current standard and verify another number Turn the output of the voltage and current standard OFF IM 760401 01E 15 11 a Bunooys jqnou pue 2ueuazueN 15 2 Calibration Verifying of Functions Auto Range Operation 1 eo 10 Set the voltage or current range of this instrument to Auto range When the voltage or current input is zero the voltage and current ranges are automatically set to 15 V range and 0 5 A range 5 mA range on the WT210 respectively Set the crest factor to 3 Press the VOLTAGE key to verify the 15 V range and then press this key once more Press the CURRENT key and check that that the range is set to 0 5 A 5 mA on the
149. 1 01E 12 1 3207 9y pue uonesueduio2 9A9 0JeZ sJejoure1eg dnjes Burzijeniu 12 2 lnitializing Setup Parameters CHECK RANGE MODE RANGE AUTO GAUTO c o o QO o o UPDATE VOLTAGE CURRENT RMS VOLTAGE DC MAX HOLD MEAN me Sav vals e o x LI L a f H k A var I KUNCTION S ELEMENT MODE MAX HOLD TRIG m m la M W me B V PF E m CAL NES 2 INTEGRATOR CES er over eer START STOP RESET mw CI HARMONICS MEMORY INTEG SET c ri l l m V H 123r Eee E Palo SEES ITE I N MW hi CJ LJ KEY LOCK OUTPUT SHIFT O1P3W 1 3P3w uy a a a o a o a a SCALING AVG LINE FREQ STORE RECALL HARMONICS KEY LOCK L13P4W 13V3A The explanation given in this section uses WT230 as an example For the differences between the WT210 and the WT230 see section 2 2 Operation Keys and Functions Element Display Procedure Operate the instrument by following the thick lines in the menu below Press the ENTER key to confirm a selection or setting To leave the current menu in the middle of the operation press the key indicated in step 1 The confirmed settings up to that point are kept Select initialization al Display C 3 SETUP LF 2 ro LEb ENTER PFs bk M A ty f SLALE Confirming the Execution of the crm 39 Initialization
150. 1 2 Connecting the Interface Cable When connecting this instrument to a personal computer make sure that the handshaking method data transmission rate and data format selected for the instrument match those selected fro the computer For details refer to the following pages Also make sure that the correct interface cable is used Connector and Signal Names Numbers in the figure represent the Pin Nos Signal Direction Pins 4 through are not used N Pins2j through 5 are not used A ooo0Woo oo o00 O piger SSA cm are not used SERIAL Connector DBSP JB25S or equivalent 1 AA GND Protective Ground Grounded to the case of this instrument 2 BA TXD Transmitted Data Data transmitted to personal computer Signal direction output 3 BB RXD Received Data Data received from personal computer Signal direction input 4 CA RTS Request to Send Signal used to handshake when receiving data from personal computer Signal direction output 5 CB CTS Clear to Send Signal used to handshake when transmitting data to personal computer Signal direction input 6 CC DSR Data Set Ready Signal used to handshake when transmitting data to personal computer Signal direction input 7 AB GND Signal Ground Ground for signals 20 CD DTR Data Terminal Ready Signal used to handshake when receiving data from personal computer Signal direction output
151. 1 System Configuration and Block Diagram c ccccccsescceeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeecseneesseeeessneeersnses 1 1 1 2 FUNCIONS nci cett i cnc M a a Pd s tect 1 3 1 3 Digital Numbers and Characters and Initial Menus eee eee eee eee reer terete 1 6 Chapter 2 Names and Functions of Parts and Auto Range Monitor Overrange and Error Displays 2 1 Front Panel Rear Panel and Top View c cccceeeeeeneeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeenaeeeeeesesneeeeeeeseneees 2 1 2 2 Operation Keys and Functions Element Display esee 2 2 2 3 Auto Range Monitor Overrange and Error Displays during Measurement 2 4 Chapter 3 Before Starting Measurements 3 1 Handling Precautions c 1c cccccccccenieecceeececedencunetecesepacenecscitesseteedduceessbbeeeubbessubecednecceeneectens 3 1 3 2 Installing the Instrument siisii serias neekin enaere naase aiana anni aapakan iaaa 3 2 A 39 3 Wiring Precautions sessssssseseseeeseeeee redran enii an nannaa irene naa Pa enne 3 4 3 4 For Making Accurate Measurements sssseeeeee eene 3 7 A 3 5 Connecting the Power Supply isisisi nanaii 3 8 3 6 Turning ON OFF the Power Switch and Opening Message sees 3 9 AN 3 7 Directly Wiring the Circuit under Measurement ssesseeeeeenn 3 11 A 3 8 Using an External PT or CT to Wire the Circuit under Measurement 3 13 A 3 9 Using an External Sensor to
152. 1st to 50th Freq V1 paras 9 062 1 24 10 0 00 0 01 order of current aims Io Goa 3h OA MOOD Me Rms value of 1st to 50th uid BUCO oe d 5 0 22 0 45 16 0 00 0 01 order of active power PFi 7 0641 9 17 0 17 0 35 18 0 00 0 01 Phase angle between the V1 THD IEC 12 01 Hd HE Hen 2 ree aoe fundamental current and A1 THD IEC 95 58 23 0 09 0 19 24 0 00 0 01 AVG EXP 8 OFF 1 s fundamental voltage icalin OFF 25 0 08 0 16 26 0 00 0 01 Power factor of the Crest Pacis a 3 27 0 07 0 14 28 0 01 0 01 fundamental 1st order 29 0 06 0 11 30 0 00 0 01 31 0 05 0 10 32 0 00 0 01 Harmonic distortion of 33 oo oog be 0 00 0 01 the voltage d p gt 37 0 03 0 07 38 0 00 0 00 Harmonic distortion of 39 0 03 0 06 40 0 01 0 01 the current 41 0 03 0 06 42 0 00 0 01 Averaging 43 0 03 0 05 44 0 00 0 01 Scali 45 0 02 0 05 46 0 00 0 01 caling 47 0 02 0 05 48 0 00 0 01 Crest factor 49 0 02 0 04 50 0 00 0 01 Harmonic Spectrum Voltage V 100 0 10 00 Measured Value 1 000 100 0m 10 00m IM 760401 01E uonoung 1ndino u jeuje1x3 Is 9 9 Outputting to an External Plotter Printer Voltage range xternal sensor Current range ia E N scaling values Example of Output to an External Printer Some sections in the following figure such as fonts and graph lines differ in appearance from the
153. 2 on the rear panel of the WT230 760503 three phase four wire model and the current measurement circuit and voltage measurement circuit on the primary side of the inverter Wiring Diagram SOURCE LOAD 0 eR D e Le Q 0 LOAD Inverter primary side amp 3 SOURCE E V VOLTAGE terminal C CURRENT terminal Input terminal ELEMENT 2 Wiring Example of a Current Measurement Circuit CURRENT terminal emaz BER j 5 Inverter Motor oy EN terminal n T Wiring Example of a Voltage Measurement Circuit WT230 Lc 7 ii T ES 2 J ss AA IM 760401 01E S 5 Wiring the Circuit 7 Connect the voltage and current input terminals of input elements 1 and 3 on the rear panel of the WT230 760503 and the current measurement circuit and voltage measurement circuit of the secondary side of the inverter and the motor Wiring Diagram SOURCE LOAD CA source U vi Inverter 4 Load secondary side W T A3 L1 Ct Input terminal Input terminal V VOLTAGE terminal ELEMENT 1 ELEMENT 3 C CURRENT terminal Wiring Example of a Current Measurement Circuit IM 760401 01E S 6 Wiring the Circuit Q Attach the current input protection cover Before attaching the current input protection cover check that the input terminal screws are securely fastened f e
154. 3 or 4 The element number 4 represents Setting the limit value No element setting is available on the WT210 Setting range 0 000 to 9999 Initial setting EN chi V type 1 element 600 0 value E 0 exponent 600 V voltage limit of element 1 for channel 1 ch2 A type 1 element 20 00 value E 0 exponent 20 00 A current limit of element 1 for channel 2 ch3 P type 1 element 1 200 value E 3 exponent 1 2 kW active power limit of element 1 for channel 3 ch4 PF type 1 element 1 000 value E 0 exponent Power factor 1 limit of element 1 for channel 4 uonoung 1ndino u jeuje1x3 Selecting the exponent The following selections are available The initial value is as described above E 3 1079 E 0 109 E 3 10 E 6 109 Setting the Comparator Limit Values in case of Harmonic Measurement You can set the type of the limit and its value for each relay seperately Selecting the relay Selects the relay ch1 to ch4 for which the type of limit and its value will be set Selecting the type of limit corresponds to column A in the procedure The following selections are available When the comparator mode is dual ch1 amp ch2 and ch3 amp ch4 are pairs and only the same type of limit can be selected for the channels of one pair V voltage A current P active power PF power factor Vt harmonic distortion of voltage At harmonic distortion of current CV relat
155. 3 1 Initializes D A output items inquires about the current settings Two sets of default settings are available one is for normal measurement and the other is for integration The same initialization Input voltage frequency V Syntax Query Example can also be performed using a key operation OAD m terminator m indicates default no m 2 Select mode 0 Default for normal measurement 1 Default for integration OAD terminator OAD1 Description Parameter error 12 will occur if m is set to OD Syntax OE Syntax Example an illegal value Select mode OAD2 is validated when the OA command is executed if m has been set to 0 default for normal measurement or 1 default for integration Requests output of measurement data OD terminator Requests output of error codes via communications OE terminator ERR11 terminator Error code Description 11 Command error 12 Parameter error 13 Attempted to change settings which cannot be changed while integration was in progress 14 Attempted to set auto range mode while external sensor range was selected 15 Attempted to execute a command that was protected 16 Attempted to execute a command that was protected while harmonic measurement was being performed 17 Time out in print output 18 Not in printing mode or no data available 19 Attempted to execute commands while recalling Storing is in prog
156. 30 No update rate Line filter Yes cutoff frequency 500 Hz None Frequency filter Yes cutoff frequency 500 Hz Yes cutoff frequency 300 Hz MAX hold Yes WT200 Yes WT110E WT130 No Peak value display Yes WT200 Yes WT110E Option WT130 Yes Average active power during Yes WT200 Yes integration WT110E WT130 No Display update rate Select 0 1 0 25 0 5 1 2 Fixed to 0 25 s or5s Number of displayed digits Select 4 or 5 digits WT200 Select 4 or 5 digits WT110E WT130 Fixed to 4 digits Integration timer time 10000 hours maximum WT200 Resolution 1 s 10000 hours maximum Resolution 1 s WT110E WT130 999 hours 59 minutes maximum Resolution 1 min Display update during Select 0 25 0 5 1 2 or5s Approx 3s harmonic measurement Remote control I O signal when EXT HOLD EXT TRIG EXT HOLD EXT TRIG equipped with the comparator EXT START EXT STOP function CMP option EXT RESET INTEG BUSY Communication Commands All communication commands for conventional models can be used except the commands for the 2533E Communication data format ASCII and binary ASCII Addressable mode B of GP IB No Yes communications Baud rate of serial RS 232 C 1200 to 9600 bps 75 to 9600 bps communications Zero level compensation Yes WT200 Yes WT110E WT130 No Key lock Yes No Power fuse Yes part number A1347EF WT200 No WT110E No WT130 Yes part number A1346EF IM 760401 01E Checking the Conten
157. 333 approximately 666 if the crest factor is set to 6 for the purpose of integration Integration When Current Input Is Small When the measurement mode is RMS VOLTAGE MEAN and the current input drops below 0 596 less than or equal to 196 if the crest factor is set to 6 of the rated range the ampere hour value is integrated as zero 0 Valid Frequency Range for Integration The sample rate is approximately 50 kHz The voltage current signal frequencies that are valid for the integration are as follows Integrated Item Valid Frequency Range for Integration Active power DC to 25 kHz Current When the measurement mode is RMS DC lower limit frequency determined by the display update rate to 25 kHz When the measurement mode is VOLTAGE MEAN DOC lower limit frequency determined by the display update rate to 25 kHz When the measurement mode is DC DC to 25 kHz IM 760401 01E uone46o1u H Chapter 7 Harmonic Measurement Function Option 7 1 Harmonic Measurement Function This chapter explains the harmonic measurement function which can be applied to normal measurements of voltage current and power Measured Displayed Items After having set the harmonic measurement function to ON the harmonic component of voltage current or active power will be mesured and displayed for one of the input elements target element not applicable for the WT210 Depending on the setting of the display function the display c
158. 7 format 123 Exponent too large Use a smaller exponent in lt NR3 gt format 14 7 14 3 124 Too many digits Limit the number of digits to 255 or less 14 7 14 3 128 Numeric data not allowed Enter in a format other than lt NRf gt format 14 7 14 3 131 Invalid suffix Check the units for lt Voltage gt and lt Current gt 14 8 134 Suffix too long Check the units for lt Voltage gt and lt Current gt 14 8 138 Suffix not allowed No units are allowed other than lt Voltage gt and lt Current gt 14 8 141 Invalid character data Enter one of the character strings in 14 3 144 Character data too long Check the character strings in 14 3 148 Character data not allowed Enter in a format other than one of those in 14 3 150 String data error Character string must be enclosed by double quotation 14 8 marks or single quotation marks 151 Invalid string data Character string is too long or contains characters which 14 3 cannot be used 158 String data not allowed Enter in a data format other than Character string 14 3 161 Invalid block data Block data is not allowed 14 9 14 3 168 Block data not allowed Block data is not allowed 14 9 14 3 171 Invalid expression Equation is not allowed 14 3 178 Expression data not allowed Equation is not allowed 14 3 181 Invalid outside macro definition Does not conform to the macro definition specified in IEEE488 2 IM 760401
159. 71 450E 00 71 370E 00 71 490E 00 214 31E 00 8 2342E 00 8 2354E 00 8 2519E 00 24 721E 00 0 10 0 Data contents Recalled data number 10 W1 428 60E 00 W2 428 10E 00 W3 428 80E 00 WY 1 2855E 03 WH1 71 450E 00 WH2 71 370E 00 WH3 71 490E 00 WH gt 214 31E 00 AH1 8 2342E 00 AH2 8 2354E 00 AH3 8 2519E 00 AHY 24 721E 00 Elapsed integration time 0 hours 10 minutes O seconds Data Format of Harmonic Measurement All data will be output in the lt NR3 gt format mantissa max 5 digits exponent 2 digits Output Format of Harmonic Measurement The communication output is set ON by any of the commands starting with MEASure HARMonics ITEM and the harmonic measurement data or frequency of PLL source SyNChronize are output according to the following order of priority Besides in case of recalling normal measurement or integration data the data number will be output in lt NR1 gt format as well 0 Data number in case of recalling 1 Frequency of PLL source syNchronize 2 VTHD 3 V 4 VCON 5 ATHD 6 A 7 ACON 8 PF 9 W 10 WCON 11 VDEG 12 ADEG Harmonic measurement data will be output for all applicable elements To find out to which element the data correspond use the HARMonics ELEMent command e Frequency of PLL Source synchronize 1 data Outputs the fundamental frequency vHz AHz of the voltage current for which the PLL source has been set The input of the PLL source can be found out using HARMonics SYNChronize
160. 760401 01E 14 3 Commands CONFigure MODE Function Syntax Example Sets the measurement mode of current and voltage queries the current setting CONFigure MODE RMS VMEan DC CONFigure MODE CONFIGURE MODE RMS CONFIGURE MODE gt CONFIGURE MODE RMS CONFigure SCALing Function Syntax Example Queries all settings relating to the scaling function CONFigure SCALing CONFIGURE SCALING CONFIGURE SCALING STATE 0 PT ELEMENT1 1 000E 00 ELEMENT2 1 000E 00 ELEMENT3 1 000E 00 CONFIGURE SCALING CT ELEMENT1 1 000E 00 ELEMENT2 1 000E 00 ELEMENT3 1 000E 00 CONFIGURE SCALING SFACTOR ELEMENT1 1 000E 00 ELEMENT2 1 000E 00 ELEMENT3 1 000E 00 CONFigure SCALing PT CT SFACtor Function Syntax Example Queries all scaling constants related to voltage current power CONFigure SCALing PT CT SFACtor CONFIGURE SCALING PT CONFIGURE SCALING PT ELEMENT1 1 000E 00 ELEMENT2 1 000E 00 ELEMENT3 1 000E 00 CONFigure SCALing PT CT SFACtor ALL Function Syntax Example Sets the scaling constants for all elements of voltage current power at once CONFigure SCALing PT CT SFACtor ALL lt NRf gt lt NR gt 0 001 to 9999 CONFIGURE SCALING PT ALL 1 000 Description The setting values are rounded as follows Less than 1 000 Three digits after the decimal point are valid 1 000 to 9999 The first five
161. 8 DC2 2 B b r 12 18 22 34 32 50 42 66 52 82 62 98 72 114 3 23 43 3 63 19 103 3 123 19 143 3 163 19 DC3 3 C C S 13 19 23 35 33 51 43 67 53 83 63 99 73 115 4 24 DCL 44 4 64 20 104 4 124 20 144 4 164 20 14 20 24 36 34 52 44 68 54 84 64 100 74 116 5 25 PPU 45 5 65 21 105 5 125 21 145 5 165 21 O NAK 5 E e u 15 21 25 37 35 53 45 69 55 85 65 101 75 117 6 26 46 6 66 22 106 6 126 22 146 6 166 22 SYN amp 6 F V 16 22 26 38 36 54 46 70 56 86 66 102 76 118 7 27 47 7167 23 107 7 127 23 147 7 167 23 ETB 7 G W g w 17 23 27 39 37 55 47 71157 87 67 10377 119 8 30 SPE 50 8 70 24 110 8 130 24 150 8 170 24 CAN 8 H h x 18 24 28 40 38 56 48 72 58 88 68 104 78 120 9 31 SPD 51 9 71 25 111 9 131 25 151 9 171 25 19 25 29 41 39 57 49 73159 89 69 105 79 121 A 32 52 10 72 26 112 10 132 26 152 10 172 26 SUB J Z 1A 26 2A 42 3A 58 4A 74 5A 90 6A 106 7A 122 B 33 53 11 73 27 113 11 133 27 153 11 173 27 ESC K kf 1B 27 2B 43 3B 59 4B 75 5B 91 6B 107 7B 123 C 34 54 12 74 28 114 12 134 28 154 12 174 28 FS L l 1C 28 2C 44 3C 60 4C 76 5C 92 6C 108 7C 124 D 35 55 13175 29 115 13 135 29 155 13 175 29 GS M m 1D 29 2D 45 3D 61 4D 77 5D 93 6D 109 7D 125 E 36 56 14176 30 116 14 136 30 156 14 176 30 RS gt N n 1E 30 2E 46 3E 62 4E 78 5E 94 6E 110 7E 126 F 37 57 15 77 UNL 117 15 137 UNT 157 15 177 9 DEL US a O Oo RUBOUT 1F 31 2F 47 3F 63 4F
162. 88 2 1987 There is no front panel key that corresponds to this group laa G C cao NC ESE D gt lt Space gt gt lt NRf gt 1 Pi Cm O Cm 50 CroO C O PSC D gt Space gt lt NRf gt 1 m ae NC SRE y gt Space gt lt NRf gt EN ad I C9e 0 405 C O CAL Description Each bit is expressed as a decimal number Function Execute zero level compensation and queries For example if ESE 251 is set the the result standard enable register will be set to Syntax CAL 11111011 This means that bit 2 of the Example CAL gt 0 standard event register is disabled so that bit Description 0 is returned when the zero level 5 ESB of the status byte register will not be compensation completes properly Otherwise Set to 1 even if a query error occurs 1 is returned Default is ESE 0 i e all bits are disabled ens The standard event enable register will be cleared when an inquiry is made using Function Clears the standard event register extended ESE event registeranderror guede For details referring the standard event iva TCDS enable register refer to page 14 45 Example CLS Description The output will also be cleared if a CLS ESR command is appended after the program Function Queries the value of the stand
163. A terminator KW terminator When CM1 is set KV1 terminator KA2 terminator KW3 terminator Example When CMO is set KV1 000 KA1 000 KW1 000 When CM1 is set KV1 1 000 KA2 1 000 KW3 1 000 Description Parameter error 12 will occur if m is set to an illegal value n must be floating point or integer Error 12 will occur when an inquiry is made if the scaling values set for each element by CMO differ from each other While recalling or storing is in progress execution error 19 will occur LF LF Turns ON OFF the line filter inquires about the current setting Syntax LF m terminator m indicates whether the line filter is ON or OFF m 0 OFF 1 ON Query LF terminator Example LFO Description Parameter error 12 will occur if m is set to an illegal value You cannot change the setting while integration is in progress Execution error 13 will occur While recalling or storing is in progress execution error 19 will occur MN MN Sets the measurement mode for voltage and current inquires about the current setting Syntax MN m terminator m indicates the measurement mode m 0 RMS 1 VOLTAGE MEAN MEAN in case of voltage RMS in case of current 2 DC Query MN terminator Example MNO Description Parameter error 12 will occur if m is set to an illegal value Changing of the measurement mode is not allowed while integration is in progr
164. ASCII character codes 14 60 attenuation constant esee 4 18 auto range 4 8 auto range harmonic 7 2 auto range monitor ssessessessseseeeeeeeeennerenn nen 2 4 average active power 4 30 5 8 averaging function seseseeeeeeeeneenerenen 4 18 averaging function harmonic eeeeeeeeee 7 3 Be back up of setup parameters seeeeeees 12 1 backup during power failures eeeseessess 6 10 back p TUMCHON ss ees iret EE ae tenero artes backus naur form bar display rnit nente en there bar display harmonic sees 7 8 baud rate block data nennen nnne block diagram 22 2 arii thm irre e rene rere BNF notation m DOGIGAN EERE E EE C elo e mete ede 15 6 calibration of AC voltage current and power 15 8 calibration of D A output wees a 15 10 calibration of DC voltage current and power 15 6 ev 11 4 character data tert rennen 14 8 character string data ssssseeeeneee 14 8 check these items first eseeeeeeeee 15 13 command M command List IEEE 488 2 js commands before IEEE 488 2 0 0 eee eee eee 13 1 commands list before the IEEE 488 2 10 16 Common command group common
165. B f eu i 20 01 FL LL ULI LI 5 5 4 2 24 1 fa t if v v nc iS a5 r n roan LE Lt L LI LI rr E r nn E a E tou v v r Jt T rn E 25 E h 1 6 IM 760401 01E 1 3 Digital Numbers and Characters and Initial Menus When the crest factor is set to 6 For option EX1 For option EX2 1 Display C Display C Display C CURRENT 2 Huta 2 Hutn EAS Hutn 1m I n1 tu tu tu 5 5 5 gh gu gh v f f t t i I A A a5 uh ub v V 4 r7 HgS eb P us E 5 re IU E gh HE 5H d _ v B E dg5 t AS Filter Scaling Averaging External Sensor Input Initializing set up parameters 1 Display C SETUP LPs Le Set the line filter Set the frequency filter Set averaging Set scaling CG K gt uw r4 a Set the external sensor input Initialize the setup parameters Select the computation item Select the measurement synchronization source Select the number of displayed digits Select the display update rate 7G 2 r z ur rr Select the crest factor Integration Setting 1 Display C RESET 2 node Set the integration mode SHIFT INTEG SET E n E r Set the integration timer hA n I dA E nE Set the rated integration time Turning the Harmonic Measurement F
166. COM 9 2 IM 760401 01E 9 2 Remote Control Option Controlling Integration To control integration apply timing signals according to the timing chart below start stop Reset star Stop gt lt 5 ms min EXT START E mooo 5 ms min EXT STOP gt e 5 ms min EXT RESET Approx Approx Approx Approx 15 ms 15 ms 115 ms 15 ms gt o Le gt lt se INTEG BUSY As shown in the timing chart the INTEG BUSY output signal level goes low while integration is in progress The signal can be used to monitor integration etc Holding Display Data Update same function as HOLD key To hold the display update apply the EXT HOLD signal according to the timing chart below m Display hold ee 5 ms min EXT HOLD Updating Display Data which has been held same function as TRIG key Applying an EXT TRIG signal when the display is on hold updates the display data Update timing during normal measurement integration Measurement start Display update 250 ms or more and display update interval or more Update timing while harmonic analysis function is in progress BEEN 5 ms min EXT TRIG Measurement start Display update Display update interval or more 5 ms min gt 5 ms min EXT TRIG Note If the period of the EXT TRIG signal does not meet the conditions of the figure above the signal may not be identified
167. Chapter 15 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Describes how to calibrate and adjust the instrument how to troubleshoot problems the error code information and corrective action and how to replace the power fuse Chapter 16 Specifications Summarizes the main specifications of the WT210 WT230 in a table Index Index of contents viii IM 760401 01E Conventions Used in This Manual Symbol Markings The following markings are used in this manual AN CAUTION Tips Note Improper handling or use can lead to injury to the user or damage to the instrument This symbol appears on the instrument to indicate that the user must refer to the user s manual for special instructions The same symbol appears in the corresponding place in the user s manual to identify those instructions In the manual the symbol is used in conjunction with the word WARNING or CAUTION Calls attention to actions or conditions that could cause serious injury or death to the user and precautions that can be taken to prevent such occurrences Calls attentions to actions or conditions that could cause light injury to the user or damage to the instrument or user s data and precautions that can be taken to prevent such occurrences Calls attention to information that is important for proper operation of the instrument Characters Displayed on the 7 Segment LED Because alphanumeric characters are displayed on a 7 segment LED some o
168. Current wa GLT GEF A D C ad O to CAEN IL 0 eR D e Le Q Q 0 IM 760401 01E S 7 Selecting the Wiring System lt lt For details see section 3 10 gt gt After wiring the circuit select the wiring circuit Select the wiring system to match the circuit under measurement that is actually wired When input element is selected the average voltage or current of each input element that corresponds to the selected wiring system and the sum of powers of each input element are displayed For the computing equation of the sum of powers see section 16 3 For the procedure of selecting input element X see pages S 15 to S 17 VA var TIME 123r FUNCTION ELEMENT 12353rE FUNCTION ELEMENT Hz o S3 27 3 27 3 S lt lt lt ga a hz 123 FUNCTION ELEMENT Wiring system indicator Press to select wiring system 3P3W Each time is pressed the wiring system indicator illuminates in the order shown in the figure below Since the example in this guide uses input element 1 and 3 of the WT230 760503 three phase four wire model with the wiring system of the secondary side of the inverter set to three phase three wire wiring system 3P3W is selected WIRING WIRING WIRING IPW 3P3W gt 3P4W gt 3V8A gt r RANGE oAUTO GAUTO o VOLTAGE CURRENT HOLD MODE MAX HOLD
169. D GPIB Dim term As String Terminator Dim Query 1100 As String Query String Dim Dummy As Integer Private Function InitGpib As Integer Dim eos As Integer EOS Dim eot As Integer EOL Dim brd As Integer GPIB Board ID Dim sts As Integer eos amp HCOA Terminator LF eot 1 EOI Enable term Chr 10 Timeout T10s Timeout 10s brd ilfind GPIBO If brd lt 0 Then GoTo GPIBError End If Dev ildev 0 addr 0 Timeout eot eos If Dev lt 0 Then GoTo GPIBError End If sts ilsic brd Set IFC If sts lt 0 Then Call DisplayGPIBError sts ilsic InitGpib 1 Exit Function End If InitGpib 0 Exit Function GPIBError Call DisplayGPIBError sts ilsic InitGpib 1 End Function Private Sub DisplayGPIBError ByVal sts As Integer ByVal msg As String Dim wrn As String Dim ers As String Dim ern As Integer If sts And TIMO Then wrn Time out Chr 13 Else wrn End If If sts And EERR Then ern iberr If ern EDVR Then ers EDVR System error ElseIf ern ECIC Then ers ECIC Function requires GPIB board to be CIC ElseIf ern ENOL Then ers ENOL No Listeners on the GPIB ElseIf ern EADR Then ers EADR GPIB board not addressed correctly ElseIf ern EARG Then ers EARG Invalid argument to function call ElseIf ern ESAC Then ers ESAC GPIB board not System Controller as required ElseIf ern EABO Then ers EABO I O operation aborte
170. DE Sets queries the mode of the comparator function 14 38 RELay NCHannel lt x gt Queries all settings related to the relay output items in case of normal measurement 14 38 RELay NCHannel lt x gt FUNCtion Sets queries the function of the relay output in case of normal measurement 14 38 RELay NCHannel lt x gt THReshold Sets queries the threshold level for the relay output item 14 38 RELay STATe Sets queries the comparator function ON OFF 14 38 SAMPIe Group SAMPle Queries all settings related to sampling 14 39 SAMPle HOLD Sets queries to hold the output of data display communication 14 39 SAMPle RATE Sets the display update rate or queries the current setting 14 39 STATus Group STATus Queries all settings related to the status of communication 14 40 STATus CONDition Queries the contents of the condition filter 14 40 STATus EESE Sets queries the extended event register 14 40 STATus EESR Queries the contents of the extended event register and clears it 14 40 STATus ERRor Queries the occurred error code and message 14 40 STATus FILTer lt x gt Sets queries the transit filter 14 40 STATus QMESsage Sets queries whether or not to apply the corresponding message to the query STATus ERRor 14 41 STATus SPOL1 Serial Poll Executes serial polling 14 41 IM 760401 01E 14 13 H pyepueis 2661 c 88gr 3331 24 0 BurAqjduio spuewwosy jo uejs S z spueuiulo uoneoiunululo2 14 3 Commands
171. Display A 2 Display B 3 Display C DISPLAY1 RESOLUTION LOW DISPLAY1 RESOLUTION DISPLAY1 RESOLUTION LOW x Will be ignored The contents of all the displays A to C will be received IM 760401 01E 14 23 H pyepueis 2661 2 88r 3331 24 0 BuiAqjduio spuewwosy jo uejs S z spueuiulo uoneoiunuiulo2 14 3 Commands 14 3 6 HARMonics Group The commands in the HARMonics group relate to the harmonic measurement function This allow you to make the same settings and inquiries as when using the HARMONICS key on the front panel and the corresponding menus This group is only useful in case your instrument is equipped with the HRM option Space OFF gt lt NRf gt Space L NRf f lt Space gt B lt NRf gt O lt Space gt IEC D CSA HARMonics HARMonics ELEMent Function Queries all settings relating to harmonic lt NRf gt 1 WT210 single phase measurement Syntax HARMonics Example HARMONICS HARMONICS STATE 0 ELEMENT 1 SYNCHRONIZE V 1 THD IEC DISPLAY ORDER 1 HARMonics DISPlay Function Queries all settings concerning the display in case of harmonic measurement Syntax HARMonics DISPlay Example HARMONICS DISPLAY HARMONICS DISPLAY gt DISPLAY ORDER 1 HARMONICS HARMonics DISPla
172. Display C Auto zm eg m O Cot mn rm nu ca c3 E3 ES un ol l Cj C3 The unit is mV 3 ENTER End of setting ru mH Ln The above figure shows the selections when the crest factor is set 3 The selections when the crest factor is set to 6 are shown below Auto 10 5 2 5 1 0 5 0 25 E 100 E 50 E 25 The menu above is for the WT230 The WT210 displays mA range followed by the external sensor range mV or V unit Explanation Scaling Function in combination with External Sensor Input This function is used when measuring the voltage or current by installing an external sensor and connecting its output to the input element of the WT210 WT230 Setting Example of Scaling Constant for External Sensor Input Incase the rated specs of the external sensor are 50 A 50 mV measurement range is 50 mV then 50 A 50 mV x 50 mV 50 A scaling constant is 50 00 Incase the rated specs of the external sensor are 100 A 50 mV measurement range is 50 mV then 100 A 50 mV x 50 mV 100 A scaling constant is 100 00 Incase the rated specs of the external sensor are 50 A 80 mV measurement range is 50 mV then 50 A 80 mV x 50 mV 31 25 A scaling constant is 31 25 However since the setting range is 50 mV use a setting within the 0 to 50 mV range This instrument uses this scaling coefficient in calculations like the ones below to obtain current values for display or
173. E STATus EESE STATUS FILTER2 Function Sets the extended event register queries the STATUS FILTER2 RISE current setting Description Refer to 14 4 for details on the condition filter Syntax STATus EESE Register STATus EESE lt Register gt 0 to 65535 Example STATUS EESE 257 STATUS EESE gt STATUS EESE 257 Description Refer to Section 14 4 for details on the extended event register 14 40 IM 760401 01E 14 3 Commands STATus QMESsage Function Sets whether or not to apply the corresponding message to the query STATus ERRor queries the current setting Syntax STATus QMESsage lt Boolean gt STATus QMESsage Example STATUS QMESSAGE OFF STATUS QMESSAGE gt STATUS QMESSAGE 0 14 3 14 STORe Group STATus SPOLL Serial Poll Function Syntax Example Description Executes serial polling STATus SPOLL STATUS SPOLL STATUS SPOLL 0 This command is used for the serial interface An interface message is available for the GP IB interface The commands in the STORe group are used to make settings relating to and inquiries about storing data This allows you to make the same settings as when using the lower menus of MEMORY StorE or MEMORY PnLSt STORe STORe Function Syntax Example STATe lt Space gt OFF D lt NRf gt lee INTerva
174. E terminal Element 1 Element 3 C CURRENT terminal Wiring example of a three phase four wire system 3P4W Can be applied to model 760503 Source load R V VOLTAGE terminal Input terminal Input terminal Input terminal C CURRENT terminal Elemnt 1 Element 2 Element 3 Wiring example of a three voltage three current system 3V3A Can be applied to model 760503 Source Load Load V VOLTAGE terminal Input terminal Input terminal Input terminal C CURRENT terminal Element 1 Element 2 Element 3 Note 0 Forthe relationship between the wiring systems and the method of determining the measured values or computed values see page 16 6 n SP3W and 3V3A systems the wiring system may be different between the WT210 230 and another product another digital power meter due to the differences in the input element that is wired To achieve correct measurements check the wiring system 3 12 IM 760401 01E 3 8 Using an External PT or CT to Wire the Circuit under Measurement A WARNING When using an external CT do not allow the secondary side of the CT to become an open circuit while current is flowing through the primary side Otherwise high voltage will appear at the secondary side of the CT making it extremely dangerous N CAUTION The
175. ELEMent lt 1 3 gt SIGMa OFF lt x gt 1 to 4 normal measurement function V A W VA VAR PF DEGRee VHZ AHZ WH WHP WHM AH AHP AHM MATH VPK APK RELAY NCHANNEL3 FUNCTION W 1 RELAY NCHANNEL3 gt RELAY NCHANNEL3 FUNCTION W 1 Except for the case when it is OFF you will specify normal measurement function and element for the relay output function However if the normal measurement function is set to MATH element is ignored The response to the query will have the element omitted RELay NCHannel lt x gt THReshold Function Syntax Example Description Sets the threshold level for the relay output item in case of normal measurement queries the current setting RELay NCHannel lt x gt THReshold lt NRf gt lt x gt 1 to 4 lt NR gt 0 000E 00 to 9 999E 09 RELAY NCHANNEL3 THRESHOLD 1 200E 03 RELAY NCHANNEL3 THRESHHOLD gt RELAY NCHANNEL3 THRESHOLD 1 200E 03 The mantissa of the setting value is rounded a follows Less than 1 000 Rounded to the third digit left of the decimal 1 000 to 9999 Rounded to the fourth significant digit RELay STATe Function Syntax Example Sets the comparator function ON OFF queries the current setting RELay STATe Boolean RELay STATe RELAY ON RELAY STATE ON RELAY STATE gt RELAY STATE 1 14 38 IM 760401 01E 14 3 Commands 14 3 12 SAMPIe Group The commands i
176. ENTER key When you change the measurement range Note Formaking accurate measurements we recommend zero level compensation to be performed after warming up the instrument for at least 30 minutes In addition the ambient temperature needs to be within the specifications see chapter 16 and stable fthe measurement mode measurement range and input filter are not changed over a long period of time the zero level may change due to the changes in the environment surrounding the instrument It is recommended that zero level compensation be performed in this case 12 4 IM 760401 01E 12 4 Key Lock CHECK RANGE MODE o o o o o RANGE UPDATE VOLTAGE CURRENT RMS VOLTAGE DC MAX HOLD AUTO GAUTO o MEAN VOLTAGE CURRENT HOLD z VA 1 2 3 x ovmarfamen r var MODE MAX HOLD TRIG FUNCTION ELEMENT BS E PF 1 2 3E gt t miio deg FUNCTION ELEMENT START STOP RESET o HARMONICS MEMORY Hz 1 235 h FUNCTION ELEMENT se ht O1P3w 3P3W O STORE mom Wind Myth ESP AW Ej vas The explanation given in this section uses WT230 as an example For the differences between the WT210 and the WT230 see section 2 2 Operation Keys and Functions Element Display zx S3 2 3 2 38 Z z iz c FILTER m o n o SCALING AVG LINE FREQ Procedure Turning ON the key lock LOCAL Key lock ON SHIFT
177. EW 1 If either one of the display function V Hz or A Hz is turned on the frequency of the corresponding function is output If both display functions are OFF the voltage frequency of the element assigned to display C is output 2 The number corresponds to input element 1 2 or 3 IM 760401 01E 9 5 uonoung 1ndino u jeuje1x3 IS 9 3 D A Output Option dFLt i integration measurement values are set as default Select this when you want to output integration measurement values Which items are output to which channel is described below Option DA4 DA12 CMP Model 760401 760502 760503 760401 760502 760503 cht w wi wi w wi wi 2 ch2 Wh w2 Wh Wh1 Wh1 ch3 Ah w3 W3 Ah Ah1 Ahi ch4 Hz 1 IW IW Hz Hz Hz 1 ch5 Wh1 Wh1 Output ch6 Wh2 channel ch7 These Wh3 Wh3 ch8 channels Wh EWh ch9 Ano Ah1 Ahi These channels cannot be set ch10 set Ah2 chi1 Ah3 Ah3 chi2 LAh LAh 1 If either one of the display function V Hz or A Hz is turned on the frequency of the corresponding function is output If both display functions are OFF the voltage frequency of the element assigned to display C is output 2 The number corresponds to input element 1 2 or 3 Setting an Original Output Format The items to be output output function and element are set per each output channel Setting the output channel The number of channels depends on the installed options and can be selected
178. EY LOCK OUTPUT O1P3w O 3P3W oO 3P4W O 3V3A wane 11 Press Tj of display C to select function W For details see step 5 of page S 14 12 Press 1 of display C to select input element 1 3 or When input element X is illuminated the sum of active powers measured on input element 1 and 3 is displayed This value is the power consumed by the load when computing the efficiency Each time T is pressed the element indicator character of display C illuminates in the order shown below The wiring system of the circuit on the secondary side of the inverter is three phase three wire and the circuit is connected to input elements 1 and 3 of the WT230 To show the measured value of input element 1 3 or X on display C we illuminate input element 1 3 or X Display C ELEMENT ELEMENT ELEMENT ELEMENT OF C O CO When input element 1 is illuminated the active power measured on input element 1 is displayed When input element 3 is illuminated the active power measured on input element 3 is displayed When input element X is illuminated the sum of active powers measured on input element 1 and 3 is displayed This value is the power consumed by the load when computing the efficiency Tips The WT210 WT230 is equipped with an input filter function for eliminating noise on the measured signal and more accurately measuring the frequency of the measured signal F
179. Ee VOLTAGE CURRENT j HOLD A FUNCTION ELEMENT 123r FUNCTION ELEMENT HARMONICS MEMORY INTEG SET r3 REMOTE a 123r UNCTION ELEMENT j LOCAL SETUP KEY LOCK OUTPUT SHIFT O1P3w O3P3w O3P4W O3V3A The explanation given in this section uses WT230 as an example For the differences between the WT210 and the WT230 see section 2 2 Operation Keys and Functions Element Display FILTER o o o o o Im SCALING AVG LINE FREQ STORE RECALL HARMONICS KEY LOCK 1 Selecting the Display Function Select either V voltage A current or W power by pressing the FUNCTION key FUNCTION FUNCTION FUNCTION FUNCTION FUNCTION FUNCTION V A W CA var TME FUNCTION FUNCTION FUNCTION FUNCTION FUNCTION pm A W PF gt ss FUNCTION FUNCTION FUNCTION FUNCTION FUNCTION FUNCTION V A W V Hz 5 A hz Wh h FUNCTION Wht FUNCTION wv F amp A Wh FUNCTION FUNCTION FUNCTION FUNCTION FUNCTION FUNCTION Aht Ah P amp V n Ant lt Whz and Ahc will light twice and P are displayed on the top of display C You can reverse the order by first pressing the SHIFT key followed by the FUNCTION key 2 Selecting t
180. Efficiency Power consumed by the load W1 W3 x 100 Power supplied by the source W2 Installing the WT230 1 Install the WT230 760503 three phase four wire model Install the inverter to be measured and the motor also Voltage input terminal Current input terminal Input element 1 Input element 2 Input element 3 Load Motor For details see section 3 2 5 IM 760401 01E iU mE i e Le Q Q 0 Wiring the Circuit For details see section 3 5 5 2 Check that the power switch on the WT230 760503 three phase four wire model is OFF 3 Connect the power cord plug to the power connector on the rear panel of the WT230 Use the power cord that came with the package 4 Plug the other end of the power cord into a power outlet 3 pin outlet WT230 Power cord included in the package For details see section 3 6 5 5 Press the power switch at the lower left corner of the front panel A test program starts when the power switch is turned ON After an opening message appears the WT230 is ready to make measurements To suppress the error in the measured value that occurs as time progresses after power up warm up the WT230 for at least 30 minutes before starting measurements S 4 IM 760401 01E Wiring the Circuit For details see section 3 7 5 6 Connect the voltage and current input terminals of input element
181. Efficiency 0 00 to 999 99 0 00 to 999 99 WT230 only Crest factor 9999 9999 Four arithmetic 9999 9999 operation Average active 9999 9999 power Voltage peak 9999 9999 current peak During harmonic measurement Displayed item When the number of displayed When the number of displayed digits is 5 digits is 4 V A W 99999 9999 PF 1 0000 to 1 0000 1 000 to 1 000 V A W relative harmonic content 0 000 to 99 999 to 100 00 to 999 99 0 00 to 99 99 to 100 0 to 999 9 V A THD 0 00 to 99 99 to 100 0 to 999 9 0 00 to 99 99 to 100 0 to 999 9 a suoneoyioeds Vdeg Adeg Phase angle of the 1 order current with respect to the 1 order voltage G180 0 to d180 0 G180 0 to d180 0 Phase angle of the 2 order and higher orders of voltage with respect to the 1 order voltage 180 0 to 180 0 180 0 to 180 0 Phase angle of the 2 order and higher orders of current with respect to the 1 order current 180 0 to 180 0 180 0 to 180 0 The computation accuracy the value calculated from the measured value is one half the display resolution IM 760401 01E 16 9 16 3 Functions Item Specifications Unit symbols m k M V A W VA var deg Hz h TIME 96 Number of displayed digits Select 5 or 4 digits Display update rate During normal measurement Select 0 1 s 0 25 s 0 5 s 1 s 2 s or 5s During harmonic measurement Select
182. Explanation Measurement Mode One of the following measurement modes can be selected for measurement of voltage and current The initial value is RMS Indicator Voltage Current RMS Measures and displays true Measures and displays true RMS RMS value value VOLTAGE MEAN Displays rectified mean value Measures and displays calibrated to the RMS value true RMS value DC Displays DC value obtained by Displays DC value obtained by averaging averaging the input signal the input signal Theoretical Equations RMS This mode is selected to display input voltage or current as a true RMS value 1 7 2 f t input signal 1 f t dt T one period of the input signal 0 VOLTAGE MEAN This mode is selected to display input voltage or current as a rectified mean value calibrated to the RMS value Since a sine wave is used for calibration the value displayed will be the same as that obtained in RMS mode if a sine wave is measured The value displayed will be different from that obtained in RMS mode if a distorted or DC waveform is measured T 1 f t input signal TU 2 2 T f t dt T one period of the input signal 0 DC This mode is selected when the input voltage or current is DC The input signal is averaged and the result is displayed IM 760401 01E 4 1 eBueg 1ueujeunseo y pue suomnipuo 1ueujeunsee y Dunes le 4 1 Selecting the Measurement Mode Typical Waveform Types and Differences in Measured Valu
183. GMA 0 MEASURE NORMAL ITEM WHP ELEMENT1 0 ELEMENT2 0 ELEMENT3 0 SIGMA 0 MEASURE NORMAL ITEM WHM ELEMENT1 0 ELEMENT2 0 ELEMENT3 0 SIGMA 0 MEASURE NORMAL ITEM AH ELEMENT1 0 ELEMENT2 0 ELEMENT3 0 SIGMA 0 MEASURE NORMAL ITEM AHP ELEMENT1 0 ELEMENT2 0 ELEMENT3 0 SIGMA 0 MEASURE NORMAL ITEM AHM ELEMENT1 0 ELEMENT2 0 ELEMENT3 0 SIGMA 0 MEASURE NORMAL ITEM VPK ELEMENT1 0 ELEMENT2 0 ELEMENT3 0 SIGMA 0 MEASURE NORMAL ITEM APK ELEMENT1 0 ELEMENT2 0 ELEMENT3 0 SIGMA 0 MEASURE NORMAL ITEM TIME 0 MATH 0 MEASURE HARMONICS ITEM SYNCHRONIZE 1 VTHD 1 V 1 VCON 1 ATHD 0 A 0 ACON 0 PF 0 W 0 WCON 0 VDEG 0 ADEG 0 MEASURE HEADER 0 gt MEASURE HARMONICS ITEM SYNCHRONIZE 1 VTHD 1 V 1 VCON 1 ATHD 0 A 0 ACON 0 PF 0 W 0 WCON 0 VDEG 0 ADEG 0 MEASure HARMonics BINary Function Syntax Example Description Queries harmonic measurement data set by commands other than MEASure HARMonics ITEM binary format MEASure HARMonics BINary MEASURE HARMONICS BINARY gt 5 number of bytes 5 digits series of data bytes For a description of the output format of harmonic measurement data see page 14 35 MEASure HARMonics ITEM Function Syntax Example Queries all settings related to the communication output items of harmonic measurement data MEASure HARMonics ITEM MEASURE HARMONICS ITEM gt Same result as for MEASure HARMonics MEASure HARMonics ITEM PRESet Function Sy
184. Input terminal Element 1 Element 2 Element 3 Note In 3P3W and 3V3A systems the wiring system may be different between the WT210 230 and another product another digital power meter due to the differences in the input element that is wired To achieve correct measurements check the wiring system IM 760401 01E 3 10 Selecting the Wiring System Applies Only to the WT230 Explanation CHECK RANGE Li UPDATE VOLTAGE CURRENT RMS MODE VOLTAGE MEAN o DC MAX HOLD VA var TIME RANGE AUTO GAUTO o VOLTAGE CURRENT HOLD izae bepa MODE MAX HOLD TRIG FUNCTION ELEMENT FILTER o o m o SCALING AVG LINE FREQ o o o o STORE RECALL HARMONICS KEY LOCK m V k A MW v ENTER B m V PF gt 7 CAL AX 23k a a INTEGRATOR k A deg runcrion ELEMENT START STOP RESET MW HARMONICS MEMORY INTEG SET c mv H123r EP a k A CR emenon mun mw he CO CO sema ET O1P3w 01 3P3w 1 3P 4w 1 3V3A The explanation given in this section uses WT230 as an example For the differences between the WT210 and the WT230 see section 2 2 Operation Keys and Functions Element Display Wiring System Press the WIRING key to select the wiring system The selectable wiring systems vary depending on the model WT210 model 760401 There is no wiring system selection function A single input element Element 1 is
185. L AH M IM 760401 01E S 19 Displaying the Efficiency Displaying the Effici For details see section 5 5 5 6 Displaying Efficiency on display C Press _ on display C to show 45 M on display C If EFFI is selected in step 4 of page S 18 efficiency is displayed The efficiency value is displayed as a percentage Display C FUNCTION FUNCTION FUNCTION FUNCTION FUNCTION FUNCTION V A 9 WV Wz a m V hz V Hz m V Hz m V Hz m V Hz m k A fh kA h k A fh k A h k A fh k MW he M W he MW he MW he MW he LM FUNCTION C ft eA C r1 m V Hz m Pea r kA h kA h Whe M W the M W ht x bellis FUNCTION FUNCTION c rli mV Hz m V Hz J Pav ni k A h kA h Wht MW he M W ht wW A hE A hit A FUNCTION vt FUNCTION FUNCTION FUNCTION Display example of efficiency c r r a r i V H z MJM lp e J J I a h FUNCTION ELEMENT am D zt This completes the setup procedures for wiring the circuit selecting the wiring system selecting the measurement range and displaying the efficiency S 20 IM 760401 01E Displaying the Efficiency Contirming the Displayed Ettici To confirm the efficiency value that is shown we will display the active powe
186. LEAD 153 8 deg PF1 0 897 V1 THD IEC 15 71 A1 THD IEC oF Avg EXP 8 OFF Scaling OFF Crest Factor 3 THHHHHHE Harmonic Voltage List HHH Or Voli V Cont 96 Or Volt V Cont 1 5 69 2 0 09 1 60 3 0 68 12 02 4 0 04 0 74 5 0 32 5 63 6 0 16 277 7 0 06 1 05 8 0 11 2 01 9 0 12 2 15 10 0 09 1 65 Ti 0 17 2 96 12 0 08 1 47 13 0 02 0 39 14 0 01 0 25 15 0 02 0 43 16 0 01 0 25 17 0 04 0 63 18 0 02 0 41 19 0 07 1 15 20 0 07 1 81 21 0 07 1 15 22 0 02 0 31 23 0 11 1 93 24 0 10 1 84 25 0 08 1 39 26 0 05 0 85 27 0 06 1 04 28 0 06 0 97 29 0 08 1 44 30 0 09 1 59 31 0 06 1 03 32 0 02 0 36 33 0 06 1 08 34 0 06 1 06 35 0 00 0 02 36 0 03 0 57 37 0 04 0 77 38 0 04 0 72 39 0 04 0 74 40 0 07 1 24 41 0 01 0 26 42 0 02 0 40 43 0 01 0 14 44 0 06 1 04 45 0 05 0 94 46 0 02 0 43 47 0 07 1 18 48 0 05 0 94 49 0 07 1 30 50 0 06 1 09 Measured Value Harmonic Spectrum Voltage 10m 100m 1 9 24 IM 760401 01E Chapter 10 GP IB Interface Option 10 1 GP IB Interface Functions and Specifications This instrument is equipped with a GP IB interface in accordance with your preference This interface permits remote control from a controller such as a personal computer and output of various data Overview of the GP IB Interface The table below shows functions that are available in each mode Mode Function Addressable mode Listener Functions perf
187. LL source You can query the PLL source input by the command HARMonics SYNChronize MEASure HARMonics VALue MEASURE NORMAL gt MEASURE NORMAL ITEM V ELEMENT1 1 ELEMENT2 1 ELEMENT3 1 SIGMA 1 MEASURE NORMAL ITEM A ELEMENT1 1 ELEMENT2 1 ELEMENT3 1 SIGMA 1 MEASURE NORMAL ITEM W ELEMENT1 1 ELEMENT2 1 ELEMENT3 1 SIGMA 1 MEASURE NORMAL ITEM VA ELEMENT1 0 ELEMENT2 0 ELEMENT3 0 SIGMA 0 MEASURE NORMAL ITEM VAR ELEMENT1 0 ELEMENT2 0 ELEMENT3 0 SIGMA 0 MEASURE NORMAL ITEM PF ELEMENT1 0 ELEMENT2 0 ELEMENT3 0 SIGMA 0 MEASURE NORMAL ITEM DEGREE ELEMENT1 0 ELEMENT2 0 ELEMENT3 0 SIGMA 0 MEASURE NORMAL ITEM VHZ ELEMENT1 0 ELEMENT2 0 ELEMENT3 0 SIGMA 0 MEASURE NORMAL ITEM AHZ ELEMENT1 0 ELEMENT2 0 ELEMENT3 0 SIGMA 0 MEASURE NORMAL ITEM WH ELEMENT1 0 ELEMENT2 0 ELEMENT3 0 SIGMA 0 MEASURE NORMAL ITEM WHP ELEMENT1 0 ELEMENT2 0 ELEMENT3 0 SIGMA 0 Function Queries harmonic measurement data set by MEASURE NORMAL ITEM WHM ELEMENT1 0 WHM commands other than ELEMENT2 0 ELEMENT3 0 SIGMA 0 MEASure HARMonics ITEM ASCII format MEASURE NORMAL ITEM AH ELEMENT1 0 AH Syntax MEASure HARMonics VALue ELEMENT2 0 ELEMENT3 0 SIGMA 0 Example MEASURE HARMONICS VALUE gt MEASURE NORMAL ITEM AHP ELEMENT1 0 60 00E 00 12 01E 00 49 98E 00 ELEMENT2 0 ELEMENT3 0 SIGMA 0 49 62E 00 0 03E 00 5 50E 00 MEASURE NORMAL ITEM AHM ELEMENT1 0 Description The renewal of h
188. MMunicate LOCKout Boolean COMMunicate LOCKout Example COMMUNICATE LOCKOUT ON COMMUNICATE LOCKOUT gt COMMUNICATE LOCKOUT 1 Description This command is used for the serial interface An interface message is available for the GP IB interface Za COMMunicate REMote Function Sets remote ON or local mode OFF Syntax COMMunicate REMote Boolean COMMunicate REMote Example COMMUNICATE REMOTE ON COMMUNICATE REMOTE COMMUNICATE REMOTE 1 Description This command is used for the serial interface An interface message is available for the GP IB interface COMMunicate STATus Function Queries the status of a specified circuit Syntax COMMunicate STATus Example COMMUNICATE STATUS COMMUNICATE STATUS 0 Description The status condition for each bit is as follows bit GP IB Serial 0 permanent Parity error comm error 1 always 0 framing error 2 always 0 break character occurrence 3 and up always 0 always 0 When a status occurs which results in changing of the bits reading it will clear the error 14 16 IM 760401 01E 14 3 Commands COMMunicate VERBose Function Determines whether a response to a query is to be returned in full form for example CONFIGURE VOLTAGE RANGE 150 0E 00 or in abbreviated form for example VOLT RANG 150 0E 00 or queries the current setting Syntax COMMunicate VERBose Boolean CoMMunicate VERBose Example COMMUNICATE VERBOSE ON COMM
189. Model For WT210 EIA single mount 751533 E2 For WT230 EIA single mount 751533 E3 For WT210 JIS single mount 751533 J2 For WT230 JIS single mount 751533 J3 For WT210 EIA dual mount 751534 E2 For WT230 EIA dual mount 751534 E3 For WT210 JIS dual mount 751534 J2 For WT230 JIS dual mount 751534 J3 Installation Procedure 1 Remove the handle The handle on the WT210 is removed by rotating the handle to the handle rest position 8 see the installation position figure on the previous page and pulling out along the rotation axis approximately 10 mm The handle on the WT230 is removed by removing the handle attachment cover and unfastening the handle attachment screws WT210 model 760401 WT230 model 760502 760503 At handle rest position 8 pull out along the rotation axis approximately 10 mm to remove the handle Rotation axis For details on the steps described below see the instructions that are included with the rack mount kit 2 Remove the legs from the bottom panel of the instrument 3 Remove the seals from the side panels of the instrument 4 Attach the rack mount bracket 5 Attach the instrument to the rack Note When rack mounting the instrument allow at least 20 mm of space around the vent holes to prevent internal overheating Make sure to have adequate support for the bottom of the instrument However do not block the v
190. NEAR 8 CONFigure CFACtor Function Syntax Example Sets the crest factor or queries the current setting CONFigure CFACtor lt NRf gt CONFigure CFACtor lt NRf gt 3 6 CONFIGURE CFACTOR 3 CONFIGURE CFACTOR gt CONFIGURE CFACTOR 3 CONFigure CURRent Function Syntax Example Queries all setting values relating to the current range external sensor range CONFigure CURRent CONFIGURE CURRENT CONFIGURE CURRENT RANGE 20 0E 00 AUTO 1 ESCALING ELEMENT1 50 00E 00 ELEMENT2 50 00E 00 ELEMENT3 50 00E 00 CONFigure CURRent AUTO Function Syntax Example Sets the current auto range ON OFF or queries the current setting CONFigure CURRent AUTO lt Boolean gt CONFigure CURRent AUTO CONFIGURE CURRENT AUTO ON CONFIGURE CURRENT AUTO gt CONFIGURE CURRENT AUTO 1 IM 760401 01E 14 19 H pyepueis 2661 2 88r 3331 24 0 BuiAqjduio spuewwosy jo uejs S z spueuiulo uoneoiunuiulo2 14 3 Commands CONFigure CURRent ESCaling Function Queries all scaling constants for the external sensor Syntax CONFigure CURRent ESCaling Example CONFIGURE CURRENT ESCALING gt CONFIGURE CURRENT ESCALING ELEMENT1 50 00E 00 ELEMENT2 50 00E 00 ELEMENT3 50 00E 00 CONFigure CURRent ESCaling ALL Function Sets the scaling constants for the external sensor for all elements at once Syntax CONFigure CURRent ESCaling ALL lt NR gt
191. NGE MODE n B fa t o RANGE UPDATE VOLTAGE CURRENT RMS VOLTAGE DC MAX HOLD Sao SGAUT o A m V VA 4 2 3 x vore cunnewr noto r1 J E k A VAF ruwcriN ELEMENT MORR OMEN THG Vos Yom Va M W TME z Ci ts ol j LE J r1 k A deg ruwcrow ELEMENT ELE HARMONICS MEMORY INTEG SET C 1 j 1 1 n 1 mV 4 2 3 gx Ze x F1 n E lt rti k A h jruwcrow ELEMENT LL am M W hz g Ld Owsw C 3P3W uum n n n n n n n n SCALING AVG LINE FREQ STORE RECALL HARMONICS KEY LOCK Tsp aw D13V3A The explanation given in this section uses WT230 as an example For the differences between the WT210 and the WT230 see section 2 2 Operation Keys and Functions Element Display Procedure Operate the instrument by following the thick lines in the menu below Press the ENTER key to confirm a selection or setting To leave the current menu in the middle of the operation press the key indicated in step 1 The confirmed settings up to that point are kept Setting the Comparator Limit Values in case of Normal Measurement Select the comparator function 1 Display C SETUP 2 Laonn SHIFT OUTPUT B g L v dH 3 Display C f r EL RH 9 ENTER aFF nn d f gdi5P 5 n ay Set the relay Set the type of limit Set the limit value Set the exponent Display
192. ORDer harmonic order IM 760401 01E 14 15 H pyepueis 2661 c 88r 3331 24 0 BurAqjduio spuewwosy jo uejs S z spueuiulo uoneoiunuiulo2 14 3 Commands 14 3 3 COMMunicate Group The commands in the COMMunicate group are used to make settings relating to and inquires about communications There is no front panel key for this function COMMunicate a O HEADer Space oF N lt NRf gt S VERBose Space i OFF Le LO yg lt NRf gt WAIT Space Register B ai REMote Space oF CN lt NRf gt Q LOCKout __ Space i OFF Le ONT lt NRf gt STATus i M COMMunicate Function Queries all the communication settings Syntax COMMunicate Example COMMUNICATE COMMUNICATE HEADER 1 VERBOSE 1 COMMunicate HEADer Function Determines whether a header is to be added for example CONFIGURE VOLTAGE RANGE 150 0E 00 or not for example 150 0E 00 when sending a response to a query or queries the current setting Syntax COMMunicate HEADer lt Boolean gt COMMunicate HEADer Example COMMUNICATE HEADER ON COMMUNICATE HEADER COMMUNICATE HEADER 1 COMMunicate LOCKout Function Sets local lockout ON or OFF Syntax CO
193. OUT H cj External sensor cable CD WT210 WT230 c Shield wire OUTL IM 760401 01E 3 1 ol sjuswainseayy Bunes 310499 le 3 9 Using an External Sensor to Wire the Circuit under Measurement For a shunt type current sensor connect it to the power earth ground side as shown in the figure below If you have to connect the sensor to the non earth side use a wire that is thicker than AWG18 conductive cross sectional area of approx 1 mm between the sensor and the instrument to reduce the effects of common mode voltage Take safety and error reduction in consideration when constructing an external sensor cable V B Voltage input terminal External sensor input connector EXT 9 Shunt type current sensor If the measurement circuit is not grounded and the measured signal is of high frequency or high power the effects of inductance of the shunt type current sensor cable become large In this case use an isolation sensor CT DC CT or clamp Clamp type current sensor V Voltage input terminal LOAD External sensor input connector EXT Make sure you have the polarities correct when making the connections Otherwise the polarity of the measurement current will be reversed and correct measurements cannot be made Be especially careful when connecting the clamp type current sensor be
194. PF gt g CAL 1 2 E E E INTEGRATOR ww E t sramr stor reser START STOP RESET MW HARMONICS MEMORY INTEG SET c V 23 REMOTE a A Function evemenr LOCAL SETUP e KEY LOCK OUTPUT SHIFT L11P3W j 3P3W FILTER ane L13P4W 1 3V3A The explanation given in this section uses WT230 as an example For the differences between the WT210 and the WT230 see section 2 2 Operation Keys and Functions Element Display Im Im m n a Im SCALING AVG LINE FREQ STORE RECALL HARMONICS KEY LOCK Procedure 1 Selecting the Display Function Select either V Hz voltage frequency or A Hz current frequency by pressing the FUNCTION key of display C Display FUNCTION FUNCTION c V A W rosca P amp A FUNCTION FUNCTION FUNCTION V Hz gt A Hz gt Wh FUNCTION Wh FUNCTION wy Whit FUNCTION FUNCTION FUNCTION FUNCTION FUNCTION P amp V a ARE Ant memes e Whz and Ah will light twice 51 and P are displayed on the top of display C You can reverse the order by first pressing the SHIFT key followed by the FUNCTION key FUNCTION 2 Selecting the Input Element Select the input element by pressing the ELEMENT key of display C The operation is the same as the one described on page 5 1 Explanation Measurem
195. PUT IRTIME measurement function NRf 1 0 0 ELEMent lt 1 3 gt SIGMa OFF AOUTput PRESet lt x gt 1 to 12 in case of DA12 i fh n Function Initializes the output items for D A output 1 to 4 in case of DA4 or CMP Syntax AOUTput PREset NORMal INTEGrate normal measurement function V A W NORMal default for normal VA VAR PF DEGRee VHZ AHZ WH WHP WHM measurement AH AHP AHM MATH VPK APK INTEGrate default for integration Example AOUTPUT CHANNEL1 V 1 Example AOUTPUT PRESET NORMAL AOUTPUT CHANNEL1 AOUTPUT a Description Refer to section 9 3 for a description of default CHANNEL1 V 1 D A output items for normal measurement and AOUTPUT CHANNEL2 AOUTPUT i integration CHANNEL2 OFF Note In the following pages the alphanumeric character strings used in the descriptions of the normal measurement function or the harmonic measurement function indicates the following data Normal measurement function V voltage A current W effective power VA apparent power VAR reactive power PF power factor DEGRee phase angle VHZ voltage frequency AHZ current frequency WH watt hour WHP positive watt hour WHM negative watt hour AH current hour AHP positive current hour AHM negative current hour MATH MATH computation result VPK peak voltage APK peak current Harmonic measurement function See page 14 33 Other TIME elapsed integration time
196. Panl r 5L ENTER apne ENTER ARLHS HES End of setting Settings will be initialized E 5 Hn L UU Y n r E 5 n i urREE L ree 12 2 IM 760401 01E 12 2 Initializing Setup Parameters Explanation Initializing Setup Parameters Select YES in the confirmation menu of the setup procedure and press the ENTER key to execute the initialization The initial settings are as follows Item Initial setting Display A Display function V element 1 Display B Display function A element 1 Display C Display function W element 1 Number of displayed digits Display update rate Line filter Frequency filter Measurement synchronization Source Measurement range Measurement mode Wiring method only WT230 Hold MAX hold PC CT scaling constant External sensor scaling constant Averaging Crest factor MATH computing equation Frequency Integration Hi 5 digits 0 25s OFF OFF A Auto range RMS 1P3W OFF OFF P 1 000 C 1 000 F 1 000 scaling ON OFF OFF 50 00A Averaging type exponential attenuation constant 8 Averaging ON OFF OFF 3 WT210 Voltage crest factor WT230 Efficiency VHz Reset condition integration mode manual Integration preset time O hr 00 min 00 s Harmonic measurement option PLL source V1 harmonic distortion factor computation format Storage recalling D A output option Comparator option Data output IEC element 1 Harmonic measurement
197. Press the or V key to select oFF or on The six selectable items appear repetitively by pressing either key 5 Press the ENTER key to confirm the settings procedure o When entering a sign or a value an under bar blinks at the corresponding entry digit if the digit is blank space Explanation This section describes the setup parameters and the limitations regarding the procedures X IM 760101 01E Contents Functional Comparison of the WT210 WT230 and WT200 WT110E WT130 ssssssss ii Checking the Contents of the Package sssssssssssssesseeeeeeeeeneeenee nennen nennen nene iii Safety Precautions ERE vi Structure of the Manual c cccceseceessceeceeeeeeceeeeeeceeeesneeeeseaeeeeecueeescaaecseeeeessaeessseeeseeeeeessneeesoes viii Conventions Used in This Manual c cc cccssscceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeecseneeeceneeeseaaeeseaeeeseaeeescneeessneeeseeess ix Startup Guide A Chapter 1 Wiring the Circuit I ed A ee S 2 Selecting the Wiring System sesssssssssssseeeeeeneenee nennen nennen nennen nennen S 8 Selecting the Measurement Range 2 e cesceee cee eeeceeeee teen eseeeeecaeeeaeseeeeaeeseeaeseeneaeneeesenaes S 9 Displaying Voltage Current and Active Power sesssssseseeeneennenen eene S 12 Displaying the EfficlenGy ierit tertii tret beth e a Resta npe Re ae e A EERE S 18 Functional Overview and Digital Display 1
198. R ic End of setting A Ex v m dg AE g IM 760401 01E 4 17 eBueg 1ueujeunseo y pue suomnipuo puawainsean Buas le 4 7 Using the Averaging Function Setting Averaging ON OFF Set the averaging function 1 Display C SETUP gt E F v n m r nr w DisplayC 5 AHG ENTER error ENTER scare J iain End of setting Ern MIL EYPE Pair Sk f Ime B5uabL rtb5a Ir ur Ak E LF Explanation About the Averaging Function This function performs exponential averaging or moving averaging on measurement values When the displayed values are unsteady due to big fluctuations in power source or load or due to the low frequency of the input signal this function is useful to stabilize the displayed values for easier reading The measurement items that are averaged directly are V voltage A current and W active power When using those measured V A and W values to calculate other measurement items those items receive the effects of the averaging Since certain values would lose their meaning if they were averaged such as the peak Vpk Apk values averaging is not performed on them Selecting the Type of Averaging The following two selections are available The initial value is Lin Exponential Averaging EP Exponential averaging is expressed by the following equation D Dn Mn Dn 1
199. R Sets the wiring system inquires about the current setting Syntax WR m terminator m 2 1P3W for WT230 only 3 3P3W for WT230 only 4 3P4W for WT230 model 760503 only 5 3V3A for WT230 model 760503 only Query WR terminator Example WR2 Description Parameter error 12 will occur if an illegal value is set 13 14 IM 760401 01E 13 1 Commands YC YC Sets the display channel while the comparator function is ON inquires about the current setting Syntax YC m terminator m indicates the channel number for display in case of single mode m 1 Displays limit and measurement value on display 1 2 Displays limit and measurement value on display 2 3 Displays limit and measurement value on display 3 4 Displays limit and measurement value on display 4 in case of dual mode m 1 2 Displays limit and measurement value on display 1 and 2 respectively m 3 4 Displays limit and measurement value on display 3 and 4 respectively Query YC terminator Example YC1 Description Parameter error 12 will occur if m is set to an illegal value YM YM Sets the mode of the comparator function inquires about the current setting Syntax YM m terminator m indicates the display mode m 0 Single mode 1 Dual mode Query YM terminator Example YMO Description Parameter error 12 will occur if m is set to an illegal value YO YO Sets the comparator function ON OFF or inq
200. RING gt CONFIGURE WIRING P1W3 The selections stand for the following P1W3 Single phase three wires only for WT230 P3W3 Three phase three wires only for WT230 P3W4 Three phase four wires only for WT230 3 phase 4 wire model V3A3 Three voltage three current only for WT230 3 phase 4 wire model s qe G lt x gt MODE Ye lt Space gt leme ENG su FUNCtion Space Display function T ELEMent Space NRf CS TD RESolution Space HGH 29 DISPlay lt x gt DISPlay lt x gt ELEMent Function Queries all the display settings Function Sets the element to be displayed queries the Syntax DISPlay lt x gt current setting lt x gt 1 to 3 Syntax DISPlay lt x gt ELEMent lt NRf gt SIGMa 1 Display A DISPlay lt x gt ELEMent 2 Display B lt x gt 1 to 3 3 Display C 1 Display A Example DISPlayl gt DISPLAY1 MODE VALUE 2 Display B FUNCTION V ELEMENT 1 RESOLUTION HIGH 3 Display C lt NRf gt 1 WT210 single phase model 1 3 WT230 three phase three wire model 1 to 3 WT230 three phase four wire model Example DISPLAY1 ELEMENT 1 DISPLAY1 ELEMENT DISPLAY1 ELEMENT 1 14 22 IM 760401 01E 14 3 Commands DISPlay lt x gt FUNCtion Function Sets the function to be displayed queries
201. Request Control Not used always o Bit 0 OPC Operation Complete Set to 1 when the operation designated by the OPC command has been completed Bit Masking To mask a bit in the standard event register so that it does not cause bit 5 ESB of the status byte to change set the corresponding bit in the standard event enable register to 0 For example to mask bit 2 QYE so that ESB will not be set to 1 even if a query error occurs set bit 2 of the standard event enable register to o This can be done using the ESE command To inquire whether each bit of the standard event enable register is 1 or 0 use the ESE For details of the ese command refer to 14 3 14 46 IM 760401 01E 14 4 Status Report Operation of the Standard Event Register Reading from the Standard Event Register The standard event register is provided for eight The contents of the standard event register can be different kinds of event which can occur inside the read by the ESR command After completion of the instrument Bit 5 ESB of the status byte is set to 1 read out the register will be cleared when any of the bits in this register becomes 1 or when the corresponding bit of the standard event Clearing the Standard Event Register enable register becomes 1 The standard event register is cleared in the following three cases When the contents of the standard event register are read using ESR
202. Response messages are expressed in the following form Form Example N lt N digit decimal value gt lt Data byte string 500012ABCDEFGHIJKL N Indiates that the data is Block data N is an ASCII character string number digits which indicates the number of data bytes that follow lt N digits decimal value gt Indicates that number of bytes of data Example 00012 12bytes lt Data byte string gt The actual data Example ABCDEFGHIJKL Data is comprised of 8 bit values 0 to 255 This means that the ASCII code OAH which stands for NL can also be a code used for data Hence care must be taken when programming the controller 14 2 6 Synchronization with the Controller There are two kinds of command overlap commands and sequential commands Execution of an overlap command may start before execution of the previously sent command is completed For example if the next program message is transmitted after the measurement range has been changed and an query is made about the measurement data it may occur that regardless whether the measurement data have been updated MEASure NORMal VALue will be executed The display becomes no data and 9 91E 37 Not a number will be output CONFigure VOLTage RANGe 60V MEASure NORMal VALue lt PMT gt In this case synchronization with the time at which the update of measurement data is completed must be acc
203. Rf gt e sigma gt Space OFF 9 lt NRf gt e TIME lt Space gt OFF D lt NRf gt C gt PRESet gt Space VPATtern p APATtern q WPATtern q DPATtern Loa ecu SYNChronize lt Space gt OFF gt lt NRf gt lt Harmonic measurement gt function gt go e 14 28 IM 760401 01E 14 3 Commands k HEADer lt Space gt OFF P lt NRf gt MEASure MEASure HARMonics Function Queries all the settings related to measurement Function Queries all settings related to harmonic computation data measurement data Syntax MEASure Syntax MEASure HARMonics Example Example of WT230 three phase four Example MEASURE HARMONICS wire model MEASURE gt MEASURE NORMAL ITEM V ELEMENT1 1 ELEMENT2 1 ELEMENT3 1 SIGMA 1 MEASURE NORMAL ITEM A ELEMENT1 1 ELEMENT2 1 ELEMENT3 1 SIGMA 1 MEASURE NORMAL ITEM W ELEMENT1 1 ELEMENT2 1 ELEMENT3 1 SIGMA 1 MEASURE NORMAL ITEM VA ELEMENT1 0 ELEMENT2 0 ELEMENT3 0 SIGMA 0 MEASURE NORMAL ITEM VAR ELEMENT1 0 ELEMENT2 0 ELEMENT3 0 SIGMA 0 MEASURE NORMAL ITEM PF ELEMENT1 0 ELEMENT2 0 ELEMENT3 0 SIGMA 0 MEASURE NORMAL ITEM DEGREE ELEMENT1 0 ELEMENT2 0 ELEMENT3 0 SIGMA 0 MEASURE NORMAL ITEM VHZ ELEMENT1 0 ELEMENT2 0 ELEMENT3 0 SIGMA 0 MEASURE NORMAL ITEM AHZ ELEMENT1 0 ELEMENT2 0 ELEMENT3 0 SIGMA 0 MEASURE NORMAL ITEM WH ELEMENT1 0 ELEMENT2 0 ELEMENT3 0 SI
204. SCALING AVG LINE FREQ STORE RECALL HARMONICS KEY LOCK Procedure 1 1 Selecting the display Function Select either A efficiency crest factor four arithmetical operations average active power P voltage peak value or P current peak value by pressing the FUNCTION key Display FUNCTION FUNCTION FUNCTION FUNCTION FUNCTION FUNCTION c V gt A W V hz gt A Hz gt Wh FUNCTION Wh FUNCTION wv paj F amp A Wh FUNCTION FUNCTION FUNCTION FUNCTION FUNCTION FUNCTION Aht At AR P amp VS n Wh and Ah will light twice 7 and are displayed on the top of display C You can reverse the order by first pressing the SHIFT key followed by the FUNCTION key 2 Selecting the Input Element To display the peak value press the ELEMENT key of display C and select the input element of which the peak value is to be displayed The procedure is the same as shown on page 5 1 IM 760401 01E 5 7 synseH uonejnduio pue synsey 1ueuieunseo y BuiAejdsiq eo 5 5 Displaying Efficiency WT230 Only Crest Factor Four Arithmetic Operation Value Average Active Power and Peak Value Explanation Displaying the Peak Value P is displayed at the front of display C The peak value of voltage is displayed when the unit display is V the peak value of current is displayed when the unit display is A Maximum displ
205. Syntax MEASure NORMal ITEM wire model Example MEASURE NORMAL ITEM gt Results are the same as for MEASure NORMal 14 30 IM 760401 01E 14 3 Commands MEASure Function Syntax Example Description MEASure Function Syntax Example MEASure NORMal ITEM PRESet Sets the ON OFF pattern for all communication outputs of the normal measurement function MEASure NORMal ITEM PRESet NORMa1 INTEGrate CLEar MEASURE NORMAL ITEM PRESET NORMAL The following three patterns can be selected The same setting applies to the current all elements or gt NORMa1 V A W gt ON others gt OFF INTEGrate W WH AH TIME gt ON others gt OFF CLEar all items gt OFF NORMa1 ITEM TIME MATH Sets the communication output of elapsed integration time MATH ON OFF queries about the current setting MEASure NORMal ITEM TIME MATH lt Boolean gt MEASure NORMal ITEM TIME MATH MEASURE NORMAL ITEM TIME OFF MEASURE NORMAL ITEM TIME gt MEASURE NORMAL ITEM TIME 0 NORMal ITEM normal measurement function Function Syntax Example Description MEASure Queries communication output settings of the normal measurement function MEASure NORMal ITEM normal measurement function normal measurement function V A W VA VAR PF DEGRee VHZ AHZ WH WHP WHM AH AHP AHM VPK APK MEASURE NORMAL ITEM V
206. T210 WT230 at this point is the calibration value with higher accuracy Calibration at a frequency other than 60 Hz 7 To perform calibration at a frequency other than 60 Hz set the frequencies of the phase shifter and the standard and carry out the procedure above in a similar fashion Make sure to use a standard that can guarantee adequate accuracy against the output frequency As a guideline use a measuring instrument that has three to four times the accuracy of the specifications of the WT210 WT230 IM 760401 01E 15 9 a Bunoouse qnou pue soueuajuleyy 15 2 Calibration Calibration of D A Output Preparation 1 Connect the AC voltage standard to the voltage terminal of this instrument The wiring method is the same as when adjustments are carried out see page 15 4 However calibration of the WT230 can also be carried out when only element 1 is connected 2 Setthe D A output of this instrument to V1 for each channel Set the crest factor to 3 Calibrating 1 Connect the D A output terminal corresponding to channel 1 of the external I O connector in the same fashion as when making adjustments 2 Setthe voltage range of the WT210 WT230 to an appropriate range 3 Setthe output voltage of the voltage standard to match the positive rated value of the rated range of the WT210 WT230 4 Read the value displayed on the DMM This readout is the calibration value for the positive D A output 5 Setthe output
207. TRIG CAL INTEGRATOR START STOP RESET HARMONICS MEMORY INTEG SET c3 REMOTE a LOCAL SETUP D 1P3W 3P3W L13P4W O 3V3A WIRING Wi iP3W 11 3P3W c 1P3 E 3P3w O1P3w O 3P3W O1P3w O 3P3W L13P4W O 3V3A o 3P4w O 3V3A I 3P4W O 3V3A O 3P4W W 3V3A S 8 IM 760401 01E Selecting the Measurement Range lt lt For details see section 4 4 gt gt After selecting the writing system select the measurement range voltage and current ranges When you select and confirm the measurement range the measured values are indicated on the WT230 displays Selecting the Voltage Range a INTEGRA FUNCTION ELEMENT Y Ei pee HARMONICS MEMORY AT L1 pls VOLT OL els Br DnD ri gc RANG 707 E c TMM X 123E 300 Zi LI LI c REMOTE FUNCTION ELEMENT LOCAL SETUP KEY LOCK OUTPUT D11P3W O 3P3W O 3P4W O 3V3A For a description of the other digital numbers and characters that are displayed on the 7 segment LED of each display see section 1 3 1 Press o The voltage range selection menu appears Display C shows the voltage range selection with blinking indication If the voltage range had been set to FA u o before this step AUTO indicator for the voltage range is illuminated the voltage range that is automatically selected from the measured voltage is displayed blinking AUTO indicator for cu
208. TUP gt gt LEIGES CE LER v HHL ij SERLE ee a cs ft PoircSe 3 Display C nREH ENTER gt E F F wr230 only Yn alj LF H i v m rt5a LF Hg bf Ht E f CF H j This is an example for the WT230 I rc re pi 760503 The display varies EX ET JE depending on the number of installed LF Hg elements EF ia Je Ah ENTER End of settin A b T Ay I h Alb RIb g ATZI HH i C Ay veg This is an example for the WT230 we ere 760503 The display varies AH 3 depending on the number of installed elements AH dg IM 760401 01E 4 25 eBueg 1ueujeunseo y pue SUOI IPUOD puawainsean Buas le 4 11 Performing Four Arithmetical Operation Explanation Four Arithmetical Operations Function The following computation results can be shown on display C 5 is displayed at the front of the value when the computation results are being displayed Arb A B H h A B Hub AxB Alb A B Alb 2 A B AQ b wM e B A and indicates the displayed value on display A and B H 5 adds the values shown on display A and B and shows the result on display C Note The meanings of the displayed symbols are as follows L Addition Subtraction x Multiplication Division Exponent When the display A function is indicating the elapsed integration time TIME the computed result indication is no data 5 If the value of the displ
209. UNICATE VERBOSE gt COMMUNICATE VERBOSE 1 COMMunicate WAIT Function Waits until one of the specified extended event occurs Syntax COMMunicate WAIT lt Register gt lt Register gt 0 to 65535 For a description of the extended event register refer to page 14 47 Example COMMUNICATE WAIT 65535 Description For a description of synchronization using COMMunicate WAIT refer to page 14 9 COMMunicate WAIT Function Generates a response when one of the specified extended events occurs Syntax COMMunicate WAIT Register lt Register gt 0 to 65535 For a description of the extended event register refer to page 14 47 Example COMMUNICATE WAIT 65535 gt 1 IM 760401 01E 14 17 H pyepueis 2661 2 88r 3331 24 0 BuiAqjduio spuewwosy jo uejs S z spueuiulo uoneoiunuiulo2 14 3 Commands 14 3 4 CONFigure Group The CONFigure group relates to the measurement settings The same function can be performed using the WIRING key VOLTAGE key CURRENT key MODE SHIFT VOLTAGE key and SETUP key except for PnLrSt u rAtE on the front panel The external sensor input range and external sensor scaling values are only vald if equipped with the external sensor option EX1 or EX2 Hom WIRing gt A lt Space gt P1W3 P Pawa_ Craw heC MODE Spaces C RMS D JG i VOLTage 20 RANGe 4 Space lt Voltage gt p 7 AUTO
210. W 600 00 300 00 W 600 00 W 1 2000 kW 3 0000kW 6 0000 kW 12 000 kW Voltage Current Range Range V 5 0000mA 10 000mA 20 000mA 50 000mA 100 00 mA 200 00 mA 15 000 75 000 mW 150 00 mW 300 00 mW 750 00 mW 1 5000 W_ 3 0000 W 30 000 150 00 mW 300 00 mW 600 00 mW 1 5000 W 3 0000 W 6 0000 W 60 000 300 00 mW 600 00 mW 1 2000 W 3 0000 W 6 0000 W 12 000 W 150 00 750 00 mW 1 5000W 3 0000 W 7 5000 W 15 000 W 30 000 W 300 00 1 5000 W 3 0000W 6 0000 W 15 000 W 30 000 W W 60 000 W 600 00 3 0000 W 6 0000 W 12 000 W 30 000 W 60 000 W W 120 00 W When the crest factor is set to 6 Voltage Current Range Range V 250 00mA 500 00mA 1 0000A 2 5000 A 5 0000A 10 000 A 7 5000 1 8750W 3 7500W 7 5000 W 18 750 W 37 500W 75 000 W 15 000 3 7500W 7 5000W 15 000 W 37 500 W 75 000 W 150 00 W 30 000 7 5000W 15 000W 30 000 W 75 000 W 150 00W 300 00 W 75 000 18 750 W 37 500W 75 000 W 187 50 W 375 00 W 750 00 W 150 00 37 500 W 75 000 W 150 00 W 375 00 W 750 00 W 1 5000 kW 300 00 75 000 W 150 00W 300 00 W 750 00 W 1 5000 kW 3 0000 kW Voltage Current Range Range V 2 5000mA 5 0000mA 10 000mA 25 000mA 50 000 mA 100 00 mA 7 5000 18 750 mW 37 500 mW 75 000 mW 187 50mW 375 00 mW 750 00 mW 15 000 37 500 mW 75 000 mW 150 00 mW 375 00 mW 750 00 mW 1 5000 W 30 000 75 000 mW 150 00 mW 300 00 mW 750 00mW 1 5000 W 3 0000 W 75 000 187 50 mW 375 00 mW 750 00 mW 1 8750 W 3 7500 W 7 5000 W 150 00 375 00 mW 750 00 mW 1 5000 W 3 7500 W 7 5000 W 15 000 W 30
211. W active power of harmonic signal A current of harmonic signal PF power factor of fundamental signal V total harmonic distortion of voltage THD relative harmonic content of each harmonic order A total harmonic distortion of current THD relative harmonic content of each harmonic order W relative harmonic content of each harmonic order of active power Vdeg phase angle of each harmonic component of voltage Vdeg phase angle of each harmonic component of current VHz frequency of the voltage set to be the PLL synchronization source AHz frequency of the current set to be the PLL synchronization source For details see Displayed Items on page 7 1 Display area Display A V A W harmonic order Display B V A W PF V A96 W Vdeg Adeg Display C V A W VHz AHz Element Select the input element or X on the WT230 Displays the display item of the selected element Maximum display display range During normal measurement Displayed item When the number of displayed When the number of displayed digits is 5 digits is 4 V A W VA va 99999 9999 PF 1 0000 to 1 0000 1 000 to 1 000 deg G180 0 to d180 0 G180 0 to d180 0 VHz AHz 99999 9999 Wh Whe Ah Ah When the unit is MWh or MAh 999999 999999 99999 for negative watt hour and ampere hour When the unit is other than MWh or MAh 99999 99999 TIME See Note on page 6 8
212. W T210 W T 230 Digital Power Meter USER S MANUAL YOKOGAWA 4 Yokogawa Electric Corporation IM 760401 01E 4th Edition Product Registration Thank you for purchasing YOKOGAWA products YOKOGAWA provides registered users with a variety of information and services Please allow us to serve you best by completing the product registration form accessible from our homepage http tmi yokogawa com PIM 103 03E Notes Trademarks Revisions 4th Edition May 2009 YK Thank you for purchasing the YOKOGAWA WT210 or WT230 Digital Power Meter This user s manual contains useful information about the functions operating procedures and handling precautions of the instrument To ensure correct use please read this manual thoroughly before beginning operation After reading the manual keep it in a convenient location for quick reference whenever a question arises during operation The contents of this manual are subject to change without prior notice as a result of continuing improvements to the instrument s performance and functions The figures given in this manual may differ from the actual screen Every effort has been made in the preparation of this manual to ensure the accuracy of its contents However should you have any questions or find any errors please contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer Copying or reproducing all or any part of the contents of this manual without the permission of Yokogawa Electric Corp
213. X1 option When the crest factor is set to 6 Current 250 mA to 10 A 0 25 0 5 1 2 5 5 or 10 A The following settings available only on WT210 2 5 mA to 100 mA 2 5 m 5m 10m 25 m 50 m or 100 mA lt Voltage gt 25 mV to 100 mv 25 50 100 mv for EX2 option 1 25 V to 5 V 1 25 2 5 5 V for EX1 option Setting of current range query CONFIGURE CURRENT RANGE 20A CONFIGURE CURRENT RANGE CONFIGURE CURRENT RANGE 20 0E 00 Setting of external sensor input range query in case of EX2 option CONFIGURE CURRENT RANGE EXTERNAL 50MV CONFIGURE CURRENT RANGE gt CONFIGURE CURRENT RANGE EXTERNAL 50 0E 03 CONFigure FILTer Function Syntax Example Sets the frequency filter ON OFF queries the current setting CONFigure FILTer lt Boolean gt CONFigure FILTer CONFIGURE FILTER OFF CONFIGURE FILTER CONFIGURE FILTER 0 CONFigure LFILter Function Syntax Example Sets the line filter ON OFF queries the current setting CONFigure LFILter Boolean CONFigure LFILter CONFIGURE LFILTER OFF CONFIGURE LFILTER gt CONFIGURE LFILTER 0 CONFigure MHOLd STATe Function Syntax Example Sets the MAX hold ON OFF queries the current setting CONFigure MHold STATe lt Boolean gt CONFigure MHold STATe CONFIGURE MHOLD STATE OFF CONFIGURE MHOLD STATE gt CONFIGURE MHOLD STATE 0 14 20 IM
214. age Range described earlier the current range on display B is set to 500 0 mA On the WT210 the current range is set to 100 0 mA The following procedure primarily describes the steps for the WT230 Display A CAL Display B 500 0 mA 100 0 mA on the WT210 Display C Measured value The measured value is displayed using 5 digits Set the output current of the generator so that the standard power meter reads 0 5000 A Wait for the measured value on display C to stabilize Even in stable condition the value fluctuates up to approximately 1 digit Press the ENTER key The adjustment value is confirmed Display B shows the next current range Display A CAL Display B UA Display C Measured value The measured value is displayed using 5 digits Set the output current of the standard according to the current range shown on display B and output the signal Repeat steps 4 to 6 to adjust the current range shown in the table below The type and the order of the current ranges that are displayed are fixed Current Range Output Current of the Standard Shown on display B 100 0 mA 100 00 mA Applies only to the WT210 500 0 mA 500 00 mA 1 000A 1 0000 A 2 000 A 2 0000 A 5 000 A 5 0000 A F 1 000 A 1 0000 A F indicates that the line filter is ON Turn OFF the output of the standard IM 760401 01E 15 3 a Bunooys jqnou pue soueusjuleyy 15 1 Adjustments Press The SHIFT key and dis
215. al meaning Q gt 12 IM 760401 01E S 15 iU mE i e Le Q 0 Displaying Voltage Current and Active Power WUA There are cases when we wish to measure as a voltage on the secondary side of the inverter the converted rms voltage rectified mean value calibrated to the rms value that is derived by summing the absolute values of the voltage over a single period dividing the result by the time of one period and making a conversion The WT230 provides a function for measuring the rectified mean value calibrated to the rms value of only the voltage For the setup procedure see section 4 1 Selecting the Measurement Mode Displaying the C he Secondary Side of the Display B Carry out the following procedure to display the current of the secondary side of the inverter on display B Function indicator Element indicator RANGE GAUTO GAUTO o 1213 rx VOLTAGE CURRENT HOLD MODE MAX HOLD TRIG VAF FUNCTION ELEMENT CAL INTEGRATOR RESET MEMORY INTEG SET a FUNCTION ELEMENT LOCAL SETUP hs LJ LJ KEY LOCK OUTPUT SHIFT OO 1P3w O 3P3W O 3P4w O 3V3A nons 9 Press Tj of display B to select function A For details see step 3 of page S 11 10 Press of display B to select input element 1 3 or gt Each time T is pressed the element indicator character of display B illuminates in the o
216. alue of current MATH computation t1 elapsed integration time Ph positive watt hour Wh Ph negative watt hour Wh Ah positive ampere hour Ah negative ampere hour no output 1 If either one of the display function V Hz or A Hz is turned on the frequency of the corresponding function is output If both display functions are OFF the voltage frequency of the element assigned to display C is output 2 For details concerning the positive value of the ampere hour refer to page 6 3 Setting the element corresponds to column B in the procedure The element setting depends on the model and is as follows The initial value is 4 WT210 760401 no such element setting available WT230 760502 element can be selected from 1 3 or 4 WT230 760503 element can be sleected from 1 2 3 or 4 The element number 4 represents Setting the Output Item in case of Harmonic Measurement The setting is carried out in the same way as described in section 9 9 Outputting to an External Plotter or External Printer However graph printing is not possible for communication output Only numerical data is output For details refer to page 9 23 9 24 For a description of the output format in addressable mode or talk only mode see 10 9 and 10 10 For a description of the output pattern in 488 2 mode see the description for the MEASure HARMonics ITEM PRESet command page 14 29 IM 760401 01E 10 15
217. an be returned as a program message to this instrument Header Interpretation Rules This instrument interprets the header received according to the following rules Mnemonics are not case sensitive Example ruNCtion can also be written as function Or Function The lower case part of a header can be omitted Example Function can also be written as FUNCT Or FUNC Ifthe header ends with a question mark the command is a query It is not possible to omit the question mark Example ruNCtion cannot be abbreviated to anything shorter than runc Ifthe x at the end of a mnemonic is omitted it is assumed to be 1 Example If ELEMent lt x gt is written as ELEM this represents ELEMent1 Any part of a command enclosed by can be omitted Example CONFigure SCALing STATe ON can be written as SCAL ON However a part enclosed by cannot be omitted if is located at the end of an upper level query Example scALing and SCALing STATe belong to different upper level query levels 14 6 IM 760401 01E 14 2 Program Format 14 2 4 Responses On receiving a query from the controller this instrument returns a response message to the controller A response message is sent in one of the following two forms Response consisting of a header and data If the query can be used as a program message without any change a command h
218. and A Far v v E v n E Pr nt hHndg Far d f 4BBZ ij hHnd3 f Far bod od 1 if 1 i Nf i hind Set the terminator Set the baud rate For mode 7 11 aor or 4BBg Display C Display C ENTER End of setting r LXI Fr ae LCL Tio ENTER 6 96ou i L mr E 5 HB re M h gumm i 5 u f Set the interval Display C 11 mour min sec 14 ENTER LH HB OO ENTER End of setting 12 V sets the value For mode n tonl 4 Select this when setting commands according to IEEE 488 2 1992 13 V shifts digits SHIFT gt IM 760401 01E 11 5 uondo e eyeju jeas B 11 3 Setting the Mode Handshaking Method Data Format and Baud Rate Explanation Mode selection no Mode Setting Refer to page 11 1 for more details Handshaking To use an RS 232 C interface to transfer data between this instrument and a computer it is necessary to use certain procedures by mutual agreement to ensure the proper transfer of data These procedures are called handshaking Various handshaking systems are available depending on the computer to be used the same handshaking system must be used for both computer and this instrument This instrument allows you to choose any handshaking method from the following eight using the panel keys Handshaking method combinations a circle indicates that the f
219. ands before the IEEE 488 2 Standard 13 1 Commands risit iia Gre dedeckbendenbdauacs a aa dese E 13 1 13 2 Before Programming ie irit bri Lore epar inar rre ecu EEEE 13 16 13 3 Sample Program Image ssssssssseeeeeeeennen nnnm nennen nnne enne 13 18 13 4 Sample Program Initialization Error and Execution Functions 13 19 13 5 Sample Program Output of Normal Measurement Data 13 22 13 6 Sample Program Output of Harmonic Measurement Data ssssssse 13 25 Chapter 14 Communication Commands 2 System of Commands Complying to the IEEE 488 2 1992 Standard 14 1 Overview of IEEE 488 2 1992 sssssssssssssessseeeeenneeneee neret nnne nene 14 1 14 2 Program Format nere PIHHHDU ee ME DENIM IEEE 14 3 14 2 1 Symbols Used in Syntax Descriptions eeee 14 3 T422 MESSAGES iei nete e eee ere ra eee 14 3 14 2 3 GCOMMAMOS nere ei pergis lace det eos Een Rx nl dell plate dates ecd iun 14 5 14 2 4 RESPONSES ice ei e ir etx ate Dehesa rede EEEa i 14 7 I 5 gt Data p E 14 7 14 2 6 Synchronization with the Controller seeeen 14 9 14 3 COMMMAMNGS sisi G 14 11 14 31 Command EISE ioci er ete ertet aeree aN edt chet eaaceecceneanes 14 11 14 3 2 AQUTput GEOUD eisien onp ecco Eo eee Ue EE eek e EL eta nee 14 15 14 3 3 COMMunicate Group esses nennen n
220. any trm Current waveform E a DU ai i Zerocross is the timing at which the synchronization source crosses over when rising or falling the level zero center value of the amplitude Because it may be impossible to stabilize and calculate the zero cross if the synchronization source waveform is distorted and superimposed with harmonics and noise the measured voltage and current values may be unstable In this case change the settings for the synchronization source and turn ON the frequency filter See section 4 3 for information on the frequency filter As in the inverter example above turn ON the frequency filter even if high frequency components were superimposed When measuring DC signals the measurement interval may be erroneous if noise crosses level zero and is recognized erroneously as a zero cross by the true signal To avoid this turn OFF the synchronization source By turning the synchronization source OFF sampling data from all intervals of the display update rate are used to calculate the measured values If the period of the voltage or current signal cannot be detected even when A or V is selected the sampled data over the entire period of the display update rate is averaged Current waveform 4 4 IM 760401 01E 4 3 Turning ON OFF the Input Filter Procedure CHECK RANGE MODE El E o o n UPDATE VOLTAGE CURRENT RMS VOLTAGE DC MAX HOLD MEAN A _
221. apter set 758931 Two pieces in one set This type holds the measurement wires using screws Rack mount kit For details see section 3 2 Spare Parts Sold Separately The spare parts below are available for purchase separately Name Model Q ty Description Power fuse A1347EF 2 250 V 1 A time lag IM 760401 01E Safety Precautions This instrument is an IEC safety class instrument provided with terminal for protective earth grounding The following general safety precautions must be observed during all phases of operation If the instrument is used in a manner not specified in this manual the protection provided by the instrument may be impaired Yokogawa Electric Corporation assumes no liability for the customer s failure to comply with these requirements For your safety the following symbols and signal words are used on this instrument AN tp pO ed ep Handle with care To avoid injury death of personnel or damage to the instrument the operator must refer to the explanation in the user s manual or service manual Protective earth terminal To ensure safe operation if the current to be measured exceeds 7 A rms value use a cable or conductor that is capable of running a current higher than the current to be measured and be sure to connect the protective earth before operating the instrument The protective earth terminal is provided on the rear panel of prod
222. ard event register message terminator and clears it at the same time For details on the registers and queues refer Syntax ESR to section 14 4 Example ESR gt 32 MESE Description Each bit is expressed as a decimal number Itis possible to ascertain the type of event Function Sets the value for the standard event enable j which has occurred while SRQ is occuring register or queries the current setting For example if ESR 32 is returned this PRESE TESE NESE means that the standard event register is ee 00100000 i e the SRQ has occurred due Pe Oaa to a command syntax error a a Le 33 f a query is made using ESR the standard SORA E event register will be cleared For details referring the standard event enable register refer to page 14 46 14 42 IM 760401 01E 14 3 Commands IDN Function Syntax Example Description OPC Function Syntax OPC Function Syntax OPT Function Syntax Example Description PSC Function Syntax Example Description RST Function Syntax Example Description SRE Function Syntax Queries the instrument model IDN IDN YOKOGAWA 760503 0 F1 01 A reply consists of the following information lt Model gt lt Type gt lt Serial No and Firmware version In actuality Serial No is not returned When OPC is sent this command sets bit 0 the OPC bit of the standard event register to 1 This
223. armonic component of the current W Shows each rms computed value of the 1st to 50th harmonic component of the active power Computation Equation n Vay Vi A J An W EWk Vk Ak Wk Each component of 1st to 50th order of voltage current and active power k Analysis order n Maximum order The maximum order depends on the fundamental frequency of the input set as the PLL source Refer to Chapter 16 for more details V Hz Shows the fundamental frequency of the voltage of the PLL source This frequency applies only to the element selected as PLL source For details regarding the PLL source setting refer to page 7 4 The measurement range is the same as in case of normal measurement The range of fundamental frequencies in case of harmonic measurement is 40 to 440 Hz However depending on internal timing there are cases where measurements in the 20 to 700 Hz range can be performed AHz Shows the fundamental frequency of the current of the PLL source The rest is the same as in case of V Hz Note n case you select an input element using the ELEMENT key which is not the assigned element for the harmonic measurement or you selected a display function which is not being measured then the bar display appears When the harmonic measurement function is turned ON on the WT230 pressing the ELEMENT key will not result in moving to When pressing the FUNCTION key on display A and the display function beco
224. armonic measurement data ELEMENT2 0 ELEMENT3 0 SIGMA 0 TX output here occurs when bitO UPD of the MEASURE NORMAL ITEM VPK ELEMENTl 0 VPK condition register refer to page 14 47 changes ELEMENT2 0 ELEMENT3 0 SIGMA 0 E from high to low For more details refer to 14 2 6 MEASURE NORMAL ITEM APK ELEMENT1 0 APK For the output format of harmonic ELEMENT2 0 ELEMENT3 0 SIGMA 0 r y measurement data refer to page 14 33 MEASURE NORMAL ITEM TIME 0 MATH 0 MEASure HEADer MEASure NORMal BINary Function Turns ON OFF the additional information output Function Queries normal measurement data set by when outputting measured computed data in commands other than MEASure NORMal binary format ITEM binary format Syntax MEASure HEADer Boolean Syntax MEASure NORMal BINary Example MEASURE HEADER OFF Example MEASURE NORMAL BINARY MEASURE HEADER 5 number of bytes 5 gt MEASURE HEADER 0 digits series of data bytes Description For a description of the additional information Description For a description of the output format of normal see page 14 35 measurement data see page 14 35 MEASure NORMal1 MEASure NORMal ITEM Function Queries all settings related to normal measured Function Queries all settings related to the computed data communication output items of normal Syntax MEASure NORMal measured computed data Example Example of WT230 three phase four
225. asured computed data The output format is normally default Note Incase of D A adjustment change the channel using the CHm command then carry out DOO or DO1 command and the request output using the CDm n command After the CDm n command is being executed by 5 V or 5 V make sure to confirm by the ENT command After the display has been stabilized in the range adjustment mode or external sensor input range adjustment mode execute the ENT command IM 760401 01E 15 5 a Bunooys jqnou pue soueusjuleyy 15 2 Calibration Required Equipment DC Voltage Current Standard recommended FLUKE 9100 AC Voltage Current Standard recommended FLUKE 9100 or FLUKE 5700A and FLUKE 5700A GUILDLINE 7620 Digital Power Meter recommended Yokogawa WT2000 2ch Synchronizer recommended Yokogawa FG120 Calibration of DC Voltage Current and Power Wiring Connect the DC voltage and DC current standard as follows In case of the WT230 voltages are connected parallel and currents in series Direct input EUT Equipment under test DC voltage standard EUT DC voltage e standard 15 6 IM 760401 01E 15 2 Calibration External sensor input equipped with option EX2 EUT DC voltage e standard Calibration 1 Setthe voltage range and current range of the WT210 WT230 to the range to be calibrated 2 Setthe output voltage of the DC voltage standard
226. asurement and setting the PLL source Sections 7 2 and 7 3 STOP SHIFT MEMORY Displays the setup menu for storing and recalling measured data and setup parameters Chapter 8 LOCAL Releases the communication remote status when the REMOTE indicator is illuminated Displays the setup menu for the output mode to the plotter printer and communication functions when the REMOTE indicator is not illuminated Sections 9 9 10 5 and 11 3 LOCAL SHIFT KEY LOCK Turns ON OFF key lock Section 12 4 SETUP Performs zero level compensation Section 12 3 START Starts integration STOP Stops integration RESET Sets the integrated value and the elapsed time of integration to zeroes RESET SHIFT INTEG SET Displays the setup menu for integration mode timer and integration preset time Section 6 2 SETUP SHIFT OUTPUT Displays the setup menu for D A output comparator function communication output items and the execution menu for plotter printer output Sections 9 3 9 5 to 9 9 and 10 6 Function operation indicator The indicator illuminates when the function assigned to the indicator is in operation Sets the measurement synchronization source input filter scaling external sensor input averaging computation number of displayed digits display update rate
227. asurement conditions CONFigure CONFIGURE CONFIGURE WIRING P1W3 MODE RMS VOLTAGE RANGE 600 0E 00 AUTO 1 CONFIGURE CURRENT RANGE 20 0E 00 AUTO 1 ESCALING ELEMENT1 50 00E 00 ELEMENT2 50 00E 00 ELEMENT3 50 00E 00 CONFIGURE FILTER 0 LFILTER 0 SCALING STATE 0 PT ELEMENT1 1 000E 00 ELEMENT2 1 000E 00 ELEMENT3 1 000E 00 CONFIGURE SCALING CT ELEMENT1 1 000E 00 ELEMENT2 1 000E 00 ELEMENT3 1 000E 00 CONFIGURE SCALING SFACTOR ELEMENT1 1 000E 00 ELEMENT2 1 000E 00 ELEMENT3 1 000E 00 CONFIGURE AVERAGING STATE 0 TYPE LINEAR 8 CONFIGURE SYNCHRONIZE CURRENT MHOLD STATE 0 CONFigure AVERaging Function Syntax Example Queries all the setting values related to the averaging function CONFigure AVERaging CONFIGURE AVERAGING CONFIGURE AVERAGING STATE 0 TYPE LINEAR 8 CONFigure AVERaging STATe Function Syntax Sets averaging ON OFF or queries the current status CONFigure AVERaging STATe Boolean CONFigure AVERaging STATe gt CONFIGURE AVERAGING STATE 0 CONFigure AVERaging TYPE Function Syntax Example Sets the averaging type and coefficient queries the current setting CONFigure AVERaging TYPE LINear EXPonent NRf CONFigure AVERaging TYPE lt NR gt 8 16 32 64 averaging coefficient CONFIGURE AVERAGING TYPE LINEAR 8 CONFIGURE AVERAGING TYPE gt CONFIGURE AVERAGING TYPE LI
228. ating Calibration of voltage and current 1 Setthe voltage range and current range of the WT210 WT230 to the range to be calibrated 2 Setthe output voltage of the AC voltage standard so that the voltage reading on the standard power meter matches the rated voltage range of the WT210 WT230 3 Setthe output current of the AC current standard so that the current reading on the standard power meter matches the rated current range of the WT210 WT230 The voltage and current values displayed on the WT210 WT230 at this point are the calibration values Calibration of power when the power factor 1 4 Shiftthe phase of the current signal channel of the phase shifter so that the power indicated on the standard power meter shows the rated value The power value displayed on the WT210 WT230 at this point is the calibration value when power factor 1 Calibration of power when the power factor 0 5 Shiftthe phase of the current signal channel of the phase shifter so that the power indicated on the standard power meter shows zero The power value displayed on the WT210 WT230 at this point is the calibration value when power factor 0 Calibration of power with high accuracy 6 Tocalibrate the WT210 WT230 with even higher accuracy adjust the AC voltage current standard and phase shifter so that the display on the standard power meter matches the calibration value of the standard power meter The displayed value on the W
229. atings across the measuring input and the ground become as follows Voltage between CURRENT VOLTAGE and CURRENT side input terminals and ground 400 Vrms max Voltage between VOLTAGE input terminal and ground 600 Vrms max Put the protective cover on the connector when this function is not used ru O 53 10 2 IM 760401 01E 10 2 Responses to Interface Messages and Remote Local Modes Responses to Interface Messages IFC Interface Clear Unaddresses talker and listener REN Remote Enable Transfers the instrument from local control to remote control GTL Go To Local Transfers the instrument from remote control to local control SDC Selective Device Clear DCL Device Clear Cleasrs GP IB input output buffer and resets an error The setup information and measurement state are not affected DCL is applicable to all devices on the bus whilst DSC is applicable to designated devices only GET Group Execute Trigger Updates the measured computed data when in hold mode Same function as the SHIFT HOLD TRIG key LLO Local Lockout Invalidates the LOCAL key on the front panel to inhibit transfer from remote control to local control Switching between Remote and Local Mode When switched from local to remote mode The REMOTE indicator will light up and all panel keys except the LOCAL key cannot be operated Set
230. att hour value Ah displays the total ampere hour values Ahz displays the total ampere hour values or the positive ampere hour value 5 the average active power during integration is displayed if the function is specified in the computation settings see section 4 12 For more details refer to page 6 3 Selecting the Input Element 1 2 3 Displays the measurement values of element 1 2 3 x Displays the total integrated values of the elements installed The method of computation depends on the wiring method The computation method changes to Wh or Ah for the active power W see page 5 2 When the display function TIME is selected on display A there is no element function available on display A Pressing the ELEMENT key on display A will result in an error code Update Hold Function Although the held values will not be updated the integration continues inside the instrument Because the UPDATE LED blinks each time the internal data is updated it will continue to blink When hold is being cancelled the integration results values and time corresponding to the point of cancellation will be displayed For details regarding the relation with the START STOP key refer to the following page IM 760401 01E 6 7 uone46o1u u 6 3 Displaying Integrated Values Stopping Integration If you stop integration the integration process stops at the integrated value and elapsed integration time of the previous display upda
231. aud rate can be selected from 1200 2400 4800 and 9600 About the Terminator Data can be received with either CR LF or LF terminator For transmission terminator you can select from CR LF LF and CR Interval In case of the talk only mode this setting specifies the interval to output data Setting range 00 00 00 0 hr 00 min 00 sec to 99 59 59 99 hrs 59 min 59 sec Initial value 00 00 00 When set to 00 00 00 the interval is equal to the display update rate In addition when the specified interval is shorter that the display update rate the data is output using the display update rate Note The error code 390 may appear depending on the status of this instrument In such a case lower the baud rate IM 760401 01E 11 7 uondo e eyeju jeas B 11 4 Format and Commands of Output Data before the IEEE488 2 Standard Output Format Commands The format of output data is the same as the GP IB interface Refer to section 10 4 for more details The commands used in serial communications on the WT210 WT230 are common with GP IB commands However the following commands are different DL DL lt terminator gt Sets or inquires about output data terminator Syntax DLm lt terminator gt m indicates terminator m 0 CR LF 1 LF 2 CR Query DL lt terminator gt Example DL1 In the serial communications on the WT210 WT230 the GP IB interface message functions are assigned to the fol
232. ault IM 760401 01E 16 1 a suoneoyioeds 16 1 Input Item Specifications Instantaneous maximum allowable input for 1 s Voltage Peak value of 2 0 kV or RMS value of 1 5 kV whichever is less Current DC input When the crest factor is set to 3 0 5 A 1 A 2 A 5 A 10 A and 20 A ranges when the crest factor is set to 6 0 25 A 0 5 A 1 A 2 5 A 5 A and 10 A ranges Peak value of 150 A or RMS value of 40 A whichever is less When the crest factor is set to 3 5 mA 10 mA 20 mA 50 mA 100 mA and 200 mA ranges when the crest factor is set to 6 2 5 mA 5 mA 10 mA 25 mA 50 mA and 100 mA ranges Peak value of 30 A or RMS value of 20 A whichever is less External sensor input Peak value less than or equal to 10 times the rated range Continuous maximum allowable input Voltage Peak value of 1 5 kV or RMS value of 1 0 kV whichever is less Current DC input When the crest factor is set to 3 0 5 A 1 A 2 A 5 A 10 A and 20 A ranges when the crest factor is set to 6 0 25 A 0 5 A 1 A 2 5 A 5 A and 10 A ranges Peak value of 100 A or RMS value of 30 A whichever is less When the crest factor is set to 3 5 mA 10 mA 20 mA 50 mA 100 mA and 200 mA ranges when the crest factor is set to 6 2 5 mA 5 mA 10 mA 25 mA 50 mA and 100 mA ranges Peak value of 30 A or RMS value of 20 A whichever is less External sensor input Peak value less than or eq
233. aximum power consumption WT210 35 VA WT230 55 VA The WT210 WT230 can use a 100 V or a 200 V system for the power supply The maximum rated voltage of the power cord varies depending on its type Check that the voltage supplied to the WT210 WT230 is less than or equal to the maximum rated voltage of the provided power cord see page iii before using it 3 pin consent WT210 WT230 Power cord included in the package IM 760401 01E 3 6 Turning ON OFF the Power Switch and Opening Message Points to Check before Turning ON the Power Check that the instrument is installed properly see section 3 2 Installing the Instrument Check that the power cord is connected properly see section 3 5 Connecting the Power Supply Is the circuit under measurement wired properly see sections 3 7 Directly Wiring the Circuit under Measurement 3 8 Using an External PT or CT to Wire the Circuit under Measurement and 3 9 Using an External Sensor to Wire the Circuit under Measurement Location of the Power Switch The power switch is located in the lower left corner of the front panel Turning ON OFF the Power Switch The power switch is a push button Press the button once to turn it ON and press it again to turn it OFF Power Up Operation A test program starts when the power switch is turned ON The test programs checks various memories If the test result is normal an openi
234. ay 9999 Unit Voltage peak value V current peak value A Prefixp m k or M The absolute values of the plus and minus sides of the displayed values for Vpk voltage peak and Apk current peak are compared and the larger of the two is displayed For example if the plus side peak is 100 1 Vpk and the minus side peak is 100 2 Vpk 100 2 Vpk is displayed for the peak value Efficiency WT230 only Crest Factor Four Arithmetic Operation and Average Active Power Display When 4 is displayed at the front of display C the efficiency crest factor four arithmetic operation value or average active power specified in sections 4 9 to 4 12 is displayed Maximum display display range Efficiency 0 00 to 999 99 95 Others crest factor four arithmetic operations and average active power 9999 Unit Average active power W Others efficiency crest factor and four arithmetic operations No unit Prefix Four arithmetic operations and average active power m k or M Others efficiency and crest factor No prefix Note Depending on the computed item computation overflow or no data may be indicated rather than a value Efficiency If the denominator of the equation for deriving the efficiency is less than or equal to 0 000196 of the rated range computation overflow A oF is indicated Crest factor Ifthe RMS value is less than or equal to 0 5 less than or equal to 1 if the crest factor is set to 6
235. ay B function is less than or equal to 0 0001 of the rated range computation overflow j5 oF is indicated Application Example AF b Displays the result of display A display B Computation example Display A Display B Display C Wiring method W1 W2 or W3 W1 W2 Any or W1 W3 wi W2 or W3 r rt h Displays the result of display A display B Computation example 1 Display A Display B Display C Wiring method W1 W3 W1 W3 Any wi W3 4 26 IM 760401 01E 4 11 Performing Four Arithmetical Operation Computation example 2 Display A Display B Display C Wiring method ZW W1 W3 W2 EW W2 3P3W wi w2 W3 Computation example 3 Display A Display B Display C Wiring method w2 ZW W1 W3 W2 EW 3P3W wi w2 Inverter w3 Rib Displays the result of display A x display B Useful when setting a function other than VA apparent power for display A and displaying VA on display C Computation example Display A Display B Display C Wiring method Virms Airms Airms x Airms Any 4 _ h Displays the result of display A display B When computing the absolute value of impedance Computation example Display A Display B Display C Wiring method Virms Virms Airms Z Aine Any SOURCE 8 LOAD A ey H_ b Displays the result of display A display B Line voltage ratio and line current ratio for a three phase wiring can be determined Computation example Display A Dis
236. ayed value The HOLD indicator illuminates Press the key again to turn off the indicator and release the hold HOLD SHIFT TRIG Updates the displayed values in hold mode FUNCTION v Sets the function to be displayed Chapter 5 sections 6 3 and 7 4 Decreases the voltage or current range j aiat and sets functions and values unction Unit displa U play I i l Increases the voltage or current range T uroare n m V VA RANGE and sets functions and values CHECK RANGE k A var FUNCTION c AUTO o AUTO o e VOLTAGE VOLTAGE CURRENT HOLD ENTER C cunnenr o Yo f Yo 0 Yo ffo M W nue MODE WAX HOLD TRIG Confirms the specified range function or Cms B m V PF value BOBB zs crm m o o o o o g9MW 96 E cat gt Loc a a INTEGRATOR SHIFT eer S m V Hz T Moves along the digits of the value from the 1 j f J 1 J H k A h FUNCTION HARMONICS MEMORY INTEG SET eft to the right H o o o o JM W het c REMOTE B D cp SHIFT sue To a Lj she nln ides KEY TOCK KEY LOCK OUTPUT SHIFT Moves the decimal point from the left to the START ENTER SHIFT HARMONICS SHIFT CAL Displays the setup menu for turning ON OFF harmonic me
237. between the 1st order current and the 2nd to 50st order current PF_ Fundamental power factor 1st order HzV Fundamental frequency of the voltage of the PLL source HzA Fundamental frequency of the current of the PLL source THD Harmonic distortion either IEC or CSA CNT Relative harmonic content MEM Data number in case of recalling h4 Element 1 Element 1 2 Element 2 3 Element 3 h5 Data state N normal I Overrange O Computation overflow P Peak overflow E No data h6 h7 Order 01 to 50 Order of fundamental or higher harmonic up to the maximum analysis order space will be assigned in case of frequency harmonic distortion power factor or in case of all computed values of the 1st to 50th order h8 Indicates data lag lead in case of DEG data type In case of other datatypes _ space will occur G Lag D Lead _ Not detectable Data Section d1 d2 d3 d4 d5 d6 d7 d8 d9 d10 d11 d1 polarity __ space or minus d2 to d8 mantissa floating point number of the maximum six digits Incase of harmonic distortion and relative harmonic content d9 d10tod11 __ space e In other cases d9 to d11 exponent E 3 m E 0 E 3 5 k E 6 gt M IM 760401 01E 10 9 uondo e ejieiul gi d5 H 10 4 Output Measured Computed Data Setup Parameters and Error Codes Output Format The output format depends on the selected output items which can be selected by the OH comma
238. by the WT210 WT230 uonoung 1ndino u jeuje1x3 IS N CAUTION Do not apply a voltage which exceeds the TTL level to the remote controller pin Also do not short the output pins nor apply a voltage to them The instrument might be damaged IM 760401 01E 9 3 9 3 D A Output Option CHECK RANGE MODE o o o o o RANGE UPDATE VOLTAGE CURRENT RMS VOLTAGE DC MAX HOLD HAUTO GAUTO o MEAN A m V VAl4 2 3 x Voce current HoLD MODE MAX HOLD TRIG aj n I k A VAF ruwcriN ELEMENT Vom Yo om MD W TIME B m V PF 1 2325 k A deg runcrion ELEMENT MW HARMONICS C n ri mV H 425 g ghe ri rm k A h runcnon evemenr LOCAL SETUP uu M W he CJ LJ KEY LOCK OUTPUT SHIFT CHP3W O3P3w FILTER WIRING o o m o m oO o o SCALING AVG LINE FREQ STORE RECALL HARMONICS KEY LOCK EIP 4w ET 3V 3A The explanation given in this section uses WT230 as an example For the differences between the WT210 and the WT230 see section 2 2 Operation Keys and Functions Element Display Procedure Operate the instrument by following the thick lines in the menu below Press the ENTER key to confirm a selection or setting Toleave the current menu in the middle of the operation press the key indicated in step 1 The confirmed settings up to that point are kept Setting the D A Output Select the D A output function 1 Display C SETUP a
239. by the cord itself Always hold and pull by the plug If the cord is damaged contact your dealer for replacement Refer to page iii for the part number of the appropriate power cord when placing an order General Handling Precautions e Do not place objects on top of the instrument Never place other instruments or any objects containing water on top of the instrument Such act can lead to malfunction When Carrying the Instrument First turn off the object to be measured and remove all cables including measurement cables and communication cables Then turn OFF the WT210 WT230 and remove the power cord from the outlet To carry the instrument use the handle or carry it using both hands WT210 model 760401 WT230 model 760502 760503 To prevent overheating do not block the vent holes on top and bottom panels of the case Keep electrically charged objects away from the input terminals They may damage the internal circuitry Do not pour volatile agents on the case or operation panel nor leave them in contact with rubber or PVC products for long periods of time The operation panel is made of thermoplastic resin Make sure heating elements such as soldering bits do not come in contact with the operation panel When cleaning the case or the operation panel first remove the power cord from the outlet Then wipe with a dry soft cloth Do not use volatile chemicals since this might cause discoloring and deformation If you are not
240. cal value and graph GVD outputs the phase angle between the 2nd to 50 or 30 th order voltage and the fundamental 1st order as numerical value and graph GAD outputs the phase angle between the 2nd to 50 or 30 th order current and the fundamental 1st order as numerical value and graph CGV outputs the relative harmonic content of voltage as numerical value and graph CGA outputs the relative harmonic content of current as numerical value and graph CGW outputs the relative harmonic content of active power as numerical value and graph ALL outputs the relative harmonic content and measured value of both voltage and current in case of any other mode ml 1 10 11 123 V outputs measured voltage value and relative harmonic content as a numerical value A outputs measured current value and relative harmonic content as a numerical value W outputs measured active power value and relative harmonic content as a numerical value deg outputs the phase angle between the first order voltage current and the 2nd to 50 or 30 th voltage current as a numerical value GV outputs measured voltage value and relative harmonic content as numerical value GA outputs measured current value and relative harmonic content as numerical value GW outputs measured active power value and relative harmonic content as numerical value GVD outputs the phase angle between the first order voltag
241. cause it is easy to reverse the connection You can use the scaling function to directly read the measured values on the display For the procedure see section 4 6 Selecting the Measurement Range and Setting the Scaling Value when External Sensor is Used option For the relationship between the wiring systems and the method of determining the measured values or computed values see page 16 6 IM 760401 01E 3 9 Using an External Sensor to Wire the Circuit under Measurement Connecting an external sensor enables measurements when the current of the object to be measured exceeds 20 A 10 A if the crest factor is set to 6 The range of the external sensor input of the WT210 WT230 comes in two types one for 2 5 5 and 10 V 1 25 2 5 5 V if the crest factor is set to 6 and another for 50 100 and 200 mV 25 50 100 mV if the crest factor is set to 6 You can select either option The following wiring examples are for connecting external shunts When connecting a clamp type sensor replace the shunt type sensor with the clamp type Wiring example of a single phase two wire system 1P2W when using an external shunt Can be applied to models 760401 760502 and 760503 Source Load External shunt aca a udo iso tr INR Connection side EM OUTL External sensor input connector EXT Input terminal Element Wiring example of a single phase three wire system 1P3W when using an external shunt Can
242. ch requests a response this instrument returns a response message A single response message is always returned in reply to a program message Program Messages As explained above the data message sent from the controller to this instrument is called a program message The format of a program message is shown below Program message unit lt PMT gt lt Program message unit gt A program message consists of one or more program message units each unit corresponds to one command This instrument executes commands one by one according to the order in which they are received Program message units are delimited by a For a description of the format of the program message unit refer to the explanation given further below Example CONFIGURE MODE RMS FILTER ON lt PMT gt V J N J Unit Unit lt PMT gt PMT is a terminator used to terminate each program message The following three types of terminator are available NL New Line Same as LF Line Feed ASCII code OAH is used END END message defined in IEEE488 1 EOI signal The data byte sent with an END message will be the final item of the program message unit NL with an END message attached NL is not included in the program message unit NL END IM 760401 01E 14 3 H pyepueis 2661 2 88r 3331 24 0 BuiAqjduio spuewwosy jo uejs S z spueuiulo uoneoiunuiulo2 14 2 Program Format P
243. command halts communications until a specific event is generated Example STATus FILTerl FALL STATus EESR CONFigure VOLTage RANGe 60V lt PMT gt Response to STATus EESR is decoded COMMunicate WAIT 1 MEASure NORMa1 VALue lt PMT gt For a description of STATus FILTerl FALL and STATus EESR refer to Using the extended event register on this page COMMunicate WAIT 1 means that communications is halted until bit O of the extended event register is set to 1 MEASure NORMal VALue will not be executed until bit O of the extended event register is set to 1 14 10 IM 760401 01E 14 3 Commands 14 3 4 Command List Command Description Page AOUTput Group AOUTput Queries all settings related to D A output 14 15 AOUTput CHANnel lt x gt Sets queries the D A output item 14 15 AOUTput IRTime Sets queries the preset integration time for D A output of integrated values 14 15 AOUTput PRESet Sets the default value as D A output items 14 15 COMMunicateG roup COMMunicate Queries all settings related to communication 14 16 COMMunicate HEADer Sets queries whether a header is to be added 14 16 COMMunicate LOCKout Sets cancels local lockout 14 16 COMMunicate REMote Sets remote local condition 14 16 COMMunicate STATus Queries the status of a specified circuit 14 16 COMMunicate VERBose Sets queries the response to be in full or abbreviated form 14 17 COMMunicat
244. command header ssessssssssse 14 5 common mode voltage seseeeeee 16 2 COMMunicate goup i communication commands for adjustment 15 5 communication functions sssssseeneeeeenn communication interface comparator display 4 nentes comparator function seessseeseeeeeeeneeenenns comparator limit comparator limit values comparator mode comparator modes compound header computation end computation function esseesssss computation method of harmonic distortion 7 5 computation over display eeeeeeeene 2 4 computation over display harmonic 7 3 condition register CONFigure group contact relay i iot tmn rt iter contents of the package sssssseeeeene iii continous integration mode continuous maximum allowable input 3 5 16 2 continuous maximum common mode voltage 16 2 control integration corrective actions crest factor eesssssssesseeeeeee CT ratio CUIFOTIL ioraa eaa see aa ae e Ea Ede e Aere current frequency current input current input is small 3 nnne 6 11 Do JA Wie 9 5 D A output function
245. ctions 7 2 and 7 3 STOP SHIFT MEMORY Displays the setup menu for storing and recalling measured data and setup parameters Chapter 8 LOCAL Releases the communication remote status when the REMOTE indicator is illuminated Displays the setup menu for the output mode to the plotter printer and communication functions when the REMOTE indicator is not illuminated Sections 9 9 10 5 and 11 3 LOCAL SHIFT KEY LOCK Turns ON OFF key lock Section 12 4 Starts integration STOP Stops integration RESET Sets the integrated value and the elapsed time of integration to zeroes RESET SHIFT INTEG SET Displays the setup menu for integration mode timer and integration preset time Section 6 2 WIRING Sets the wiring system according to the wiring to the voltage current terminals on the rear panel Section 3 10 SETUP SHIFT OUTPUT Displays the setup menu for D A output comparator function communication output items and the execution menu for plotter printer output Sections 9 3 9 5 to 9 9 and 10 6 Function operation indicator The indicator illuminates when the function assigned to the indicator is in operation SETUP Sets the measurement synchronization source input filter scaling external sensor input averaging computation number of displayed digits display
246. cuit so the current range can be switched while power is supplied to the circuit This also enables remote control via communications outputs The WT210 equipped with two shunt resistors one for minute currents and another for large currents The output from the A D converter in the current input and voltage input circuits is sent to the DSP Digital Signal Processor via a photo isolator ISO which is used to provide insulation between the current input circuit or voltage circuit and the DSP During normal measurement the DSP converts digital values sampled at a period of approximately 20 uS to voltage current and active power sums the values over a predetermined period and then divides the sum by the number of samples to derive the measured value of voltage current and active power In addition to achieve high accuracy the start and end points of sampling are determined by synchronizing to the zero crossing point of the voltage or current signal that you select to be measured From the voltage current and active power the DSP computes the apparent power reactive power power factor and phase angle and performs processing such as scaling and averaging During harmonic measurement the DSP performs FFT based on the digital values sampled at an integer multiple of the period of the PLL source signal period of the clock that the PLL circuit generates and determines the measured values of various items of harmonic measurement The m
247. d Cable condition EN61326 1 Class A EN55011 Class A Group 1 EN61000 3 2 EN61000 3 3 C tick EN55011 Class A Group 1 This product is a Class A for industrial environment product Operation of this product in a residential area may cause radio interference in which case the user is required to correct the interference Serial RS 232 C interface connector Use shielded serial cables 4 GP IB interface connector Use shielded GP IB cables D A output terminal Use shielded cables Connecting cables may cause radio interference in which case the user is required to correct the interference Immunity Complying standard Cable condition EN61326 1 Table 2 for use in industrial locations However the measured values may receive noise effects Same as the cable condition for emission above 1 Applies to products with CE marks For all other products contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer 2 The Overvoltage Category is a value used to define the transient overvoltage condition and includes the impulse withstand voltage regulation Overvoltage Category II Applies to equipment supplied with electricity from fixed installations like a distribution board 3 Pollution Degree Applies to the degree of adhesion of a solid liquid or gas which deteriorates withstand voltage or surface resistivity Pollution Degree 1 Applies to closed atmospheres with no or only dry non conductive pollution Pollution Degree 2 Applies
248. d Apk current peak while the MAX hold function see section 4 8 is enabled will be displayed according to the maximum values MAX that are held The values that are compared against the limit values are also the maximum values MAX that are held Determination is done by internal data of the input signal and not by displayed data For example when the limit is set to 10 00 and the internal data of the input signal coming from a lower value reaches 9 999 the relay will not be activated Only when the internal data reaches a value of 10 000 the relay will be activated 9 18 IM 760401 01E 9 8 Turning the Comparator Function ON OFF Option CHECK RANGE MODE m m B a g A UPDATE VOLTAGE CURRENT RMS VOLTAGE DC MAX HOLD SAUDO GAUTO o A m V VAl41 2 3 x VOLTAGE cunREnr nouo MODE MAX HOLD TRIG r1 J r rL k A Val Function ELEMENT Vos om am M W TME B m V PFj l123 EX A J i I i a a INTEGRATOR E J F1 k A deg runcrion ELEMENT MW START STOP RESET HARMONICS MEMORY _INTEG SET c I im m V Hz 41 2 3 g je Li md lf k A h jruwcrow ELEMENT MW het 2 Id L iP3W O3P3W oo o m n o m n m n SCALING AVG LINE FREQ STORE RECALL HARMONICS KEY LOCK Tsp aw O 3V3A The explanation given in this section uses WT230 as an example For the differences between the WT210 and the WT230 see section 2 2 Operation Keys and Func
249. d Functions Element Display Set the mode Display C LOCAL C7 5 N n Addr 3 Operate the instrument by following the thick lines in the menu below Press the ENTER key to confirm a selection or setting To leave the current menu in the middle of the operation press the key indicated in step 1 The confirmed settings up to that point are kept Set the address Display C 6 ENTER gt m moor gt ENTER End of setting M sets the value V SHIFT shifts digits gt Setting the interval Display C 3 mhour minqrsecy kanl H gt ENTER Hnnmnmmmn t Li LI LIE LULIL LT 4 Same as steps 5 4105 above 6 gt ENTER End of setting IM 760401 01E 10 11 uondo ve yul gi d5 H 10 5 Setting the Address and Mode Explanation Setting the Mode Refer to page 10 1 for details Setting the Address A particular address is assigned to each device connected to the GP IB interface so that each device can be recognized by every device Therefore an address must be assigned to this instrument when it is connected to a personal computer Address setting range 0 to 30 The initial value is 1 The address is retained even if the instrument is initialized Talk only Function This function only allows the instrument to send data
250. d timeout ElseIf ern ENEB Then ers ENEB Nonexistent GPIB board ElseIf ern EDMA Then ers EDMA DMA error ElseIf ern EOIP Then ers EOIP I O operation started before previous operation completed ElseIf ern ECAP Then ers ECAP No capability for intended operation ElseIf ern EFSO Then ers EFSO File system operation error ElseIf ern EBUS Then ers EBUS GPIB bus error ElseIf ern ESTB Then ers ESTB Serial poll status byte queue overflow IM 760401 01E 14 51 Oo o 3 3 3 o 9 o 5 O o 3 3 D 5 2 o N 77 lt o o 3 9 O o 3 3 D 5 2 o Oo o 3 v lt 5 a E o h gt m m m A Qo eo N i o oO N 7 e 5 5 2 9 14 7 Sample Program Initialization Error and Execution Functions ElseIf ern ESRO Then ers ESRQ SRQ remains asserted ElseIf ern ETAB Then ers ETAB The return buffer is full ElseIf ern ELCK Then ers ELCK Address or board is locked Else ers End If Else ers End If MsgBox Status No Str sts Chr 13 wrn Error No Chr 13 msg vbExclamation Call ibonl Dev 0 Dev 1 End Sub Error Str ern Chr 13 ers Private Sub Commandl Click Dim sts As Integer If StartFlag 1 Then Exit Sub End If StartFlag 1 Textl Text START Listl Clear Dummy DoEvents sts GpibNormal If sts 0 Then Tex
251. d within the number of digits available on display A The appropriate prefix symbol m 10 k 103 or M 109 of the unit illuminates accordingly 2 Press of display A to select input element 2 Each time T is pressed the element indicator character of display A illuminates in the order shown below The wiring system of the circuit on the primary side of the inverter is single phase two wire and the circuit is connected to input element 2 of the WT230 To show the measured value of input element 2 on display A we illuminate input element 2 Display A ELEMENT ELEMENT ELEMENT ELEMENT qo 2 gt 8 gt I 1 2 s x C 1 232 1 8 s z S 12 IM 760401 01E Displaying Voltage Current and Active Power Displaying the Current on the Pri Side of the Invert Display B Carry out the following procedure to display the current of the primary side of the inverter on display B Function indicator Element indicator RANGE Sar AWO o VOLTAGE CURRENT HOLD MODE MAX HOLD TRIG VAF FUNCTION ELEMENT HARMONICS MEMORY Y C3 REMOTE INTEG SET a LOCAL SETUP gsslgxsslg s V A h FUNCTION ELEMENT I W he KEY LOCK OUTPUT O 1P3W O 3P3W 0 3P4W O 3V3A e FUNCTION 3 Press T of display B to select function A Each time T is pressed the function indicator character of display B illum
252. de of the inverter on display C Function indicator Element indicator RANGE SG AUTO GAUTO o n VOLTAGE CURRENT HOLD a MODE MAX HOLD TRIG val E FUNCTION ELEMENT CES VIII CAL INTEGRATOR a a l a J START STOP RESET Ex HARMONICS MEMORY INTEG SET ERR a E LOCK OUTPUT SHIFT L11P3W O 3P3w L13P4W O 3V3A T_ of display C to select function W Each time _ is pressed the function indicator character of display C illuminates in the 5 Press order shown below To show the measured active power on display C we illuminate function W Display C FUNCTION FUNCTION FUNCTION FUNCTION FUNCTION FUNCTION V A W V Hz A Hz wh V V m V Hz m V Hz m V A A k A h kA h k A wW wW MW he MW he M w MEIN m V kA h Whe M W ht oe FUNCTION m V Hz J kA h Whe M W h Y FUNCTION m V Hz m V Hz m V Hz k A h kA h kA h M W ht M W h M W he Ns EP FUNCTION f A hE A hE A Ih FUNCTION FUNCTION FUNCTION The decimal point position moves so that the measured value can be displayed within the number of digits available on display C The appropriate pre
253. del 760502 only element 1 3 and S are valid 0 Data number in case of recalling 1 V1 v2 1 V3 VY 2 A1 A2 4A3 gt A 3 W1 wW2 W3 gt W 4 VA1 VA2 VA3 VAY 5 VAR1 VAR2 VAR3 VARY 6 PF1 PF2 PF3 PFX 7 DEGR1 DEGR2 DEGR3 DEGRY 8 VHZ1 VHZ2 VHZ3 NVHZ 9 AHZ1 AHZ2 AHZ3 AHZY 10 WH1 WH2 WH3 WHY 11 WHP1 WHP2 WHP3 WHPY 12 WHM1 WHM2 WHM3 WHM 13 AH1 AH2 AH3 AHY 14 AHP1 vAHP2 AHP3 AHP gt 14 AHM1 AHM2 AHM3 AHMY 16 TIME elapsed integration time Each data is divided by a comma and is ended by the terminator lt RMT gt 14 32 IM 760401 01E 14 3 Commands Output Example of Normal Measurement Data Output example for model 760502 after having sent the following commands Sent MEASURE NORMAL ITEM PRESET NORMAL MEASURE NORMAL VALUE Received data 10 004E 00 10 002E 00 10 003E 00 49 041E 00 49 052E 00 49 047E 00 429 00E 00 429 02E 00 0 8580E 03 Data contents V1 10 004E 00 V3 10 002E 00 VX 10 003E 00 A1 49 041E 00 A3 49 052E 00 AY 49 047E 00 W1 429 00E 00 W3 429 02kE 00 W 0 8580E 03 Output example for model 760503 where measurement data first have been stored during integration and while recalling these data the following commands have been sent Sent MEASURE NORMAL ITEM PRESET INTEGRATE MEASURE NORMAL VALUE Received data 10 428 60E 00 428 10E 00 428 80E 00 1 2855E 03
254. der measurement and the instrument The thick lines on the wiring diagrams shown in sections 3 7 and 3 9 are the sections where the current flows Use appropriate wires that are suitable for the current In order to make accurate measurements of the voltage of the circuit under measurement connect the cable to the circuit as close as possible In order to make correct measurements separate the measurement cables as far away from the earth ground wires and the instrument s case as possible to minimize the static capacitance to earth ground To more accurately measure apparent power and power factor in three phase unbalanced circuits we recommend the three voltage three current 3V3A measurement method 3 6 IM 760401 01E 3 4 For Making Accurate Measurements By wiring the circuit to match the load you can minimize the effect of the power loss on the measurement accuracy We will consider the current source SOURCE and load resistance LOAD below When the Measurement Current Is Relatively Large Wire so that the voltage measurement circuit is connected to the load side The current measurement circuit measures the sum of current i flowing through the load of the circuit under measurement and the current iy flowing through the voltage measurement circuit Because the current flowing through the circuit under measurement is ij iy is the amount of error For example WT230 s input resistance of the voltage measurement circuit of the
255. digits are valid CONFigure SCALing PT CT SFACtor ELEMent lt x gt Function Syntax Sets the scaling constant for voltage current power of each element queries the current setting CONFigure SCALing PT CT SFACtor ELEMent lt x gt lt NRf gt CONFigure SCALing PT CT SFACtor ELEMent lt x gt lt x gt 1 WT210 single phase Example 1 3 WT230 three phase three wire model 1 to 3 WT230 three phase four wire model lt NR gt 0 001 to 9999 CONFIGURE SCALING PT ELEMENT1 1 000 CONFIGURE SCALING PT ELEMENT 1 gt CONFIGURE SCALING PT ELEMENT1 1 000E 00 Description The setting values are rounded as described at CONFigure SCALing PT CT SFACtor ALL CONFigure SCALing STATe Function Syntax Example Sets scaling ON OFF queries the current setting CONFigure SCALing STATe Boolean CONFigure SCALing STATe CONFIGURE SCALING STATE OFF CONFIGURE SCALING STATE CONFIGURE SCALING STATE 0 CONFigure SYNChronize Function Syntax Example Sets the measurement synchronization source queries the current setting CONFigure SYNChronize VOLTage CURRent OFF CONFigure SYNChronize CONFIGURE SYNCHRONIZE VOLTAGE CONFIGURE SYNCHRONIZE gt CONFIGURE SYNCHRONIZE VOLTAGE CONFigure VOLTage Function Syntax Example Queries all settings relating to voltage range CONFigure VOLTage CONFIGURE
256. duio2 9A91 0JeZ sJejoure1eg dnjes Burzijeniu 12 3 Performing Zero Level Compensation CHECK RANGE MODE o n Oo B o RANGE UPDATE VOLTAGE CURRENT RMS VOLTAGE DC MAX HOLD CBAUTO GAUTO o MEAN VOLTAGE CURRENT HOLD VA 12 3r var MODE MAX HOLD TRIG FUNCTION ELEMENT p me C3 v f ENTER B PF 4 2 3E gt CAL a a INPBGRATOR deg ruwcrioN ELEMENT START STOP RESET o HARMONICS MEMORY REMOTE Hz 1235 h ruwcriN ELEMENT hz O1P3w 0 3P3w uy g g g g g a L13P4W O3V3A n n SCALING AVG LINE FREQ STORE RECALL HARMONICS KEY LOCK Sx 3s S 7 3 5 3 Ser lt j erc lt j er lt The explanation given in this section uses WT230 as an example For the differences between the WT210 and the WT230 see section 2 2 Operation Keys and Functions Element Display Procedure ENTER Execute zero level compensation SHIFT CAL Procedure Zero Level Compensation This function is used to create a zero input condition using the internal circuit of the WT210 WT230 and setting the level at that point to zero level Zero level compensation must be performed to meet the specifications of the WT210 WT230 see chapter 16 Zero level compensation is executed when you carry out the following operations When you press the SHIFT key to illuminate the indicator above and to the left of the SHIFT key followed by the
257. e Changing of the current range is not allowed while integration is in progress execution error 13 will occur The 50 mV 100 mV and 200 mV or 2 5V 5V and 10V ranges are for the external sensor When using any of these ranges be sure to set a valid sensor value using the SA command While recalling or storing is in progress execution error 19 will occur Initializes setting parameters RC terminator For details on initialization see section 12 2 Initializing Setup Parameters Setup parameters excluding those related to communication are initialized Sets the recall function ON OFF or inquires about the current setting RO m terminator m indicates recall ON or OFF m 0 recall OFF 1 recall ON RO terminator ROL Parameter error 12 will occur if m is set to an illegal value Sets the recalling interval inquires about the current setting RR ml m2 m3 terminator ml indicates the hours 0 lt ml lt 99 m2 indicates the minutes 0 lt m2 lt 59 m3 indicates the seconds 0 lt m3 lt 59 13 12 IM 760401 01E 13 1 Commands Query RR terminator Example RRO 0 0 Description Parameter error 12 will occur if an illegal value is set f the recalling interval is set to 0 h O min O s the recalling interval is set to the display update rate as when the data was stored While recalling or storing is in progress execution error 19 will occur
258. e WAIT Waits until one of the specified extended event occurs 14 17 COMMunicate WAIT Generates a response when on of the specified extended events occurs 14 17 CONFigure Group CONFigure Queries all settings related to the measurement conditions 14 19 CONFigure AVERaging Queries all settings related to the averaging function 14 19 CONFigure AVERaging STATe Sets queries averaging ON OFF 14 19 CONFigure AVERaging TYPE Sets queries averaging type and coefficient 14 19 CONFigure CFACtor Sets the crest factor or queries the current setting 14 19 CONFigure CURRent Queries all settings related to the current range 14 19 CONFigure CURRent AUTO Sets queries the current auto range ON OFF 14 19 CONFigure CURRent ESCaling Queries all settings related to the external sensor 14 20 CONFigure CURRent ESCaling ALL Sets the scaling constants for the external sensor for all elements at once 14 20 CONFigure CURRent ESCaling ELEMent x Sets queries the scaling constants for the external sensor for each element 14 20 CONFigure CURRent RANGe Sets queries the current range 14 20 CONFigure FILTer Sets queries the frequency filter ON OFF 14 20 CONFigure LFILter Sets queries the line filter ON OFF 14 20 CONFigure MHold STATe Sets queries the MAX hold ON OFF 14 20 CONFigure MODE Sets queries the measurement mode 14 21 CONFigure SCALing Queries all settings related to the scaling function 14 21
259. e already stored to the file display C will show 5 HHE gd When no data are stored yet display C willshow F EE IM 760401 01E 8 5 SJojoureJeg dnjes pue geq peinduio9 paunseay jo uonoung je2eg eJo1S e 8 2 Storing Recalling Setup Parameters Explanation Storing Setup Parameters Stores the current setup parameters which consist of the following Four destinations FiLE1 FilE2 FILES FiLE4 are available Measurement range measurement mode measurement synchronization source scaling settings averaging settings input filter settings MAX hold ON OFF setting computation settings number of displayed digits display update rate setting crest factor integration settings harmonic settings plotter output settings store recall settings and communication settings When data are saved in a file and you want to save data in the same file display C will show SAVEd Pressing the ENTER key will result in overwriting the previously saved data Setup parameters are saved in another internal memory than measured data Saved setup parameters are backed up by the lithium battery in the same way as measured data For a description of the lithium battery life see section 15 6 Recalling Setup Parameters When setup parameters are being retrieved all setup parameters are being set accordingly After that measurements can be carried out IM 760401 01E Chapter 9 External In Output Function 9 1 Pin Arrangement and Pin Assign
260. e comparator function is set to dual mode Unit prefix Limit value Display the limit value of ch1 Illuminates as necessary in each display or ch3 by v A Unit One unit corresponding to relay on display A and B illuminates The unit V A or W corresponding to the measured computed or limit values shown on displays A B and C is illuminated Input element One element corresponding to relay on display A and B illuminates 123r Measured or computed data Corresponding to the relay on display A and B Limit value Displays the limit value of ch2 or ch4 by v Al The limit values on display A and B will show the pairs of ch1 amp ch2 and ch3 amp ch4 alternately by pressing the V keys Check the displayed limit value unit or the limit value setting menu to see which pair is being displayed Comparator Display Function ON OFF This setting allows you to turn the above described display function ON or OFF oN The comparator display will appear by pressing the ENTER key after selecting on oFF The normal measurement or harmonic measurement display will appear by pressing the ENTER key after selecting oFF Note Pressing the FUNCTION or ELEMENT key will result in an error Other keys can be operated The values of V voltage A current W active power VA apparent power var reactive power Vpk voltage peak an
261. e current and the 2nd to 50 or 30 th voltage current as a numerical value GAD outputs the phase angle between the first order voltage current and the 2nd to 50 or 30 th voltage current as a numerical value CGV outputs the measured value of voltage and relative harmonic content as numerical value CGA outputs the measured value of current and relative harmonic content as numerical value CGW outputs the measured value of active power and relative harmonic content as numerical value IM 760401 01E 13 9 pyepueis 286 4 Z 88t 3331 94 910J9q spueuiuio Jo uejs S spueuiuo uoneorunuulo 13 1 Commands 13 ALL outputs the relative harmonic content and measured value of both voltage and current m2 indicates element m2 1 2 EE Query Example OH13 1 Element 1 Element 2 for WT230 model 760503 only Element 3 for WT230 only OH terminator Description Parameter error 12 will occur if m1 or m2 is set to an illegal value OR OR Designates the harmonic order of the harmonic component shown on display B V A W V 96 A W V deg A deg inquires about the current settings OR m terminator m indicates the harmonic order Syntax m Query Example OR50 Integer between 1 to 50 or 30 OR terminator Description Parameter error 12 will occur if m is set to an illegal value Depending on the fundamental frequency o
262. e voltage frequency of the element assigned to display C is stored When storing harmonic measurement data harmonic measurement function is turned ON Normal measured data will not be stored All measured data of the elements which are being used for the measurement will be stored Aborting Storage The store operation stops in the following conditions when all the above described blocks are full e when during the storage process oFF is selected at the store ON OFF setting 8 2 IM 760401 01E 8 1 Storing Recalling Measured Comupted Data Setting the Storage Interval Sets the time during which storage will be carried out When starting storage the recalling interval see next page is also set to the same value as the specified store interval Setting range 00 00 00 0 hrs 00 min 00 sec to 99 59 59 99 hrs 59 min 59 sec Initial value 00 00 00 When set to 00 00 00 the store interval is set to the same value as the display update rate Stora Aft val Note ge ON OFF er having set the storage interval select the store menu once again The initial ue is oFF on Storing will start by pressing the ENTER key after selecting on the STORE indicator will light while storage is in progress oFF Storing will stop by pressing the ENTER key after selecting oFF the STORE indicator will extinguish After storing has been stopped and storing is restarted the existing data in the memory will be ove
263. eaches the maximum of 10000 hours Integration holds the elapsed integration time and integrated values at the point where integration stopped will be held until the RESET key is pressed Max integrated value Integrated Hold 999999 MWh MAh value Display overflow Elapsed Hold Hold integration time A A A Start Stop Reset Start Reset Standard Integration Mode Integration starts after having pressed the START key Integration stops when the elapsed integration time is reached to preset time when the integrated value reaches the maximum value 999999 MWh MAh or when the integrated value drops to the minimum value 99999 MWh MAh Integration holds the elapsed integration time and integrated values at the point where integration stopped will be held until the RESET key is pressed Integrated value Hold Elapsed integration time Hold Integration timer 1 preset time i lt Start Reset uone46o1u u IM 760401 01E 6 1 Integrator Functions Continous Integration Mode Repeat Integration Integration starts after having pressed the START key when the elapsed integration time is reached to preset time the integrated value and elapsed integration time are reset automatically and restarted immediately Integration stops when the elapsed integration time is reached to preset time however the integrated value and elapsed integration time are reset aut
264. eader is attached to the query which is then returned Example INTEGRATE MODE lt PMT gt gt INTEGRATE MODE NORMAL lt RMT gt Response consisting of data only If the query cannot be used as a program message unless changes are made to it i e it is a query only command no header is attached and only the data is returned Some query only commands can be returned after a header is attached to them Example sSTATUS ERROR lt PMT gt gt 0 NO ERROR lt RMT gt When returning a response without a header It is possible to remove the header from a response consisting of a header and data The COMMunicate HEADer command is used to do this Abbreviated form Normally the lower case part is removed from a response header before the response is returned to the controller Naturally the full form of the header can also be used For this the comMunicate VERBose command is used The part enclosed by is also omitted in the abbreviated form 14 2 5 Data A data section comes after the header A space must be included between the header and the data The data contains conditions and values Data is classified as below Data Description Decimal Value expressed as a decimal number Example PT setting CONFigure SCALing PT ELEMENT1 100 Physical value lt Voltage gt lt Current gt Example Voltage range gt CONFigure VOLTage RANge 150V Register value expressed as either binary octa
265. easured value is transmitted to the CPU section Various computed values such as X and MATH are determined from the measured values These measured values and computed values are displayed on the 7 segment LED output through a D A converter or output through communications During normal measurement the processing on the DSP and CPU is pipelined and the DSP processing is performed in real time Therefore measurements with few data dropouts can be achieved against the input signal IM 760401 01E 1 2 Functions Input Functions Voltage and Current Input Sections The WT210 WT230 is a digital power meter that can measure the RMS value of voltage or current or active power by applying voltage and current signals to the voltage and current input sections respectively From the measured values of voltage current and active power power elements such as apparent power reactive power power factor and phase angle can be determined Frequency Measuring Range Measurement of DC voltage current and power as well as AC voltage current and power in the frequency range of 0 5 Hz to 100 kHz Input Filter The following two types of input filters are provided The filters eliminates noise such as inverter waveforms and distorted waveforms and allow stable measured values to be obtained LineFilter This filter is inserted only into the measurement circuit It eliminates noise components of the input signal The cutoff frequency is 500 Hz
266. easured values between the previous display update and the execution of the integration stop are not integrated 6 2 IM 760401 01E 6 1 Integrator Functions Display Resolution during Integration The display resolution of integrated values is normally 99999 counts counts up to 999999 only when the unit is MWh or MAh When the integrated value reaches 100000 counts the decimal point shifts automatically For example if 0 0001 mWh is added to 9 9999 mWh the display shows 10 000 mWh Display Function of Integrator Values By selecting the display function you can display the polarity of the integrator values Display function Measurement mode Display contents Wh RMS VOLTAGE MEAN DC both positive and negative watt hour values Whz RMS VOLTAGE MEAN DC positive watt hour value Whz RMS VOLTAGE MEAN DC negative watt hour value Ah RMS VOLTAGE MEAN total ampere hour values DC both positive and negative ampere hour values Ahx RMS VOLTAGE MEAN total ampere hour values same as Ah DC positive ampere hour value Aht RMS VOLTAGE MEAN 0 DC negative ampere hour value 1 When the Wh function is selected pressing the FUNCTION key once or twice will result in Wh Pressing the FUNCTION key once will result in displaying the positive watt hour value whereas pressing the FUNCTION key twice will result in displaying the negative watt hour value In case of the negative watt hour value will appear i
267. easurement Harmonics Element Element 1 function ON OFF Distortion Formula IEC Order Comparator Off Element Comparator Mode Single Distortion Comparator Display Off formula Comparator Channel 1 Comparator Communication Command 20 function ON OFF Display ON OFF Channel Comm command Element Voltage Current Active power Apparent power Reactive power Power factor Phase angle Voltage peak Current peak Frequency Integration status Elapsed integration time Watt hour Ampere hour Pd Output example of normal measured data Element 1 Element 2 Element 3 Sigma V 2 998 2 993 2999 2 997 Order A 49 910 49 924 49 937 49 924 w 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 0000k VA 149 63 149 42 149 77 0 4488k Var 149 63 149 42 149 77 0 1496k PF 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 DEG 90 0 90 0 90 0 90 0 Vpk 5 28 5 23 5 25 Apk 86 51 86 53 86 50 EFF 6447 HzV 59 999 o Integrator Start Integrator Time 00000 01 30 Element 1 Element 2 Element 3 Sigma Wh 1 3051 1 3031 1 3058 3 9140 Wh 1 3050 1 3031 1 3058 3 9138 Wh 0 0306m 0 0663m 0 0718m 0 1687m Ah 1 2512 1 2516 1 2519 3 7546 Ah 0 0000m 0 0000m 0 0000m 0 0000m Ah 1 2512 1 2516 1 2519 3 7546 Output example of harmonic measured data r Model M 760503 HRM V Range 15V A Range 0 5A Function V1 Sync PLL V1 Freq V1 60 00 Hz V1 rms 5 76 V A1 rms 1 4 mA wi 0 001 W DEG1
268. ed data can be selected and output OF m1 m2 m3 terminator ml indicates communication output channel and must be set within the following range 1 lt ml lt 14 m2 indicates output type no m2 0 No output 1 Voltage V 2 Current A 3 Power W 4 Reactive power var Apparent power VA Power factor PF Input voltage frequency V Hz 8 Input current frequency A Hz 9 Watt hour Wh 10 Ampere hour Ah 11 Phase angle deg 12 Peak voltage value Vpk 13 Peak current value Apk 14 Computation result MATH 15 Integration time 24 Positive watt hour Wh 25 Negative watt hour Wh 26 Positive ampere hour Ah 27 Negative ampere hour Ah m3 indicates element and must be set within the following range 1 lt m3 lt 4 Query OF1 lt terminator gt Example OF1 3 2 Description Parameter error 12 will occur if m1 m2 or m3 is set to an illegal value No output computation range and elapsed integration time have no relation to the element but when using them with the OF command set m3 1 OFD OFD Initializes communication output information type inquires about the current settings Two sets of default setting are available one is for normal measurement and the other is for integration Syntax OFD m lt terminator gt m indicates default no m 2 Select mode valid only for the inquiry command 0 Default for normal measurement 1 Default
269. ee 64 bytes EN Used Free 192 bytes Po Used When handshaking is in use reception of data will stop when the free space in the buffer drops to 64 bytes since data cannot be passed to the main program fast enough to keep up with the transmission After reception of data stops data continues to be passed to the internal program Reception of data starts again when the free space in the buffer inceases to 192 bytes Whether handshaking is in use or not if the buffer becomes full any additional data received is no longer stored and is lost IM 760401 01E 11 3 Setting the Mode Handshaking Method Data Format and Baud Rate Data Format The serial interface of this instrument performs communications using start stop synchronization In start stop synchronization one character is transmitted at a time Each character consists of a start bit data bits a parity bit and a stop bit Refer to the figure below Level returns to idle Circuit idle 1 character gt State dotted line or state the start bit the next lt Data bit data solid line 7 or 8 bits l l I l I I l y I I 1 I I 1 I i Stop bit end M Parity bit Start bit Even odd or none 1 or 2 bits 2 The table below shows the data format combinations supported Preset value Start bit Data length Parity Stop bit 0 1 8 No 1 1 1 7 Odd 1 2 1 7 Even 1 3 1 7 No 2 Baud Rate The b
270. ee wire 7 5000 3 7500 W 7 5000W 15 000 W 37 500 W 75 000 W 150 00 W 1P3W 15 000 7 5000 W 15 000W 30 000 W 75 000 W 150 00 W 300 00 W Three phase three wire 30 000 15 000 W 30 000W 60 000 W 150 00 W 300 00 W 600 00 W SP3W 75 000 37 500W 75 000W 150 00 W 375 00 W 750 00W 1 5000 kW Three voltage three current 150 00 75 000 W 150 00W 300 00 W 750 00 W 1 5000 kW 3 0000 kw 8V3A 75 000 150 00W 300 00W 600 00 W 1 5000 kW 3 0000kW 6 0000 kW Three phase four wire 7 5000 5 6250 W 11 250W 22 500 W 56 250 W 112 50W 225 00 W SPAW 3 7500 11 250W 22 500W 45 000 W 112 50 W 225 00 W 450 00 W 30 000 22 500 W 45 000W 90 000 W 225 00 W 450 00 W 900 00 W 75 000 56 250W 112 50W 225 00 W 562 50 W 1 1250 kW 2 2500 kw 150 00 112 50W 225 00W 450 00 W 1 1250kW 2 2500 kW 4 5000 kW 300 00 225 00 W 450 00W 900 00 W 2 2500 kW 4 5000 kW 9 0000 kW IM 760401 01E 4 9 eBueg Uaweinseayy pue suomnipuo 1ueujeunseo y Dunes le 4 4 Selecting the Measurement Range When Using Direct Input On the WT210 When the crest factor is set to 3 Voltage Current Range Range V 500 00mA_ 1 0000 A 2 0000 A 5 0000 A 10 000 A 20 000 A 15 000 7 5000 W 15 000 W 30 000 W 75 000 W 150 00 W 300 00 W 30 000 15 000 W 30 000W 60 000 W 150 00 W 300 00 W 600 00 W 60 000 30 000 W 60 000 W 120 00 W 300 00 W 600 00 W 1 2000 kW 150 00 75 000 W 150 00 W 300 00 W 750 00 W 1 5000 kW 3 0000 kW 300 00 150 00 W 300 00W 600 00 W 1 5000 kW 3 0000 kW_ 6 0000 k
271. eeeeeseeeessaes 14 40 COMMunicate WAIT we 14 17 STORe INTeryval 22 enint eint eiceees 14 41 COMMunicate 14 16 STORE PANGI ae coe tiit eese ner rds 14 41 CONFIGUEG orco rero rientro eto 14 19 1s yg 14 41 DISPlay lt x gt ELEMent 14 22 STORe STATO iiiter tir ro rere erri 14 41 DISPlay lt x gt FUNCtion 14 22 DISPlay lt x gt MODE sse 14 23 DISPlay x RESolution eee 14 23 DISPlay lt x gt sssssssse 14 22 HARMonics DISPlay ORDer eene 14 24 HARMonics DISPlay esee 14 24 HARMonics ELEMent 14 24 HARMonics SYNChronize eeessseeeeenees 14 25 HARBMonics THD iiisiiisccssoesiucsa assa ssa aeneis bati i 14 25 HARMonics 14 24 HARMoni s STAT 6 nte tte 14 24 INTEGrate MODE ninm emeret 14 25 INTEGrate RESet wee 14 25 INTEGrate S TARE inest rene eee 14 25 INTEGrate STOP ssssssssseseseeeeeen enenatis 14 25 INTEGrate TIMer we 14 25 INTEGrate iiia tet teet ere eus 14 25 MATH ARIThmetic esses 14 26 MATH AVERage 14 26 MATH CFACtor 14 26 MATH TYPE 14 27 MATH nitent iet 14 26 MEASure HARMonics BlNary 14 29 MEASure HARMonics ITEM SYNChronize lt gt 14 30 MEASure HARMonics ITEM PRESet 14 29
272. egration End Over or Syntax error After an IM1 SRQ is affected only by a computation End In case of IM4 SRQ is affected only by a Syntax error ERROR DIO 6 When a Syntax error or Over occurs this bit is set to 1 and the SRQ is set to True Store Recall Busy DIO 5 This bit is set to 1 when storing recalling of data is in progress This bit cannot be disabled by the IM command since it is a status bit Even if this bit is set to 1 SRQ will not be affected Over DIO 4 This bit is set to 1 and SRQ is set to True when an overrange occurs in the measured data However this is not valid if the bit has been disabled by the IM command This bit is reset after a response is made to the serial poll The nature of Over can by identified by the OE command Syntax error DIO 3 This bit is set to 1 when a command error parameter error or execution error occurs The error No can be identified by the OE command This bit is reset after a response is made to the serial poll However this is not valid if the bit has been disabled be the IM command Integration End DIO 2 This bit is set to 1 when integration has been completed The bit is reset when a response is made to the serial poll However this is not valid if the bit has been disabled by the IM command Computation End DIO1 This bit is set to 1 when computation has been completed and the display is updated The bit is reset when a response
273. em before operation Fuse To avoid the possibility of fire only use a fuse that has a rating voltage current and type that is specified by the instrument When replacing a fuse turn OFF the power switch and unplug the power cord Never short the fuse holder Do Not Operate in an Explosive Atmosphere Do not operate the instrument in the presence of flammable liquids or vapors Operation in such environments constitutes a safety hazard Do Not Remove Covers The cover should be removed by YOKOGAWA s qualified personnel only Opening the cover is dangerous because some areas inside the instrument have high voltages External Connection Securely connect the protective grounding before connecting to the item under measurement or to an external control unit If you are going to touch the circuit make sure to turn OFF the circuit and check that no voltage is present See below for operating environmental limitations CAUTION This product is a Class A for industrial environments product Operation of this product in a residential area may cause radio interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference IM 760401 01E vii Structure of the Manual This user s manual consists of the following sections Startup Guide Using an example of measuring the inverter efficiency the setup procedure from wiring the circuit to performing measurements and computation is explained C
274. ement Mode is set to RMS or VOLTAGE MEAN Function Display V voltage A current Displays zero VA apparent power var reactive power ae PF power factor B me r r c 4 deg phase angle di j J Measurement Abort No Data Display Bar Display If you change the displayed information by changing the measurement range or the function element or there is no data to be displayed the following bar display appears temporarily 2 4 IM 760401 01E Chapter 3 Before Starting Measurements 3 4 Handling Precautions Safety Precautions e If you are using this instrument for the first time make sure to thoroughly read the Safety Precautions given on page vi and vii Do not remove the case Some sections inside the instrument have high voltages that are extremely dangerous For internal inspection or adjustment contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer Abnormal Behavior Stop using the instrument if there are any symptoms of trouble such as strange odors or smoke coming from the instrument If these symptoms occur immediately turn OFF the power and unplug the power cord In addition turn OFF the power to the DUT that is connected to the input terminal Then contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer Power Cord Nothing should be placed on top of the power cord The power cord should also be kept away from any heat sources When unplugging the power cord from the outlet never pull
275. ement that is actually connected The internal processing of the WT230 varies depending on the selected wiring system If the selected wiring system does not match the actual circuit measurements and computation will not be correct For the relationship between the wiring systems and the method of determining the measured values or computed values see page 16 6 IM 760401 01E 3 19 sjueuiaunseo y Bues o40Jog le Chapter 4 Setting Measurement Conditions and Measurement Range 4 1 Selecting the Measurement Mode CHECK RANGE MODE o o o o o m o RANGE UPDATE VOLTAGE CURRE RMS VOLTAGE DC JAX HOLD a AUTO o MEAN 5 var MODE MAX HOLD TRIG FUNCTION ELEMENT z EET Te a 1 7 vn deg ruwcrioN ELEMENT START STOP RESET HARMONICS MEMORY r3 REMOTE H 123X h ruwcriN ELEMENT ht FILTER WIRING a 5 a a m a L13P4W O3V3A Im Im SCALING AVG LINE FREQ STORE RECALL HARMONICS KEY LOCK Ere S3 2 3 2 38 Z 2 5 z 5 The explanation given in this section uses WT230 as an example For the differences between the WT210 and the WT230 see section 2 2 Operation Keys and Functions Element Display Procedure VOLTAGE VOLTAGE VOLTAGE qux SHIFT MODE NS SHIFT MODE wm SHIFT MODE Ap l VOLTAGE MEAN
276. en the WT210 and the WT230 see section 2 2 Operation Keys and Functions Element Display Operate the instrument by following the thick lines in the menu below Press the ENTER key to confirm a selection or setting To leave the current menu in the middle of the operation press the key indicated in 5 ENTER End of setting 5 3 Display C ENTER IH oFF E an v 3 Display C ENTER ENTER pas 3 fh End of setting IM 760401 01E eBueg 1ueujeunseo y pue suomnipuo 1ueujeunseoe y Buas le 4 3 Turning ON OFF the Input Filter Explanation The following two types of input filters are provided The filters eliminates noise such as inverter waveforms and distorted waveforms and allow stable measured values to be obtained Line Filter This filter is inserted only into the measurement circuit It eliminates noise components of the input signal The cutoff frequency is 500 Hz on Selecting on and pressing the ENTER key enables the line filter function and turns ON the LINE indicator OFF Selecting oFF and pressing the ENTER key disables the line filter function The LINE indicator turns OFF Frequency Filter This filter is inserted only into the frequency measurement circuit The cutoff frequency is 500 Hz Since the WT210 230 is making measurements in sync with the input signal the frequency of the input signal must be measured correctly o
277. en the 1st order voltage and 1st order current does not become the corresponding relay output item RELay HCHannel lt x gt THReshold Function Syntax Example Description Sets the threshold level for the relay output item in case of harmonic measurement queries the current setting RELay HCHannel lt x gt THReshold lt NRf gt lt x gt 1 to 4 lt NRf gt 0 000E 00 to 9 999E 09 RELAY HCHANNEL1 THRESHOLD 600 0E 00 RELAY HCHANNEL1 THRESHHOLD gt RELAY HCHANNEL 1 THRESHOLD 600 0E 00 The mantissa of the setting value is rounded a follows Less than 1 000 Rounded to the third digit left of the decimal 1 000 to 9999 Rounded to the fourth significant digit RELay MODE Function Syntax Example Sets the mode of the comparator function queries the current setting RELay MODE SINGle DUAL RELay MODE RELAY MODE DUAL RELAY MODE RELAY MODE DUAL RELay NCHannel lt x gt Function Queries all settings related to the relay output items in case of normal measurement Syntax RELay NCHannel lt x gt lt x gt 1 to 4 Example RELAY NCHANNEL2 gt RELAY NCHANNEL2 FUNCTION A 1 THRESHOLD 20 00E 00 RELay NCHannel lt x gt FUNCtion Function Syntax Example Description Sets the function of the relay output item in case of normal measurement queries the current setting RELay NCHannel lt x gt FUNCtion normal measurement function gt lt NRf gt
278. ended event register Sets bit 3 EES of status byte to 1 or 0 Error queue Sets bit 2 EAV of status byte to 1 or 0 Enable Registers Registers which mask a bit so that the bit does not affect the status byte even if the bit is set to 1 are shown below Status byte Standard event register Masks bits using the standard event enable register Masks bits using the service request enable register Extended event register Masks bits using the extended event enable register Writing Reading from Registers The ESE command is used to set bits in the standard event enable register to 1 or 0 and the ESR query is used to check whether bits in that register are set to 1 or o For details of these commands refer to section 14 3 14 4 2 Status Byte Overview of Status Byte RQS 7 6 ESB MAV EES EAV 1 0 MSS Bits 0 1 and 7 Not used always 0 Bit 2 EAV Error Available Set to 1 when the error queue is not empty i e when an error occurs For details refer to page 14 44 Bit 3 EES Extended Event Summary Bit Set to 1 when a logical AND of the extended event register and the corresponding enable register is 1 i e when an event takes place in the instrument Refer to page 14 47 Bit 4 MAV Message Available Set to 1 when the output queue is not empty i e when there is data which is to be output when an i
279. ent Range The measurement range varies depending on the display update rate see section 4 13 as follows Display Update Rate Measurement Range 0 1s 25 Hz to 100 kHz 0 25s 10 Hz to 100 kHz 0 5s 5 Hz to 100 kHz 1s 2 5 Hz to 100 kHz 2s 1 5 Hz to 50 kHz 5s 0 5 Hz to 20 kHz There are six types of measurement ranges 1 Hz 10 Hz 100 Hz 1 kHz 10 kHz 100 kHz The measurement range switches automatically Maximum Reading Unit and Unit Prefix Maximum reading 99999 when the number of displayed digits is 5 Units Hz Prefix k IM 760401 01E 5 5 S Nsay uonejnduio pue s jnsey JUsWAaINseayy HulAejdsig H 5 4 Displaying the Frequency Selecting the Display Function The following selections are available V Hz voltage frequency will be displayed A Hz current frequency will be displayed Selecting the Input Element 1 2 3 Displays the measurement values of element 1 2 3 X Displays no measurement values only bar Note 000 Incase the level of the input signal is low less than or equal to 7 if the crest factor is set to 3 less than or equal to 14 if the crest factor is set to 6 or when the frequency is smaller than the measurement range the display will show ErrLo When the frequency is larger than the measurement range the display will show ErrHi This instrument measures the frequency after synchronizing to the cycle of the input signal We recommend to turn ON the frequency fil
280. ent and returns to the screen on which rAnGE is shown on display C The adjustment results are applied when the WT210 WT230 is power cycled to the normal measurement condition turning ON the power switch without pressing the SHIFT key RESET Returns to normal measurement However all adjusted data will become invalid CURRENT Press this key to proceed to the following range without adjusting the current range When adjusting the D A output press this key to move the new input value to the right VOLTAGE Press this key to return to the previous range without adjusting the current range When adjusting the D A output press this key to move the new input value to the left IM 760401 01E 15 1 a Bunoouse qnou pue eoueuojure y 15 1 Adjustments Adjusting the Voltage Range 1 As shown in the figure below connect the voltage output terminal of the AC voltage current standard to the voltage input terminal of the WT210 WT230 and the voltage terminal of the standard power meter EUT Equipment under Test AC voltage Voltage HO current standard Output Terminal Standard power 2 Instep 2 of Preparations described earlier select rAnGE2 and press the ENTER key Display B changes to the voltage range of 15 00 V Display A CAL Display B 15 00V Display C Measured value The measured value is displayed using 5 digits 3 Setthe output voltage of the generator so that the standard power meter reads 15 00
281. ent holes in the process IM 760401 01E 3 3 sjueuiaunseo y Bues o40Jog le 3 3 Wiring Precautions AN To prevent the possibility of electric shock and damage to the instrument follow the warnings below Employ protective earth ground before connecting measurement cables The power cord that comes with the instrument is a three pin type power cord Connect the power cord to a properly grounded three pin outlet To ensure safety if the current to be measured exceeds 7 A RMS use a cable or conductor that allows current greater than the current to be measured to flow through it and always connect protective grounding prior to use of this instrument For products shipped as of January 2004 the protective earth terminal is located on the rear panel f you need to confirm whether a protective earth terminal is installed please contact the dealer from whom you purchased the instrument Turn OFF the power to the object to be measured circuit measurement circuit when wiring the circuit Connecting or removing measurement cables while the power is turned ON is dangerous Take special caution not to wire a current measurement circuit to the voltage input terminal or a voltage measurement circuit to the current input terminal Strip the insulation cover of the measurement cable so that when it is wired to the current input terminal the conductive parts bare wires do not protrude from the terminal Also make sure to fasten the c
282. enu below Press the ENTER key to confirm a selection or setting Toleave the current menu in the middle of the operation press the key indicated in step 1 The confirmed settings up to that point are kept Setting the Scaling Constant Select the scaling function 1 Display C SETUP F L L r rr C7 N un TOP rm zn 2 r gm m mca J n E3 3 Display C ENTER 1 aFF an 5 f d AL A gt ENTER m ua 2 ry F7 pw Ln rr 3 rr ss un ra uc un n ur Ak E Fr 15 ENTER Select the input Set the power element Set the PT ratio Set the CT ratio coefficient Display C T Display A 11 Display B 13 Display C HLL ENTER P Li i i 9 ENTER gt 0 UTE 9 ENTER gt F LG ri f CL i 8 V sets the value 12 Same as steps 14 Same as steps Fi dg 9 V moves digits 8 to 10 8 to 10 EL 3 SHIFT gt 10 moves the decimal point SHIFT 17 End ENTER End of setting IM 760401 01E 4 11 eBueg 1ueujeunseo y pue SUOI IPUOD 1ueujeunseoe y Buas le 4 5 Setting the Scaling Value When External PT CT is Used Explanation Turning ON OFF Scaling Set the scaling functin 1 Display C SETUP LFiLE F
283. eration Keys and Functions Element Display FILTER o o o n o n mn n SCALING AVG LINE FREQ STORE RECALL HARMONICS KEY LOCK 1 Selecting the Display Function Pressing the FUNCTION key on display A will select TIME elapsed integration time Pressing the FUNCTION key on display C will select Wh Whz power Ah Aht current or average active power during integration FUNCTION FUNCTION FUNCTION FUNCTION FUNCTION FUNCTION A W PES RN POS o FUNCTION FUNCTION FUNCTION FUNCTION FUNCTION FUNCTION V 9 A W V Hz A Hz Wh FUNCTION Wh FUNCTION v Wht FUNCTION FUNCTION FUNCTION FUNCTION FUNCTION P amp WV A lt Aht lt lt Aht peius ine Wh and Ah will light twice and are displayed on the top of display C You can reverse the order by first pressing the SHIFT key followed by the FUNCTION key P amp A FUNCTION 2 Selecting the Input Element Select the input element by pressing the ELEMENT key on display C The operation is the same as the one described on page 5 1 3 Starting Integration Press the START key The START indicator will light the integrated value will appear on display C and the elapsed integration time will appear on display A 5 is displayed first on display
284. es between Measurement Modes The WT210 WT230 does not support the mean value measurement mode shown in the table below Measurement Retified Rectified mean Linear mode value calibrated mean value to the rms value averaging Name Waveform V MEAN DC Ep Sinewave pm Ta 0 Half wave ENS tEp Ep Ep rectification x 2x 2 2 ux Full wave LVN Ep 2 E rectification On a 7 p Direct T E E E current i B 2 2 P P Triangular JEP u Ep 0 wave T 2n 4 2 Square SEP m wave Ep 0 Pulse n em 2 2 T T TNT T 2n 2x 4n J2 2x r ke Pulse Ep When duty D is applied 0 2x s xD JD Ep D Ep 2ym D Ep 4 2 IM 760401 01E 4 2 Selecting the Measurement Synchronization Source CHECK RANGE MODE n rH n mn UPDATE VOLTAGE CURRENT RMS VOLTAGE DC MAX HOLD MEAN VA var ALL MUC TIME 123r FUNCTION ELEMENT 123r AUTO o AUTO RANGE VOLTAGE CURRENT MODE MAX HOLD INTEGRATOR a HOLD TRIG RESET FUNCTION ELEMENT LL LO UT 123r HARMONICS MEMORY REMOTE INTEG SET a h runerion mewewr LOCAL SETUP hi KEY LOcK OUfPi SHIFT OiP3w 01 3P3w O3P4w 13V3A e The explanation given in this section uses WT230 as an example For the differences between the WT210 and the WT230 see section 2 2 Operation Keys and Functions Element Di
285. es regarding self diagnosis 15 15 error display harmonic error messages communication ussse 14 61 error queue 5 tetendit tel rere den 14 48 exponential averaging 4 18 exponential averaging harmonic ssssssss 7 8 extended event register 14 47 external dimensions sse 16 13 Pe fixed rango 4 5 ised creeks ree e mre p En ER EM deed 4 8 four arithmetic operation seeeeeeeeeee four arithmetical operations E fr quency iater heben nemen innen frequency filter sessssseeeenennn 4 6 frequency measurement function ssssssss 1 4 front panel 2 otis one te eter Rr Emu 2 1 functional comparison sesssseseeeeeneneee ii functional overview sssesssseeeeeeeneeene 1 1 TUSOt o esc rb rst borea cote te 15 16 general handling precautions eeeeesssess 3 1 GP IB board GP IB interface ee tene eere 10 1 HI haindshaking rei terreno rere 11 6 harmonic distortion seseeeneeene 7 5 harmonic measurement sssseeeeeeeneene 7 1 harmonic measurement function eese 1 4 HARMonics group 14 24 header section ASCII see 10 5 holding the display
286. ess execution error 13 will occur While recalling or storing is in progress execution error 19 will occur MT MT Sets the computing equation of MATH function inquires about the current setting Syntax MT m lt terminator gt m indicates the computing equation m 0 Efficiency for WT230 only 1 Crest factor of the voltage input waveform of element 1 2 Crest factor of the voltage input waveform of element 2 for WT230 model 760503 only 3 Crest factor of the voltage input waveform of element 3 for WT230 only 4 Crest factor of the current input waveform of element 1 5 Crest factor of the current input waveform of element 2 for WT230 model 760503 only 6 Crest factor of the current input waveform of element 3 available only on 7 display A display B 8 display A display B 9 display A x display B 10 display A display B 1l display A display B 12 display A display B 13 Average active power of element 1 while integration is in progress 14 Average active power of element 2 while integration is in progress for WT230 model 760503 only 15 Average active power of element 3 while integration is in progress for WT230 only 16 Average active power of element S while integration is in progress for WT230 only 13 6 IM 760401 01E 13 1 Commands Query Example Description OA OA Sets D A output items inquires about the Syntax Query Example Descript
287. ethod Voltage range Current range Measurement mode of voltage and current Data hold Line filter ON OFF Frequency filter ON OFF Measurement synchronization source Scaling ON OFF MAX hold function ON OFF PT CT scaling constant External sensor scaling constant Averaging ON OFF Averaging type Averaging sample number attenuation constant Crest factor Computing Equation of MATH function Display function element for each display Number of displayed digits Display update rate Integration mode Integration timer preset time Integration value Integration elapsed time Data stored in internal memory Storage interval Recalling interval Output items for plotter communication Harmonic measurement ON OFF only when equipped with the harmonic measurement option PLL source only when equipped with the harmonic measurement option D A output items only when equipped with the D A output option D A rated integration time only when equipped with the D A output option Comparator determination function only when equipped with the comparator option Comparator determination limit value only when equipped with the comparator option Communication output mode Delimiter Header Output interval in case of talk only GP IB address when GP IB is installed Handshaking method when serial interface is installed Data format when serial interface is installed Baud rate when serial interface is installed IM 76040
288. f Do While qrytemp lt gt END qrytemp Space 200 sts ilrd Dev qrytemp Len qrytemp If sts lt 0 Then GoTo GPIBError End If qrytemp Left qrytemp InStr qrytemp term 2 qry qry qrytemp If qrytemp lt gt END Then qry qry End If Loop Extract items that are separated by commas from the received data Listl AddItem Measurement Listl ListIndex Listl ListIndex 1 item 1 Do While qry lt gt END comma InStr qry If comma 0 Then Exit Do CStr cnt Query item Left qry comma 1 If item 10 Then Listl AddItem CStr item Query item Else Listl AddItem CStr item Query item End If qry Mid qry comma 1 Listl ListIndex Listl ListIndex 1 item item 1 Loop Listl AddItem Listl ListIndex Listl ListIndex 1 qrytemp Space 200 qry Space 500 Dummy DoEvents Return Function IM 760401 01E 13 23 pyepueis 4861 2 88p 3331 94 d10Joq spuewwo Jo Wa sAS SPUBLIWIOD uoneorunuulo 13 5 Sample Program Output of Normal Measurement Data im WT2108230 IEEE488 Sample Program Measurement 1 1N 0100 27E 0 0097 73E 0 0102 57E 0 0101 42E 0 04 9993E 0 05 0019E 0 05 387 1E 0 05 1932E 0 0500 30E 0 0488 16E 0 0548 11E 0 N 01 0484E 3 043 338E 0 0500 30E 0 Jd O3 5 C5 cO co c0 cn 4 co n2 i TII a a 1 1 1 1 1 Measurement 2 IN 0100 28E 0 0097 4E 0 0102
289. f the PLL source set as the input the maximum number of orders varies When an order exceeding the maximum has been set display B will show OS Requests output of setting parameters via communications Syntax Example Line 1 Line 2 Line 3 Line 4 Line 5 Line 6 Line 7 OS terminator Model MODEL760503 terminator Voltage range RV9 AV1 terminator Current range for CM0 RA9 AA1 SA50 00 terminator for CM1 RA9 AA1 SA1 50 00 A2 50 00 A3 50 00 terminator Display function DA1 DB2 DC3 terminator Display element EA1 EB1 EC1 terminator Measurement condition WR2 FL0 SC0 AGO HDO0 MTO terminator Measurement mode MNO terminator Line Line Line Line Line Line Line Line Line Line 17 Line 18 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Scaling for CM0 KV1 000 KA1 000 KW1 000 terminator for CM1 WT210 KV1 1 000 KA1 1 000 KW1 1 000 terminator for CM1 WT230 KV1 1 000 KV2 1 000 KV3 1 000 KA1 1 000 KA2 1 000 KA3 1 000 KW1 1 000 KW2 1 000 KW3 1 000 lt terminator gt Averaging setting AT1 AC1 terminator Integration setting ICO TM0 0 0 terminator Store and recall settings S00 SR0 0 0 RO0 RR0 0 0 terminator Harmonic measurement for models with HRM option PS1 HA0 OR1 HE1 DFO lt terminator gt D A output setting for models with DA4 DA12 or CMP optio
290. f the characters are displayed using special formats For details see section 1 3 Digital Numbers and Characters and Initial Menus page 1 6 IM 760401 01E Conventions Used in This Manual Symbols Used on Pages Describing Operating Procedures The following symbols are used to distinguish the contents of the explanations Indicates the keys and indicators related to the settings The procedure is explained using a flow diagram For the meaning of each operation see the example below All procedures are written with inexperienced users in mind exp erienced users may not need to carry out all the steps Example 1 Display C SETUP 2 Lann SHIFT OUTPUT Peau E Y dH 3 Display C 5 r EL AY ENTER CST aFF T ENTER End of setting F n Ji n SN ra edk n Za m oh xc EN 3 7 n 3g 1 Y n The flow diagram above indicates the following setu You can set up the display that is blinking 1 Press the SHIFT key to illuminate the SHIFT indicator and then press the SETUP OUTPUT key The output setup menu appears on display C 2 Press the or V key to select rELAY The four selectable items appear repetitively by pressing either key 3 Press the ENTER key to confirm the settings The setup menu corresponding to the function selected in step 2 appears on display C 4
291. fications Warm up time Approx 30 minutes Operating conditions Temperature 5 to 40 C Humidity 20 to 80 RH no condensation Operating altitude 2000 m or less Storage conditions Temperature 25 to 60 C Humidity 20 to 80 RH no condensation Rated supply voltage 100 to 120 VAC 200 to 240 VAC Permitted supply voltage range 90 to 132 VAC 180 to 264 VAC Rated supply voltage 50 60 Hz frequency Permitted supply voltage 48 to 63 Hz frequency range Maximum power consumption WT210 35 VA WT230 55 VA Insulation resistance 50 MQ or more at 500 VDC Between all voltage input terminals and case Between all current input terminals and output terminals collectively Between all voltage input terminals and all current input terminals Between all voltage input terminals of input elements Between all current input terminals of input elements Between all voltage input terminals and power supply plug Between all current input terminals and power supply plug Between case and power supply plug Withstand voltage 3700 VAC at 50 60 Hz for one minute Between all voltage input terminals and case Between current input terminals collectively and output terminals collectively Between all voltage input terminals and all current input terminals Between all voltage input terminals of input elements Between all current input terminals of input elements Between all voltage input te
292. fix symbol m 1073 k 103 or M 109 of the unit illuminates accordingly Indicators W h and A h illuminate twice consecutively For a description of these items see page 6 3 Ifthe first digit of display C shows M the result of computations such as the efficiency crest factor and four arithmetic operations is displayed Ifthe first digit of display C shows P and function V is illuminated the peak voltage is displayed If the first digit of display C shows P and function A is illuminated the peak current is displayed S 14 IM 760401 01E Displaying Voltage Current and Active Power 6 Press of display C to select input element 2 Each time T is pressed the element indicator character of display C illuminates in the order shown below The wiring system of the circuit on the primary side of the inverter is single phase two wire and the circuit is connected to input element 2 of the WT230 To show the measured value of input element 2 on display C we illuminate input element 2 Display C ELEMENT ELEMENT ELEMENT ELEMENT 1 2 3 gt X 12 sz C 1 235 1 282 Displaying the Volt tthe S lary Side of the Invert Display A Carry out the following procedure to display the voltage of the secondary side of the inverter on display A Function indicator Element indicator RANGE AUTO GAUTO o TRIG
293. for integration Query OFD terminator Example OFD1 Description Parameter error 12 will occur if m is set to an illegal value Select mode OFD2 is validated when the OF command is executed if m is set to 0 default for normal measurement or 1 default for integration f you select default for normal measurement the output of channel 13 is the information on the frequency target function that is currently measured and the output of channel 14 is the information displayed on display C If you change either the frequency measurement target or display information of display C the output also changes 13 8 IM 760401 01E 13 1 Commands OH OH Sets communication output information Syntax types in case of harmonic measurement inquires about the current settings OH ml1 m2 terminator ml indicates output type no in case of print mode ml 1 10 114 12 13 V outputs measured voltage value and relative harmonic content as a numerical value A outputs measured current value and relative harmonic content as a numerical value W outputs measured active power value and relative harmonic content as a numerical value deg outputs the phase angle as a numerical value GV outputs measured voltage value as numerical value and graph GA outputs measured current value as numerical value and graph GW outputs measured active power value as numeri
294. from harmonic order 01 to 50 21 End gt ENTER End of setting 9 14 IM 760401 01E 9 6 Setting the Comparator Limit Values Option Explanation Setting the Comparator Limit Values in case of Normal Measurement You can set the type of the limit and its value for each relay seperately Selecting the relay Selects the relay for assigning the type of limit from Ch1 to ch4 Selecting the type of limit correspons to column A in the procedure The following selections are available When the comparator mode is dual ch1 amp ch2 and ch3 amp ch4 are pairs and only the same type of limit can be selected for the channels of one pair V voltage A current P active power VAr reactive power VA apparent power PF power factor VFrq voltage frequency AFrq current frequency Ph total Watt hour Wh Ah total Ampere hour dEG phase angle VP peak value of voltage AP peak value of current MATH computation Ph positive watt hour value Wh Ph negative watt hour value Wh Ah positive ampere hour value Ah negative ampere hour value no data For details concerning the positive value of the ampere hour refer to page 6 3 Selecting the element corresponds to column B in the procedure WT210 760401 no such element setting available WT230 760502 element can be selected from 1 3 or 4 WT230 760503 element can be selected from 1 2
295. function ON OFF OFF Interval Ohr OOmin 00sec storage recalling ON OFF OFF Output items normal measurement items rated integration time 1 hr 00 min 00 s Mode single determination function V1 A1 P1 PF1 Limit value refer to section 9 6 display function ON OFF OFF Communication item normal measurement setting GP IB Mode addressable mode address 1 status byte 15 delimiter 0 Serial Mode normal mode handshaking mode 0 format 0 Baud rate 9600 delimiter 0 status byte 15 Note Becareful since measurement data will be lost when initializing However measurement data or setup parameters stored in the internal memory will be kept Ifthe setup parameters are initialized by a communication command RC command or RST command parameters related to GPIB and serial communication will not be initialized When Initializing Setup Parameters at Power On If the power switch is turned ON while holding down the ENTER key the WT210 WT230 powers up using initial settings Keep holding down the ENTER key until the illumination of all LEDs turn off step 2 of the Opening Message on page 3 10 All setup parameters including communication parameters will be initialized as indicated above When the setup parameters are initialized error codes Err 60 and Err 78 are shown as messages to indicate the initialization they do not indicate a malfunction IM 760401 01E 12 3 3207 9y pue uonesue
296. g on the RECALL indicator will light while recalling is in progress e OFF Recalling will stop by pressing the ENTER key after selecting oFF the RECALL indicator will extinguish Note During recalling the measurement conditions range will become as those of the data being recalled After recalling finishes the original measurement conditions will return Measurement range measurement mode measurement synchronization source input filter ON OFF scaling ON OFF scaling constants averaging ON OFF averaging mode averaging coefficients MAX hold ON OFF display update rate crest factor integration mode integration time harmonic measurement function ON OFF PLL source target element computation method of harmonic distortion factor When recalling data to a personal computer by communication interface data might be cut due to the data length or used personal computer In such a case increase the recalling interval 8 4 IM 760401 01E 8 2 Storing Recalling Setup Parameters CHECK RANGE MODE o o tl Oo o RANGE UPDATE VOLTAGE CURRENT RMS VOLTAGE DC MAX HOLD CHAUD GAUO o MEAN K j m V VA 1 2 3 x YolTAGe cunrenr nouo MODE MAX HOLD TRIG r1 LE r1 k A VAF runerion ELEMENT Va M W Tm B m V F 1 235 k A deg ruwcrow ELEMENT MW HARMONIC a j 1 n n l m V H 1253 g Ze r m j im k A h jruwcrow ELEMENT Vom a m M
297. g EF He End of setting urHEE ij F HG This is an example for the WT230 rro FF Wi 760503 The display varies E L nI depending on the number of installed CE ng elements CF R3 OAR P BR b P Anh H Alb H ATB H R 2Ib FAN Yi a This is an example for the WT230 HU E 760503 The display varies AY u j depending on the number of installed 7 elements AH Y4 IM 760401 01E 4 23 eBueg 1ueujeunseo y pue SUOI IPUOD puawainsean Buas le 4 10 Computing the Crest Factor Explanation Crest Factor Computation The crest factor is determined by peak value rms value The WT210 WT230 can compute the crest factors for voltage and current and show them on display C 5 is displayed at the front of the value when the crest factor is being displayed Computing Equation for the Crest Factor and Display EF H l Displays the result of Peak of V1 rms of V1 LF Hg Displays the result of Peak of V2 rms of V2 for 760503 only LF 4 Displays the result of Peak of V3 rms of V3 for 760502 and 760503 LF A Displays the result of Peak of A1 rms of A1 LF Hg Displays the result of Peak of A2 rms of A2 for 760503 only CF 4 Displays the result of Peak of A3 rms of A3 for 760502 and 760503 Note Definition of crest factor PEAK value RMS value Ifthe RMS value is less than or equal to 0 5 less than or equal to 1 if the crest factor is set to 6 of the rated range computation overflow 4 oF
298. g battery life see section 15 6 IM 760401 01E sjuswainseayy Bunes 310499 le 3 6 Turning ON OFF the Power Switch and Opening Message Opening Message Power ewitch i y Display B Display C POWER ON LLL No display C EESE All LEDs illuminate Turn OFF A For 760502 c i 02 8 Model display ESTAS No display The display C varies depending on the specified 4 Version display Lee au i specifications and Ne sispley options EX1 and EX2 external sensor option 6 HRM harmonic option GP IB address Serial communication mode Serial communication mand H handshaking 1 Serial communication format Serial communication baud rate All specified specifications and options displayed YES Displays the item that was specified before the power was Ready to make turned OFF measurements 3 10 IM 760401 01E 3 7 Directly Wiring the Circuit under Measurement A A WARNING When measuring current by directly applying the current to flow through the current input terminals of the WT210 WT230 the voltage of the object to be measured appears at the external sensor input connector To prevent the possibility of electric shock remove the cable for measurements from the external sensor N CAUTION The measurement c
299. g the Number of Displayed Digits and the Display Update Rate 4 31 4 14 Selecting the Crest Factor e c cece cece ee ee eee eceeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeseesaeseesaeeeeeseeeeaetaae 4 33 Displaying Measurement Results and Computation Results 5 1 Displaying Voltage Current and Active Power sse 5 1 5 2 Displaying Apparent Power Reactive Power and Power Factor sessss 5 3 5 3 Displaying the Phase Angle sesenta tenta 5 4 5 4 Displaying the Frequency ccccsscceeeseeeeeeeeeeeesneeseeeneeseeeeeeeneesenaneeseaeeeeesneeseneneetenneeess 5 5 5 5 Displaying Efficiency WT230 Only Crest Factor Four Arithmetic Operation Value Average Active Power and Peak Value cccccccceeceeeeeneeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeccaeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeas 5 7 Integration 6 1 Integrator FUNCIONS P aiiis 6 1 6 2 Setting Integration Mode and Integration Timer sssssees 6 4 6 3 Displaying Integrated Values ssseeneenennennm eene 6 6 6 4 Precautions Regarding Use of Integrator Function seeeeeeeeee 6 9 Harmonic Measurement Function Option 7 1 Harmonic Measurement Function ssssseeeeeeneeeneen eene mnn 7 1 7 2 Setting the Target Element PLL Source and Harmonic Distortion Method 7 4 7 3 Turning ON OFF the Harmonic Measurement Function
300. ge Active Power during Integration This function computes the average active power within the integration period It is derived by dividing the watt hour integrated active power by the elapsed time of integration The result can be shown on display C When displaying the average active power 3 is displayed at the front of the value Watt hour Wh Average active power during integration W s R H a w Elapsed time of integration h Computing Method and Displayed Information of Average Active Power while Integration Is in Progress HH i Displays the computed result of watt hour of element 1 Wh1 the elapsed integration time HH Displays the computed result of watt hour of element 2 Wh2 the elapsed integration time 760503 only HH 3 Displays the computed result of watt hour of element 3 Wh3 the elapsed integration time 760502 and 760503 HH 4 Displays the computed result of watt hour of element S SWh3 the elapsed integration time 760502 and 760503 The value of watt hour Wh varies depending on the wiring system The value that results is derived by replacing W in the table on page 5 2 with Wh Note This computation function is enabled during integration while the integration is in progress or while the integration is suspended If the integration is reset the watt hour and the elapsed time of integration become zero and the display s
301. going to use the instrument for a long period of time unplug the power cord from the outlet IM 760401 01E 3 1 sjuswainseayy Bunes 310499 le 3 2 Installing the Instrument Installation Condition Install the instrument in a place that meets the following conditions Ambient Temperature and Humidity Ambient temperature 5 to 40 C 20 to 80 RH no condensation Flat Even Surface Install the instrument in a stable horizontal place Accurate measurements may be hindered when the instrument is used in an unstable place or tilted position Well Ventilated Location Vent holes are located on the top and bottom of the instrument To prevent internal overheating do not block the vent holes If you remove the legs from the bottom panel for rack mounting allow an equivalent amount of space 20 mm or more from the floor to prevent blocking the vent holes Do Not Install the Instrument in the Following Places In direct sunlight or near heat sources Where the level of mechanical vibration is high Near noise generating sources such as high voltage equipment and power source Near strong magnetic field sources Where an excessive amount of soot steam dust or corrosive gas is present In an unstable place Note Installation Position For the most accurate measurements use the instrument in the following environment Ambient temperature 23 5 C Ambient humidity 30 to 75 RH no condensation When using the instrument in
302. gration was stopped will be displayed or output ON HOLD TRIG ON ON ON T i Displayed a7 i value 7 Dotted line shows integrated value i i Elapsed integration time i i i START STOP RESET Relation between Integration Reset and the START STOP key The relation between integration reset and the start stop key is as follows Auto stop Reset y Interrupt Reset Interrupt Restart Start Restart Integrated value lt Preset time for integration Elapsed integration time START STOP START STOP RESET START RESET IM 760401 01E 6 9 uone46o1u u 6 4 Precautions Regarding Use of Integrator Function Backup During Power Failures fthere is a power failure while integration is in progress the integrated value and integration elapsed time will be backed up When the power is restored the display will show the integrated results up to the time the power failure occurred To start integration after the power is restored it is necessary to reset integration first Operating Restrictions during Integration Certain key operations are restricted during integration and are shown below Integration status Integration Integration in Integration reset progress interrupted START Indicator Not lit Lit Not lit STOP Indicator Not lit Not lit Lit Function Wiring system only WT230 O O O Measurement synchronization so
303. gt Spaces OFF D CoN lt NRf gt 5 cuRRent roe RANGe Space gt lt Current gt O lt Voltage gt 4 MC AUTO gt Space C OFF Con lt NRf gt ALL Space lt NRf gt ELEMent x Space 4 lt NRf gt T PC FiLTer PES Space OFF 2r ON NR C LFiLter 2 4 Space OFF or E lt NRf gt rl C STATe Space OFF Con lt NRf gt Space lt NRf gt ELEMent x 4 Space lt NRf gt p O O STATe lt Space gt C OFF gt Con lt NRf gt 14 18 14 3 Commands CONFIGURE AVERAGING STATE OFF Pe SYNChronize Space VOLTage pee or pn lt Space gt lt NRf gt e O m lt Space gt OFF Con lt NRf gt TYPE lt Space gt LiNear D lt NRf gt CONFigure Example Function Queries all the settings related to the CONFIGURE AVERAGING STATE Syntax Example me
304. gure CURRent AUTO esse 14 19 CONFigure CURRent ESCaling ELEMentexs 14 20 CONFigure CURRent ESCaling 14 20 CONFigure CURRent ESCaling ALL 14 20 CONFigure CURRent RANGE sss 14 20 CONFigure CURRent wee 14 19 CONFigure FILTer niisiis irainaren aiian 14 20 CONFigure LFI LIET seio nn cere erts 14 20 CONFigure MHOLd STATe 14 20 CONFigure MODE esseeeeneeeennneennen 14 21 CONFigure SCALing PT CT SFACtor ELEMent lt x gt 14 21 CONFigure SCALing PT CT SFACtor 14 21 CONFigure SCALing PT CT SFACtor ALL 14 21 CONFigure SCALing eee 14 21 CONFigure SCALing STATe we 14 21 CONFigure SYNChronize sssssssssss 14 21 CONFigure VOLTage AUTO sssesee 14 21 CONFigure VOLTage RANGe wee 14 21 CONFigure VOL Tage se 14 21 CONFigure WlRing eeeneen 14 22 AOUTput CHANnel lt x gt wee 14 15 AOUTput IRTime we 14 15 AOUTput PRESet wee 14 15 AOUTDput sss 14 15 COMMunicate HEADer 14 16 COMMunicate LOCKout 14 16 COMMunicate REMote 14 16 MEASure NORMal ITEM lt gt ELE lt emt lt x gt MEASure NORMal ITEM lt
305. hanges as follows Display A FUNCTION FUNCTION FUNCTION FUNCTION iF No display function lit 9 V A gt W No display function lit Displays the harmonic order 1 to 50 Display function V A W Displays all rms values computed values of 1up to 50 components of voltage current or active power FUNCTION FUNCTION FUNCTION FUNCTION w gt PF V A FUNCTION FUNCTION a FUNCTION FUNCTION Adeg Vdeg W 4 A ETON 0 Displays the measured voltage value of the order shown on display A Displays the measured current value of the order shown on display A Displays the active power measured value of the order shown on display A Displays the power factor of the fundamental 1st order Displays the voltage harmonic distortion proceeded by t on display B Displays the current harmonic distortion proceeded by t on display B Displays the relative harmonic content of the voltage of the order shown on display A Displays the relative harmonic content of the current of the order shown on display A Displays the relative harmonic content of the active power of the order shown on In case the 1st order fundamental is shown on display A Displays the phase angle between the voltage of the first order and the current of
306. hapter 1 Functional Overview and Digital Display Describes the input signal flow functional overview digital numbers characters initial menus that are displayed when a key is pressed and other information Chapter 2 Names and Functions of Parts and Auto range Monitor Overrange and Error Displays Describes the names of each part of the instrument and keys on the front panel Chapter 3 Before Starting Measurements Describes precautions to be taken when using the instrument how to install the instrument how to connect the power supply how to turn ON OFF the power switch and how to wire the measurement circuit Chapter 4 Setting Measurement Conditions and Measurement Range Describes how to set measurement conditions such as the measurement mode filter ON OFF measurement range external PT CT scaling when using external sensors shut clamp etc averaging and crest factor Chapter 5 Displaying Measurement Results and Computation Results Explains the procedures for displaying parameters such as the voltage current active power apparent power reactive power power factor phase angle frequency efficiency crest factor value derived from four arithmetical operations average active power during integration and peak value Chapter 6 Integration Explains the procedures for integrating active power and current Chapter 7 Harmonic Measurement Function Option Explains the procedures for
307. haracter string PANel gt lt Space gt gt lt NRf gt RECall RECall PANel Function Queries all the settings relating to recalling data Function Retrieves the setup parameters file Syntax RECall Syntax RECall PANel lt NRf gt Example RECALL gt RECALL STATE 0 lt NRf gt 1 to 4 file number INTERVAL 0 0 0 Example RECALL PANEL 1 RECall INTerval Function Sets the recalling interval queries the current setting Syntax RECall INTerval NRf NRf NRf lt String gt RECall INTerval lt NRf gt lt NRf gt lt NR gt 0 0 0 to 99 59 59 lt String gt HH MM SS HH hour MM minutes SS seconds Example RECALL INTERVAL 0 0 0 RECALL INTERVAL 00 00 00 RECALL INTERVAL gt RECALL INTERVAL 0 0 0 Description If the recalling interval is set to O h 0 min 0 s the recalling interval is set to the display update rate as when the data was stored RECall STATe Function Syntax Example Turns recalling ON OFF queries the current setting RECall STATe Boolean RECall STATe RECALL STATE ON RECALL STATE gt RECALL STATE 1 14 36 IM 760401 01E 14 3 Commands 14 3 11 RELay Group The commands in the RELay group are used to make settings relating to and inquiries about the comparator function This allows you to make the same settings and inquiries as when using the lower menus of OUTPUT rELAY This group is only useful in case your instrument is equipped w
308. he Input Element Select the input element by pressing the ELEMENT key WT210 No element selection function because there is only a single input element 760401 ELEMENT ELEMENT ELEMENT WT230 1 3 Xx 760502 ELEMENT ELEMENT ELEMENT ELEMENT WT230 eee eee 1 760503 3 Selecting the Measurement Range You can select the voltage measurement range by pressing the VOLTAGE key and the current measurement range by pressing the CURRENT key For more details refer to either of the following 4 4 Selecting the Measurement Range in case of Direct Input 4 5 Setting the Scaling Value when External PT CT is Used 4 6 Selecting the Measurement Range and Setting the Scaling Value when External Sensor is Used option IM 760401 01E s ns y uoneinduio pue synseg 1ueuieunseo y BuiAejdsiq H 5 1 Displaying Voltage Current and Active Power 4 Selecting the Measurement Mode Select the measurement mode by pressing the VOLTAGE MODE key after having pressed the SHIFT key so that the SHIFT indicator is lit For more details refer to section 4 1 Selecting the Measurement Mode Explanation Continuous Maximum Allowable Input Voltage Up to peak voltage of 1 5 kV or RMS value of 1 0 kV whichever is less Current 5 mA to 200 mA range 2 5 mA to 100 mA range if the crest factor is set to 6 WT210 only Up to peak current
309. he WT230 see section 2 2 Operation Keys and Functions Element Display Procedure Operate the instrument by following the thick lines in the menu below Press the ENTER key to confirm a selection or setting To leave the current menu in the middle of the operation press the key indicated in step 1 The confirmed settings up to that point are kept Setting the Target Element WT230 only 1 Display C START oFF SHIFT HARMONICS 2 n Set the element on 3 Display C 5 y ELEA ENTER gt Eh f ENTER u Cu r ci J End of setting f Sue ze UE This is an example for the WT230 EHd Y EL 3 760503 The display varies depending on the number of installed f elements Setting the PLL source 1 Display C START oF SHIFT HARMONICS 2 A on v Ej E Set the PLL source EE 3 Display C 5 f 5 Hn C gt ENTER 7 HI ENTER Lug x Hi End of setting v uJ oe This is an example for the WT230 f Hge 760503 The display varies u3 depending on the number of installed J elements R3 Method of the Harmonic Distortion 1 Display C START aFF SHIFT HARMONICS 2 A nan v os X ELE E Wa i Set the computation method 3 Display C 5 L Hg gt ENTER T ENTER End of settin CSA ea
310. he key indicated in step 1 The confirmed settings up to that point are kept Setting the Storage Interval for Measured Computed Data Select the store function Storing Recalling Measured Computed Data 1 Display C 3 Display C STOP ST 5b ar E ENTER 1 aFF Set the interval SHIFT MEMORY Erol Display C rELAL A on 5 phour pmin sec 8 Y Pal Gk p YL nabHL gt ENTER GAO GOG gt EnTER f PabtrtL ij 6 V A Up down End of setting T V Shift cursor SHIFT gt Turning Measured Computed Data Storage ON OFF Select the store function T Display C 3 Display C 5 STOP Ed 5E ar E 9 ENTER 1 aFF T ENTER SHIFT MEMORY End of setti Alle PECA an nd of setting V M Prat Str nEHL ij ves P f L Fr LL E ij IM 760401 01E SJojoueJeg dnjes pue geq peinduio9 paunseey jo uonoung je2eg e1o1S e 8 1 Storing Recalling Measured Computed Data Setting the Recall Interval for Measured Computed Data Select the recall function 1 Display C mE SHIFT EMORY 2 SB 3 Display A rELHL gt
311. he setting for the measured sync source suitable in this case 4 2 Is the input filter ON or OFF 4 3 Are the ambient temperature and humidity within the allowed range 16 10 Keys do not function properly Is the REMOTE indicator ON 10 2 Is the KEY LOCK indicator ON 12 4 Instrument cannot be controlled Does the GP IB address specified in the program match the address 10 1 10 5 via GP IB interface set up in the instrument Does the interface meet the IEEE standard 488 1978 electrical and mechanical requirements Instrument cannot be controlled via the serial interface Are the instrument and controller using the same communication settings 11 1 to 11 3 IM 760401 01E 15 13 a Bunoouse qnou pue eoueuejure y 15 4 Error Codes and Corrective Actions Error Codes for Operation and Measurement Error Code Description Corrective Action Section 11 Received a command not used by this instrument Check for error in the 13 1 14 3 command sent 12 Parameter value specified is outside the allowed range Correct the value 13 1 14 3 13 Attempted to execute a key operation or received a Check whether integration is in 6 4 13 1 14 3 communications command while integration was running progress or is interrupted or was interrupted that cannot be executed or received in such a state 14 Attempted to set auto range while external sensor range It is not possible to set auto 4 4 i
312. hing Select from RMS the true RMS value of voltage and current VOLTAGE MEAN the rectified mean value calibrated to the RMS value of the voltage and the true RMS value of the current DC simple average of voltage and current Measurement synchronization source Select voltage current or the entire period of the display update rate for the signal used to achieve synchronization during measurement Line filter Select OFF or ON cutoff frequency of 500 Hz Peak measurement Measures the peak value of voltage or current from the instantaneous voltage or instantaneous current that is sampled Zero level compensation Creates a zero input condition inside the WT210 WT230 and sets the level at that point as the zero level Frequency Measurement Item Specifications Measured item WT210 single phase model 760401 Select voltage V or current A WT230 three phase three wire model 760502 Select voltage of input element 1 V1 voltage of input element 3 V3 current of input element 1 A1 or current of input element 3 A3 WT230 three phase four wire model 760503 Select voltage of input element 1 V1 voltage of input element 2 V2 voltage of input element 3 V3 current of input element 1 A1 current of input element 2 A2 or current of input element 3 A3 Method Reciprocal method Frequency measuring range Varies depending on the display update period see de
313. hour Ah in case of harmonic measurement m 1 Rms value of the 1st to 50 or 30 th order of voltage V 2 Rms value of the 1st to 50 or 30 th order of current A 3 Rms value of the 1st to 50 or 30 th order of active power W 7 Input voltage frequency V Hz 8 Input current frequency A Hz Query DC terminator Example DC1 Description Parameter error 12 will occur if m is set to an illegal value DF DF Sets the computation method for harmonic distortion THD inquires about the current setting Syntax DF m terminator m indicates the computation method for harmonic distortion refer to section 7 2 m 0 IEC 1 CSA Query DF terminator Example DFO Description Parameter error 12 will occur if m is set to an illegal value While recalling or storing is in progress execution error 19 will occur DL DL Sets the terminator for communication output data inquires about the current setting Syntax DL terminator m indicates terminator GP IB Serial m 0 CR LF EOI CR tLF 1 IF LF 2 EOI CR Query DL lt terminator gt Example DLO EA EA Description Parameter error 12 will occur if m is set to an illegal value DR DR Displays the current range Syntax DR m terminator m indicates the range m 0 cancels the range display and returns to measurement display 1 displays voltage current and shunt value of element 1 on display A B and C re
314. hows For details on integrator functions see chapter 6 4 30 IM 760401 01E 4 13 Selecting the Number of Displayed Digits and the Display Update Rate Procedure CHECK RANGE MODE Lr o o o n n o UPDATE VOLTAGE CURRENT RMS VOLTAGE DC MAX HOLD A MEAN A Em V VA 12 3 X LLLI UN k a var 1 Jj j J J FUNCTION ELEMENT lam m M W Te B m V F 12 35 k A deg ruwcriw ELEMENT MW c _ m V H 123r f L L n1 k A h jruwcroN ELEMENT am oes MW hi FILTER o m o n n T Ey n SCALING AVG LINE FREQ STORE RECALL HARMONICS KEY LOCK The explanation given in this section uses WT230 as an example For the differences between the WT210 and the WT230 see section 2 2 Operation Keys and Functions Element Display Operate the instrument by following the thick lines in the menu below VOLTAGE MODE START HARMONICS r3 REMOTE LOCA RANGE GAUTO GAUTO o CURRENT MAX HOLD STOP MEMORY SETUP KEY LOCK DOTPUT O1P3w 0 3P3w O3P4W 0 3V3A Press the ENTER key to confirm a selection or setting Toleave the current menu in the middle of the operation press the key indicated in step 1 The confirmed settings up to that point are kept Selecting the Number of Displayed Digits Select the number of displayed digits 1 Display C SETUP F J rir IY d mq 3 zn Ec ET rr
315. ice is required 68 Data file failure File will be initialized measurement data setup parameter file failure automatically 71 72 73 DSP communications failure Service is required 74 RAM failure on the harmonics measure board Service is required for models with the HRM option 75 Internal DSP error Service is required 78 Backup data failure in setup parameters 79 ROM checksum error Service is required 84 DSP sample clock failure Service is required 90 Incorrect board combination Service is required 91 Incorrect board combination Service is required Redundancy is provided for EPROMs that handle errors 61 62 and 63 If one of the errors 61 62 or 63 appears when the instrument is turned ON turn OFF the instrument and turn it back ON If no errors occur on the second attempt servicing is not necessary IM 760401 01E 15 15 a Bunooys jqnou pue soueusjuleyy 15 5 Replacing the Fuse AN Fuse Ratings The fuse used must be of the specified rating current voltage type in order to prevent a fire hazard Make sure to turn OFF the power switch and to unplug the power cord from its source before replacing the fuse Never short circuit the fuse holder The fuse used in the WT230 has the following specifications 100V 200V Common Maximum rated voltage 250 V Maximum rate curren 1 A Type Time lag Approved standard UL VDE Parts number A1347EF Replacing Procedure Replace the fu
316. ick Dim sts As Integer If StartFlag 1 Then Exit Sub End If StartFlag 1 Textl Text START Listl Clear Dummy DoEvents sts GpibHarmonics If sts 0 Then Textl Text END Else Textl Text ERROR End If StartFlag 0 End Sub Sample2 GPIB Get Harmonics Data Private Sub Command3_Click Dim sts As Integer If StartFlag 1 Then Exit Sub End If StartFlag 1 Textl Text START Listl Clear Listl AddItem NOT MAKE Textl Text END StartFlag 0 End Sub Private Sub Command4 Click Dim sts As Integer If StartFlag 1 Then Exit Sub End If StartFlag 1 Textl Text START Listl Clear Listl AddItem NOT MAKE Textl Text END StartFlag 0 End Sub 13 20 IM 760401 01E 13 4 Sample Program Initialization Error and Execution Functions Private Sub Command5 Click Dim sts As Integer If StartFlag 1 Then Exit Sub End If StartFlag 1 Textl Text START Listl Clear Listl AddItem NOT MAKE Textl Text END StartFlag 0 End Sub Private Sub Command6 Click Dim sts As Integer If StartFlag 1 Then Exit Sub End If StartFlag 1 Textl Text START Listl Clear Listl AddItem NOT MAKE Textl Text END StartFlag 0 End Sub Private Sub Form Load StartFlag 0 Clear Start Flag Dev 1 Clear device id addr 1 GPIB Address 1 Commandl Caption Samplel GPIB Chr 13 Get Normal Data C
317. imes Backup battery 3 years Lithium battery IM 760401 01E 15 17 a Bunoouse qnou pue soueuajuleyy Chapter 16 Specifications 16 1 Input Item Specifications Input terminal type Voltage Plug in terminal safety terminal structure Current Direct input Large binding post Current sensor input option BNC connector insulation type Input format Voltage Floating input resistive voltage divider Current Floating input shunt input Measurement range Rated value Voltage 15 V 30 V 60 V 150 V 300 V 600 V Current DCinput When the crest factor is set to 3 Common to WT210 and WT230 0 5 A 1 A 2 A 5 A 10 A and 20A WT210 only 5 mA 10 mA 20 mA 50 mA 100 mA and 200mA When the crest factor is set to 6 Common to WT210 and WT230 0 25 A 0 5 A 1 A 2 5 A 5A and 10A WT210 only 2 5 mA 5 mA 10 mA 25 mA 50 mA and 100 mA External sensor input option When the crest factor is set to 3 Either 2 5 V 5 V and 10 V or 50 mV 100 mV 200 mV When the crest factor is set to 6 Either 1 25 V 2 5 V and 5 V or 25 mV 50 mV 100 mV Input impedance Voltage Input resistance Approx 2 MQ input capacitance Approx 13 pF Current DCinput WT230 Input resistance Approx 6 mQ input inductance Approx 0 1 uH e WT210 when the crest factor is set to 3 0 5 A 1 A 2A 5 A 10 A and 20 A ranges when the crest factor is set to 6 0 25
318. inates in the order shown below To show the measured voltage on display B we illuminate function A Display B FUNCTION FUNCTION FUNCTION FUNCTION FUNCTION V A gt PF deg m Y PE m V PF m V PF Q7 k A deg k A deg MW MW MW The decimal point position moves so that the measured value can be displayed within the number of digits available on display B The appropriate prefix symbol m 10 3 k 103 or M 10 of the unit illuminates accordingly Function indicator illuminates only during harmonic measurement 4 Press of display B to select input element 2 Each time is pressed the element indicator character of display B illuminates in the order shown below The wiring system of the circuit on the primary side of the inverter is single phase two wire and the circuit is connected to input element 2 of the WT230 To show the measured value of input element 2 on display B we illuminate input element 2 Display B ELEMENT ELEMENT ELEMENT ELEMENT 1 2 gt 3 X 12 sz C 1 2 3 z 1 232 IM 760401 01E S 13 0 m D e Le Q 0 Displaying Voltage Current and Active Power Displaying the Active P the Pri Side of the Invert Display C Carry out the following procedure to display the active power of the primary si
319. ings msg RST term Initialize the settings sts ilwrt Dev msg Len msg Send Command If sts lt 0 Then GoTo GPIBError End If Set the measurement condition msg SAMPLE RATE 500MS term Update rate 500ms sts ilwrt Dev msg Len msg If sts lt 0 Then GoTo GPIBError End If Set the measurement range msg VOLTAGE RANGE 150V term Voltage range 150V sts ilwrt Dev msg Len msg If sts lt 0 Then GoTo GPIBError End If msg CURRENT RANGE 5A term Current range 5A sts ilwrt Dev msg Len msg If sts lt 0 Then GoTo GPIBError End If Setting related to harmonics analize Object element 1 PLL source V1 Computation method of THD IEC msg HARMONICS ELEMENT 1 SYNCHRONIZE V 1 THD IEC STATE ON term sts ilwrt Dev msg Len msg Send Command If sts lt 0 Then GoTo GPIBError End If Set the communication output items l All function gt off msg MEASURE HARMONICS ITEM PRESET CLEAR term sts ilwrt Dev msg Len msg If sts 0 Then GoTo GPIBError End If 2 Necessary function gt on msg MEASURE HARMONICS ITEM SYNCHRONIZE ON ATHD ON A ON term sts ilwrt Dev msg Len msg If sts 0 Then GoTo GPIBError End If Oo o 3 3 3 o 9 o 5 O o 3 3 D 5 2 o N 77 lt o o 3 9 O o 3 3 D 5 2 o Oo o 3 v lt 5 a E o h gt m m m A Qo eo N i o oO N 7 e
320. ion OAD OAD MT terminator MTO Average active power MT13 14 15 16 is displayed only during integration current settings Up to 4 or 12 measured data can be selected and output as analog signal from the D A converter OA m1 m2 m3 terminator ml indicates D A output channel and must be set within the following range 1 lt ml lt 12 or 4 m2 indicates output item no m2 0 No output 1 Voltage V Current A Power W Reactive power var Apparent power VA Power factor PF Yn Ui FWD Hz 8 Input current frequency A Hz 9 Watt hour Wh 10 Ampere hour Ah 11 Phase angle deg 12 Peak voltage value Vpk 13 Peak current value Apk 14 Computation result MATH 24 Positive watt hour Wh 25 Negative watt hour Wh 26 Positive ampere hour Ah 27 Negative ampere hour Ah m3 indicates element m 1 Element 1 2 Element 2 for WT230 model 760503 only 3 Element 3 for WT230 only 4 X for WT230 only OA1 terminator 0A1 3 2 Parameter error 12 will occur if any of m1 m2 and m3 is set to an illegal value If computation result is selected and the MATH computing equation is set to anything other than efficiency MTO or the average active power MT13 to 16 when integration is in progress the D A output is fixed to O V No output and computation result have no relation to the element but when using them with the OA command set m
321. ion This allows you to make the same settings and inquiries as can be set using the lower menus of OUTPUT dA or INTEG SET dAtimE ad Wc m PRESet Space NORMal C cHANnel x m Space Normal measurement OFF IRTime f Space ef lt NRf gt O lt NRf gt Character string uu AOUTput Description If normal measurement function is set to MATH Function Queries all the settings relating to D A output the element setting is void You can omit it Syntax AOUTput P AOUTput IRTime Example AOUTPUT gt AOUTPUT CHANNEL1 V 1 TET Function Sets the preset integration time for D A output of CHANNEL2 V 2 CHANNEL3 V 3 CHANNELA V integrated values or queries the current setting SIGMA CHANNEL5 A 1 CHANNEL6 A 2 Syntax AOUTput IRTime CHANNEL7 A 3 CHANNEL8 A SIGMA NR NR NR String CHANNEL9 W 1 CHANNEL10 W 2 lt NRf gt lt NRf gt lt NRf gt 0 0 0 to CHANNEL11 W 3 CHANNEL12 W SIGMA 10000 0 0 AOUTPUT IRTIME 1 0 lt String gt HHHHH MM SS HHHHH hours MM AOUTput CHANnel lt x gt minutes SS seconds Function Sets the D A output item or queries the current Example AOUTPUT IRTIME 1 0 0 setting AOUTPUT IRTIME 1 00 00 Syntax AOUTput CHANnel x normal AOUTPUT IRTIME gt AOUT
322. ion aborted timeout ElseIf ern ENEB Then ers ENEB Nonexistent GPIB board ElseIf ern EDMA Then ers EDMA DMA error ElseIf ern EOIP Then ers EOIP I O operation started before previous operation completed ElseIf ern ECAP Then ers ECAP No capability for intended operation ElseIf ern EFSO Then ers EFSO File system operation error ElseIf ern EBUS Then ers EBUS GPIB bus error ElseIf ern ESTB Then ers ESTB Serial poll status byte queue overflow ElseIf ern ESRQ Then ers ESRQ SRQ remains asserted IM 760401 01E 13 19 pyepueis 7861 2 88h 3331 94 d10Joq spuewwo Jo Wa sAsS SPUBLIWIOD uoneorunuulo 13 4 Sample Program Initialization Error and Execution Functions ElseIf ern ETAB Then ers ETAB The return buffer is full ElseIf ern ELCK Then ers ELCK Address or board is locked Else ers End If Else ers End If MsgBox Status No Str sts Chr 13 wrn Error No Chr 13 msg vbExclamation Call ibonl Dev 0 Dev 1 End Sub Error Str ern Chr 13 ers Private Sub Commandl Click Dim sts As Integer If StartFlag 1 Then Exit Sub End If StartFlag 1 Textl Text START Listl Clear Dummy DoEvents sts GpibNormal If sts 0 Then Textl Text END Else Textl Text ERROR End If StartFlag 0 End Sub Run Samplel GPIB Get Normal Data Private Sub Command2_Cl
323. is at most 0 1 Q and that the resistance between NC and COM is at least 50MQ Turn the output of the voltage standard OFF 15 10 IM 760401 01E 15 2 Calibration Verifying of the Harmonic Measurement Function Connection Use the same instruments as in case of AC power measurement and connect them in the same way refer to page 15 8 Preparation 1 2 Set the voltage range of this instrument to 15 V and the current range to 1 A Turn the harmonic measurement function ON Set the crest factor to 3 Calibrating Currents 1 Set the voltage signal channel of the synchronizer to 60 Hz current signal channel to 900 Hz 15 times and output these frequencies Set the frequency of the voltage standard to 60 Hz the output voltage to 15 V and output the voltage Set the frequency of the current standard to 900 Hz the output current to 1 A and output the current Set the displayed number on display A of this instrument to 15 Set the display function of display B to A and verify that the displayed value lies within the specifications On the WT230 change the settings of the element on which harmonic measurement is to be performed see section 7 2 and confirm elements 1 2 and 3 on display B If required change the current signal channel s setting of the synchronizer and the frequency of the current standard and verify another number Turn the output of the voltage and current standard OFF Calibrating Voltages
324. is made to the serial poll However this is not valid if the bit has been disabled by the IM command 10 4 IM 760401 01E 10 4 Output Format for Measured Computed Data Setup Parameters and Error Codes This section describes ASCII data output format in addressable mode or talk only mode For the data output format in 488 2 mode see section 14 3 9 MEASure Group and pages 14 32 to 14 34 Output Format of Normal Measured Computed Data Data Format Normal measurement data consists of a 6 byte header and 11 byte data total of 17 bytes Header 6 bytes Data 11 bytes Header Section hi n2 h3 na h5 h6 h1 to h3 data type Types of data that can be classified using h1 to h3 V__ voltage A__ Current W__ Active power VA Apparent power Var Reactive power PF Power factor HzV Voltage frequency HZA Current frequency Wh Watt hour Ah Ampere hour DEG Phase angle Vpk Peak voltage value Apk Peak current value EFF Efficiency WT230 only CV1 V1 crest factor CV2 V2 crest factor CV3 V3 crest factor CA1 A1 crest factor CA A2 crest factor CA3 A3 crest factor A B display A display B A B display A display B AxB display A x display B A B display A display B Wh Positive watt hour Wh Negative watt hour Ah Positive ampere hour Ah Negative ampere hour HMS Elapsed time of integration MEM Data number in case of recalling Items tha
325. istIndex Listl ListIndex 1 Loop Dummy DoEvents qrytemp Space 200 Listl AddItem Listl ListIndex Listl ListIndex 1 Return End Function I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I IT I I I I I Measurement 04 3332E 0 THDIN 04 3332E 0 HzVIN 0 0015E 0 CNTTNO 2 0008E 0 CNTINOS 0008E 0 CNTINO4 0007E 0 CNTINOS 0004E 0 CNTINOE 0005E 0 CNTINO 0005E 0 CNTINOS 0007E 0 CNTINOS 0003E 0 CNTINIO 0007E 0 CNTINI1 0005E 0 CNTINT2 0001E 0 CNTINIS 0017E 0 CNTINIA 0025E 0 CNTINIS 0018E 0 CNTINIE 0003E 0 CNTINT 0002E 0 CNTINI8 O002E 0 CNTINIS 0004E 0 CNTIN20 0002E 0 CNTIN21 0002E 0 CNTIN22 0001E 0 CNTIN23 OO04E 0 CNTIN24 OO03E 0 CNTIN25 OO01E 0 CNTINZE 0009E 0 CNTIN2 0003E 0 CNTIN2S 0000 15 043 338E 0 13 26 IM 760401 01E Chapter 14 Communication Commands 2 System of Commands Complying to the IEEE 488 2 1992 Standard 14 1 Overview of IEEE 488 2 1992 The GP IB interface provided with this instrument conforms to IEEE 488 2 1992 This standard requires the following 23 points be stated in this document This appendix describes these points 1 Subsets supported by IEEE 488 1 interface functions Refer to the specifications on page 10 2 2 Operation of device when the device is assigned to an address other than one of the addresses 0 to 30 This instrument does
326. it 1 ITG Integrate busy Set to 1 during integration See figure below Bit 2 ITM Integrate timer busy Set to 1 during the integration timer is being operated See figure on the next page Bit 3 OVRS X results overflow Set to 1 when the integration results of overflow Display shows oF Bit 4 FOV Frequency over Set to 1 when the frequency lies outside the measurement range Display shows ErrLo ErrHi or FrqEr Bit 5 SRB Store Recall busy Set to 1 while storing or recalling is in progress Bit 6 OVR1 Element 1 measured data over Set to 1 when the measurement computed data of element 1 overflow or when an error occurs Display shown oF oL PFErr or dEGEr Bit 7 POV1 Element 1 voltage peak over Set to 1 when the voltage value of element 1 exceeds the peak value Bit 8 POA1 Element 1 current peak over Set to 1 when the current value of element 1 exceeds the peak value Bit 9 OVR2 Element 2 measured data over Set to 1 when the measurement computed data of element 2 overflow or when an error occurs Display shown oF oL PFErr or dEGEr Bit 10 POV2 Element 2 voltage peak over Set to 1 when the voltage value of element 2 exceeds the peak value Bit 11 POA2 Element 2 current peak over Set to 1 when the current value of element 2 exceeds the peak value Bit 12 OVR3 Element 3 measured data over
327. ith the CMP option Ga C STATe Space OFF D lt NR gt mone gt lt space gt SINGIe O C K NCHannel lt gt 33 FUNCtion Space Normal meas function OFF THReshold 4 Space 4 lt NRf gt E O x FUNCtion lt Space gt lt Harmonic measurement function gt THReshold r Space 4 lt NRf gt o _ C DISPlay gt lt space gt 4 lt NRf gt RELay Function Syntax Example Queries all settings relating to the comparator function RELay RELAY RELAY STATE 0 MODE SINGLE NCHANNEL1 FUNCTION V 1 THRESHOLD 600 0E 00 RELAY NCHANNEL2 FUNCTION A 1 THRESHOLD 20 00E 00 RELAY NCHANNEL3 FUNCTION W 1 THRESHOLD 1 200E 03 RELAY NCHANNEL4 FUNCTION PF 1 THRESHOLD 1 000E 00 RELAY HCHANNEL1 FUNCTION V 1 1 THRESHOLD 600 0E 00 RELAY HCHANNEL2 FUNCTION A 1 1 THRESHOLD 20 00E 00 RELAY HCHANNEL3 FUNCTION W 1 1 THRESHOLD 1 200E 03 RELAY HCHANNEL4 FUNCTION PF 1 THRESHOLD 1 000E 00 RELAY DISPLAY OFF RELay DISPlay Function Sets the comparator display OFF or when ON the channel to be displayed queries the current setting Syntax RELay DISPlay NRf CHANnel 1 4 OFF RELay DISPlay
328. ive harmonic content of each voltage harmonic order CA relative harmonic content of each current harmonic order CP relative harmonic content of each active power harmonic order Vd voltage phase angle of each order Ad current phase angle of each order no data For details on the meaning of harmonic measurement values see chapter 7 IM 760401 01E 9 15 9 6 Setting the Comparator Limit Values Option Selecting the element corresponds to column B in the procedure WT210 760401 no such element setting available WT230 760502 element can be selected from 1 or 3 WT230 760503 element can be selected from 1 2 or 3 Selecting the harmonic order corresponds to column C in the procedure Setting range 01 to 50 Initial value refer to the following The maximum order of harmonic measurement data varies by the fundamental frequency Therefore there might be cases where no measure data is present up to the 50th order and the display will show bars In such a case even if you select an harmonic order determination will not be carried out Therefore before setting verify the maximum order chapter 16 and the fundamental frequency of the object of measurement Setting the limit value No element setting is available on the WT210 Setting range 0 000 to 9999 Initial setting chi V type 1 element 600 0 value E 0 exponent 600 V voltage limit of element 1 for channel 1 ch2
329. l Space Bp NRI L O 4 NRI L O 4 lt NRf gt lt Character string gt PANel lt Space gt lt NRf gt A Queries all settings related to storing data STORe STORE gt STORE STATE 0 INTERVAL 0 0 0 STORe INTerval Function Syntax Example Description Sets the interval for storage queries the current setting STORe INTerval lt NRf gt lt NRf gt lt NRf gt lt String gt STORe INTerval lt NRf gt lt NRf gt lt NR gt 0 0 0 to 99 59 59 lt String gt HH MM SS HH hours MM minutes SS seconds STORE INTERVAL 0 0 0 STORE INTERVAL 00 00 00 STORE INTERVAL STORE INTERVAL 0 0 0 If the store interval is set to 0 h 0 min O s the store interval is set to the same interval as the display update rate STORe PANel Function Syntax Example Saves the setup parameters to a file STORe PANel lt NRf gt lt NRf gt 1 to 4 file number STORE PANEL 1 STORe STATe Function Syntax Example Sets store ON OFF queries the current setting STORe STATe Boolean STORe STATe STORE STATE ON STORE STATE gt STORE STATE 1 IM 760401 01E 14 41 H pyepueis 2661 2 88r 3331 24 0 BuiAqjduio spuewwosy jo uejs S z spueuiulo uoneoiunuiulo2 14 3 Commands 14 3 15 Common Command Group The commands in the common command group are independent of the instrument s functions and are specified in IEEE 4
330. l decimal lt Register gt or hexadecimal Example Extended event register value gt STATus EESE HFE lt Character data gt Specified character string mnemonic Can be selected from Example Selecting measurement mode gt CONFigure MODE RMS VMEan DC Indicates ON OFF Set to ON OFF or value Example Averaging ON gt CONFigure AVERaging STATe ON lt Character string data gt Arbitrary character string Example Timer gt INTEGrate TIMer 1 00 00 Data containing 8 bit arbitrary values Example Response of measured computed data binary format gt 500012ABCDEFGHIJKL lt Boolean gt lt Block data gt lt Decimal gt lt Decimal gt indicates a value expressed as a decimal number as shown in the table below Decimal values are given in the NR form specified in ANSI X3 42 1975 Data Description Example lt NR1 gt Integer 125 1 1000 lt NR2 gt Fixed point number 125 0 90 001 lt NR3 gt Floating point number 125 0E 0 9E 1 1E4 lt NRf gt Any of the forms lt NR1 gt to NR3 is allowed Decimal values which are sent from the controller to this instrument can be sent in any of the forms lt NR1 gt to NR3 This is represented by lt NRf gt For response messages which are returned from this instrument to the controller the form lt NR1 gt to lt NR3 gt to be used is determined by the query The same form is used irrespective of whether the
331. l and Terminator 50th harmonic of voltage 50th harmonic of current END Terminator Incase of ALL setting The data will be output in the sequence voltage current active power phase angle END terminator The output format of each item is as described for each item above The END line is not output for each item but after finishing the entire output operation Output Format of Setup Parameters and Error Codes See the response examples of OS and OE commands in section 13 1 Fora description of the displayed information of the response examples see the explanation of the respective command in section 13 1 10 10 IM 760401 01E 10 5 Setting the Address and Mode Procedure CHECK RANGE MODE oO o o n n UPDATE VOLTAGE CURRENT RMS VOLTAGE DC MAX HOLD MEAN A r r1 l mv VA 12 3 X j I r J Ei k A VAF ruwcriN ELEMENT _ a M W TIME B m V F 1 235 k A deg FuncTION ELEMENT MW C m V Hz 12 35 t a im r k A h Function ELEMENT M MW het FILTER m E a jas tj Im SCALING AVG LINE FREQ STORE RECALL HARMONICS KEY LOCK RANGE AUTO c AUTO c VOLTAGE CURRENT MODE MAX HOLD TRIG L11P3W O3P3w L13P4W O3V3A The explanation given in this section uses WT230 as an example For the differences between the WT210 and the WT230 see section 2 2 Operation Keys an
332. l occur IM IM Specifies which causes will be allowed to generate a status byte inquires about the current setting Syntax IM m terminator m is assigned as follows 0 lt m lt 15 m 1 Computation end 2 Integration end 4 Syntax error 8 OVER Query IM terminator Example IM15 Description Parameter error 12 will occur if m is set to an illegal value f more than one of these causes is to be allowed set m to the sum of their individual m values For instance if all causes are to be allowed set m to 15 21424448 IP Stops integration Syntax IP terminator Description If an attempt is made to stop integration when integration has already been interrupted stopped execution error 45 will occur While recalling or storing is in progress execution error 19 will occur IR Resets integration Syntax IR terminator KH KH KL KL Description If an attempt is made to reset integration while integration is in progress execution error 45 will occur While recalling or storing is in progress execution error 19 will occur IS Starts integration Syntax IS terminator Description 1If an attempt is made to start integration when integration is already in progress execution error 42 will occur If a voltage or current peak overflow or overrange takes place when an attempt is made to start integration execution error 46 Will occur and integration will no
333. lags the voltage the value is computed as a positive value 5 2 IM 760401 01E 5 2 Displaying Apparent Power Reactive Power and Power Factor CHECK RANGE MODE o E g n o RANGE UPDATE VOLTAGE CURRENT RMS VOLTAGE DC MAX HOLD SA00 GAUTO o MEAN A m v fva 253 VOLTAGE CURRENT HOLD k MODE MAX HOLD TRIG NeuNCTION ELEMENT M z v ENTER B m V 2 3 gt CAL a a INTEGRATOR k A deg feuncrion evemenr START STOP RESET MW HARMONICS MEMORY INTEG SET c m V Hz 123E REMOTE a k A h jruwcrow evemenr LOCAL SETUP M W hz LJ CJ KEY LOCK OUTPUT SHIFT L 1P3W O 3P3w FILTER WIRING n LI o o o E SCALING AVG LINE FREQ STORE RECALL HARMONICS KEY LOCK L13P4W O3V3A The explanation given in this section uses WT230 as an example For the differences between the WT210 and the WT230 see section 2 2 Operation Keys and Functions Element Display Procedure 1 Selecting the Display Function Select either VA apparant power var reactive power or PF power factor by pressing the FUNCTION key of display A or B Display FUNCTION FUNCTION FUNCTION FUNCTION FUNCTION FUNCTION A 59 A gt W Lnd FUNCTION FUNCTION FUNCTION FUNCTION FUNCTION B QV 73 4 7779 W 777 PF 775 deg You can reverse the order by first pressing the SHIFT key followed by the FUNCTION key
334. le MATH gt MATH TYPE ARITHMETIC ARITHMETIC ADD MATH ARIThmetic Function Sets queries the computing equation of the four arithmetic operations Syntax MATH ARIThmetic ADD SUB MUL DIV DIVA DIVB MATH ARIThmetic Example MATH ARITHMETIC ADD MATH ARITHMETIC MATH ARITHMETIC ADD Description If MATH TYPE is not set to ARIThmetic this command will be meaningless The computing equation selections are as follows ADD display A display B SUB _ display A display B MUL display A x display B DIV display A display B DIVA display A display B DIVB display A display B MATH AVERage Function Sets queries the average active power computation Syntax MATH AVERage W NRf ELEMent 1 3 SIGMa MATH AVERage Example MATH AVERAGE W 1 MATH AVERAGE MATH AVERAGE W 1 Description If MATH TYPE is not set to AVERage this command will be meaningless MATH CFACtor Function Sets queries the computing equation of the crest factor Syntax MATH CFACtor V A lt NRf gt ELEMent x lt x gt 1 WT210 single phase model 1 3 WT230 three phase three wire model 1 to 3 WT230 three phase four wire model MATH CFACtor Example MATH CFACTOR V 1 MATH CFACTOR gt MATH CFACTOR V 1 Description If MATH TYPE is not set to CFACtor this command will be meaningless 14 26 IM 760401 01E 14 3 Commands MATH TYPE Function Sets queries the comp
335. lement 2 for WT230 model 760503 only 3 Element 3 for WT230 only n indicates external sensor Scaling value 0 001 n lt 9999 Query When CMO is set SA terminator When CM1 is set SAm terminator When CMO is set SA50 00 When CM1 is set SA1 50 00 Description Parameter error 12 will occur if m is set to an illegal value Error 12 will occur when an inquiry is made if the shunt current values set for each element by CMO differ from each other While recalling or storing is in progress execution error 19 will occur Example Determines whether or not to use the scaling function inquires about the current setting SC SC Syntax SC m terminator m indicates whether scaling is ON or OFF m 0 OFF 1 ON Query SC terminator Example SC1 Description Parameter error 12 will occur if m is set to an illegal value While recalling or storing is in progress execution error 19 will occur SI SI Sets the display update rate inquires about the current setting Syntax SI m terminator m indicates the display update rate m 0 0 1 s 1 0 25 s 2 0 5 s 3 1 8 4 2s 5 5 s Query SI lt terminator gt Example SI1 Description Parameter error 12 will occur if m is set to an illegal value IM 760401 01E 13 13 g pyepueis 286 4 Z 88t 3331 94 910J9q spuewwo Jo WS S spueuiuo uoesiunwwog 13 1 Commands You cannot change the setting while integrati
336. lling or storing is in progress execution error 19 will occur AV AV Sets the voltage auto range ON or OFF inquires about the voltage setting Syntax AV m terminator m indicates auto range ON OFF m 0 auto range OFF fixed range 1 auto range ON Query AV terminator Example AVO Description Auto range is not allowed while integration is in progress execution error 13 will occur If the range is changed during auto range mode manual range mode will be validated instead of auto range mode If integration is started during auto range mode auto range mode will be invalidated While recalling is in progress execution error 19 will occur CF CF Sets the crest factor and queries the current setting Syntax CF m terminator m is the crest factor value m 0 Crest factor 3 1 Crest factor 6 Query CF terminator Example CFO Description Parameter error 12 will occur if m is set to an illegal value You cannot change the setting while integration is in progress Error 13 will occur While recalling or storing is in progress execution error 19 will occur IM 760401 01E g pyepueis 286 4 Z 88t 3331 94 910J9q spuewwo Jo Wa sAsS spueuiuo uoneorunuulo 13 1 Commands CM CM Selects scaling constants simultaneous setting command group or individual setting command group for command data which come after this command inquires about the current setting Syntax CM m lt ter
337. lowing commands lt ESC gt S lt terminator gt Equivalent to GP IB s serial poll function Status byte is output when the S command is received following reception of the lt ESC gt code 1BH For a description of the status byte format see section 10 3 However in the serial communications of the WT210 WT230 SRQ DI07 is always 1 lt ESC gt R lt terminator gt Equivalent to GP IB s remote local control function The instrument is placed in remote status and panel keys become invalid when the R command is received following reception of the lt ESC gt code 1BH Press the LOCAL key to exit from the remote status lt ESC gt L lt terminator gt Equivalent to GP IB s remote local control function When the instrument is in remote status the instrument will be placed in local status when the L command is received following reception of the lt ESC gt code 1BH lt ESC gt C lt terminator gt Equivalent to GP IB s device clear function The communication devices of this instrument are initialized when the C command is received following reception of the lt ESC gt code 1BH IM 760401 01E Chapter 12 Initializing Setup Parameters Zero Level Compensation and Key Lock 12 1 Back up of Setup Parameters In order to protect setup parameters in case of a power failure and such this instrument is equipped with a lithium battery which protects these parameters The following setup parameters are being kept Wiring m
338. make sure to match these control signals with other equipments to eliminate erroneuous control EEEEEEIMIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIHIIULILIIIIIGILLELILLL EAILDIPIVGK LLLOAAILIOLOAALL oOL NL oL L LL L L L L OEOAA AAb OAOA A AYA A A CLA A LOA A UOoOA AACOOCO O L ANLEALULLLOLLALSAAA oICG amp SKS AAGC IM 760401 01E 9 19 uonoung 1ndino u jeuje1x3 fa 9 9 Outputting to an External Plotter or External Printer CHECK RANGE MODE a a g m S ANGE UPDATE VOLTAGE CURRENT RMS VOLTAGE DC MAX HOLD SAUD GAUTO o A j i 1 1 m V VAl4 2 3 x vormee current noto MODE MAX HOLD TRIG J 1 r J Et k A Val ruwcriN ELEMENT i m M W TME A B mv PF123r gt a a INTEGRATOR ww Cod Col Lem eer eer START STOP RESET MW HARMONICS MEMORY INTEG SET c r1 m V Hz 1 23 x wee im r J F1 IL k A h jruwcroN ELEMENT LOCAL MISETUP mm jm w hr L LL e over sar CHP3W O3P3w ao n n n Im m m n E SCALING AVG LINE FREQ STORE RECALL HARMONICS KEY LOCK Csp4aw 1 3v3a The explanation given in this section uses WT230 as an example For the differences between the WT210 and the WT230 see section 2 2 Operation Keys and Functions Element Display Procedure Operate the instrument by following the thick lines in the menu below Press the ENTER key to confirm a selection or setting Toleave the current menu in the middle
339. mal mode tant 4 Settalk only mode Pr mk Set the print mode and plotter or printer output 4Aae Set communication commands according to IEEE488 2 1992 1 8 IM 760401 01E Chapter 2 Names and Functions of Parts and Auto Range Monitor Overrange and Error Displays 2 1 Front Panel WT210 model 760401 r 7 segment display r Function Unit display r Keys Section 2 2 Handle Power switch Vent holes Section 3 6 Rear Panel WT210 model 760401 External sensor input connector A Section 3 9 r Current input terminal A Sections 3 7 to 3 8 r Voltage input terminal A T Sections 3 7 to 3 9 ti Power fuse A Section 15 5 Top View Power connector A Section 3 5 GP IB or SERIAL connector Chapters 10 and 11 Protective earth terminal A Page vi External I O connector A Chapter 9 WT210 model 760401 1 Rear panel 8 o 96 8080 o o 2 o o o 0 o o a o o o08 E3 E 9 E Jo o 98 0642 292520 25 2025 2o2o Po e SogogogogogogogogogogegogogegogogegogeSe 09090909 Fu 9 de 88 88 g 8 PROIN RR S8 980098o208080808080808080803080399 38 E 9o 9o 38 E 8 8 E
340. maximum displayable integration value 999999M or 99999M Accuracy Power accuracy or current accuracy 0 1 of reading Timer accuracy 0 02 Remote control Start stop reset possible using an external remote signal applies to products with the DA4 DA12 or CMP option IM 760401 01E 16 7 a suoneoyioeds 16 3 Functions Harmonic Measurement HRM Option Item Specifications Measured item Select only a single wiring unit Method PLL synchronization method Frequency range Fundamental frequency of the PLL source is in the range of 40 Hz to 440 Hz PLL source Select voltage or current of each input element Measured items See Displayed Items on page 7 1 FFT data length 1024 FFT processing word length 32 bits Window function Rectangular Sample rate window width and upper limit of analysis Fundamental Frequency Sample rate Window Width against of Upper PLL Source f S s the FFT Data Length Limit of Harmonic Hz Frequency of the Analysis Fundamental Wave 40 lt f lt 70 fx512 2 50 70sf lt 130 fx256 4 50 130 lt f lt 250 fx128 8 50 250 lt f lt 440 fx64 16 30 Accuracy Add 0 2 of range to the accuracy of normal measurement However for n order component input add 10 m 1 of the n order reading to nm order and n m order Auto range Step up When the measured value exceeds 200 of the
341. maximum values MAX of V voltage A current W active power VA apparent power var reactive power Vpk voltage peak and Apk current peak can be held while the MAX hold function is enabled When a value greater than the held value is measured the larger value is held The initial setting is oFF on The MAX HOLD indicator illuminates and the MAX hold function is enabled oFF The MAX HOLD indicator turns OFF and the MAX hold function is disabled Note While the MAX hold function is active the maximum values of V voltage A current W active power VA apparent power and var reactive power are displayed continuously The displayed values for Vpk voltage peak and Apk current peak are the absolute values of the maximum value For example if the plus side peak is 100 1 Vpk and the minus side peak is 2100 2 Vpk then 100 2 Vpk is displayed for the voltage peak The values for D A output output to external plotter and printer and communication output are also set to the maximum values MAX that are held 4 20 IM 760401 01E 4 9 Computing the Efficiency Applies to WT230 Only CHECK RANGE MODE o o o o o RANGE UPDATE VOLTAGE CURRENT AMS VOLTAGE DC MAX HOLD GAUTO GAUTO o A r mi I ri m V WAl41 2 3 x vore cunnewr nouo MODE MAX HOLD TRIG q E E J r k A VAF ruwcrioN ELEMENT Ee m a M W rwE B mV PF123 EX AL
342. mber of output relays 4 outputs Type of limit Set for each relay Contact capacity 24 V 0 5 A rating 16 7 Remote Control Input Output Signal DA4 DA12 and CMP Options Item Specifications Remote control input signal EXT HOLD EXT TRIG EXT START EXT STOP EXT RESET Remote control output signal INTEG BUSY I O level TTL I O logic format Negative logic falling edge IM 760401 01E 16 11 a suoneoyioeds 16 8 GP IB Interface Standard on C1 C1 Option Item Specifications Electrical and mechanical specifications Conforms to IEEE St d 488 1978 JIS C 1901 1987 Functional specifications SH1 AH1 T5 L4 SR1 RL1 PPO DC1 DT1 CO Protocol Conforms to IEEE St d 488 2 1992 Provides communication commands other than those of the IEEE St d 488 2 protocol Code ISO ASCII code Address 0 to 30 Clear remote mode Remote mode can be cleared by pressing LOCAL except during Local Lockout 16 9 Serial RS 232 C Interface Standard on C2 C2 Option Item Specifications Connector type D Sub 25 pin plug Electrical specifications Conforms to EIA 232 RS 232 Connection Point to point Transmission mode Full duplex Synchronization Start stop synchronization Baud rate Select from 1200 2400 4800 and 9600 bps 16 12 IM 760401 01E 16 10 General Specifications Item Speci
343. me Select the preset integration time 1 Display C RESET 2 node SHIFT INTEG SET Hour bi ner 3 Display A 6 VIL 4AE AE 9 ENTER D ENTER J ij 4 V sets the value 5 V moves digits SHIFT gt Minute Second Display B 9 Display C 12 iii ENTER OO ENTER 7 Same as steps 10 4 Same as steps End of setting 8 4 and 5 above 11 4 and 5 above Explanation D A Output Voltage current active power apparent power reactive power power factor phase angle harmonic measurement data and integrated data values will be output as a 5 V FS analog voltage The number of items which can be output number of output channels depends on the installed options Default Setting of the Output Format D A The default items which will be output can be selected as follows dFLt n normal measurement values are set as default Select this when you want to output normal measurement values Which items are output to which channel is described below Option DA4 DA12 CMP Model 760401 760502 760503 760401 760502 760503 cht v vi 7 v 7 v vi vw ch2 A v2 A Al Al ch3 Ww V3 V3 Ww Wi Wi ch4 Hz 1 XV IV Hz Hz Hz 1 ch5 A1 A1 Output ch6 A2 channel ch7 These A3 A3 Wis Eid i T5 These channels cannot be set ch10 set w2 ch11 w3 W3 ch12 EW
344. measurement current flows through the thick lines in the figure below Use wires with sufficient current capacity Use of a PT or CT enables measurement of voltage or current even if the maximum voltage or maximum current of the object to be measured exceeds the maximum measuring range Ifthe maximum voltage exceeds 600 V 300 V if the crest factor is set to 6 connect an external potential transformer PT and connect the secondary side of the PT to the voltage input terminals If the maximum current exceeds 20 A 10 A if the crest factor is set to 6 connect an external current transformer CT and connect the secondary side of the CT to the current input terminals Wiring example of a single phase two wire system 1P2W when using a PT CT Can be applied to models 760401 760502 and 760503 Source Load Source Load d con LO LCT o OVPT Ix o QVPT 1 QW 1 MU 1 QW 1 MWU UU i PU a BUM role nO Ol Ovi 1 O Ol DVI sop E EEN we e d T EA EUN EN LN ape n X OV c i 1 Input terminal a Input terminal Elemnt Element Wiring example of a single phase three wire system 1P3W when using a PT CT Can be applied to models 760502 and 760503 Source load Input terminal gt Input terminal Element 1 Element 3
345. memory 8 2 interpretation rules oe eee eee eee eeeee tees sees teeeeeeeeaes 14 6 interval eerie tern nen dee nage 10 12 11 7 I e key lock 4 unde e ata inion 1 5 12 5 E language eeeeeeeeeeeneeneennnnnneennne nne 13 16 line filter iecore o e Ren a rc aaa 4 6 ISTENEN mre CEDERE TREE 10 1 localmode 2 5 tte terne tea teet 10 3 M mialf tctlonlng os cereo enr encre eae nene 15 13 manual integration mode seeseeee 6 1 MASKING ee MATH group MAX hold function 2 nne teres 1 8 4 20 maximum allowable input esee 5 2 maximum display 16 9 maximum order ss 2 1 maximum power consumption 16 13 maximu m value ie Mee t tendere ee tete stents 6 1 MEAGure group sseeeene emen 14 28 measured displayed items harmonic rs measurement limits 6 11 measurement method 16 5 measurement modes essere 4 1 measurement range external sensor 4 15 measurement range frequency 5 5 measurement synchronization source 24 44 minimum Valle 27 4 tete i eerte rne RRRIUR 6 1 moving averaging eesseeeseeeeeenenee ene 4 18 multipliGr cicer inet ttr ern enne 14 8 N ndata displays ree erret nennen 2 4 no data display harmonic NO amc normal
346. ments of the External I O Connector Option AN WARNING The connectors used in this function have protective covers When the covers are removed or when using connectors the voltage ratings across the measuring input and the ground become as follows Voltage between CURRENT VOLTAGE and CURRENT side input terminals and ground 400 Vrms max Voltage between VOLTAGE input terminal and ground 600 Vrms max Put the protective cover on the connector when this function is not used Using the external I O connector this instrument can be remotely controlled and D A output can be done The connector s pin sequence and signal assignment is as follows Connector s Pin Arrangement WT210 760401 WT230 760502 760503 Oc Ly OE ELLO 24 13 Rear panel Rear panel Pin Assignment Remote control input circuit Remote control output circuit 5 V 5 V 10 ko A 10 KQ 100 Q O 00 ANY o T ur 0 01 uF S T 0 022 uF TTL level TTL level L 0 to 0 8V L 0 to 0 4 V 8 mA H 2 0 to 5V H 2 4 to 5 V 400 pA DA4 specifications for WT210 760401 only remote control 4 channel D A output Signal Signal DIGITAL COM DIGITAL COM EXT HOLD Input EXT TRIG Input EXT START Input EXT STOP Input EXT RESET Input INTEG BUSY Output No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection
347. menu appears Display C shows the current range selection with blinking indication If the current range had been set to Fu E a before this step AUTO indicator for the current range is illuminated the current range that is automatically selected from the measured current is displayed blinking Press or to show the desired current range on display C Press wer The current range is confirmed Each display shows the measured values The following flow chart illustrates steps 4 to 6 When the crest factor is set to 3 C 4 Display C 6 CURRENT 5 Hutbn ENTER Y an End of setting CT ut A c zi v B More selections are displayed on i products with option EX1 or EX2 For details see section 4 6 nc LI X J When the crest factor is set to 6 M 4 Display C 6 CURRENT Auto ENTER End of setting More selections are displayed on products with option EX1 or EX2 For details see section 4 6 c I moun co nau S 10 IM 760401 01E Selecting the Measurement Range Turning ON the P to the Circuit under M t Check the following items before turning on the power to the circuit under measurement The power supply of the WT230 is connected Input terminal screws are securely fastened The current input protection covers are attached The power to the WT230 is ON and it is ready to
348. mes V A or W then display A will show the same measured items as the V A or W shown on display C Characteristics such as maximum reading display range units and prefix which are not described on the previous page are not different from the characteristics of normal measurement IM 760401 01E 7 9 uondo uonoun J 1ueureunseoj y 31uouueH HE Chapter8 Store Recall Function of Measured Computed Data and Setup Parameters 8 1 Procedure CHECK RANGE MODE m e a B o RANGE UPDATE VOLTAGE CURRENT RMS VOLTAGE DC MAX HOLD Sno CUAUDO a A r mv wald 2 3 rx omet cunmewr noto MODE MAX HOLD TRIG ri Lr ri k A Val ruwcroN ELEMENT EN M W rwE B m V PF12 3X EA a 2 INTEGRATOR k A deg ruwcriw ELEMENT sf freer 7 RESET Mw EA HARMONIC RAEMORY INTEG SET c d l T m V Hz 4 2 3 r Eee a Lar Esse em Tm ae lm M W ht KEY LOCK OUTPU TFT O1P3W O3P3w gee o a L1 oO n n SCALING AVG LINE FREQ Ge BN um KEY LOCK Crap 4w C13V3A The explanation given in this section uses WT230 as an example For the differences between the WT210 and the WT230 see section 2 2 Operation Keys and Functions Element Display Operate the instrument by following the thick lines in the menu below Press the ENTER key to confirm a selection or setting Toleave the current menu in the middle of the operation press t
349. minator gt m indicates command group used m 0 WT210 230 command output format group scaling constant simultaneous setting command group 1 command output format group by element scaling constant individual setting command group Query CM terminator Example CM1 Description Parameter error 12 will occur if m is set to an illegal value The output format of the WT210 is the same for m 0 or 1 DA DA Sets the function for display A inquires about the current setting Syntax DA m terminator m indicates one of the following functions in case of normal measurement m 1 voltage V current A power W reactive power var apparent power VA Po BP WN 5 Elapsed integration time TIME in case of harmonic measurement m 1 Each relative harmonic content of lst to 50 or 30 th order of voltage V 2 Each relative harmonic content of lst to 50 or 30 th order of current A 3 Each relative harmonic content of lst to 50 or 30 th order of active power W 28 harmonic measurement order order Query DA terminator Example DA1 Description Parameter error 12 will occur if m is set to an illegal value DB DB Sets the function for display B inquires about the current setting Syntax DB m terminator m indicates one of the following functions in case of normal measurement m 1 voltage V 2 current A 3 power W 6 power factor PF 11 phase angle deg in
350. mmands relating to options are used on instruments which do not have the options installed Err 11 is displayed Also there are no responses to inquiries IM 760401 01E 10 17 uondo e ejieiul gi d5 H Chapter 11 Serial Interface Option 11 1 Serial Interface Functions and Specifications This instrument is equipped with a serial RS 232 C interface in accordance with your preference This interface permits remote control from a controller such as a personal computer and output of various data Overview of the Serial Interface The table below shows functions that are available in each mode Mode Function Normal mode Reception Functions performed by key operations except for LOCAL key and power ON OFF measured and computed data output request setting parameters output request error code output request Transmission measured and computed data output setting parameters output error code output status byte output Talk only mode Transmission measured and computed data output Normal Mode This mode is equivalent to the the addressable mode of the GP IB function and enables reception of commands and transmission of data Measured data is output on reception of the OD command 488 2 Mode This mode allows receiving of commands conforming to the IEEE St d 488 2 1992 protocol Talk only Mode This mode is equivalent to the Talk only mode of the GP IB function Only measured data can be output and
351. mode 11 1 number of displayed digits eeseesssess 4 32 Index 2 IM 760401 01E O opening message operating altitude operating conditions operating restrictions seseeseeseeeeneeennee operation keys optional accessories options order of harmoHics 2 2 corren cere ce output printing mode output format ASCII 488 2 14 32 14 33 output format ASCII ssss 10 5 10 9 10 10 output format BINARY eeeeeenenen 14 35 output format D A essen 9 5 Output functioni eee eite 1 5 9 22 output item OUIDUT QUOUG 5 miens 14 48 output to an external plotter harmonic 7 8 OVOP iss adaa 10 4 overlap command 14 9 overrange dislay harmonic eessseseees 7 8 overrange display esssssseeeeeneeeneenene 2 4 P se co EET iii peak measurement function sseeeeeeee 1 3 peak value phase angle rrt oreet e nias 5 4 pin arrangement eseeeseseeeeeeneenneennnen nennen 9 1 piri assightmielil eec no eer eto dno rar eene haeret h ether a een l 9 1 PUL SOUNCO 7 5 PMT 14 3 power coefficie
352. monic synchronization PLL source queries the distortion THD for harmonic measurement current setting queries the current setting Syntax HARMonics SYNChronize Syntax HARMonics THD IEC CSA V A NR ELEMent lt 1 3 gt HARMonics THD HARMonics SYNChronize Example HARMONICS THD IEC Example HARMONICS SYNCHRONIZE V 1 HARMONICS THD gt HARMONICS THD IEC HARMONICS SYNCHRONIZE gt HARMONICS SYNCHRONIZE V 1 14 3 7 INTEGrate Group The commands in the INTEGrate group are used to make settings relating to and inquiries about integration This allows you to make the same settings and inquiries as when using the START key STOP key RESET key INTEG SET key and their corresponding menus adic 2 MODE Space NORMal EO C TiMer Space lt NRf gt O lt NRf gt O lt NRf gt lt Character string gt N STARt A NM s A S e RESet J INTEGrate INTEGrate STOP Function Queries all settings relating to integration Function Stops integration Syntax INTEGrate Syntax INTEGrate STOP Example INTEGRATE INTEGRATE Example INTEGRATE STOP MODE NORMAL TIMER 0 0 0 INTEGrate TIMer INTEGrate MODE Function Sets the integration timer queries the current Function Sets the integration mode queries the current setting setting Syntax INTEGrate TIMer NRf NRf NRf
353. n 15 10 verifying the range esee 4 8 WOMAG M 5 2 voltage and current accuracy 5 voltage frequency essesssseeeeeneneenenenenn 5 6 VOLTAGE MEAN eeeeeeneeeemeeemeeneeneenmenrnn 4 1 W warm up time watt hour wiring example direct essen wiring example PT CT eeen wiring example sensor a wiring MOTO 2 rre n rete rte neret wiring precautions essen Wiring System corren nenne tern teet Z zero level compensation seen 1 5 zero level compensation sse 12 4 Commands before IEEE 488 2 PAA BOE 5c tici ct eds Heri ev dede merge Unc Le 13 1 AC AC AGUA iii tesis deetoseisete sS E se e aomas aLa eaa naaa Stace 13 1 ATA pd 13 1 AV AV CF CF CM OM DA DA DB DB DC DC DF DF DL DL DR DR DS DS DY DY EA EA EB EB 2 ue Eehdemnine noe tiere re piiee 13 4 ECIEG 2 EP 13 4 E ST lt interface message GET gt sss 13 4 FL FL s 13 4 H H we 13 4 HA HA ooo eee eerie ce cece se seseeeeneeneseeaetanae 13 4 HD EID ice Eta e epa des 13 4 HE HE s 13 4 ICAO avet 13 5 IM IM rir ett n E RN RA 13 5 13 5
354. n RT1 0 0 lt terminator gt Comparator output setting for models with CMP option YOO YM1 DY0 YC1 terminator Command system used CMO terminator Measurement synchronization source integration type MAX hold displayed digits SN1 IG0 KH0 DS1 terminator and number of Display update rate and line filter SI1 LF0 FLO terminator Output end END terminator Description The number of lines varies depending on the options used When a CMO is issued if the shunt current values or scaling values set for each element differ from each other the value set for element 1 will be output 13 10 IM 760401 01E 13 1 Commands OY OY Syntax Query Example Sets the relay output items in case of normal measurement inquires about the current setting Up to four items can be set OY ml1 m2 m3 m4 m5 terminator ml indicates the output relay channel 1 lt mil lt 4 m2 indicates the output item number m2 0 no output 1 Voltage V 2 Current A 3 Power W 4 Reactive power var 5 Apparent power VA 6 Power factor PF 7 Input voltage frequency V Hz 8 Input current frequency A Hz 9 Watt hour Wh 10 Ampere hour Ah 11 Phase angle deg 12 Peak voltage value Vpk 13 Peak current value Apk 14 Computation result MATH 24 Positive watt hour Wh 25 Negative watt hour Wh 26 Positive ampere hour Ah 27 Negative ampere hour Ah m3
355. n Selecting on and pressing the ENTER key enables the frequency filter function and turns ON the FREQ indicator oFF Selecting oFF and pressing the ENTER key disables the frequency filter function The FREQ indicator turns OFF Note L You cannot change the input filter ON OFF setting when integration is started You must stop and reset integration to do so IM 760401 01E 4 4 Selecting the Measurement Range When Using Direct Input CHECK RANGE MODE o o o o n UPDATE VOLTAGE CURRENT RMS VOLTAGE DC MAX HOLD MEAN A mv VA 123 X H ri i k A VAF ruwcriN ELEMENT uum um um M W TIME B r1 31235E mr m a mm k A deg runcrion ELEMENT Fin ei HARMONICS MEMORY INTEG SET c ri m V Hz 41 2 3 g e a pem am K A h j ruwcrow ELEMENT LOGALE SETUP J LI L LI M W he LJ CJ KEY LOCK OUTPUT SHIFT O1P3W O3P3W FILTER Seung cane me ined BORE ARCAL TuS REY LUE Tsp 4w L13V3A The explanation given in this section uses WT230 as an example For the differences between the WT210 and the WT230 see section 2 2 Operation Keys and Functions Element Display Procedure Operate the instrument by following the thick lines in the menu below Press the ENTER key to confirm a selection or setting Toleave the current menu in the middle of the operation press the key indicated in step 1 The confi
356. n circuit while the power is being applied Otherwise high voltage will appear at the secondary side of the CT making it extremely dangerous When using an external current sensor make sure to use a sensor that comes in a case The conductive parts and the case should be insulated and the sensor should have enough withstand voltage with respect to the voltage being measured Using a bare sensor is dangerous because you might accidentally come in contact with it IM 760401 01E 3 3 Wiring Precautions When using a shunt type current sensor as an external current sensor turn OFF the circuit under measurement Connecting or removing a sensor while the power is ON is dangerous When using a clamp type current sensor as an external current sensor have a good understanding of the voltage of the circuit under measurement and the specifications and handling of the clamp type sensor Then confirm that there are no shock hazards For safety reasons when using the instrument on a rack mount furnish a switch for turning OFF the circuit under measurement from the front side of the rack After connecting the measurement cable attach the current input protection cover for your safety Make sure that the conductive parts are not exposed from the protection cover To make the protective functions effective check the following items before applying the voltage or current of the circuit under measurement The power cable provided wi
357. n front of the value 2 When the Ah function is selected pressing the FUNCTION key once or twice will result in Ah Pressing the FUNCTION key once will result in displaying the positive ampere hour value whereas pressing the FUNCTION key twice will result in displaying the negative ampere hour value In case of the negative ampere hour value will appear in front of the value Note When negative integrated values are displayed the minimum display reading will become 99999 MWh MAh because of the added minus character During integration is in progress until being reset operation of other functions are restricted Refer to page 6 10 for more details IM 760401 01E 6 3 uone46o1u H 6 2 Setting Integration Mode and Integration Timer CHECK RANGE MODE 5 o tl oD n RANGE UPDATE VOLTAGE CURRENT RMS VOLTAGE DC MAX HOLD CHAUD GAUTO o MEAN A J PF paz emm MODE MAX HOLD TRIG J r1 Z E J k A VAF ruwcriN ELEMENT m Oa m TIME N uw m B m V F 1 2 35 CAL k A deg ruwcriN ELEMENT MW HARMONICS m i j mV Hz14 2 3 g GREMOTE rt an L1 IL k A h ruwcriN ELEMENT j Va mm m M W ht 4 L 1P3W 0 3P3w oo jas m m a es a a oO SCALING AVG LINE FREQ STORE RECALL HARMONICS KEY LOCK Cashew EILIV The explanation given in this section uses WT230 as an example For the differences between the WT210 and the WT230 see section 2 2
358. n the SAMPle group are used to make settings relating to sampling The commands allow you to make the same settings and inquiries as when the HOLD key on the front panel or the u rAtE menu of the SETUP key is used a op HOLD Space OFF lt NRf gt RATE Space lt time gt EN SAMPle Function Queries all settings related to sampling Syntax SAMPle Example SAMPLE gt SAMPLE HOLD 0 SAMPle HOLD Function Sets to hold the output of data display communication queries the current setting Syntax SAMPle HOLD Boolean SAMPle HOLD Example SAMPLE HOLD ON SAMPLE HOLD gt SAMPLE HOLD 1 SAMPle RATE Function Sets the display update rate or queries the current setting Syntax SAMPle RATE lt time gt time 0 1 to 5 s 0 1 0 25 0 5 1 2 5 Example SAMPLE RATE 0 25S SAMPLE RATE SAMPLE RATE 0 25E 00 H pyepueis 2661 2 88r 3331 24 0 BuiAqjduio spuewwosy jo uejs S z spueuiulo uoneoiunuiulo2 IM 760401 01E 14 39 14 3 Commands 14 3 13 STATus Group The commands in the STATus group are used to make settings relating to and inquiries about the communication status There is no corresponding operation using the front panel Refer to section 14 4 for status reports STATus A O CONDition 0 A Space __ lt Register
359. nator WT230 760502 Line 1 UE Terminator The data number will only be output in case of recall Line 2 W1 data W3 data SW data Terminator Line3 Whidata Wh3data SWhdata Terminator Line4 Ahidata Ah3data SAhdata Terminator Line5 Frequency us time Terminator Line 6 END Terminator e WT230 760503 Data j Line 1 number Terminator The data number will only be output in case of recall Line 2 W1 data 5 W2 data j W3 data SW data Terminator Line3 Whidata Wh2data Wh3data SWhdata Terminator Line 4 Ahidata 5 Ah2data Ah3data SAhdata Terminator Elapsed E Line5 Frequency integration time Terminator Line 6 END Terminator 10 8 IM 760401 01E 10 4 Output Measured Computed Data Setup Parameters and Error Codes Output Format of Harmonic Measurement Data Data Format Harmonic measurement data consists of an 8 byte header and 11 byte data total of 19 bytes Header 8 bytes Data 11 bytes Header Section hi h2 h3 h4 h5 h6 h7 h8 h1 to h3 data type V__ voltage A__ Current W_ Active power DEG Phase angle between the 1st order voltage and 1st order current DGV Phase angle between the 1st order voltage and the 2nd to 50st order voltage DGA Phase angle
360. nd In case of voltage and current All computed values of e a Line 1 the 1st to 50th order harmonic distortion Terminator Measured value for Line 2 fundamental 1st order Frequency Terminator Measured value for 2nd Relative harmonic content x Lines harmonic gt _ for 2nd harmonic Terminator Line 51 Measured value for 50th Relative harmonic content Terminator harmonic for 50th harmonic Line 52 END Terminator Incase of active power Line 1 All computed values or Power factor Terminator the 1st to 50th order is Measured value for Line2 fundamental 1st order Frequency Terminator Measured value for Relative harmonic content Terminator Line3 2nd harmonic for 2nd harmonic Line 51 Measured value for Relative harmonic content 50th harmonic for 50th harmonic Terminator Line 52 END Terminator Incase of phase angle f Phase angle between g Line 1 fundamentals Frequency Terminator of voltage and current Line 2 Phase angle between Phase angle between fundamental and 2nd fundamental and Terminator harmonic of voltage 2nd harmonic of current Line 3 Phase angle between Phase angle between fundamental and fundamental and Terminator 3rd harmonic of voltage i Line 50 g 3rd harmonie of current Phase angle between Phase angle between Line 51 fundamental and fundamenta
361. nd Error Queue ssessseeeeemeenenenne 14 48 Before Programming ssssssssssseseseeeeennee nennen nnne nnen nennt nennen en nnn nnns 14 49 Sample Program Image ssssssssssseseeenenneen nennen nennen nnne nnne 14 50 Sample Program Initialization Error and Execution Functions 14 51 Sample Program Output of Normal Measurement Data esseseesss 14 54 Sample Program Output of Harmonic Measurement Data sssusss 14 57 ASCII Character Codes ssssssssseseeeeeneneneennnee nne nnnn nennen 14 60 Communication related Error Messages sesssseeeeeeneeneenee ner 14 61 Chapter 15 Maintenance and Troubleshooting 15 1 15 2 15 8 15 4 AN 15 5 15 6 ACUSUIMOMNS EET 15 1 erecun Bm E 15 6 In Case of Malfunctioning sssssesseseseeeeeeneenneenneeeneeen enne nnne nnns 15 13 Error Codes and Corrective Actions nennen 15 14 Replacing the FUSS M E 15 16 Recommended Replacement Parts sessssseeeeeeeneen mee 15 17 Chapter 16 Specifications D MEMO c EU 16 1 162 Precio me 16 3 16 9 FUNCIONS due Ete Ehre eei ete e I NN 16 5 16 4 External Sensor Input EX1 and EX2 options seee 16 11 16 5 D A Output DA4 DA12 and CMP Options 16 11
362. nd nesting limit Cannot be used 9 Syntax of response data to queries Refer to the examples of each command in section 14 3 10 Communication between devices which do not follow the rules regarding response data No other modes than conforming to IEEE 488 2 1992 are supported 11 Size of data block of response data oto 24576 bytes 12 List of supported common 5commands Refer to section 14 3 15 Common Command Group 13 Condition of device when calibration is successfully completed CAL is not supported 14 Maximum length of block data which can be used for definition of trigger macro when ppt is used DDT is not supported 15 Maximum length of macro label if macro definition is used maximum length of block data which can be used for definition of macro processing when recursion is used in definition of macro Macro functions are not supported 16 Response to IDN Refer to section 14 3 15 Common Command Group IM 760401 01E 14 1 H pyepueis 2661 2 88r 3331 24 0 BuiAqjduio spuewwosy jo uejs S z spueuiulo uoneoiunuiulo2 14 1 Overview of IEEE 488 2 1992 17 Size of storage area for protected user data if PUD and Pup are used PUD and PuD are not supported 18 Length of resource name if RDT and RDT are used RDT and RDT are not supported 19 Change in status if RST LRN RCL and sav are used RST Refer to section 14 3 15 Common Command Group LRN RCL SAV These commands are not supported 20 Execution
363. necting the Power Supply Before Connecting the Power To prevent the possibility of electric shock and damage to the instrument follow the warnings below AN Before connecting the power cord ensure that the source voltage matches the rated supply voltage of the WT210 WT230 and that it is within the maximum rated voltage of the provided power cord Connect the power cord after checking that the power switch of the instrument is turned OFF To prevent the possibility of electric shock or fire always use the power cord supplied by YOKOGAWA Make sure to perform protective grounding to prevent the possibility of electric shock Connect the power cord to a three pin power outlet with a protective earth terminal Do not use an extension cord without protective earth ground Otherwise the protection function will be compromised Connecting the Power Cord 1 Check that the power switch is OFF 2 Connect the power cord plug to the power connector on the WT210 WT230 Use the power cord that came with the package 3 Connect the plug on the other end of the power cord to the outlet that meets the conditions below The AC outlet must be of a three pin type with a protective earth ground terminal Item Specifications Rated supply voltage 100 to 120 VAC 200 to 240 VAC Permitted supply voltage range 90 to 132 VAC 180 to 264 VAC Rated supply voltage frequency 50 60 Hz Permitted supply voltage frequency range 48 to 63 Hz M
364. ng message as shown on the next page appears and the WT210 WT230 is ready to make measurements If an error code remains on the display after the test program terminates the WT210 WT230 will not operate properly Turn OFF the power switch immediately and contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer When contacting your dealer please give them the model name suffix code and instrument No written on the name plate on the side panel and the displayed error code Note fan error code appears check the information in section 15 4 Error Codes and Corrective Action and perform the appropriate action The warm up time required to satisfy all specifications is approximately 30 minutes Shutdown Operation The setup parameters that exist immediately before the power switch is turned OFF are stored in memory The same is true when the power cord gets disconnected from the outlet The next time the power switch is turned ON the instrument powers up using the stored setup parameters Note A lithium battery is used to retain the setup parameters If the lithium battery is low error codes 60 68 and 78 that indicate backup data failure see section 15 4 Error Codes and Corrective Actions appear when the power switch is turned ON If these error codes appear frequently the lithium battery must be replaced quickly The user cannot replace the battery Contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer to have the battery replaced For information regardin
365. ng the GP IB or serial interface harmonic measurement data can be printed as value or graph on an external plotter Effect of Aliasing This instrument is not equipped with an internal aliasing filter Due to aliasing accidental errors may occur under the following circumstances Fundamental frequency f in Hz 40 f 70 When harmonic components of the 256th or higher exist 70xf 130 When harmonic components of the 128th or higher exist 130 lt f lt 250 When harmonic components of the 64th or higher exist 250 lt f lt 440 When harmonic components of the 32nd or higher exist IM 760401 01E uondo uonoun J 1ueureunseoj y 31uouueH HE 7 2 Setting the Target Element PLL Source and Harmonic Distortion Method CHECK RANGE MODE oO a a o a RANGE UPDATE VOLTAGE CURRENT RMS VOLTAGE Dc MAX HOLD o AUTO GAUTO o A l i i i m V VAl4 2 3 x volTAce current nouo F1 mm J k A VAF ruwcriN ELEMENT MOPE MANU ONG M W Te B m V F 1 2 35 k A deg runcrion ELEMENT jseIee STOP RESET uw IL CIC ARMONICSZ MEMORY i ri Pp oan ir 235 Z9 IL J IL m k A h jruwcriN ELEMENT am am MW het KEY LOCK OUTPI 4 CliP3W O3P3W ao Oo n m n o o SCALING AVG LINE FREQ STORE RECALL HARMONICS KEY LOCK Di3P4W O3V3A The explanation given in this section uses WT230 as an example For the differences between the WT210 and t
366. nn SHIFT OUTPUT Lonn g Select the output format F out 3 Display C 5 d A gt ENTER dFib n T ENTER rEL AY 4 gdFL C x gt rel E End of setting ri select default v SEL setting f Select original setting Set the output item Display C 11 l Set output channel 2 Display B 7 IL ch i ENTER H H ENTER ch og H d ch d 8 Pod Ar ch H ap Boe i y ch 5 HA 1 When you press the ENTER key at step 11 h E BE 1 the output channel displayed at display B will ET J I 5L o3 HEU 4 change to the next channel i e from ch1 to ch2 En d B and so forth ch H rra 2 The number of channels depends on the ch g Ph installed options In case of option DA4 or ch li Hh CMP there are four channels in case of option chil dE 5 DA12 there are twelve channels available ch id HP 1 3 Depends on the model number Refer to the ap f explanation for more details D j nHEH Fur d Ph 1 Ahr Jh ype A B 13 8 V A sets the A column output function End gt ENTER 9 v jmoves to the B column SHIFT gt End of setting 3 E selects from element 1 to 4 except 5 AL H 9 4 IM 760401 01E 9 3 D A Output Option Setting the Preset integration Ti
367. nne nnne nens 14 16 14 34 CONFig re Gro p conet cette ci eren etn efe gero cete inden 14 18 14 8 5 DISPlay Group ssssseseeneeeneennennnennnen nennen neret nnne nennen nnns 14 22 14 3 6 HARMonics Group osiers aean er A es 14 24 14 8 7 INTEGrate Group esssssessseeeseeeeneeenere nennen nennen nnne nnne nens 14 25 14 3 8 MATH Group i rette re rate ae eR ee pte rae nene Roe nnd 14 26 14 8 9 MEASure Group sssssssssseeseee eene nennen nnne rese tren reset 14 28 14 3 10 HEGall Group 12 perrito rete e rdc ne teer ti nix er ERR 14 36 14 311 IRE Gay Groups secececicebeecesecceadic sete t akc a AE AE E E E E R aE EN ENa 14 37 14 8 12 SAMPIe Group edet ret rne EE Er neon ER EAEE Ea TEESE 14 39 14 3 13 STATUS Group Mm 14 40 14 3 14 STORE Group sssssssssseseeneeneeeennee nennen nnne nennen neret 14 41 14 3 15 Common Command Group sse 14 42 IM 760101 01E xiii Content 14 5 14 6 14 7 14 8 14 9 14 10 14 11 Status REDOT sen iren edente tni due ete cca crer reenter 14 44 14 4 1 Overview of the Status Report ssssssssessseeeeeenerenenenennnns 14 44 14 4 2 Status Byte sssssssssssssssssseeeeeennnen eren n nnne nnnen nnne 14 45 14 4 3 Standard Event Register sssssssssseseseeeeeenenren nennen 14 46 14 4 4 Extended Event Register sesssseeeeeeneem meme 14 47 14 4 5 Output Queue a
368. normal measured computed data can be output simultaneously and the user is allowed to choose any output information type for those 14 data Each output block is of the following format Line 1 Dala Terminator The data number will only be output in case of recall Line 2 ch 1 ch 2 ch 3 ch 4 Terminator Line 3 ch 5 ch 6 ch 7 j ch 8 Terminator Line 4 ch 9 ch 10 ch 11 n ch 12 Terminator Line 5 ch 13 ch 14 Terminator Line 6 END Terminator 10 6 IM 760401 01E 10 4 Output Measured Computed Data Setup Parameters and Error Codes Each output block usually consists of five lines six in case of recall including the block end line END However if all output types on a line are set to no output this line will be omitted reducing the number of output lines by one For example if all output items of ch 9 to ch12 are set to no output line 4 in the above example will be omitted Furthermore if any channel on a line is set to no output all data following this channel on the line will be shifted forward For example if the ch 2 on line 1 is set to no output data of ch 1 will be followed by data of ch 3 Output Format in case of Normal Measurement WT210 760401 Line 1 Line 2 Line 3 Line 4 Line 5 Line 6 e WT230 760502 Line 1 Line 2 Line 3 Line 4 Line 5 Line 6 e WT230 760503 Line 1 Line 2 Line
369. nquiry is made Refer to page 14 44 Bit 5 ESB Event Summary Bit Set to 1 when a logical AND of the standard event register and the corresponding enable register is 1 i e when an event takes place in the instrument Refer to page 14 46 Bit 6 RQS Request Status MSS Master Summary Status MSS is set to 1 when a logical AND of the status byte except for bit 6 and the service request enable register is not 0 i e when the instrument is requesting service from the controller RQS is set to 1 when MSS changes from o to 1 and is cleared when a serial poll is performed or when MSS changes to 0 Bit Masking To mask a bit in the status byte so that it does not cause an SRQ set the corresponding bit of the service request enable register to 0 For example to mask bit 2 EAV so that no service will be requested even if an error occurs set bit 2 of the service request enable register to 0 This can be done using the SRE command To query whether each bit of the service request enable register is 1 or 0 use SRE For details of the SRE command refer to 14 3 IM 760401 01E 14 45 H pyepueis 2661 c 88r 3331 24 0 BurAjduio spuewwosy jo wa sAs z spueuiulo uoneoiunululo2 14 4 Status Report Operation of the Status Byte A service request is issued when bit 6 of the status byte becomes 1 Bit 6 becomes 1 when any of the other bits becomes 1
370. nt 4 2 rmn ccn etes 4 12 pOW r COTO E M iii power factor 5 8 power range table essent 4 9 precautions regarding use of integrator function 6 9 ero eie 10 1 11 1 printing OU reno rrr inis 9 22 PIOCOSS e 1 2 program data 14 4 program header 14 4 program messages ssssseee een 14 3 protective COVer eseeseeseeeeeeeee eee iv protocol PT ratio Q pu c 14 45 R ze arent Y 3 3 ANJE down oit irn rrr reir tne repris 4 8 range up rate integration time esee 9 7 rated supply voltage frequency ssesss 16 13 rated value ss reactive power rear panel RECGall gro p eiecti tide cies T recalling interval recommended replacement parts ee dcr cassis caresses 14 8 Ir rm RELay group relay output remote COMOL s iie ete Pei ERU ERR ERR EREEE remote control function sessssseseeeseeneennee 1 5 remote mode 10 3 repeat integration 6 2 reset 6 8 response dala 2 2 cider eir e i e ta a Eee 14 4 response header eene 14 4 response messages 14 4 retrieving da
371. ntax Example Description Sets the ON OFF pattern for all communication outputs of the harmonic measurement function MEASure HARMonics ITEM PRESet VPATtern APATtern WPATtern DPATtern ALL CLEar MEASURE HARMONICS ITEM PRESET VPATTERN The following six patterns can be selected VPATtern SYNChronize VTHD V VCON gt ON others gt OFF APATtern SYNChronize ATHD A ACON gt ON others gt OFF WPATtern SYNChronize PF W WCON gt ON others gt OFF DPATtern SYNChronize VDEG ADEG gt ON others gt OFF ALL all items gt ON CLEar all items gt OFF IM 760401 01E 14 29 H pyepueis 2661 c 88gr 3331 24 0 BurAqjduio spuewwosy jo uejs S z spueuiulo uoneoiunululo2 14 3 Commands MEASure HARMonics ITEM SYNChronize lt harmonic measurement function Function Syntax Example Description Sets the communication output item of harmonic measurement ON OFF queries the current setting MEASure HARMonics ITEM SYNChronize lt harmonic measurement function gt lt Boolean gt MEASure HARMonics ITEM SYNChronize lt harmonic measur2ement function gt SYNChronize PLL source lt harmonic measurement function gt VTHD V VCON ATHD A ACON PF W WCON VDEG ADEG MEASURE HARMONICS ITEM VTHD ON MEASURE HARMONICS ITEM VTHD MEASURE HARMONICS ITEM VTHD 1 The selection SYNChronize is for outputting the frequency of the P
372. ntent and harmonic distortion are related to voltage and current Error Display The power factor or phase angle will show PFErr or dEGEr when either the voltage range or power exceeds 200 of the range Computation Over Display Appears in the same way as for normal measurement Measurement Abort No Data Display Bar Display The display will show bar in any of the following cases Averaging Function When there are no more measured data to be displayed during harmonic measurement Soon after the harmonic measurement function has been turned ON When the PLL synchronization is being re established Until the initial measured data are obtained after having changed the settings When the analysis order which depends on the fundamental frequency exceeds the upper limit after having set the order at display A When the display function is set to relative harmonic content and the order at display A is set to 1 When the PLL source is set to voltage and an attempt is made to display the current frequency AHz or when the PLL source is set to current and an attempt is made to display the voltage frequency VHz When an element which is not assigned to the measurement object is selected However since the frequency is not related to the element setting the fundamental frequency designated as the PLL source can be displayed Exponential averaging is performed with an attenuation constant of 8 Output to an External Plotter Usi
373. number of displayed digits is 5 is 0 000 to 99 999 to 100 00 to 999 99 W Shows the relative harmonic content of the active power corresponding to the order shown on display A The display range when the number of displayed digits is 5 is 0 000 to 499 999 to 100 00 to 999 99 V deg In case the fundamental 1st order is shown on display A Shows the phase angle between the 1st order of the current and the 1st order of the voltage G phase lag or d phase lead will also be displayed In case the 2nd to 50th order is shown on display A Shows the phase angle between the 1st order of the voltage and the 2nd to 50th order of each voltage A minus will be displayed in front of the order only when the 2nd to 50th order is phase lagged The display range is 180 0 to 180 0 deg A deg In case the fundamental 1st order is shown on display A Shows the same as in case of V deg In case the 2nd to 50th order is shown on display A Shows the phase angle between the 1st order of the current and the 2nd to 50th order of each current A minus will be displayed in front of the order only when the 2nd to 50th order is phase lagged The display range is 180 0 to 180 0 deg 7 8 IM 760401 01E 7 4 Setting the Harmonic Order and Displaying the Measured Harmonic Value Display C V Shows each rms computed value of the 1st to 50th harmonic component of the voltage e A Shows each rms computed value of the 1st to 50th h
374. o 3 3 D 5 2 o N 77 lt o o 3 9 O o 3 3 D 5 2 o Oo o 3 v lt 5 a E o h gt m m m A Qo eo N i o oO N 7 e 5 5 2 9 Listl AddItem All end Listl ListIndex Listl ListIndex 1 Call ibonl Dev 0 GpibNormal 0 Exit Function GPIBError Call DisplayGPIBError sts msg GpibNormal 1 End Function IM 760401 01E 14 55 14 8 Sample Program Output of Normal Measurement Data 100 05E 00 97 08E 00 101 36E 00 101 00E 00 5 0001E 00 5 0026E 00 5 3885E 00 5 1943E 00 O mo C5 co co 105 cn qp 0o n5 Mea surement 2 100 04E 00 37 07E 00 101 95E 00 100 99E 00 5 0004E 00 5 0026E 00 5 3883E 00 5 1943E 00 499 31E 00 484 96E 00 545 00E 00 1 0443E403 49 998E 00 WM C5 co co a 0 cn p 05 P5 14 56 IM 760401 01E 14 9 Sample Program Output of Harmonic Measurement Data Sample2 GPIB Get Harmonics Data Private Function GpibHarmonics As Integer Dim msg As String Command buffer Dim qry As String Query buffer Dim sts As Integer Dim cnt As Integer Dim item As Integer Dim comma As Integer Dim length As Integer term Chr 10 terminator msg Space 100 qry Space 1000 Listl AddItem Now Initializing Wait a moment Dummy DoEvents sts InitGpib Initialize GPIB If sts lt gt 0 Then GpibHarmonics 1 Exit Function End If Initialize the sett
375. o 1 A range in range adjustment mode with the line filter turned ON CAN Exits range adjustment mode discarding the adjustments Corresponds to the RESET key END Exits range adjustment mode keeping the adjustments Corresponds to the SHIFT key ENT Confirms the adjustment value Corresponds to the ENTER key CAL2 Enters external sensor input range adjustment mode EXO No external sensor input option EX1 Option EX1 2 5 V 5 V and 10 V ranges EX2 Option EX2 50 mV 100 mV and 200 mV ranges CR9 EX2 Switch to 200 mV range CR10 EX1 Switch to 10 V range CAN Exits range adjustment mode discarding the adjustments Corresponds to the RESET key END Exits range adjustment mode keeping the adjustments Corresponds to the SHIFT key ENT Confirms the adjustment value Corresponds to the ENTER key CAL3 Enter D A output adjustment mode CHm Switches channels in D A output adjustment mode m 1 to 12 CDm n Enter the actual output value in D A output adjustment mode m 1 to 12 n actual output value DOO Execute 5 V output in D A output adjustment mode DO1 Execute 5 V output in D A output adjustment mode CAN Exits range adjustment mode discarding the adjustments Corresponds to the RESET key END Exits range adjustment mode keeping the adjustments Corresponds to the SHIFT key ENT Confirms the adjustment value Corresponds to the ENTER key CALO Exits adjustment returns to normal measurement mode OD Communication output request for me
376. o start integration while measurement of peak 6 4 overflow was inprogress or during an overrange condition 47 Attempted to start integration in continuous integration Set a correct preset time 6 2 mode when integration preset time was set to 0 50 A D conversion time out 51 Measurement data overflow occurred oL is displayed 2 8 52 Voltage peak overflow occurred V OVER indicator lights up 2 3 53 Current peak overflow occurred A OVER indicator lights up 2 3 54 Power factor exceeded 2 during measurement of power 5 2 factor 55 PFErr was displayed at the end of power factor 5 2 5 3 computation during measurement of phase angle 56 Input level was too low or below measurement range during 5 4 measurement of frequency Err Lo is displayed 57 Measured frequency exceeded the measurement range 5 4 Err Hi is displayed 58 Computation overflow occurred oF is displayed 2 8 59 Harmonic measurement becomes FrqEr 7 1 390 Overrun error Lower the baud rate 11 8 15 14 IM 760401 01E 15 4 Error Codes and Corrective Actions Error Codes regarding Self Diagnosis Error Code Description Corrective Action 60 Data failure of setup parameters backup setup parameters other than communication parameters are set to default 61 EEPROM element 1 failure Service is required 62 EEPROM element 2 failure Service is required 63 EEPROM element 3 failure Service is required 64 EEPROM D A board failure Serv
377. of 30 A or RMS value of 20 A whichever is less 0 5 Ato 20 A range 0 25 A to 10 A range if the crest factor is set to 6 common to WT210 and WT230 Up to peak current of 100 A or RMS value of 30 A whichever is less External sensor input common to WT210 and WT230 Peak value of up to five times the measurement range Maximum Reading Unit and Unit Prefix Maximum reading 99999 when the number of displayed digits is 5 for voltage current and power Units V voltage A current W power Prefix m k or M Selecting the Display Function The following selections are available V voltage will be displayed A current will be displayed W active power will be displayed Selecting the Input Element The type of input element which can be selected depends on the model number Make your selection after having verified your model number 1 2 83 Displays the measurement values of element 1 2 3 X Displays according to the wiring method and is as follows Wiring method XV XA EW XEVA lvar 1P3W ViVe AUAM WaWa ViAsVsAS var vars 3P3W ViVa Arsha W1 Ws 13 ViAssVoAs vari vars 3P4W VuYeevs Arsfedhs Wi We Ws V1A1 V2A2 V3A3 vari vare vars 3V3A VieVerVs AtsAerAs WiWa 18 Viai VeAz VoAs varvar Wiring method PF Xdeg 1P3W 3P3W EW 4 cos PF 3P4W EVA 3V3A Note 0 For X var computation when the current leads the voltage each var value is computed as a negative value when the current
378. of the condition register changes from 1 to 0 Both The bit of the extended event register becomes 1 when the bit of the condition register changes from 0 to 1 or from 1 to 0 Never The bit of the extended event register is disabled and always 0 14 4 5 Output Queue and Error Queue Overview of the Output Queue The output queue is provided to store response messages to queries For example when the MEASure NORMal VALue query is sent to request output of the acquired waveform the response data will be stored in the output queue until it is read out The example below shows that data is stored record by record in the output queue and is read out oldest item first newest item last The output queue is emptied in the following cases in addition to when read out is performed When a new message is received from the controller When dead lock occurs page 14 5 When a device clear command DCL or SDC is received When power is turned ON again The output queue cannot be emptied using the CLS command To see whether the output queue is empty or not check bit 4 MAV of the status byte Hed RE e D1 Overview of the Error Queue The error queue stores the error No and message when an error occurs For example when the built in battery has run out an error occurs and its error No 901 and message Backup Failure will be stored in the error queue The contents of
379. of the operation press the key indicated in step 1 The confirmed settings up to that point are kept Selecting the Output Mode If the communication interface Select the output Mode that you purchased is an serial 1 Display C interface the menu proceeds to LOCAL Communication setting Select plotter or printer the Handshaking method 2 3 Display C 5 menu of section 11 3 A Pe nb 9 ENTER HEDL ENTER gt Set the relevant parameters v End 4 End such as the handshaking A E 5 E P method format and baud rate V gy then press the ENTER key to ree complete the settings If the communication interface is a GP IB the procedure ends at step 5 1 Communication settings depend on your communication interface Refer to chapter 10 or 11 for the menu 9 20 IM 760401 01E 9 9 Outputting to an External Plotter Printer SETUP SHIFT OUTPUT Select the Output Items Display C 3 Display C ac oan P nut dR rELHH C l Activating the Output ENTER L 4 Ce lt gt Execute the output SETUP SHIFT OUTPUT RD i Display C Lann P nut dH rELAY nor Har 3 ENTER End Set the output items 5 ENTER
380. of the rated range computation overflow 5 oF is indicated If the measurement mode is VOLTAGE MEAN or DC no data 5 is indicated Four arithmetic operation fthe display A function is indicating the elapsed integration time TIME the computed result indication is no data 5 Ifthe value of the display B function is less than or equal to 0 0001 of the rated range computation overflow gs oF is indicated 5 8 IM 760401 01E Chapter 6 Integration 6 1 Integrator Functions Active power integration and current integration can be carried out All measurement values and computed values can be displayed even when integration is in progress except for the integrated values watt hour or ampere hour and elapsed integration time Since integrated values of negative polarity can be also displayed the consumed watt hour ampere hour value of the positive side and the watt hour value returning to the power supply of the negative side ampere hour only when the measurement mode is DC can be displayed seperately Integration Modes The following three modes are available as integration modes Manual Integration Mode Integration starts after having pressed the START key Integration stops after having pressed the STOP key when the integrated value reaches the maximum value 999999 MWh MAh or when the integrated value drops to the minimum value 99999 MWh MAh when the elapsed integration time r
381. oltage and current This value is used to compute the crest factor MAX Hold Function This function holds the maximum values of the voltage current active power apparent power reactive power voltage peak and current peak It holds the maximum value that exists while the MAX hold function is enabled IM 760401 01E 1 3 Aejdsiq jJeu6iq pue m na Jeuonoun J ES 1 2 Functions Computation Function Apparent Power Reactive Power Power Factor and Phase Angle Based on the measurement values of voltage current and active power the values of apparent power reactive power power factor and phase angle can be computed Scaling When performing voltage or current measurements with items such as external PT CT shunt and external sensor clamp you can set a scaling factor to the primary secondary ratio This is called scaling This function enables display of the measured values of voltage current active power reactive power integrated current and integrated power factor in terms of primary side values Averaging This function is used to perform exponential or moving averaging on the measured values before displaying them when the measured values are not stable Efficiency applicable only to the WT230 Efficiency can be computed on models with multiple input elements Crest Factor This function determines the crest factor of the voltage and current using peak RMS values Four Arithmetic Operation Displays six types of compu
382. oltage or current of the circuit under measurement The power cable provided with the instrument is used to connect to the power supply and the instrument is grounded The power switch of the instrument is turned ON The current input protective cover provided with the instrument is being used Other important items concerning the safety when wiring the circuit are described in section 3 3 Read and understand the information before wiring the circuit S 2 IM 760401 01E Wiring the Circuit Below is a wiring example of a circuit used to measure the efficiency of an inverter using the WT230 Digital Power Meter 760503 three phase four wire model To compute the efficiency on the WT230 760503 three phase four wire model when the primary side of the inverter is a single phase two wire system and the secondary side is a three phase three wire system wiring must be furnished to input elements 1 and 3 using a three phase three wire system Primary side Secondary side Input Output Wiring Single phase two wire Wiring Three phase three wire Inverter W1 w2 w3 W2 Active power measured by input element 2 of the WT230 W1 Active power measured by input element 1 of the WT230 W3 Active power measured by input element 3 of the WT230
383. oltage range 150V sts ilwrt Dev msg Len msg If sts 0 Then GoTo GPIBError End If msg RA7 term Current range 5A sts ilwrt Dev msg Len msg If sts 0 Then GoTo GPIBError End If Set the measurement mode msg MNO term Measurement mode RMS sts ilwrt Dev msg Len msg If sts lt 0 Then GoTo GPIBError End If Set the communication output items Default for normal measurement Set the communication output delimiter CR LF EOI msg OFD0 DLO term sts ilwrt Dev msg Len msg If sts lt 0 Then GoTo GPIBError End If 13 22 IM 760401 01E 13 5 Sample Program Output of Normal Measurement Data Clear the RQS of status byte Read and trash the response Sleep 1000 sts ilrsp Dev spr Listl Clear Read and display the numerical data For cnt 1 To 10 GoSub Readdata Next cnt Listl AddItem All end Listl ListIndex Listl ListIndex 1 Call ibonl Dev 0 GpibNormal 0 Exit Function GPIBError Call DisplayGPIBError sts msg GpibNormal 1 Exit Function Readdata End sts ilrsp Dev spr If sts lt 0 Then GoTo GPIBError End If If spr And amp H41 lt gt amp H41 Then ent cnt 1 Return End If Serial Poll It is repeated 10 times in this program Serial Poll Read out the measurement data till END ary msg OD term sts ilwrt Dev msg Len msg If sts lt 0 Then GoTo GPIBError End I
384. olumn A in the procedure One of the following items should be select which then will be printed out on an external plotter ptinter The initial value is V V Prints the numerical values of the measured values and relative harmonic content of the voltage e A Prints the numerical values of the measured values and relative harmonic content of the current P Prints the numerical values of the measured values and relative harmonic content of the active power e dEG Prints the numerical values of the phase angle G V Prints the numerical values and the graph of the measured voltage values G A Prints the numerical values and the graph of the measured current values G P Prints the numerical values and the graph of the measured active power values G Vd Prints the numerical values and the graph of the phase angle between each voltage of the 2nd to 50th order and the fundamental 1st order G Ad Prints the numerical values and the graph of the phase angle between each current of the 2nd to 50th order and the fundamental 1st order CG V Prints the numerical values and the graph of the relative harmonic content of voltage CG A Prints the numerical values and the graph of the relative harmonic content of current CG P Prints the numerical values and the graph of the relative harmonic content of active power ALL Prints the numerical values and the graph of the measured values and relative harmonic con
385. omatically and restarted immediately after having pressed the STOP key e when the integrated value reaches the maximum value 999999 MWh MAh or when the integrated value drops to the minimum value 99999 MWh MAh Integration holds the elapsed integration time and integrated values at the point where they reached the maximum minimum or at the point where the STOP key was pressed will be held until the RESET key is pressed Integrated value Elapsed integration time Hold lt gt Integration Integration Integration timer preset timer preset timer preset time time time Start Stop Reset Integration Methods The computing equations are shown below The result is displayed using time conversion n Power integration Ys ii i l N Current integration RMS Y n DC yi vi and ii are instantaneous values of voltage and current n is the number of samples A is the measured current for each display update rate N is the number of display updates Power integration or current integration with the measurement mode set to DC are integration of instantaneous power or instantaneous current If the measurement mode is set to RMS integration is performed on the measured current on each display update rate see section 4 13 Note If you stop integration the integration process stops at the integrated value and elapsed integration time of the previous display update The m
386. ommand2 Caption Sample2 GPIB Chr 13 Get Harmonics Data Textl Text End Sub pyepueis 4861 2 88p 3331 94 910J9q spueuiuio Jo ue1s S spueuiuo uoneorunuulo IM 760401 01E 13 21 13 5 Sample Program Output of Normal Measurement Data Samplel GPIB Get Normal Data Private Function GpibNormal As Integer Dim msg As String Dim qry As String Dim qrytemp As String Dim sts As Integer Dim item As Integer Dim comma As Integer Dim cnt As Integer Dim spr As Integer term Chr 10 terminator msg Space 100 qry Space 500 qrytemp Space 200 Listl AddItem Now Initializing Wait a moment Dummy DoEvents sts InitGpib Initialize GPIB If sts lt gt 0 Then GpibNormal 1 Exit Function End If Initialize the settings msg RC term Initialize the settings sts ilwrt Dev msg Len msg Send Command If sts lt 0 Then GoTo GPIBError End If Set the measurement condition Hold off Frequency Filter off Line Filter off Scaling off Averaging off msg HDO FLO LF0 SC0 AGO term sts ilwrt Dev msg Len msg Send Command If sts lt 0 Then GoTo GPIBError End If Set function and element of display DisplayA V Elementl DisplayB A Elementl DisplayC W Elementl msg DA1 EA1 DB2 EB1 DC3 EC1 term sts ilwrt Dev msg Len msg If sts lt 0 Then GoTo GPIBError End If Set the measurement range msg RV7 term V
387. omplished as shown next Using STATus CONDition query A sTATus CONDition query is used to make an inquiry about the contents of the condition register section 14 4 It is possible to judge whether updating measurement data is in progress or not by reading bit 0 of the condition register Bit 0 is 1 if updating is in progress and o if updating is stopped Using the extended event register Changes in the condition register are reflected in the extended event register section 14 4 Example STATus FILTerl FALL STATus EESE 1 EESR SRE 8 CONFigure VOLTage RANGe 60V lt PMT gt Service request is awaited MEASure NORMal VALue lt PMT gt STATus FILTerl FALL indicates that the transit filter is set so that bit O is set to 1 when bit O FrLTer1 of the condition register is changed from 1 to o STATus EESE 1 is acommand used only to reflect the status of bit O of the extended event register in the status byte STATus EESR is used to clear the extended event register The SRE 8 command is used to generate a service request caused solely by the extended event register MEASure NORMal VALue will not be executed until a service request is generated IM 760401 01E 14 9 H pyepueis 2661 2 88gr 3331 24 0 BurAqjduio spuewwosy jo wa sAs z spueululo uoneoiunuiulo2 14 2 Program Format Using the COMMunicate WAIT command The comMunicate WAIT
388. on is in progress Execution error 13 will occur While recalling or storing is in progress execution error 19 will occur SL Recalls setup parameters from a selected file Syntax SL m terminator m indicates file no and must be set within the following range 1 lt m lt 4 Description Parameter error 12 will occur if m is set to an illegal value Itis not possible to recall communications related information communication mode address etc using this command While recalling or storing is in progress execution error 19 will occur SN SN Sets the measurement synchronization source inquires about the current setting Syntax SN m terminator m indicates the type of measurement synchronization source m 0 V voltage 1 A current 2 OFF Query SN terminator Example SNO Description Parameter error 12 will occur if m is set to an illegal value You cannot change the setting while integration is in progress Execution error 13 will occur While recalling or storing is in progress execution error 19 will occur SO SO Sets the store function ON OFF or inquires about the current setting Syntax SO m terminator m indicates whether storage is ON or OFF m 0 OFF 1 ON Query SO terminator Example SO1 Description Parameter error 12 will occur if m is set to an illegal value While recalling or storing is in progress execution error 19 will occur SR SR Se
389. on the number of installed 5 elements HH M IM 760401 01E 4 21 eBueg 1ueujeunseo y pue suomnipuo 1ueujeunseoe y Buas 4 9 Computing the Efficiency Applies to WT230 Only Explanation The efficiency of the device can be computed and shown on display C When displaying the efficiency 3 is displayed at the front of the value Computing Equation of Efficiency For the three phase three wire model 760502 Computes the efficiency by taking the active power W1 measured on element 1 as the active power applied to the primary side of the inverter and the active power W3 measured on element 3 as the power consumed by the secondary side of the inverter Primary side Secondary side wi w3 Output side Equation x100 96 W3 Efficency Wi For the three phase four wire model 760503 Computes the efficiency by taking the active power W2 measured on element 2 as the active power applied to the primary side of the inverter and the active power W1 and W3 measured on elements 1 and 3 as the power consumed by the secondary side of the inverter Primary side Secondary side wi W2 Inverter W3 Output side Equation _ W1 W3 Efficency W x100 Note If the denominator of the above equation is less than or equal to 0 0001 of the rated range computation overflow j5 oF is indicated 4 22 IM 760401 01E 4 10 Computing the Crest Factor CHECK RANGE
390. onent 2 digits max 5 digits in case of negative value The sign of the mantissa will only be applied in case of negative values However phase lead and lag in case of phase angle DEG will be shown as follows LEAD 180 0E 00 LAG 180 0E 00 in phase 0 0E 00 The mantissa will be proceeded by a space n case of overrange or computation over 9 9E 37 will be output i e in case the display shows oL oF PFErr dEGEr ErrLo or ErrHi n case no data is present i e the display shows 9 91E 37 NAN Will be output The elasped integration time is output as hours minutes seconds in the lt NR1 gt format Example 999 59 59 Only one of the six parameters VHZ1 VHZ2 VHZ3 AHZ1 AHZ2 or AHZ3 can be measured for frequency Data that is not measured is set to no data 9 91E 37 VHZX AHZX VPKX and APKX always output no data 9 91E 37 Output Format of Normal Measurement Data The communication output is set ON by any of the commands starting with MEASure NORMal ITEM and the normal measured computed data or elapsed integration time are output according to the following order of priority Besides in case of recalling normal measurement or integration data the data number will be output in lt NR1 gt format as well Data will be output in the following order corresponding to each element However note that for model 760401 only element 1 is valid and for mo
391. ons and values ncreases the voltage or current range and sets functions and values ENTER CHECK RANGE MODE n _ UPDATE RANGE Confirms the specified range function or value o MAX HOLD D AUTO m o VOLTAGE CURRENT RMS VOLTAGE DC MEAN p o AUTO a v SHIFT gt Moves along the digits of the value from the eft to the right HOLD TRIG ENTER CAL INTEGRATOR SHIFT RESET Moves the decimal point from the left to the INTEG SET right ENTER SHIFT CAL SHIFT Performs zero level compensation Section 12 3 H START H m V vaji 2 s z ereere HHHEHE K A var Funerion ELEMENT MODE MAX HOLD 2 2 TIME MW i m V PFI123 x gt z a i j i j f j ii j i j H k A deg ruwcrow evemenr 2 2 9MW START sroP i HARMONICS MEMORY c m V H 12 3 5 2 H H g j H f k A h eunetion ELEMENT LOCAL SETUP o o o o o gM W het KEY LOCK OUTPUT o1paw ospaw E FILTER _scatine AE LINE FREQ nm Erali nanais E o 3P4w C31 3V 3A START SHIFT HARMONICS Displays the setup menu for turning ON OFF harmonic measurement setting the PLL source and the element to be measured Se
392. ontinuously from integration start through integration stop Communication Functions Option on the WT210 Standard on the WT230 You can select GP IB interface or serial RS 232 C interface Measured computed data of up to 14 channels can be output to your PC via the communication interface You can also set various functions of the WT210 WT230 from your PC Output Function to an External Plotter and Printer Measured computed data can be printed on an external plotter or printer via the GP IB or serial RS 232 C interface Other Functions Backup Function of Setup Parameters This function backs up setup parameters including computed values if the power is cut off such as a result of a power failure Initialization of Setup Parameters This function initializes the setup parameters to factory default Zero Level Compensation Zero level compensation refers to creating a zero input condition inside the WT210 WT230 and setting the level at that point as the zero level Zero level compensation must be performed in order to satisfy the specifications of this instrument When the measurement range is changed zero level compensation is performed automatically However if the measurement range is not changed for a long time the zero level may shift due to environmental changes around the instrument In such case you can manually perform zero level compensation Key Lock Setup operations using front panel keys can be disabled except for the po
393. or input adjustments When you press the RESET key instead of the SHIFT key the carried out adjustments will become invalid Adjusting the D A Output 1 Preparations Connect the D A output terminal pin corresponding to channel 1 of the external I O connector to the H terminal of the DMM and the COM terminal pin No 24 to the L terminal For the relationship between the D A output terminals and the D A output channels see Pin Assignments in section 9 1 2 Setthe DMM range to 20 V 3 Instep 2 of Preparations on page 15 1 select dA and press the ENTER key Adjusting After having carried out the above described preparations the displays will show the following Display A will be blinking LOL 9 display A ch 1 display B 5 000 display C 5 0000 Press the or v key to select the channel to be adjusted shown on display A Press the ENTER key The first digit on display C starts blinking A voltage of approximately 5 V is output from the external I O connector Press the VOLTAGE or CURRENT key to move the blinking digit on display C and press or v key to set the value of the blinking digit the same as the value displayed on the DMM After setting all the digits on display C press the ENTER key Display C shows 5 0000 V and a voltage of approximately 5 V is output from the external I O connector Repeat step 3 After setting all the digits on display C press the ENTER key The channel shown on
394. or the setup procedure see section 4 3 Turning ON OFF the Input Filter The WT230 has a function that is used to perform exponential or moving averaging on the measured values before displaying them when the measured values are not stable For the setup procedure see section 4 7 Using the Averaging Function IM 760401 01E S 17 Displaying the Efficiency After wiring the circuit selecting the wiring system and selecting the measurement range voltage and current ranges set the efficiency computation The computed results of efficiency can be shown on display C Setting the Effici C tati For details see section 4 9 5 RANGE GAUTO GAUTO o VA 12 3 X VOLTAGE CURRENT HOLD var MODE MAX HOLD TRIG FUNCTION ELEMENT Peru ri SETUP Ari u CAR INTEGRATOR FUNCTION ELEMENT Ey 3 5 3 Srv lt er lt er lt Q oO Q a a START STOP RESET HARMONICS MEMORY INTEG SET Hz 12 3 322 h Function ELEMENT oc see h LJ LJ KEY LOCK PUT SHIFT DL11P3W O 3P3w WIRING O 3P4W O 3V3A MATH 4 RANGE AUTO GAUTO o VA 123 X VOLTAGE CURRENT HOLD var MODE MAX HOLD TRIG FUNCTION ELEMENT amp Fee Z SETUP ICE wui PF 232 FUNCTION ELEMENT INTEGRATOR j LL L ILI MATH yiri n 5 o START STOP RESET HARMONICS MEMORY INTEG SET Hz 1 2 3
395. oration is strictly prohibited Adobe and Acrobat are trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated Company and product names used in this manual are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective holders First Edition June 2002 Second Edition August 2002 Third Edition April 2004 Fourth Edition May 2009 All Rights Reserved Copyright 2002 Yokogawa Electric Corporation IM 760401 01E Functional Comparison of the WT210 WT230 and WT200 WT110E WT130 This section summarizes the functional differences between the WT210 WT230 and the conventional models WT200 WT110E WT130 For more details on the functions and performance of the WT210 WT230 see the following sections Item WT210 WT230 WT200 WT110E WT130 Conventional Models Voltage input terminal Plug in terminal Binding post safety terminal structure External sensor input terminal BNC connector Plug in terminal safety terminal structure Basic voltage and 0 196 of reading 0 15 of reading current accuracy 0 1 of range 0 1 of range Basic power accuracy 0 1 of reading 0 2 of reading 0 1 of range 0 1 of range Frequency range DC 0 5 Hz to 100 kHz DC 10 Hz to 20 kHz Effective input range 1 to 13096 of the rated range 10 to 130 of the rated range Measurement synchronization Select from voltage current WT200 Select voltage or current source and entire period of the display WT110E WT1
396. ored Each bit is expressed as a decimal number For example if SRE 239 is set the service request enable register will be set to 11101111 This means that bit 4 of the service request enable register is disabled so that bit 4 MAV of the status byte register will not be set to 1 even if the output queue is not empty Bit 6 MSS of the status byte register is the MSS bit itself and therefore is ignored Default is SRE 255 i e all bits are enabled The service request enable register will not be cleared even if a query is made using SRE For details of the service request enable register refer to page 14 45 Queries the value of the status byte register STB STB gt 4 Each bit is expressed as a decimal number Bit 6 is RQS and not MSS because the register is read without serial polling For example if STB 4 is returned the status byte register is set to 00000100 i e the error queue is not empty an error has occurred The status byte register will not be cleared even if a query is made using STB For details of the status byte register refer to page 14 45 Executes the same operation as the TRIG SHIFT HOLD key on the front panel TRG Executes the same operation as when using the multi ine message GET Group Execute Trigger Executes a self test and queries the result All internal memory boards are tested TST TST gt 0 0
397. ormed by key operations except for LOCAL key and power ON OFF measured and computed data output request setting parameters output request error code output request Talker measured and computed data output setting parameters output error code output status byte output Talk only mode Talker measured and computed data output Addressable Mode This mode allows the WT210 WT230 to be controlled using commands from the controller The command system before the IEEE St d 488 2 standard can be used The WT210 WT230 outputs data when a data output request command OD is received This mode allows data to be read at an arbitrary time 488 2 Mode Like the addressable mode this mode allows the WT210 WT230 to be controlled using commands from the controller This mode allows commands conforming to the IEEE St d 488 2 1992 protocol to be used Talk only Mode This mode does not require a controller Data is output at certain intervals This interval can be set to any length This mode is useful when the instrument is connected to a listener only device such as a printer Print Mode This mode is useful when harmonic measurement data are output to the external plotter or external printer For details refer to section 9 9 Note Conventional power meters WT110 WT110E WT130 WT200 WT1010 WT1030 WT1030M WT2010 and WT2030 supported addressable mode A and addressable mode B The WT210 WT230 supports addressable mode A IM 760401
398. performing harmonic measurement Chapter 8 Store Recall Function of Measured Computed Data and Setup Parameters Describes how to store recall measured computed data and setup parameters to from the internal memory Chapter 9 External I O Function Describes how to use the remote control option D A output option and comparator option functions and how to output to external plotters and printers Chapter 10 GP IB Interface Option Describes how to control the WT210 WT230 from a PC and how to retrieve measured computed data on the WT210 WT230 to a PC using the GP IB interface Chapter 11 Serial Interface Option Describes how to control the WT210 WT230 from a controller such as a PC and how to retrieve measured computed data on the WT210 WT230 to a controller using the serial RS 232 C interface Chapter 12 Initializing Setup Parameters Zero level Compensation and Key Lock Describes the setup parameters that are backed up and how to initialize the settings Chapter 13 Communication Commands 1 System of Commands before the IEEE 488 2 Standard Describes communication commands and sample programs that follow the rules that existed before the establishment of the IEEE 488 2 Standard Chapter 14 Communication Commands 2 System of Commands Complying to the IEEE 488 2 1992 Standard Describes communication commands and sample programs that comply with the IEEE 488 2 1992 Standard
399. play B Display C Wiring method Virms V3rms ee alee 3P3W V3rms Airms Airms A3rms A3rms CD SOURCE LOAD 3 IM 760401 01E 4 27 eBueg 1ueujeunseo y pue SUOI IPUOD 1ueujeunsee y Dunes le 4 11 Performing Four Arithmetical Operation HI 2 Displays the result of display A display B When computing impedance Z resistance R and reactance X Computation example Display A Display B Display C Wiring method VA1 Airms Z anal Any W1 Airms R mae Var Airms X 7 ADS SOURCE 9 LOAD D ATZI h Displays the result of display A display B When computing resistance R Computation example Display A Display B Display C Wiring method Virms Virms W1 R Wi Any SOURCE 9 LOAD D 4 28 IM 760401 01E 4 12 Computing the Average Active Power during Integration Procedure CHECK RANGE MODE El o n n o UPDATE VOLTAGE CURRENT RMS VOLTAGE DC MAX HOLD MEAN A Y r l ri m V VA 12 3 x 7 LE LE J r k A VAF ruwcriN ELEMENT a ee M W Time B m V F 1 2 335 k A deg ruwcriw ELEMENT MW c mV H123 X F1 l1 IL lt k A h jruwcrow ELEMENT M W het FILTER o mj o n n n Ey n SCALING AVG LINE FREQ STORE RECALL HARMONICS KEY LOCK VOLTAGE MODE START HARMONICS r3 REMOTE LOCA KEY LOCK OOTPUT SHIFT O1P3w O3P3w O3P4W O3V3A RANGE GAUTO GAUTO o CURRENT MAX HOLD
400. play B will be applied to element 2 only This selection will not appear on model 760502 The scaling constant set at display C will be applied to element 3 only After having selected ALL or EACH and entered the scaling constant press the ENTER key to end this scaling setting Selecting the Measurement Range Current with Scaling function ON After having set the scaling constant select the menu for the current measurement range Select the rated output of the external sensor from this menu refer to the Operating Procedure on the previous page Scaling of the external sensor input will start as soon as you press the ENTER key after selecting Scaling will stop as soon as you select a measurement range other than external sensor input from the menu Note When performing measurements using the external sensor and the scaling function for the external PT CT turned ON the PT CT scaling constant will interfere The input range for the external sensor can only be of the manual type There is no auto range function When you switch from external sensor input to direct auto range input an error will appear First select manual range for direct input and afterwards select auto range same goes for Setting by communication interface 4 16 IM 760401 01E 4 7 Using the Averaging Function CHECK RANGE MODE RANGE AUTO GAUTO o o n n UPDATE VOLTAGE CURRENT RMS VOLTAGE DC MAX HOLD MEAN
401. play C 5 Display C 7 nor gt ENTER AFLE n p LENER Hop 6 dFiLt End of setting m Select v 5 E L default setting f Select original setting 13 ENTER When you press the key at step 13 the output channel displayed at display B will change to the next channel i e from ch1 to ch2 and so forth 2 explanation for more details s the A column output function Moves to the B column 2 Select from element 1 to 4 except 47 AL H and E Depends on the model number Refer to the IM 760401 01E 10 13 uondo esejsezu gi d5 10 6 Setting the Output Items SETUP SHIFT OUTPUT Setting the Output Item in case of Harmonic Measurement gt 2 CEDR Display C Lann P pnub dR rELRH 3 ENTER ee 4 M Display C nar L D Lm Tlf Set the output item ENTER When graph printouts are selected as the output item only data values will be output by communication C 5 5Je Display C Lt 1 a B A a n rn c3 ta rx E za ra a SHIFT ENTER End of setting Sets the A column output function V Moves to the B column gt Select from element 1 to 3 10 14 IM 7604
402. play C will change to rAnGE This completes the range adjustments When you press the RESET key instead of the SHIFT key the carried out adjustments will become invalid In case the External Sensor Input Option is installed EX1 or EX2 Connect the voltage output terminal of the AC voltage current standard to the voltage input terminal of the WT210 WT230 Connect the H terminal of the standard to the core of the EXT terminal of the WT210 WT230 and the L terminal to the shield of the EXT terminal of the WT210 WT230 On the WT230 the core of the EXT terminals and the shield of the EXT terminals of all input elements are connected collectively In step 2 of Preparations described earlier select Ein and press the ENTER key Display B shows the external sensor range E 10 00 V or E200 0 mV Set the output voltage of the standard to 10 000 V or 200 00 mV and output the signal Wait for the measured value on display C to stabilize Even in stable condition the value fluctuates up to approximately 2 digits The displayed value when using external sensor input is a value converted to current If a voltage value that is equal to the specified external sensor range is input display C shows the rated range of 50 000 A assuming that there is no error in the WT210 WT230 or the standard Press the ENTER key The adjustment value is confirmed Press The SHIFT key and display C will change to Ein This completes the external sens
403. r A1004JD 1 For remote control and D A output provided only on options DA4 DA12 and CMP 4 Current input B9317CY 1 For the WT210 protective cover B9317GY 1 For the WT230 cover appropriate for the model provided 5 Rubber feet forthe A90882M 1 Two pieces in one set One set provided hind feet 6 User s Manual 1M760401 E 01 1 This manual 1 One of the following power cords is supplied according to the instrument s suffix codes iv IM 760401 01E Checking the Contents of the Package Optional Accessories Sold Separately The optional accessories below are available for purchase separately Name Model Q ty Description 1 External sensor cable B9284LK 1 For connecting the current sensor input connector of the WT210 WT230 length 0 5 m Measurement lead 758917 Two leads in one set used with the separately sold 758922 or 758929 adapter length 0 75 m ratings 1000 V Alligator clip adapter set 758922 Two pieces in one set for the 758917 measurement lead Rated voltage 300 V Alligator clip adapter set 758929 Two pieces in one set for the 758917 measurement lead Rated voltage 1000 V Fork terminal adapter set 758921 Two pieces in one set for the 758917 measurement lead Rated current 25 A Safety terminal adapter set 758923 Two pieces in one set This type holds measurement wires in place using springs Safety terminal ad
404. r on the primary side of the inverter power supplied by the source on display A and the active power on the secondary side of the inverter power consumed by the load on display B 1 Display the active power on the primary side of the inverter on display A FUNCTION e Press of display A to select function W e Press 7 of display A to select input element 2 2 Display the active power on the secondary side of the inverter on display B e Press 77 of display B to select function W ELEMENT e Press 7 of display B to select input element x 3 Display efficiency on display C Press on display C to show 5 on display C If FF is selected in step 4 of page S 18 efficiency is displayed Confirmation Example of the Displayed Efficiency The following figure shows the case in which displays A B and C are showing the active power on the primary side of the inverter power supplied by the source the active power on the secondary side of the inverter power consumed by the load and the efficiency respectively If we divide the value shown on display B by the value shown on display A and convert the result to a percentage we obtain the efficiency value shown on display C Active power on the secondary side of the inverter W Value shown Power consumed by the load _ on display B 27 97 W m iN eee Active power on the primary Value shown 38 28 W ie dei side of the inverter W on display A 0 7307
405. rated range or the peak value exceeds approximately 300 Approx 600 if the crest factor is set to 6 of the rated range Step down Range down When the measured value becomes less than 30 of the rated range and the peak value is less than 300 Less than or equal to 600 if the crest factor is set to 6 of the subordinate range Display Item Specifications Display type 7 segment LED Simultaneous display 3 items Display items During normal measurement Display function V voltage A current W active power VA apparent power var reactive power TIME elapsed integration time PF power factor deg phase angle VHz voltage frequency AHz current frequency Wh sum of watt hours Ah sum of ampere hours Whz positive or negative watt hour Ahz positive or negative ampere hour Result of efficiency computation crest factor computation four arithmetic operations and average active power during integration Voltage peak Current peak Display area Display A V A W VA var and TIME Display B V A W PF and deg Display C V A W VHz AHz Wh Whz Ah Ahz result of efficiency computation crest factor computation four arithmetic operations and average active power during integration voltage peak and current peak 16 8 IM 760401 01E 16 3 Functions Item Specifications Display items During Harmonic Measurement Display function V voltage of harmonic signal
406. rcuit 24V Low ch 1 Exceeding upper limit open circuit ch 1 nthe dual mode the combinations ch1 amp ch2 and ch3 amp ch4 are fixed The following combinations are not possible Within a pair you can set either channel as upper or lower limit The values of V voltage A current W active power VA apparent power var reactive power Vpk voltage peak and Apk current peak while the MAX hold function see section 4 8 is enabled will be displayed according to the maximum values MAX that are held The values that are compared against the limit values are also the maximum values MAX that are held 9 10 IM 760401 01E 9 4 Comparator Function Option CAUTION Make sure not to greatly vary the input signal when using the comparator function Depending on the input signal used for determination the instrument may display error codes i e overrange and this will change the output relays as follows When using the output relay as a control signal make sure to match these control signals with other equipments to eliminate erroneuous control Displayed error Relay status oL over range The NC contact is closed oF over flow The NC contact is closed dEGEr phase angle error The NC contact is closed PFErr power factor error The NC contact is closed ErrLo frequency error The NC contact is closed ErrHi frequency error The NO contact is clo
407. rder 14 4 430 Query DEADLOCKED Limit the length of the program message including lt PMT gt to 14 5 1024 bytes or less 440 Query UNTERMINATED after Do not enter any query after IDN and OPT indefinite response Errors in Execution 800 to 899 Code Message Action Reference 813 to 819 Invalid operation Refer to 15 4 15 14 830 to 833 Internal memory access error Refer to 15 4 15 14 841 to 847 Integrator execute error Refer to 15 4 15 14 Error in System Operation 912 Code Message Action Reference 912 Fatal error in Communication Service is required driver Warnings 350 390 Code Message Action Reference 350 Queue overflow Read out the queue 14 48 390 Overrun error Adjust the baud rate 11 5 only for RS 232 C Note The warning code 350 only appears in case of an overflow of the error queue The error which occurs in case of clearing the STATus ERRor will not appear on the screen 14 62 IM 760401 01E Chapter 15 Maintenance and Troubleshooting 15 1 Adjustments When the measurement values are erroneous adjust this instrument using the following procedures Required Equipments AC Voltage Current Standard 15 to 150 V 0 1 to 5A 60 Hz recommended FLUKE 9100 or 2558 if you want to carry out adjustments with an accuracy higher than the one 2558 is providing fine adjust the output using the Digital Multi Meter DMM 1271 DMM 0 5 Recommended Yokogawa 7555
408. rder shown below The wiring system of the circuit on the secondary side of the inverter is three phase three wire and the circuit is connected to input elements 1 and 3 of the WT230 To show the measured value of input element 1 3 or on display B we illuminate input element 1 3 or X Display B ELEMENT ELEMENT ELEMENT ELEMENT 1 92 3 x OF GD CO When input element 1 is illuminated the line current of phase U see page S 6 on the secondary side of the inverter is indicated When input element 3 is illuminated the line current of the W phase see page S 6 on the secondary side of the inverter is indicated When input element 2X is illuminated the average of the line current of phase U and W on the secondary side of the inverter is indicated However this value does not have any physical meaning IM 760401 01E Displaying Voltage Current and Active Power Displaying the Active P thes lary Side of the Invert Display C Carry out the following procedure to display the active power of the secondary side of the inverter on display C Function indicator Element indicator c RANGE Swe Sao Y A k VAF FUNCTION ELEMENT MODE MAK HOLD TRIG noo v TA Tee B m ia le eid ee c ee v HARMONICS MEMORY INTEG SET JEFE 59r xu Z k A fi ruwcroN ELEMENT p EN MW he
409. relay Contact Relay Output This instrument is equipped with four contact relays 4 ch as follows If the relay is not operating the NC Normally Closed contact is closed If the relay is operating the NC contact is opened and the NO Normally Open contact is closed AN Comparator Mode Current 3A Limit of ch2 is set to 3 A NO GO determination area Time Current GO determination area 3A Limit of ch2 is set to 3 A Relay specifications Contact rating rated 24 V 0 5 A max 30 V 0 5 A Minimum load 10 mV 10 uA Operating life with load approx 500000 times at contact rating Operating life without load approx one hundred million times Contact Response time 2 times the display update rate or less Note Since this relay is subject to wear it is excluded from the 3 year warranty CAUTION Damage to the relays may occur when a voltage or current exceeding the specified range is applied to the contact output terminal The following two comparator modes are available Single Mode If the measured computed and integrated values exceed the previously set limits the relay contact will become NO This mode is useful when you want to assign each of the four relays individually Refer to the figure below When the current value is less than 3 A NO GO will be determined and the circuit becomes open When the current value is 3 A or more GO will be determined and the circuit becomes closed
410. ress 30 File data failure 31 File is damaged 32 Not stored in internal memory 33 No data to be stored in internal memory 41 Attempted to start integration when integration had been stopped due to an irregularity 42 Attempt made to start integration during integration IM 760401 01E 13 7 g pyepueis 286 4 Z 88t 3331 94 910J9q spuewwo Jo WS S spueuiuo uoneorunuulo 13 1 Commands OF OF Syntax 43 Measurement stopped due to overflow during integration or due to a power failure 44 Attempt made to stop integration while integration was interrupted 45 Attempt made to reset integration while integration was in progress 46 Attempt made to start integration when peak overflow was detected 47 The integration timer is set to zero when integration is started in continuous integration mode 51 Measurement data overflow occurred oL is displayed 52 Voltage peak overflow occurred 53 Current peak overflow occurred 54 Power factor exceeded 2 PFErr is displayed 55 degErr was displayed 56 Frequency input level was too low or below measurement range ErrLo is displayed 57 Frequency was above the measurement range ErrHi is displayed 58 Computation overflow occurred oF is displayed 59 When harmonic measurement is carried out FrqEr is displayed Sets communication output information types inquires about the current settings Up to 14 measur
411. rflow oF PFErr dEGEr ErrLo ErrHi is being displayed h1 h2 h3 h4 O E 8 8 8 8 8 8 E 0 Data state in case of no data when the display is hiln2 n3 h E 9 9 9 o9 9 9 E c 3 Elapsed time of integration d1 to d5 Hour d d7 to d8 Minute d9 d10 to d11 Second M S d1 d2 d3 d4 d5 d6 d7 d8 d9 diO a11 Note When the frequency is set by either of the following methods only one value is measured and that value will be output by panel keys by the FUNCTION key and ELEMENT key of display C except WT210 by communication command by the DC or EC command After setting the measurement object of frequency even changing the display C to something different than VHz or AHz will not result in changing the object of measurement of frequency When selecting the output items yourself and you set a frequency item which is not object of measurement 999999 E 03 no data will be output The displayed values of V voltage A current W active power VA apparent power var reactive power Vpk voltage peak and Apk current peak while the MAX hold function see section 4 8 is enabled will be the maximum values MAX that are held The values output via communications are also set to the maximum values MAX that are held Output Format when Self Selected Up to 14
412. rmed settings up to that point are kept Setting the Voltage Range 1 Display C 3 VOLTAGE Auko ENTER 2 con End of setting DL LL Inm dud The left figure shows the selections when the 15 crest factor is set 3 The selections when the v 5 crest factor is set to 6 are shown below ut in Auto 300 150 75 30 15 7 5 Settting the Current Range On the WT210 On the WT230 1 Display C 3 Ak Display C 3 A RANGE gt gt Huta ENTER CURRENT Auto ENTER eH End of setting 2g End of setting 1m 1m tu Cot 5 5 v The unit is A 2 2 The left figure shows the B i selections when the crest i nc factor is set 3 The selections nc Lt Zi z oo B when the crest factor is set to Imm 7 CUL 6 are shown below The above figure shows the ag Auto selections when the crest en 10 5 2 5 1 0 5 0 25 lt A factor is set 3 The selections au 100 50 25 10 5 2 5 mA when the crest factor is set to eu 6 are shown below if The unit is mA Auto 10 5 2 5 1 0 5 0 25 Note 00 You cannot change to the minimum range by pressing the key from the auto range setting Conversely you cannot change to auto range by pressing the v key from the minimum range setting IM 760401 01E 4 7 eBueg 1ueujeunseo y pue suomnipuo 1ueujeunsee y Dunes le 4 4 Selecting the Measurement Range When U
413. rminals and power supply plug Between all current input terminals and power supply plug 1500 VAC at 50 60 Hz for one minute Between case and power supply plug Oscillation condition Sweep test Sweeps a frequency range of 8 to 150 Hz 3 directions each 1 minute reciprocation Endurance test frequency 16 7 Hz peak to peak amplitude 4 mm 3 directions each 2 hours Shock condition Shock test Acceleration 490 m s 3 directions each Endurance test Free fall test Height 100 mm once on four sides External dimensions excluding projections WT210 Approx 213 W x 88 H x 379 D mm WT230 Approx 213 W x 132 H x 379 D mm Weight WT210 Approx 3 kg WT230 Approx 5 kg Battery backup Backs up the setup parameters and stored data with the lithium battery Standard accessories Power cord 1 piece Spare power fuse 1 piece Attached to the fuse holder 24 pin connector 1 piece included in products with the DA4 DA12 and CMP options Current input protection cover 1 piece included with the WT210 WT230 Hind feet rubber 1 set Users manual 1 piece this manual IM 760401 01E 16 13 a suoneoyioeds 16 10 General Specifications Item Specifications Safety standard Complying standard EN61010 1 Installation category overvoltage category CAT II Measurement Category CAT II Pollution degree 2 Emission Complying standar
414. rmonic measurement see Harmonic Measurement in section 16 3 Functions e For the D A output accuracy see section 16 5 D A Output 16 4 IM 760401 01E 16 3 Functions Voltage Current and Active Power Measurements Item Specifications Measurement method Digital sampling method summation averaging method Crest factor 3or6 Wiring system WT210 single phase model 760401 Single phase two wire 1P2W WT230 three phase three wire model 760502 Select from single phase two wire 1P2W single phase three wire 1P3W and three phase three wire 3P3W WT230 three phase four wire model 760503 Select from single phase two wire 1P2W single phase three wire 1P3W three phase three wire 3P3W three phase four wire 3P4W and three voltage three current 3V3A Range switching Select fixed range or auto range Auto range Step up When the measured value exceeds 130 of the rated range or the peak value exceeds approximately 300 Approx 600 if the crest factor is set to 6 of the rated range For the WT230 when the condition is met on any of the input elements Step down Range down When the measured value becomes less than 30 of the rated range and the peak value is less than 300 Less than or equal to 600 if the crest factor is set to 6 of the subordinate range For the WT230 when the condition is met on all input elements Measurement mode switc
415. rogram message unit format The format of a program message unit is shown below C lt Program data gt Program header cp Space Program header A program header is used to indicate the command type For details refer to page 14 5 Program data If certain conditions are required for the execution of a command program data must be added Program data must be separated from the header by a space ASCII code 20H If multiple items of program data are included they must be separated by a comma Example CONFIGURE AVERAGING TYPE LINEAR 8 lt PMT gt iN ms Header Data Response Messages The data returned by this instrument to the controller is called a response message The format of a response message is shown below tli lt Response message unit gt 25 lt RMT gt lt Response message units gt A response message consists of one or more response message units each response message unit corresponds to one response Response message units are delimited by a For the response message format refer to the next item Example CONFIGURE VOLTAGE RANGE 15 0E 00 AUTO 0 lt RMT gt V PEN J v Unit Unit lt RMT gt RMT is the terminator used for every response message Only one type of response message is available NL END Response message unit format The format of a program message unit is shown below
416. rrent range RESET INTEG SET a SHIFT 2 Press or to show the desired voltage range on display C 3 Press ma The voltage range is confirmed Each display shows the measured values The following flow chart illustrates steps 1 to 3 In the procedural explanation in chapter 4 and beyond similar flow diagrams are used When the crest factor is set to 3 1 VOLTAGE Display C uu 3 ENTER End of setting When the crest factor is set to 6 C 1 Display C 3 VOLTAGE 2 Ruta ENTER nn End of setting J LL cn L uu A 7 V n LI i t ri t W 2 IM 760401 01E 0 me ij e Le Q 0 Selecting the Measurement Range Selecting the Current Range mp sre AM P ni a E i ba FUNCTION ELEMENT B mv PF 4235 q q a a INTEGRATOR RANGE J J 1 J 1 Li L a P Function emet Oaar sro RESET HARMONICS MEMORY INTEG SET c l m H 1232 rA REMOTE a 1 A Jh jruwcrow ELEMENT j O ht LJ LJ KEY LOCK OUTPUT AUTO indicator for current range SHIFT O 1P3w O 3P3W oO 3P4w O 3V3A For a description of the other digital numbers and characters that are displayed on the 7 segment LED of each display see section 1 3 4 Press curren The current range selection
417. rwritten Previous data will therefore be lost Stored data will be kept even after the power has been turned OFF because of the internal lithium battery For a description of the lithium battery life see section 15 6 When integrated values are not present the bar display will be stored as data whereas 0 00 00 will be stored as integration preset time When the fundamental frequency is high and up to 50 orders of harmonic measurement data are not present the bar display will be stored as data While storage is in progress several settings cannot be changed such as switching the harmonic measurement function ON OFF changing the target element the PLL source the harmonic distortion factor computation method nor can display update rate scaling averaging filter measurement synchronization source and crest factor settings be changed nor integration mode integration time and storage interval If you press the HOLD key while storing data the measurement operation and the counting operation of the store interval are suspended The storage operation itself is also suspended However if integration is in progress measurement and integration continues internally The displayed values of V voltage A current W active power VA apparent power var reactive power Vpk voltage peak and Apk current peak while the MAX hold function see section 4 8 is enabled will be the maximum values MAX that are held The values for D A output
418. s all settings related to the display in case of harmonic measurement 14 24 HARMonics DISPlay ORDer Sets queries the order of the harmonic component to be shown on display B 14 24 HARMonics ELEMent Sets queries the element for harmonic measurement 14 24 HARMonics STATe Sets queries the harmonic measurement mode ON OFF 14 24 HARMonics SYNChronize Sets queries the input to be used as PLL source 14 25 HARMonics THD Sets queries the computation method for harmonic distortion 14 25 INTEGrate Group INTEGrate Queries all settings related to integration 14 25 INTEGrate MODE Sets queries the integration mode 14 25 INTEGrate RESet Resets the integration values 14 25 INTEGrate STARt Starts integration 14 25 INTEGrate STOP Stops integration 14 25 INTEGrate TIMer Sets queries the integration timer 14 25 MATH Group MATH Queries all settings related to the computing function 14 26 MATH ARIThmetic Sets queries the computing equation of the four arithmetic operations 14 26 MATH AVERage Sets queries the average active power computation during integration 14 26 MATH CFACtor Sets queries the computing equation of the crest factor 14 26 MATH TYPE Sets queries the computing equation 14 27 MEASure Group MEASure Queries all settings related to measurement computation data 14 29 MEASure HARMonics Queries all settings related to harmonic measurement data 14 29 MEASure HARMonics ITEM Queries all settings related to the outpu
419. s dangerous because when power is applied to the circuit under measurement that is connected to the external sensor input terminal the voltage of the circuit appears across the current input terminals Use connectors with safety terminals that cover the conductive parts for connecting to the external sensor input terminals of the WT210 WT230 If the connector comes loose voltage appears at the conductive parts making them extremely dangerous CAUTION The measurement current flows through the thick lines in the wiring diagrams Use wires with sufficient current capacity The external sensor must be selected carefully because the frequency and phase characteristics of the sensor affects the measured value Make the lead wires between the external sensor and the instrument as short as possible to minimize measurement errors caused by stray capacitance and resistance of the lead wires To minimize error when using a shunt type current sensor note the following points when connecting the external sensor cable Connect the shielded wire of the external sensor cable to the L side of the shunt output terminal OUT Minimize the area created between the wires connecting the current sensor to the external sensor cable The effects due to the line of magnetic force caused by the measurement current and noise that enter this area of space can be reduced Shunt type current sensor Area created between the wires connecting
420. s selected range while external sensor range is selected 15 Attempted to execute a command or key operation that Check whether the command was protected or key operation is correct 16 Attempted to execute a key operation or received a Check whether 7 3 communications command while harmonic measurement harmonic measurement is in was being performed or was interrupted that cannot be progress or is interrupted executed or received in such a state 17 Print output time out 9 9 18 No data to be printed or not in the printing mode 9 9 19 Attempted to execute a key operation or received a communications command while storing recalling of data being performed 30 Invalid file data 31 File is damaged 32 No data stored in the internal memory Store data in the internal Chapter 8 memory or select the proper file to be stored 33 No space to store data in the internal memory 8 1 41 Attempted to start integration while there is an overflow Reset integration 6 3 condition Attempted to start integration after elapsed integration time has reached its preset value 42 Attempted to start integration while integration is in 6 4 progress 43 Measurement stopped due to overflow during integration or 6 4 due to a power failure 44 Attempted to stop integration even though integration was 6 4 not in progress 45 Attempted to reset integration even though integration was 6 4 not in progress or integration mode was not selected 46 Attempted t
421. scription given later as follows Display Update Rate Measurement Range 0 1s 25 Hz to 100 kHz 0 25s 10 Hz to 100 kHz 0 5s 5 Hz to 100 kHz 1s 2 5 Hz to 100 kHz 2s 1 5 Hz to 50 kHz 5s 0 5 Hz to 20 kHz IM 760401 01E 16 5 a suoneoyioeds 16 3 Functions Item Specifications Measurement range Auto switching among six types 1 Hz 10 Hz 100 Hz 1 kHz 10 kHz and 100 kHz Frequency filter Select OFF or ON cutoff frequency of 500 Hz Accuracy Requirements The amplitude of the measure signal is at least 30 greater than or equal to 60 if the crest factor is set to 6 of the rated value of the voltage or current range Frequency filter is ON when measuring voltage or current of 200 Hz or less Accuracy x 0 0696 of reading Computation Item Specifications Computing equation of apparent power VA reactive power var power factor PF and phase angle deg i Input element number Wiring System Active Power W Apparent Power VA Reactive Power var Power Factor PF Phase Angle deg Single phase ye varz VAY Wi W cos 1 W Two wire Ww VA VeA VA 2 W PF VA deg cos 1 vA Wi VAi VieAi Single phase three wire iz 3 SW W1 W3 ZVA VA1 VA3 variz VA WP Wi VAizVi Ai Xvar vari var3 Three phase three wire 43 EW W1 W3 EVA VA1 VA3 Wi enel Wi i 1 3 2 PIS AT degi cos VAD Ww Wi VAi Vi Ai vari
422. se as follows 1 2 3 Turn the power switch OFF Unplug the power cord from the power connector Place the tip of a flat blade screwdriver in to the slot of the fuse holder and move the screwdriver in the direction of the arrow to remove the fuse holder Remove the blown fuse Insert a new fuse into the holder then install the holder in place Fuse holder 15 16 IM 760401 01E 15 6 Recommended Replacement Parts The one year warranty applies only to the main unit of the instrument starting from the day of delivery and does not cover any other items nor expendable items items which wear out The replacement period for expendable items varies depending on the conditions of use Refer to the table below as a general guideline Contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer for replacement parts Parts Name Specifications and Recommended Replacement Period Current input relay WT210 only This is the relay used to switch the current input circuit The specifications of the relay are as follows Electric switching life Approx 50 000 times at rated capacity Mechanical life Approx 1 000 000 times Comparator function relay This relay operates in the comparator mode It is provided only on models with the CMP option The specifications of the relay are as follows Rated contact capacity 24 V 0 5 A Electric switching life Approx 500 000 times at rated capacity Mechanical life Approx 100 000 000 t
423. se message which has not been received will be discarded f an attempt is made by the controller to receive a response message even if there it no response message an error will occur An error will also occur if the controller makes an attempt to receive a response message before transmission of a program message has been completed f a program message of more than one unit is sent and some of the units are incomplete this instrument receives program message units which the instrument thinks complete and attempts to execute them However these attempts may not always be successful and a response may not always be returned even if the program message contains queries 14 4 IM 760401 01E 14 2 Program Format Dead Lock This instrument has a buffer memory in which both program and response messages of 1024 bytes or more can be stored The number of bytes available will vary depending on the operating state of the instrument If both buffer memories become full at the same time this instrument becomes inoperative This state is called dead lock In this case operation can be resumed by discarding the response message No dead lock will occur if the size of the program message including the PMT is kept below 1024 bytes Furthermore no dead lock will occur if the program message does not contain a query 14 2 3 Commands There are two types of command program header which can be sent from the controller to this
424. sed for this case only FrqErr frequency error in case of harmonic measurement The NC contact is closed error when no data are present The NC contact is closed IM 760401 01E uonoung 1ndino u jeuje1x3 f 9 5 Setting the Comparator Mode Option CHECK RANGE MODE El o n RANGE UPDATE VOLTAGE CURRENT RMS VOLTAGE DC MAX HOLD HAUT GAUTO o MEAN n m V VAl4 2 3 gp YOLMAGE cuRRENT HOLD mo f I k A VAF FuncTION ELEMENT pr ed ie Vom om am M W TME B I l m l r m V F 12 3x f Z J l1 1 k A deg runcrion ELEMENT L LL EE dE START STOP RESET HARMONICS z i rF mV Hz14 2 3 g gh ri n1 ri IE k A h jruwcrow ELEMENT om oe M W h y H H oe D31P3W O3P3w m E EI o o o o Dr o LT m SCALING AVG LINE FREQ STORE RECALL HARMONICS KEY LOCK LI3P4W C13V3A The explanation given in this section uses WT230 as an example For the differences between the WT210 and the WT230 see section 2 2 Operation Keys and Functions Element Display Procedure Operate the instrument by following the thick lines in the menu below Press the ENTER key to confirm a selection or setting Toleave the current menu in the middle of the operation press the key indicated in step 1 The confirmed settings up to that point are kept Select the comparator function
425. sing Direct Input Explanation AN To ensure safe operation if the current to be measured exceeds 7 A rms value use a cable or conductor that is capable of running a current higher than the current to be measured and be sure to connect the protective earth before operating the instrument The protective earth terminal is provided on the rear panel of products shipped in January 2004 and later Fixed Range manual versus Automatic Range auto The measurement range can be of one of the following types The initial setting is Auto range ON Fixed range Select the voltage range from the following When the crest factor is set 3 600 300 150 60 30 or 15 V When the crest factor is set 6 300 150 75 30 15V or 7 5 V Select the current range from the following When the crest factor is set to 3 20 10 5 2 1 or 0 5 A 200 mA 100 mA 50 mA 20 mA 10 mA and 5 mA are also selectable on the WT210 When the crest factor is set to 6 10 5 2 5 1 0 5 or 0 25 A 100 mA 50 mA 25 mA 10 mA 5 mA and 2 5 mA are also selectable on the WT210 Auto range Auto The measuring range is adjusted automatically according to the input voltage or current as follows Overrange is handled the same way as for the manually selected range Range up When the measured value of voltage or current V or A exceeds 130 of the rated range or when the peak value instantaneous voltage or current value that is sampled exceeds appro
426. spectively 2 displays the shunt value of element 1 2 and 3 on display A B and C respectively WT230 only Query DR terminator Example DRO Description Parameter error 12 will occur if m is set to an illegal value DS DS Sets the number of displayed digits inquires about the current setting Syntax DS m terminator m indicates the number of digits m 0 4 digits 1 5 digits Query DS terminator Example DSO Description Parameter error 12 will occur if m is set to an illegal value DY DY Sets the display for comparator ON OFF or inquires about the current setting Syntax DY m terminator m indicates display for comparator ON OFF m 0 cancels the display for comparator 1 sets the display for comparator ON Query DY terminator Example DY1 Description Parameter error 12 will occur if m is set to an illegal value Sets the element for display A inquires about the current setting Syntax EA m terminator m indicates element m 1 Element 1 2 Element 2 for WT230 model 760503 only 3 Element 3 for WT230 only 4 X for WT230 only Query EA terminator Example EA1 Description Parameter error 12 will occur if m is set to an illegal value IM 760401 01E 13 3 g pyepueis 286 4 Z 88t 3331 OY 9104 9q spuewwo Jo WS S SPUBLIWIOD uoneorunuulo2 13 1 Commands EB EB Sets the element for display B inquires about the current setting S
427. splay Sr lt ler lt j er lt Qa oO a w ee gt Se oo zx S3 2 3 z2 38 FILTER o o o o o o o o SCALING AVG LINE FREQ STORE RECALL HARMONICS KEY LOCK Procedure Operate the instrument by following the thick lines in the menu below Press the ENTER key to confirm a selection or setting Toleave the current menu in the middle of the operation press the key indicated in step 1 The confirmed settings up to that point are kept Select the measurement synchronization source Display C I SETUP m rn 7a pee rc 7a rc a oc ie C 5 s N Ln rA 4 ES m m 3 7G a ry P7 4 Lr Uy a m c a Lin ue r4 mA moo n r 3 4 rc ra n 7 3 Display C ENTER CK a 3 an mp e 2 5 ENTER End of setting IM 760401 01E eBueg 1ueujeunseo y pue suomnipuo 1ueujeunseoe y Buas le 4 2 Selecting the Measurement Synchronization Source Explanation Function used to select the measurement synchronization source The instrument determines the measured value by averaging the sampled data averaging process over the period synchronized to the input signal period The input signal period is detected from the voltage and current signals and you can select which signal period to use to perform the averaging process The
428. sult of minus limit values For example if a limit of 1 is set the relay will not be activated when the input signal value reaches 2 coming from an even lower value but will be activated when the input signal value becomes 0 Make sure to set the polarity of the phase angle as well for phase lead and can be ignored for phase lag 9 16 IM 760401 01E 9 7 Comparator Display Option CHECK RANGE MODE o o n o o RANGE UPDATE VOLTAGE CURRENT AMS VOLTAGE DC MAX HOLD SAUTO CAUTO c A 12 3r VotTAGe cunnenr HoLD l uerion evemenr OPE MAK HOLD TRIG LI i ro ot Edi din em am 4 UNCTION ELEMENT J J J J START STOP RESET HARMONICS MEMORY INTEG SET c 1 T ri REMOTE x L1 J d J UNCTION ELEMENT m a 7 L1P3W 3P3W uu m E a x a jas tj m SCALING AVG LINE FREQ STORE RECALL HARMONICS KEY LOCK D13P4W O3V3A The explanation given in this section uses WT230 as an example For the differences between the WT210 and the WT230 see section 2 2 Operation Keys and Functions Element Display Procedure Operate the instrument by following the thick lines in the menu below Press the ENTER key to confirm a selection or setting Toleave the current menu in the middle of the operation press the key indicated in step 1 The confirmed settings up to that point are kept
429. t be started While recalling or storing is in progress execution error 19 will occur Sets MAX hold inquires about the current setting Syntax KH m terminator m indicates MAX hold ON OFF m 0 OFF 1 ON Query KH terminator Example KHO Description Parameter error 12 will occur if m is set to an illegal value While recalling or storing is in progress execution error 19 will occur Cannot be changed in harmonic measurement mode Execution error 19 will occur Turns ON OFF key lock inquires about the current setting Syntax KL m lt terminator gt m indicates whether key lock is ON or OFF m 0 OFF 1 ON Query KL lt terminator gt Example KLO KV KV KA KA KW KW Sets the scaling constant inquires about the current setting KV is used for voltage measurement KA for current measurement and KW for power measurement Syntax When CMO is set KV n terminator KA n terminator KW n terminator When CM1 is set KV m n terminator KA m n terminator KW m n terminator m indicates element m 0 All elements Setting not allowed during inquiry IM 760401 01E 13 5 g pyepueis 286 4 Z 88t 3331 94 910 9q spuewwo Jo WS S spueuiuo uoneorunuulo 13 1 Commands 1 Element 1 2 Element 2 for WT230 model 760503 only 3 Element 3 for WT230 only n indicates scaling value 0 001 n lt 9999 Query When CMO is set KV terminator K
430. t can be output for efficiency and crest factor vary depending on the model h4 Element 1 Element 1 2 Element 2 3 Element 3 4 X h1 h4 data type Types of data that is classified using h1 to h4 A B2 display A display B 2 A2 B display A 2 display B AVGW Average active power of element 1 while integration is in progress AVW2 Average active power of element 2 while integration is in progress AVW3 Average active power of element 3 while integration is in progress AVWA Average active power of element X while integration is in progress The average active power of element X varies depending on the wiring system h5 Data state N normal I Overrange O Computation overflow P Peak overflow E No data h6 Indicates data lag lead in case of DEG data type In case of other data types _ space will occur G Lag D Lead Not detectable IM 760401 01E 10 5 uondo e ejieiul gi d5 H 10 4 Output Measured Computed Data Setup Parameters and Error Codes Data Section d1 d2 d3 d4 d5 d6 d7 d8 d9 d10 d11 d1 polarity _ space or minus d2 to d8 mantissa floating point number of the maximum six digits d9 to d11 exponent E 3 gt m E 0 E 3 5 k E 6 5 M Data state in case of an overrange oL is being displayed m h2 h3 h4 I 9 9 9 9 9 9 E 3 Data state in case of a computation ove
431. t items of harmonic measurement data 14 29 MEASure HARMonics BINary Queries harmonic measurement data set by commands other than MEASure HARMonics ITEM binary format 14 29 MEASure HARMonics ITEM PRESet Sets the ON OFF pattern for all communication outputs of the harmonic measurement function 14 29 MEASure HARMonics ITEM SYNChronize lt harmonic measurement function Sets queries the communication output item of harmonic measurement ON OFF 14 30 MEASure HARMonics VALue Queries harmonic measurement data set by commands other than MEASure HARMonics ITEM ASCII format 14 30 MEASure HEADer Turns ON OFF the additional information output when outputting measured computed data in binary format 14 30 MEASure NORMal Queries all settings related to normal measured computed data 14 30 MEASure NORMal BINary Queries normal measurement data set by commands other than MEASure NORMal ITEM binary format 14 30 MEASure NORMal ITEM Queries all settings related to the output items of normal measured computed data 14 30 MEASure NORMal ITEM PRESet Sets the ON OFF pattern for all communication outputs of the normal measurement function 14 31 14 12 IM 760401 01E 14 3 Commands Command Description Page MEASure NORMal ITEM TIME MATH Sets queries the ON OFF state of the communication output of integration time MATH 14 31 MEASure NORMal ITEM normal measurement function
432. ta 8 4 RMS usse 4d RMT 14 4 RS 232 standard unco eter Ee YVES RERSER RA 11 4 S safety precautions n Vi 3 1 safety standard 16 14 safety terminal adapter ssssseenee V SAMPI6 GOUD E dedil es 14 39 sample number ttr nian 4 18 sample program 18 19 14 51 scaling constant 4 12 4 15 scaling FUNGON 2 nns tnn trenes SCII character codes sene sequential command serial Interface eet cene tectus serial poll nre signal direction sisirig rene signal flOW 5 5 ren rtr single mode single phase three wire system seesssee 3 11 single phase two wire system seeeseeeee 3 11 Spare parts 5 reme ce citet ehe annette v SRQ etant 10 4 standard accessories eterne eras iv standard event register sssesssseee 14 46 standard integration mode sese 6 1 status byte status byte format STATus group Status repor esnai rcp n rep Te storage conditions esses storage interval ORO OUP certet ai eee Uie store recall DUSY irren rentrer store recall function esee 1 4 SIONN Ee M subset name SUEEDC 22i R A E E AT iii summarizes the functional differences
433. te The measured values between the previous display update and the execution of the integration stop are not integrated Integration Reset Resetting will result in returning the integration results to the status before integration started Pressing the RESET key is useful after integration has been stopped e For details regarding the relation with the START STOP key refer to the following section Display in case of Integration Over When the maximum integration value has been reached 999999 MWh MAh or 99999 MWh MAh integration will stop and that result will be held on the display When the maximum integration time has been reached up to 10000 hrs integration will stop and that result will be held on the display Note The maximum number of digits used to display the elapsed time of integration is nine when the hour minute and second digits are added together The WT210 WT230 displays the elapsed time of integration on display A However because the maximum number of digits that can be displayed on display A is five all the digits of the elapsed time of integration may not be displayed in certain cases Therefore the number of digits that are displayed varies depending on the elapsed time of integration as follows Elapsed Time of Integration Display on Display A Display Resolution 0 to 9 hr 59 min 59 s 0 00 00 to 9 59 59 1s 10 hr to 99 hr 59 min 59 s 10 00 0 to 99 59 5 10s 100 hr to 999 hr 59 min 59 s 100 00 to 999
434. ted results A B A B AxB A B A B A B Average Active Power during Integration This function computes the average active power within the integration period It is derived by dividing the watt hour integrated active power by the elapsed time of integration Integrator Function This function enables integration of active power and current The integrated value watt hour or current hour and the elapsed time of integration as well as other measured computed values can be displayed even while the integration is in progress Moreover since integrated values of negative polarity can be displayed the consumed watt hour ampere hour value of the positive side and the watt hour value returning to the power supply of the negative side can be displayed separately Frequency Measurement Function This function measures the frequency of the voltage or current Measurable range 0 5 Hz to 100 kHz The measurement range varies depending on the display update rate Harmonic Measurement Function Option This function enables the computation of voltage current active power and so forth of up to the 50 order the relative harmonic content of harmonic orders and the phase angle of each order with respect to the fundamental first order on a single selected input element Furthermore the total rms value fundamental harmonic of the voltage current and active power and the harmonic distortion factor THD can be calculated Store Recall Func
435. teger GPIB Address Timeout As Integer Timeout Dev As Integer Device ID GPIB term As String Terminator Query 1100 As String Query String Dummy As Integer ate Function InitGpib As Integer Dim eos As Integer EOS Dim eot As Integer EOL Dim brd As Integer GPIB Board ID Dim sts As Integer eos amp HCOA Terminator LF eot 1 EOI Enable term Chr 10 Timeout T10s Timeout 10s brd ilfind GPIBO If brd lt 0 Then GoTo GPIBError End If Dev ildev 0 addr 0 Timeout eot eos If Dev lt 0 Then GoTo GPIBError End If sts ilsic brd Set IFC If sts lt 0 Then GoTo GPIBError End If InitGpib 0 Exit Function Error Call DisplayGPIBError sts ilsic InitGpib 1 Function ate Sub DisplayGPIBError ByVal sts As Integer ByVal msg As String Dim wrn As String Dim ers As String Dim ern As Integer If sts And TIMO Then wrn Time out Chr 13 Else wrn End If If sts And EERR Then ern iberr If ern EDVR Then ers EDVR System error ElseIf ern ECIC Then ers ECIC Function requires GPIB board to be CIC ElseIf ern ENOL Then ers ENOL No Listeners on the GPIB ElseIf ern EADR Then ers EADR GPIB board not addressed correctly ElseIf ern EARG Then ers EARG Invalid argument to function call ElseIf ern ESAC Then ers ESAC GPIB board not System Controller as required ElseIf ern EABO Then ers EABO I O operat
436. tegration time The D A output of integrated values is 5 0 VFS when rated value is input continuously for the specified time integration preset time This is also true when scaling or X is specified Selectable range 0 00 00 0 hours 00 minutes 00 seconds to 10000 00 00 10000 hours 00 minutes 00 seconds The initial value is 1 00 00 If the time is set to 0 00 00 the DA output value becomes OV Note The displayed values of V voltage A current W active power VA apparent power var reactive power Vpk voltage peak and Apk current peak while the MAX hold function see section 4 8 is enabled will be the maximum values MAX that are held The values for D A output are also set to the maximum values MAX that are held The D A output of each output item is configured so that 5 0 VFS is output when the value corresponding to the range rating of the voltage current or power is applied Even when scaling constants for voltage current and power are specified the D A output is adjusted so that 5 0 VFS is output when the value corresponding to the range rating is applied Also when is specified for the element with the scaling constant of each element is different the D A output is adjusted so that 5 0 VFS is output when the value corresponding to the range rating is applied to each element If AEH computation is specified the D A output is 0 V except for efficiency and average active power IM 760401 01E
437. tent of voltage and current V and A are both printed HPGL PCL plotters print both numerical values and the graph but ESCP printers only print the graph Setting the Element correspons to column B in the procedure One of the following should be selected The output items corresponding to the set element will then be printed out on an external plotter The initial value is 1 On the WT210 this setting is always 1 1 Select this when the output items of element 1 should be printed out 2 Select this when the output items of element 2 should be printed out This setting is not available on model 760502 e 3 Select this when the output items of element 3 should be printed out Executing Output After connecting the external plotter printer to the WT210 WT230 execute the output dATA All data selected as output items will be output PnL All set up parameters will be output 9 22 IM 760401 01E 9 9 Outputting to an External Plotter Printer Note o The harmonic measurement items that are output via the communication interface GP IB or serial vary depending on the output items of harmonic measurement selected here When V A P or dEG is selected the item is output via communication interface as is When ALL is selected V A P and dEG become items output via the communication interface When graph printing G V to CG P is selected only the numerical data of the item is output via the communication interface
438. ter when measuring an inverted waveform or a waveform with high noise However depending on the signal s frequency and level ErrLo might appear on the display This is because the filter with a cutoff frequency is 500 Hz attenuates the signal to a level that the instrument determines no signal is being input If the frequency exceeds the measurement range even when the frequency filter is set OFF ErrLo might appear due to the internal circuit attenuating the signal to a level that the instrument determines no signal is being input 5 6 IM 760401 01E 5 5 Displaying Efficiency WT230 Only Crest Factor Four Arithmetic Operation Value Average Active Power and Peak Value CHECK RANGE MODE RANGE o E o o o UPDATE VOLTAGE CURRENT RMS VOLTAGE DC MAX HOLD SAU GAUTO o MEAN VOLTAGE CURRENT HOLD A V VA 12 35 VAF runcrion ELEMENT MODE MOOD MG TIME v ENTER B PF 1 2 3 gt CAL a a INTEGRATOR START STOP RESET HARMONICS 2 3 wor MEMORY INTEG SET a A w V A deg euncrion ELEMENT w V A FUNCTION ELEMENT kev tock ourpuT SHIFT O1P3w 0 3P3w O3P4W 2 3V3A The explanation given in this section uses WT230 as an example For the differences between the WT210 and the WT230 see section 2 2 Operation Keys and Functions Element Display Er sex 3 E 83 FILTER o o o o o m
439. term Falling edge of bit0 UPD sts ilwrt Dev msg Len msg If sts lt 0 Then GoTo GPIBError End If Sleep 1000 Listl Clear Read and display the measurement data It is repeated 10 times in this program For cnt 1 To 10 Clear the extended event register Read and trash the response msg STATUS EESR term sts ilwrt Dev msg Len msg sts ilrd Dev qry Len qry Wait for the completion of the data updating msg COMMUNICATE WAIT 1 term sts ilwrt Dev msg Len msg If sts lt 0 Then GoTo GPIBError End If Read out the measurement data msg MEASURE NORMAL VALUE term sts ilwrt Dev msg Len msg If sts 0 Then GoTo GPIBError End If sts ilrd Dev qry Len qry If sts lt 0 Then GoTo GPIBError End If Extract items that are separated by commas from the received data Listl AddItem Measurement CStr cnt Listl ListIndex Listl ListIndex 1 For item 1 To 13 length Len qry comma InStr qry If comma 0 Then comma InStr qry term If comma 0 Then Exit For Query item Left qry comma 1 If item lt 10 Then Listl AddItem CStr item Query item Else Listl AddItem CStr item Query item End If qry Mid qry comma 1 Listl ListIndex Listl ListIndex 1 Next item Listl AddItem Listl ListIndex Listl ListIndex 1 qry Space 200 Dummy DoEvents Next cnt Oo o 3 3 3 o 9 o 5 O
440. tes the sampling mode m 0 Updates the data at each sampling rate 1 Hold Query HD terminator Example HD0 Description Parameter error 12 will occur if m is set to an illegal value HE HE Determines the element of the harmonic measurement function inquires about the current setting Syntax HE m terminator m indicates the element of the harmonic measurement function m 1 Element 1 2 Element 2 for WT230 model 760503 only 13 4 IM 760401 01E 13 1 Commands 3 Element 3 for WT230 only Query HE terminator Example HE1 Description Parameter error 12 will occur if m is set to an illegal value While recalling or storing is in progress execution error 19 will occur IC IC Sets the integration mode inquires about the current setting Syntax IC m terminator m indicates one of the following integration modes m 0 Normal integration mode 1 Continuous integration mode Query IC terminator Example ICl Description Parameter error 12 will occur if m is set to an illegal value Changing the integration mode is not allowed while integration is in progress execution error 13 will occur f continuous integration mode is selected make sure that the timer preset time is set to a value larger than 0 f normal integration mode is selected set the timer preset time to any desired value While recalling or storing is in progress execution error 19 wil
441. th the instrument is used to connect to the power supply and the instrument is grounded The power switch of the instrument is turned ON The current input protective cover provided with the instrument is being used When the power switch of the instrument is turned ON do not apply a signal that exceeds the following values to the voltage or current input terminals When the instrument is turned OFF turn OFF the circuit under measurement For other input terminals see the specifications of each module in chapter 16 Instantaneous Maximum Allowable Input 1 period for 20 ms Voltage Input Peak value of 2 8 kV or RMS value of 2 0 kV whichever is less Current Input 5 mA to 200 mA range 2 5 mA to 100 mA range if the crest factor is set to 6 WT210 only Peak value of 150 A or RMS value of 100 A whichever is less 0 5 A to 20 A range 0 25 A to 10 A range if the crest factor is set to 6 common to WT210 and WT230 Peak value of 450 A or RMS value of 300 A whichever is less Continuous Maximum Allowable Input Voltage Input Peak value of 1 5 kV or RMS value of 1 0 kV whichever is less Current Input 5 mA to 200 mA range 2 5 mA to 100 mA range if the crest factor is set to 6 WT210 only Peak value of 30 A or RMS value of 20 A whichever is less 0 5 A to 20 A range 0 25 A to 10 A range if the crest factor is set to 6 common to WT210 and WT230 Peak value of 100 A or RMS value of 30 A whichever is less
442. the Measured Harmonic Value Displaying the Measured Harmonic Values Depending on the setting of display function of display B and C the measured data of items will appear on the display as follows In the following explanation a maximum of 50 analysis orders is assumed In case of a maximum less than 50 computation display will be performed up to that order Display B V Shows the measured value of the voltage corresponding to the order shown on display A A Shows the measured value of the current corresponding to the order shown on display A W Shows the measured value of the active power corresponding to the order shown on display A PF Shows the power factor of the fundamental 1st order V Shows the harmonic distortion of the voltage followed by the character t Two computation methods are available Refer to page 7 5 for details The display range is 0 00 to 99 99 to 100 0 to 999 9 A96 Shows the harmonic distortion of the current followed by the character t Two computation methods are available Refer to page 7 5 for details The display range is 0 00 to 99 99 to 100 0 to 999 9 V Shows the relative harmonic content of the voltage corresponding to the order shown on display A The display range when the number of displayed digits is 5 is 0 000 to 99 999 to 100 00 to 999 99 A Shows the relative harmonic content of the current corresponding to the order shown on display A The display range when the
443. tion of Measured Computed Data and Setup Parameters This function enables the storage of measured computed data and setup parameters in the internal memory The stored measured computed data and setup parameters can be recalled and the data can be displayed or output via the communication interface D A Output Function Option This function converts the measured values of voltage current active power apparent power reactive power power factor phase angle frequency voltage peak current peak and integrated values to DC analog voltage with full scale of 5 V and outputs the voltage Output items of up to 12 output channels 4 channels on WT210 can be selected IM 760401 01E 1 2 Functions Comparator Function Option This function compares a preset limit and the measured computed or integrated value and outputs the determination result using relay contacts Remote Control Function Option On models with the DA4 DA12 or CMP option the TTL logic signal negative pulse can be used to control the WT210 WT230 or output externally External Input The following five types of control signals are available EXT HOLD Holds updating of the displayed values or releases the hold status EXT TRIG Updates the displayed values in hold mode EXT START Starts integration EXT STOP Stops integration EXT RESET Resets the integration result External Output The following signal is output during integration INTEG BUSY Outputs c
444. tions Element Display Procedure Operate the instrument by following the thick lines in the menu below Press the ENTER key to confirm a selection or setting Toleave the current menu in the middle of the operation press the key indicated in step 1 The confirmed settings up to that point are kept Select the comparator function 1 Display C SETUP 2 Lann SHIFT OUTPUT i a A r nur M HH Display C 5 f r EL AY gt ENTER un Breq ENTER 4 on End of setting A E v node m f gi GF a I dAEA n dE H H Explanation Turning the Comparator Function ON OFF After having set all the items described on the previous pages turn the comparator function ON on The comparator function will start by pressing the ENTER key after selecting on OFF The comparator function will stop by pressing the ENTER key after selecting oFF N CAUTION After having turned ON the comparator function do not change the comparator mode Changing the type of limit might result in unexpected statuses of the output relay Make sure not to greatly vary the input signal before turning the comparator function ON Depending on the input signal used for determination the instrument may display error codes i e overrange and this will change the output relays as described on page 9 11 When using the output relay as a control signal
445. tl Text END Else Textl Text ERROR End If StartFlag 0 End Sub Run Samplel GPIB Get Normal Data Private Sub Command2_Click Dim sts As Integer If StartFlag 1 Then Exit Sub End If StartFlag 1 Textl Text START Listl Clear Dummy DoEvents sts GpibHarmonics If sts 0 Then Textl Text END Else Textl Text ERROR End If StartFlag 0 End Sub Run Sample2 GPIB Get Harmonics Data Private Sub Command3_Click Dim sts As Integer If StartFlag 1 Then Exit Sub End If StartFlag 1 Textl Text START Listl Clear Listl AddItem NOT MAKE Textl Text END StartFlag 0 End Sub Private Sub Command4 Click Dim sts As Integer If StartFlag 1 Then Exit Sub End If StartFlag 1 Textl Text START Listl Clear Listl AddItem NOT MAKE Textl Text END StartFlag 0 End Sub 14 52 IM 760401 01E 14 7 Sample Program Initialization Error and Execution Functions Private Sub Command5 Click Dim sts As Integer If StartFlag 1 Then Exit Sub End If StartFlag 1 Textl Text START Listl Clear Listl AddItem NOT MAKE Textl Text END StartFlag 0 End Sub Private Sub Command6 Click Dim sts As Integer If StartFlag 1 Then Exit Sub End If StartFlag 1 Textl Text START Listl Clear Listl AddItem NOT MAKE Textl Text END StartFlag 0 End Sub Private Sub Form Load StartFlag
446. to the rated range of the WT210 WT230 3 Setthe output current of the DC current standard to the rated range of the WT210 WT230 The voltage current and power values displayed on the WT210 WT230 at this point are the calibration values Set the crest factor to 3 IM 760401 01E 15 7 a Bunoouse qnoJ pue e ueuojure y 15 2 Calibration Calibration of AC Voltage Current and Power Wiring Connect the Digital Power meter Synchronizer and the AC voltage and AC current standard as follows Direct input EUT Equipment under test N AC voltage y VU standard Synchronizer HO AC voltage standard LO Digital power meter External sensor input equipped with option EX1 Change as follows for wiring currents only EUT AC voltage standard Synchronizer External sensor input equipped with option EX2 Change as follows for wiring currents only EUT Synchronizer AC voltage standard 15 8 IM 760401 01E 15 2 Calibration Preparation Set the frequency of the AC voltage standard and of each channel of the synchronizer to 60 Hz Then while not exceeding the maximum values of the external synchronization inputs of the voltage and current standard rise the output level of the synchronizer until the standards are synchronized Set the crest factor to 3 Calibr
447. tput of measured data OF m1 m2 m3 Output Function sets output items OFD m Output Function Default sets default output items OS Output panal Setting OE Output Error code H m Header DL m DeLimiter IM m Interrupt Mask requests output of setting parameters requests output of error code sets output data header Sets output data delimiter Sets status byte interrupt mask 10 16 IM 760401 01E 10 7 Commands before the IEEE 488 2 Standard Command Description HAM option HA m Harmonics Analize sets harmonic measurement ON OFF HE m Harmonics Eiement sets harmonics element PS m PII Source sets PLL source DF m Distortion Formula sets distortion formula OR harmonics ORder Sets display order OH m1 m2 sets communication or output block Output Harmonics function DA option OA m1 m2 m3 Output Analog sets output items yourself OAD m Output Analog Default sets default output items RT m1 m2 m3 sets integration time integrate Rated Time CMP option YO m relaY On sets comparator function ON OFF YM m relaY Mode sets comparator mode DY m Display relaY sets display relay ON OFF for comparator YC m relaY Channel sets the display channel when comparator display is ON OY m1 m2 m3 m4 m5 sets the output relay function for normal Output relaY function measurement OYH m1 m2 m3 m4 m5 m6 Sets the output relay function for harmonic Output relaY Harmonic function measurement Note If co
448. ts of the Package Unpack the box and check the contents before operating the instrument If some of the contents are not correct or missing or if there is physical damage contact the dealer from which you purchased them WT210 WT230 Check that the model name and suffix code given on the name plate on the right side panel when facing the front panel match those on the order WT210 model 760401 WT230 model code 760502 760503 o MODEL SUFFIX Made in Japan MODEL and SUFFIX codes Model SUFFIX Description 760401 uiis WT210 Single phase model single input element model 760502 anora a e erii WT230 Three phase three wire model two input element model 700509 ueuasuisianesesirgeis WT230 Three phase four wire model three input element model Supply Voltage 100 120 VAC 200 240 VAC Communication interface 01 GP IB interface One of the two is built in 02 Serial RS 232 C interface applies to the WT230 Power cord a UL CSA Standard power cord Part No A1006WD Maximum rated voltage 125 V Maximum rated current 7 A A eene VDE Standard Power Cord Part No A1009WD Maximum rated voltage 250 V Maximum rated current 10 A o BS Standard Power Cord Part No A1054WD Maximum rated voltage 250 V Maximum rated current 10 A SEU eire AS Standard Power Cord Part No A1024WD Maximum rated voltage
449. ts the storage interval inquires about the current setting Syntax SR ml1 m2 m3 terminator ml indicates the hours 0 lt ml lt 99 m2 indicates the minutes 0 m2 lt 59 m3 indicates the seconds 0 m3 59 Query SR terminator Example SR0 0 0 Description Parameter error 12 will occur if an illegal value is set If the store interval is set to 0 h 0 min O s the store interval is set to the same interval as the display update rate While recalling or storing is in progress execution error 19 will occur SS Stores setup parameters into a selected file Syntax SS m terminator m indicates file no and must be set within the following range 1 lt m lt 4 Description Parameter error 12 will occur if m is set to an illegal value The following setup parameters can be stored All setup parameters which can be output by the OS command Information related to communications GP IB serial etc TM TM Sets integration preset time inquires about the current setting Syntax TM ml m2 m3 terminator ml indicates the hours 0 lt ml lt 1000 m2 indicates the minutes 0 m2 lt 59 m3 indicates the seconds 0 m3 lt 59 Query TM terminator Example TM0 0 0 Description Parameter error 12 will occur if an illegal value is set While recalling or storing is in progress execution error 19 will occur The maximum time that can be specified is 10000 hours WR W
450. u 3 Ji r7 x4 MA mo ny gt 2 nm obuey JUSWIINSeS pue suonipuo jueuloJnseoe N Punes b dun Le 2 ra r wi n m rc ra r 3 Display C 5 d T ENTER 5 End of setting e gt a ENTER IM 760401 01E 4 33 4 14 Selecting the Crest Factor Explanation Selecting the Crest Factor The crest factor is a ratio of the amplitude with respect to the rms value You can select 3 or 6 Note If the crest factor is entered using the ENTER key the voltage range and current range are set to the maximum range The maximum current range is as follows Direct input range 5 mA to 20 A 2 5 mA to 10 A if the crest factor is 6 20 A 10 A if the crest factor is 6 External sensor input range Option EX1 2 5 V to 10 V 1 25 V to 5 V if the crest factor is 6 10 V 5 V if the crest factor is 6 External sensor input range Option EX2 50 mV to 200 mV 25 mV to 100 mV if the crest factor is 6 200 mV 100 mV if the crest factor is 6 If you set the crest factor to 6 the measurement conditions of crest factor 5 and higher required by IEC 62018 are met 4 34 IM 760401 01E Chapter 5 Displaying Measurement Results and Computation Results 5 1 Procedure Display A Displaying Voltage Current and Active Power CHECK RANGE MODE o o n o UPDATE VOLTAGE CURRENT RMS VOLTAGE DC MEAN
451. ual to 5 times the rated range Continuous maximum common mode voltage during 50 60 Hz input 600 Vrms when using the output connector protection cover CAT II 400 Vrms when the output connector protection cover is removed CAT II Influence from common mode voltage When 600 Vrms is applied between the input terminal and case with the voltage input terminals shorted current input terminals open and external sensor input terminals shorted At 50 60 Hz 80 dB or more 0 01 of range or less Up to 100 kHz reference value 15 V 30 V 60 V 150 V 300 V 600 V ranges and 0 5 A 1 A 2 A 5 A 10 A 20 A ranges Maximum rated range Rated range Within x 0 001 x f of range The maximum rated range is 600 V for the voltage input terminal and 20 A for the current input terminal 5 mA 10 mA 20 mA 50 mA 100 mA and 200 mA ranges Maximum rated range Rated range Within x 0 0002 x f of range The maximum rated range is 200 mA External sensor input ranges Maximum rated range Rated range Within x 0 01 x f of range The maximum rated range is 10 V for option EX1 and 200 mV for option EX2 twice these values when the crest factor is set to 6 Except at least 0 01 The unit of frequency f is kHz Line filter See Voltage Current and Active Power Measurement in section 16 3 Functions Frequency filter See Frequency Measurement
452. ucts shipped in January 2004 and later Electric shock danger Alternating current Both direct and alternating current ON power OFF power ON power state OFF power state Earth vi IM 760401 01E Safety Precautions Make sure to comply with the precautions below Not complying might result in injury or death Power Supply Before connecting the power cord ensure that the source voltage matches the rated supply voltage of the WT210 WT230 and that it is within the maximum rated voltage of the provided power cord Power Cord and Plug To prevent the possibility of electric shock or fire be sure to use the power cord supplied by YOKOGAWA The main power plug must be plugged into an outlet with a protective earth terminal Do not invalidate this protection by using an extension cord without protective earth grounding Protective Grounding Make sure to connect the protective earth to prevent electric shock before turning ON the power The power cord that comes with the instrument is a three pin type power cord Connect the power cord to a properly grounded three pin outlet Necessity of Protective Grounding Never cut off the internal or external protective earth wire or disconnect the wiring of the protective earth terminal Doing so poses a potential shock hazard Defect of Protective Grounding Do not operate the instrument if the protective earth or fuse might be defective Also make sure to check th
453. ue 2nd order 0 03E 00 V Harmonic measurement value 50th order Harmonic relative content 2nd order 0 00E 00 V 0 06E 00 Harmonic relative content 50th order 0 01E 00 The data consist of 102 items in total 14 34 IM 760401 01E 14 3 Commands Data Format Output Format of Normal Measurement and Harmonic Measurement Data BINARY The data format and output format of normal measurement and harmonic measurement data in binary format that are output by the MEASure NORMal BINary or MEASure HARMonics BINary command are as follows Data Format Measured data consists of a 2 byte header and 4 byte data total of 6 bytes Header 2 bytes Data 4 bytes Header structure The header consists of a 1 byte status and 1 byte ASCII conversion information Status 1 byte ASCII conversion information 1 byte Status byte b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 bO b7 to b4 Lead Lag phase information This information is meaningful only when the data is a phase angle DEGR For all other cases the value is always 0000 0000 Lag 0001 Lead 0010 Cannot be detected b3 to b0 Data status 0000 Normal 0001 Overrange oL 0010 Voltage peak over 0011 Current peak over 0100 Power factor error PFErr 0101 Phase angle error dEGET 0110 Frequency error ErrLo 0111 Frequency error ErrHi 1000 Computation overflow oF 1001 PLL error FregEr 1010 No data
454. uires about the current setting Syntax YO m terminator m indicates whether the comparator function is ON OFF m 0 OFF 1 ON Query YO terminator Example YO1 Description Parameter error 12 will occur if m is set to an illegal value ZC Executes zero level compensation Syntax ZC lt terminator gt Description Zero level compensation is not allowed while integration is in progress execution error 13 will occur While recalling is in progress execution error 19 will occur IM 760401 01E 13 15 g pyepueis 286 4 Z 88t 3331 OY 910 9q spuewwo Jo Wa sAsS spueuiuo uoneorunuulo 13 2 Before Programming Environment Model IBM compatible PC Language Visual Basic Ver5 0 Professional Edition or later GP IB board AT GPIB TNT IEEE 488 2 by National Instruments Settings on Visual Basic Standard modules used Niglobal bas Vbib 32 bas WT210 WT230 Settings GP IB address The sample programs given in this chapter use a GP IB address of 1 for the WT210 WT230 Setthe GP IB address to 1 according to the procedures described in section 10 5 Setting the GP IB Board The sample programs in this chapter use the GP IB serial polling function ilrsp function Turn OFF automatic serial polling clear the Automatic Serial Polling check box to make the sample programs work properly Basic Form of Programming The program data structure of the WT210 WT230 is as follows Command Parameter
455. unction ON OFF 1 a E START SHIFT HARMONICS Set OFF Set ON ELE E A Sets the target element WT230 only E Set the PLL source Select the computation method of harmonic distortion C 5 s 5 N Storing Recalling to from Internal Memory 1 Display C STOP SHIFT MEMORY Store Set measured data storage ro F HL Set measured data recall Set setup parameter storage ra p Set setup parameter recall C 5 N T 7G 3 r r rn un 5 m IM 760401 01E 1 7 Aejdsiq jJeu6iq pue m no Jeuonoun J ES 1 3 Digital Numbers and Characters and Initial Menus Setting Output 1 SETUP SHIFT OUTPUT Display 2 L ann Set the communication plotter and printer output items A P nut Execute plotter or printer output M d Set the D A output f rel ay Set the comparator and relay output Setting Communication Interface GP IB 1 LOCAL C 5 5 N Display C Addr Set addressable mode tank 4 Settalk only mode Print Set the print mode and plotter or printer output 48482 Set communication commands according to IEEE488 2 1992 Setting Communication Interface Serial 1 LOCAL CG I K gt Display C nar Set nor
456. unction and change the order or display function while the harmonic measurement function is ON you can display the measured harmonic data at the corresponding time Updating the Displayed Data The display can be updated in the same way as for normal measurement Overrange Error Displays When the fundamental frequency of the PLL synchronization signal lies outside the measurement range Display B will show FrgEr Note The measurement range of the fundamental frequency of the harmonic measurement function is different from the frequency measurement range of normal measurement Refer to Chapter 16 for more details 7 2 IM 760401 01E 7 1 Harmonic Measurement Function Overrange Dislay The overrange display being the same as for normal measurement see section 2 3 will appear when all rms values of the 1st to 50th order reach the following value Greater than equal to 140 of the rated range for voltage measurement range 600 V or current measurement range 20 A Greater than equal to 140 of the rated range for voltage measurement range 300 V or current measurement range 10 A if the crest factor is set to 6 Greater than 200 of the rated range for voltage measurement ranges other than 600 V or current measurement ranges other than 20 A Greater than equal to 200 of the rated range for voltage measurement ranges other than 300 V or current measurement ranges other than 10 A if the crest factor is set to 6 The relative harmonic co
457. unction is available Data sending control Control method when sending data to computer Data receiving control Control method when receiving data from computer Software handshake Hardware handshake Sending stops when X off is received and sending is resumed when X on is received Sending stops when CB CTS is False and sending is resumed when CB is True Sending No stops when CC DSR handshake is False and sending is resumed when CC is True Software handshake Hardware handshake X off is sent when received data buffer becomes 3 4 full and X on is sent when received data buffer becomes 1 4 full CD DTR is CA RTS is No set to False set to False handshake when when received data received data buffer buffer becomes 3 4 becomes 3 4 full and is set full and is set to True when to True when received data received data buffer buffer becomes 1 4 becomes 1 4 full full Oo O1 Goo Precautions Regarding Data Receiving Control When handshaking is used to control received data data may still be sent from the computer even if the free space in the receive buffer drops below 64 bytes In this case after the receive buffer becomes full the excess data will be lost whether handshaking is in use or not Data storage to the buffer will start again when there is free space in the buffer 256 bytes BEEN Used B Fr
458. unction is turned ON Setting the Harmonics Order 1 Light up the display function indicator of display A Display FUNCTION FUNCTION FUNCTION FUNCTION A Light up display function 9 V 9 A 9 W 2 Set the harmonics order Display A Displaying the Measured Harmonic Values Displays each measured value after having set the display function of either display B or C Display FUNCTION FUNCTION FUNCTION FUNCTION FUNCTION FUNCTION B V A WwW PF V96 A FUNCTION FUNCTION FUNCTION FUNCTION FUNCTION adeg SET deg eter Wop EAT nay EEN yoy a Display FUNCTION FUNCTION FUNCTION FUNCTION FUNCTION Cc cS nd Ad S a Setting the Order of Harmonics The maximum order for which analysis results can be displayed varies depending on the frequency of the fundamental Example When the fundamental frequency is 50 Hz up to 50 orders can be displayed When the fundamental frequency is 400 Hz up to 30 orders can be displayed When an order is set exceeding the maximum order display B will change to the dot display Refer to Chapter 16 for more details on upper limits of analysis orders IM 760401 01E 7 7 uondo uonouny 1ueureunseoJ y DIUOWeH HE 7 4 Setting the Harmonic Order and Displaying
459. up parameres entered in the local mode will be retained When switched from remote to local mode The REMOTE indicator will extinguish and all panel keys can be operated Setup parameters entered in the remote mode will be retained Valid keys for remote control Pressing the LOCAL key in remote control will switch the instrument to local control However this is not possible in case the Local Lockout has been set by the controller IM 760401 01E 10 3 uondo e ejieitul gi d5 H 10 3 Status Byte Format before the IEEE 488 2 Standard DIO 8 DIO 7 DIO 6 DIO 5 DIO 4 DIO 3 DIO 2 DIO 1 Integration SRQ ERROR STORE OVER Syntax Integration Computation BUSY RECALL ERROR END END BUSY Integration Busy DIO 8 This bit is set to 1 when integration is in progress This bit cannot be disabled by the IM command since it is a status bit Even if this bit is set to 1 SRQ will not be affected SRQ DIO 7 This bit is set to 1 when computation End DIO 1 integration End DIO 2 OVER DIO 4 or Syntax error DIO 3 occurs When RQS is set to 1 SRQ is set to True issuing a service request to the controller This bit is reset to 0 when a response is sent to the serial poll To prevent the SRQ and status byte being affected by computation End integration End Over or Syntax error this bit must be disabled by the IM command After an IM15 SRQ is affected by a computation End int
460. update rate crest factor initialization of setup parameters and other items Sections 4 2 4 3 4 5 to 4 7 4 9 to 4 14 and 12 2 IM 760401 01E 2 3 s ejdsig 10443 pue Huen opuom Huey ony pue syieg jo suonoun pue soweN H 2 3 Auto Range Monitor Overrange and Error Displays during Measurement Overrange Display During normal measurement overrange occurs when the measured voltage V or measured current A exceeds 140 of the rated range When using auto range the range automatically steps up Overrange occurs when 14096 of the maximum range is exceeded Overrange is indicated as follows For the conditions in which overrange display occurs in harmonic measurement see section 7 1 Computation Over Display If the computed value overflows during the computation process it is indicated as follows Lis Auto Range Monitor The indicator illuminates when the input signal meets the conditions for auto range switching For details on the auto range function see section 4 4 WT210 indicator WT230 indicator CHECK RANGE CHECK RANGE VOLTAGE VOLTAGE CURRENT CURRENT Display When the Measured Value is too Small If the measured voltage or current drops below 0 5 less than or equal to 1 if the crest factor is set to 6 of the rated range the condition is indicated as shown below This applies only when the measurement mode section 4 1 Selecting the Measur
461. urce O x x Measurement mode O x x Filter O x x Measurement range O x x Crest factor O x x Scaling O x x Averaging O x x MAX hold O O O Display function O O O Input element only WT230 O O O Number of displayed digits O O O Display update rate O xX x Hold O O O Trigger O O O Integration mode O Settings cannot be changed but can be displayed Integration timer O Settings cannot be changed but can be displayed Integration start O x O Integration stop x O x Integration reset O x O Harmonic measurement option O x x Store recall O XStore possible XStore possible Comparator O O O Plotter printer O O O Zero level compensation O x x O Settings can be changed X Settings cannot be changed Attempts will result in an error code When integration is started during auto range the measurement range will change to fixed range If you start integration when averaging is ON averaging is turned OFF It does not turn back ON even if integration is stopped and reset 6 10 IM 760401 01E 6 4 Precautions Regarding Use of Integrator Function Integration Computation when the Measured Value Exceeds Measurement Limits Integration Computation When the Measured Value Exceeds the Measurement Limit When the instantaneous voltage or current of the sampled data exceeds approx 33396 approximately 666 if the crest factor is set to 6 of the measurement range the value is considered to be the value corresponding to approx
462. urrent flows through the thick lines in the figure below Use wires with sufficient current capacity Wiring example of a single phase two wire system 1P2W Can be applied to models 760401 760502 and 760503 Source Load Source Load I C V VOLTAGE terminal A C CURRENT terminal Input termonal Element Source Load v Load Source LNSCN I lt V VOLTAGE terminal Input terminal C CURRENT terminal Element Wiring example of a single phase three wire system 1P3W Can be applied to models 760502 and 760503 Source Load C A1 A v N Source I Load va m cT V VOLTAGE terminal CAs Input terminal Input terminal C CURRENT terminal Element 1 Element 3 Note It is recommended that the wire connected from the source to the current terminal be routed as close as possible to the ground potential in order to minimize measurement error IM 760401 01E 3 11 sjuswainseayy Bunes 310499 le 3 7 Directly Wiring the Circuit under Measurement Wiring example of a three phase three wire system 3P3W Can be applied to models 760502 and 760503 Source Load C AT m es Mi emm ER EE SUR v1 Source Input terminal Input terminal V VOLTAG
463. urrent input terminal screws securely so that the cable does not come loose Use cables with safety terminals that cover the conductive parts for connecting to the voltage input terminals Using a terminal with bare conductive parts such as a banana plug is dangerous when the terminal comes loose Use cables with safety terminals that cover the conductive parts for connecting to the current sensor input connectors external sensor input connectors Using a terminal with bare conductive parts is dangerous when the conector comes loose When the voltage of the circuit under measurement is being applied to the current input terminals do not touch the external sensor input connector Since these terminals are electrically connected inside the instrument this act is dangerous When connecting measurement cables from an external current sensor to the external sensor input connector remove the cables connected to the current input terminals In addition when the voltage of the circuit under measurement is being applied to the external sensor input connector do not touch the current input terminals Since these terminals are electrically connected inside the instrument this act is dangerous When using the external potential transformer PT or current transformer CT make sure it has enough withstand voltage with respect to the voltage E being measured 2E 1000 V recommended Also make sure that the secondary side of the CT does not become an ope
464. uting equation Syntax MATH TYPE EFFiciency CFACtor ARIThmetic AVERage MATH TYPE Example MATH TYPE CFACTOR MATH TYPE gt MATH TYPE CFACTOR Description The equation method selections are as follows EFFiciency Efficiency valid only for WT230 CFACtor Crest factor ARIThmetic Four arithmetic operations AVERage Average active power during integration IM 760401 01E 14 27 H pyepueis 2661 2 88r 3331 24 0 BuiAqjduio spuewwosy jo uejs S z spueuiulo uoneoiunuiulo2 14 3 Commands 14 3 9 MEASure Group The MEASure group relates to measurement computation data There are no front panel keys for these functions Also your instrument must be equipped with the HRM harmonic measurement function to be able to use the related commands Setting the output items for measurement computation data is only valid in the communication mode gt VALue 0 BINary 0 ITEM _PRESet Space NORMal INTEGrate Cmm kK Normal measurement ALL S OFF ON function gt bid Haines C PG 9 lt NRf gt I CELEMent lt x gt Space _ OFF lt N
465. uto range mode is not allowed if the external sensor range is selected execution error 14 will occur While recalling is in progress execution error 19 will occur Sets attenuation constant inquires about the current setting The constant set is used as the attenuation constant for exponential averaging or as the number of data for moving averaging AC AC Syntax AC m terminator m indicates attenuation constant m 1 8 2 16 33 32 4 64 Query AC terminator Example AC1 Description Parameter error 12 will occur if m is set to an illegal value While recalling or storing is in progress execution error 19 will occur AG AG Determines whether or not averaging should be performed inquires about the current setting Syntax AG m terminator m indicates if averaging is ON or OFF m 0 OFF 1 ON Query AG terminator Example AG1 Description Parameter error 12 will occur if m is set to an illegal value Averaging cannot be set to ON while integration is in progress Error 13 will occur While recalling or storing is in progress execution error 19 will occur AT AT Sets averaging type exponential or moving inquires about the current setting Syntax AT m terminator m indicates averaging type m 0 Exponential averaging 1 Moving averaging Query AT terminator Example AT1 Description Parameter error 12 will occur if m is set to an illegal value While reca
466. value is large or small In the case of NR3 the after the E can be omitted but the cannot If a value outside the setting range is entered the value will be normalized so that it is just inside the range If the value has more than the significant number of digits the value will be rounded IM 760401 01E 14 7 H pyepueis 2661 c 88gr 3331 24 o1 BuiAjduio spuewwosy jo uejs S z spueuiulo uoneoiunuiulo2 14 2 Program Format Voltage Current Time Voltage Current and Time indicate decimal values which have physical significance lt Multiplier gt or Unit can be attached to lt NRf gt They can be entered in any of the following forms Form Example lt NR gt lt Multiplier gt lt Unit gt 5MV lt NRf gt lt Unit gt 5E 3V lt NR gt lt Multiplier gt 5M lt NRf gt 5E 3 lt Multiplier gt Multipliers which can be used are shown below Symbol Word Description EX Exa 1018 PE Peta 1015 T Tera 1072 G Giga 10 MA Mega 10 K Kilo 10 M Mili 10 U Micro 109 N Nano 10 P Pico 10 F Femto 1075 Unit Units which can be used are shown below Symbol Word Description v Volt Voltage A Ampere Current S Second Time lt Multiplier gt and Unit are not case sensitive y is used to indicate LU MA is used for Mega M to distinguish it from Mili However when using ma for current Mili ampere
467. voltage of the voltage standard to match the negative rated value of the rated range of the WT210 WT230 6 Readthe value displayed on the DMM This readout is the calibration value for the negative D A output 7 Connect the D A output terminal corresponding to each channel to the DMM one by one and repeat steps 2 to 6 Check the calibration value for all channels 8 Turn OFF the output of the voltage standard Verifying the Comparator Output Function Preparation 1 2 3 4 Connect the voltage standard to the voltage terminal of this instrument Set the range of this instrument to 15 V Set the comparator output to V1 for each channel Set the comparator setting value to 10 V for each channel Set the crest factor to 3 Calibrating 1 Set the output of the voltage standard so that the displayed value on this instrument becomes 9 99 V and output this voltage Measure the resistance values between all terminals of the comparator output between NO and COM or between NC and COM using the DMM Verify that the resistance between NO and COM is at least 50 MQ and that the resistance between NC and COM is at most 0 1 Q Set the output of the voltage standard so that the displayed value on this instrument becomes 10 01 V and output this voltage Measure the resistance values between all terminals of the comparator output between NO and COM or between NC and COM using the DMM Verify that the resistance between NO and COM
468. wer switch and KEY LOCK switch IM 760401 01E 1 5 Aejdsiq jJeu6iq pue m n Jeuonoun J ES 1 3 Digital Numbers and Characters and Initial Menus Digital Numbers and Characters Because the WT210 WT230 uses a 7 segment LED display numbers alphabets and operation symbols are represented using special characters as follows Some of the Initial Menus characters are not used 0l A gt 1o B h 2 2 C L Smallc c 33 Dd 4 H EE 5 5 FF 6 gt GL 7 gt H H Small h gt h 88 gt 9 H Jou KP LoL M gt Nn 0n pP Qu Rr S5 L Toe U u Exponent vou wt Mt Xii u You Z x gt ne 11 Each function of the WT210 WT230 is set using a menu that appears on the display The initial menu that appears when the operation keys are pressed are shown below Voltage Range Setting When the crest factor is set to 3 1 Display C VOLTAGE Auko fa Co uy cu lt gt gt us Ln E3 Current Range Setting When the crest factor is set to 3 1 Display C CURRENT Auto On the WT210 5 to 200 mA range can also be specified When the crest factor is set to 6 1 Display C VOLTAGE s Auto iud IE f ut A q5 v 3d Eos nc La For option EX1 For option EX2 Display C Display C L L mod moe oT 2 2
469. will be valid therefore use MAA to assign Mega ampere If both Multiplier and Unit are omitted the default unit will be used Response messages are always expressed in lt NR3 gt form Neither lt Multiplier gt nor Unit is used therefore the default unit is used Register Register indicates an integer and can be expressed in hexadecimal octal or binary as well as as a decimal number Register is used when each bit of a value has a particular meaning Register is expressed in one of the following forms Form Example lt NRf gt 1 H lt Hexadecimal value made up of the digits 0 to 9 and A to F gt HOF Q lt Octal value made up of the digits 0 to 7 gt q777 B lt Binary value made up of the digits 0 and 1 gt B001100 lt Register gt is not case sensitive Response messages are always expressed as lt NR1 gt lt Character Data gt lt Character data gt is a specified string of character data a mnemonic It is mainly used to indicate options and is chosen from the character strings given in For interpretation rules refer to Header Interpretation Rules on page 14 6 Form Example RMS VMEan DC RMS As with a header the comMunicate VERBose command can be used to return a response message in its full form Alternatively the abbreviated form can be used The coMMunicate HEADer command does not affect lt character data gt lt Boolean gt
470. ximately 30096 of the rated range the range is increased the next time the measured value is updated On the WT230 when any of the input elements meets the above condition the range is increased the next time the measured value is updated Range down When the measured value of the voltage or current is less than or equal to 3096 of the rated range and the peak value is less than or equal to approximately 30096 of the rated range of the next lower range the range is decreased the next time the measured value is updated On the WT230 when all of the input elements meet the above condition the range is decreased the next time the measured value is updated Verifying the Range To verify the current range setting press the VOLTAGE key or the CURRENT key The result will be shown at display C In order to return to the measurement status press the same key again Note ___ When the range is set to auto the range may be adjusted frequently if a waveform such as a pulse is input In such a case set the range manually Power Range The measuring range for active power apparent power and reactive power is determined as follows Wiring method Power range single phase two wire 1P2W voltage range x current range single phase three wire 1P3W three phase three wire 3P3W voltage range x current range x 2 three voltage three current 3A3V three phase four wire 3P4W voltage range x current range x 3 IM 760401 01E
471. y ORDer Function Sets the order of the harmonic component to be shown on display B queries the current setting Syntax HARMonics DISPlay ORDer NRf HARMonics DISPlay ORDer lt NRf gt 1 to 50 Example HARMONICS DISPLAY ORDER 1 HARMONICS DISPLAY ORDER HARMONICS DISPLAY ORDER 1 HARMonics ELEMent Function Sets the element for harmonic measurement queries the current setting Syntax HARMonics ELEMent NRf Example Function Syntax Example Description model WT230 three phase three wire model 1 to 3 WT230 three phase four wire model HARMONICS ELEMENT 1 HARMONICS ELEMENT gt HARMONICS ELEMENT 1 1 3 HARMonics STATe Sets the harmonic measurement mode ON OFF queries the current setting HARMonics STATe lt Boolean gt HARMonics STATe HARMONICS STATE ON HARMONICS STATE gt HARMONICS STATE 1 If you switch the harmonic measurement mode ON OFF using this command and query the measurement mode using the sMEASure HARMonics VALue or sMEASure NORMal Value command immediately afterwards the measured data of the previous measurement mode may be output To retrieve the measured data in the new measurement mode a wait of approximately 2 seconds is required after issuing this command 14 24 IM 760401 01E 14 3 Commands HARMonics SYNChronize HARMonics THD Function Sets the fundamental frequency for PLL Function Sets the computation method for har
472. yntax EB m terminator m indicates element m 1 Element 1 2 Element 2 for WT230 model 760503 only 3 Element 3 for WT230 only 4 X for WT230 only Query EB terminator Example EB1 Description Parameter error 12 will occur if m is set to an illegal value EC EC Sets the element for display C inquires about the current setting Syntax EC m terminator m indicates element m 1 Element 1 2 Element 2 for WT230 model 760503 only 3 Element 3 for WT230 only 4 X for WT230 only Query EC terminator Example EC1 Description gt Parameter error 12 will occur if m is set to an illegal value E ST lt interface message GET gt Generates a trigger Syntax E lt terminator gt ST lt terminator gt lt interface message GET gt Description This command is valid only during hold mode FL FL _ Determines whether or not frequency filter is used inquires about the current setting Syntax FL m terminator m indicates whether frequency filter is ON or OFF m 0 OFF 1 ON Query FL terminator Example FL1 Description Parameter error 12 will occur if m is set to an illegal value Filter cannot be switched ON or OFF while integration is in progress error 13 will occur While recalling or storing is in progress execution error 19 will occur H H Determines whether or not to add a head to measured data output via communication inquires about the current setting Syntax H m

WT210/WT230 Digital Power Meter User`s Manual - Electro

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents